What's New in SAP S - 4HANA 1909

WHAT'S NEW | PUBLIC
Document Version: 1.0 – 2019-09-20
What's New in SAP S/4HANA 1909

© 2019 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
THE BEST RUN

Content
1 What's New. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
2 Asset Management. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
2.1 Maintenance Operations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Actual Cost Analysis. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Maintenance Notification and Order: Change Scheduling. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Find Maintenance Plans. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Find Maintenance Plans: Viewing End Date for Scheduling. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Find Maintenance Items. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Mass Time Confirmations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
2.2 Environment, Health, and Safety. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Incident Management. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Health and Safety Management. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Environment Management. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
2.3 Resource Scheduling. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Scheduling of Maintenance Order Operations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40
New Features: Resource Scheduling for Maintenance Planners App. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
New Features: Schedule Maintenance Order Operations App. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
New Features: Maintenance Scheduling Board App. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
New Features: Manage Work Center Utilization App. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Visualization of Relationships between Order Operations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46
New App: Assign Maintenance Order Operations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
2.4 Country/Region Specifics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
2.5 SAP Best Practices Content. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48
Preventive Maintenance (BJ2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
3 Finance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
3.1 Name Changes for Finance Apps. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
3.2 Fiori Content for Finance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
3.3 Value Help Authorizations in Finance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
3.4 Financial Planning and Analysis. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Apps No Longer Available. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Business Catalogs for Planning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Overhead Cost Accounting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Financial Planning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Product Costing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67
Sales Accounting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .68

2 PUBLIC Content
Budget Availability Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
3.5 Accounting and Financial Close. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
General Ledger Accounting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Asset Accounting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Revenue Accounting and Reporting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Joint Venture Accounting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .118
Joint Venture Accounting on Universal Journal. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .118
Intercompany Matching and Reconciliation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Group Reporting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Central Finance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Advanced Compliance Reporting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
3.6 Treasury Management. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Cash and Liquidity Management. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Treasury and Risk Management. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Payments and Bank Communication. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
3.7 Commodity Risk Management. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Configuration Settings for Commodities. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .198
Exercise of Commodity Listed Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .200
3.8 Financial Operations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Invoice Management. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Receivables Management. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .206
Settlement Management. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Integration with SAP S/4HANA Contract Accounting (FI-CA) and SAP S/4HANA Cloud for
Central Payment Management. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
3.9 Billing and Revenue Innovation Management. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
Convergent Invoicing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
Receivables Management and Payment Handling. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
3.10 Governance, Risk, and Compliance for Finance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
International Trade. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .262
3.11 Country/Region Specifics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
3.12 SAP Best Practices Content. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
Lease-In Accounting (1T6) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
Period-End Closing - Plant (BEI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
Service Contract (21R) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .279
Accounting for Incoming Sales Orders (2FD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
Basic Cash Operations (BFB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
Advanced Bank Account Management (J77) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
Customs Management with SAP Global Trade Services (2U1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
Inventory Valuation for Year-End Closing (BEJ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
Universal Allocation (2QL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
Provisioning of Overdue Receivables (2PD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286

Content PUBLIC 3
Financial Plan Data Upload from File (1HB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
Accounting and Financial Close (J58) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
Bank Integration with SAP Multi-Bank Connectivity (16R) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
Lease-Out for Sublease Accounting (2SB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
Basic Credit Management (BD6) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .291
Group Reporting - Financial Consolidation (1SG) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
Restricted Party Screening with SAP Watch List Screening (1WE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
Purchase Order Accruals (2VB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
Embargo Control (1WC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
General Indirect Tax in the Canary Islands (3SS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
Key Risk Indicator Monitoring with SAP Risk Management (2U2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
Intercompany Reconciliation Process (40Y) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .297
Profitability and Cost Analysis (J55) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
Legal Control (1W8) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .299
Predictive Analytics Model Training - Finance (30K) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
Joint Venture Accounting (3F7) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .301
Advanced Cash Operations (J78) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
Overhead Cost Accounting (J54) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
Accounts Receivable (J59) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .304
Classification for Customs Tariff Number and Commodity Code (2U3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .305
Cash Application Integration (1MV) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
Advanced Credit Management (1QM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
Accounts Payable (J60) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .308
Basic Bank Account Management (BFA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
Liquidity Planning (3L5) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
Intrastat Processing (BDT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
Lockbox (1JT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
Lease-Out Accounting (21Q) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
Group Reporting - Matrix Consolidation (3LX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
Group Reporting - Predictive Consolidation (3JP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
Tax Service Integration (43D) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
Digital Payments (1S2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .316
Group Reporting - Data from External Systems (2U6) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
Lease-Out for Sublease Accounting - Group Ledger IFRS (2SA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
Preference Management with SAP Global Trade Services (3JX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
Continuous Control Monitoring with SAP Process Control (2OH) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
Lease-In Accounting - Group Ledger IFRS (21P) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
Actual Costing (33Q) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
4 Manufacturing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
4.1 Manufacturing Execution for Discrete Industries. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
Schedule Technical Completion Job for Orders. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323

4 PUBLIC Content
Value Help Authorizations in Manufacturing Execution for Discrete Industries. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
Confirmation Settings for Discrete and Process Manufacturing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
4.2 Manufacturing Execution for Process Industries. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
Confirmation Settings for Discrete and Process Manufacturing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
4.3 Production Planning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
Maintain PIRs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
Rescheduling Check in the Managing Apps. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .328
Situation Handling in the Manage Material Coverage App. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .329
Manage Planned Orders. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
Convert Planned Orders. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
Maintain MRP Controllers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .330
Schedule Production. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
Monitor Work Center Schedules. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
Schedule ATP Run for Production / Planned Orders. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
API for Planned Orders (Read, Create, Update, Delete). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
Material Requirements Planning (MRP). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
Demand-Driven Replenishment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
Suspend and Resume Proposal Runs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
BOM and BOM Usage in Network Graph. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
Average Daily Usage in Buffer Proposal Calculation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
API for Buffer Profile (Read). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
API for Buffer Sizing (Read, Write, Update). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
Predictive Material and Resource Planning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
Production Planning and Detailed Scheduling. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .340
Kanban. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
4.4 Quality Management. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
Manage Defects. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
Record Production Defects. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
Define Follow-Up Actions for Quality Tasks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
Define Defect Categories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349
Proposal of Defect Codes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349
New Functions for Quality Tasks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
Manage Quality Tasks: Task Status. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
Manage Workflows for Quality Task Processing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351
Flexible In-Production Inspection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351
Value Help Authorizations in Quality Management. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .352
Record Inspection Results in Table Form. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
EWM-QM Integration Without Inspection Rules. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .354
New Features for Record Inspection Results. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
Nonconformance Analytics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .356
Nonconformance Detailed Analytics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356

Content PUBLIC 5
Defects in Quality Engineer Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357
Make-to-Stock - Process Manufacturing Based on Process Order (BJ8) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357
Analytics for Production Unit - Plan/Actual Production Cost (2QW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358
Quality Management in Discrete Manufacturing (1E1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359
Predictive Analytics Model Training - Supply Chain (20N) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
Make-to-Order Production - Process Manufacturing (3OK) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
Tank Trailer Filling with Residuals (42N) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .362
Make-to-Stock Production - Discrete Manufacturing (BJ5) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
Mass Change Manufacturing Bill of Material for Production (3LP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
Make-to-Stock Production with Variant Configuration (21D) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
Nonconformance Management (2QN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366
Just-In-Time Supply to Customer from Stock (2EM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
Rework Processing - Work-in-Process (BJQ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368
Make-to-Stock with Co- and By-Products - Process Manufacturing (3L7) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369
Inbound Storage Tank Management - Process Manufacturing (3UK) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370
SAP Fiori Analytical Apps for Quality Management (2V0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .371
Make-to-Stock - Process Manufacturing Based on Production Order (2UG) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
Change Manufacturing Bill of Material for Production (3LO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .373
Make-to-Order Production - Finished Goods Sales and Final Assembly (BJE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374
Make-to-Order Production with Variant Configuration (1YT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375
Manufacturing with Kanban Supply into Production (1E3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376
Demand-Driven Replenishment Planning and Execution (2QI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377
Production Capacity Evaluation (31L) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378
Production Capacity Leveling (3LQ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379
Make-to-Order Production - Semifinished Goods Planning and Assembly (1BM) . . . . . . . . . . . . 380
Make-to-Stock with Silo Material - Process Manufacturing (3UL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381
Demand-Driven Buffer Level Management (1Y2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382
5 Manufacturing for Production Engineering and Operations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383

5.1 Manufacturing Engineering and Process Planning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383
Manage Production Operators. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383
Manage Production Versions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .384
Monitor Shop Floor Master Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384
Manage Engineering Changes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385
Additional PEO Features in VEMP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386
Manage Shop Floor Routings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386
Manage Rework Routings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387
Manage Planning Routings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
Manage Order-Specific Shop Floor Routings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .389
5.2 Extended Production Process Setup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .390

6 PUBLIC Content
5.3 Extended Production Operations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390
Production Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390
Production Execution. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392
6 Just-In-Time Processing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397

6.1 Next Generation Just-In-Time (JIT) Supply to Production. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397
7 R&D/Engineering. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398
7.1 Enterprise Portfolio and Project Management. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398
Project Financial Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398
Commercial Project Management. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400
7.2 Integrated Product Development for Discrete Industries. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .405
Access Control Management for Change Master. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .405
Access Control Management for Bill of Material. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406
Assignment of Change Record to BOM. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406
Maintain Variable Size Item for BOM. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407
Deletion of Multiple BOM Items. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407
Business Event Handling in Bill of Material. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408
Value Help Authorizations in Bill of Material. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408
Document Search. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409
Assignment of Phantom Items to Routing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .410
Define Phantom Items in Assembly. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410
AVC - Enhanced Integration with Purchasing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411
AVC - Enhanced Integration with Production Order. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .411
AVC - Apply Mass Changes to Material Variant. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412
Enterprise Search for Classification Characteristic. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412
Enterprise Search for Classification Class. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413
AVC - Handling Inconsistencies for Multi-level VC Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413
AVC - Enhanced Functionality for Maintenance of Characteristic Groups. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414
Enhancements to Manage Engineering Changes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414
AVC - Syntax Enhancements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415
AVC - Enablement of BAdIs for the Advanced Configuration Engine. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416
Integration of Order Engineering Workbench. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .416
AVC - Enhancements for the Simulation Environment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417
7.3 Integrated Product Development for Process Industries. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418
Contribution-based Formulation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418
Usability Enhancements in Recipe Development. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419
7.4 Product Compliance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420
Foundation for Product Compliance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420
Product Marketability and Chemical Compliance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430
Dangerous Goods Management. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 434
Safety Data Sheet Management. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 442

Content PUBLIC 7
7.5 SAP Best Practices Content. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .446
Recipe Handover to Production - Bill of Material (1QG) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 446
Assess Dangerous Goods for a Product (3FC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 447
Product Structure Template Management (35Q) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 448
Assess Marketability of a Product (31H) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 449
Set up Configurable Bill of Material using Variant Configuration (22T) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 450
Chemical Compliance Approval for Purchased Material And Supplier (31G) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .451
Manage Safety Data Sheets for Products (3VR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 452
Specification Management for Recipes (1QA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .452
Product Structure Management (3ND) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453
Manage Documents (22P) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 454
Bill of Material - Mass Change (1R5) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 455
Engineering Bill of Material - Change Master Management (1R3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 456
Formulation - Recipe Development (1QC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 457
Requirements Driven Development (2G4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 458
Engineering Change Management with Change Records (1NF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 459
8 Sales. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 461
8.1 Order and Contract Management. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 461
Sales Master Data Management. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 461
Price Management. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .463
Sales Quotation Management. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 467
Sales Contract Management. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .468
Sales Order Management and Processing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .474
Sales Billing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .485
Solution Billing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 496
Incentive and Commission Management. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 496
Claims, Returns, and Refund Management. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 497
Sales Monitoring and Analytics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 500
Enhancements to Functionality and Usability in Sales. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .514
8.2 Sales Force Support. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .517
Product Assistance for Sales Force Support Moved From Service to Sales. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 517
8.3 Commodity Sales. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 517
Integration with Trader's and Scheduler's Workbench. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 517
Predictive Analytics Model Training - Sales (2YJ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .518
Convergent Billing (1MC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 519
Accelerated Customer Returns (BKP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 520
Return Order Processing for Non-Stock Material (3TE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 521
Dangerous Goods in Sales (3G8) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .521
Digital Payments - Sales (1Z1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .522
Presales Management (41V) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .523

8 PUBLIC Content
Sales Order Processing with Customer Down Payment (BKJ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 524
Safety Data Sheets in Sales (3VQ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 525
Chemical Compliance in Sales (31J) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 526
9 Service. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 527
9.1 Service Contract Management. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 527
Price Adaptation for Service Contracts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .527
Price Agreements in Service Contracts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 528
Auto Renewal for Service Contract Items. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 528
9.2 Solution Quotations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 530
OData API for Solution Quotations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 530
Subscription-Related Items Enabled in Solution Quotations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 530
9.3 Business Solution Portfolios. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 531
Business Solution Portfolios. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 531
9.4 Case Management. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 533
Case Management. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 533
9.5 Cross Topics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .534
External References for Service Transactions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 534
9.6 Integration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 535
Integration with SAP Field Service Management. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 535
9.7 Subscription Order Management. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 535
Solution Quotation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .535
Allowances. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 536
Variant Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 537
Subscription Item Quantity. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 538
Account Split. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .539
Master Agreement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .540
Service Order Management (41Z) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 541
Interaction Center Service Request Management (41W) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 542
Service Contract Management (426) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 542
10 Sourcing and Procurement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .544

10.1 Generic Features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 544
Configuration of the Flexible Workflow Made Easy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .544
10.2 Value Help Authorizations in Sourcing and Procurement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .545
10.3 APIs for Integration with Sourcing and Procurement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 546
SOAP APIS for Service Entry Sheets (External Services) - Renamed. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 546
New SOAP APIs for Supplier Invoice Creation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 547
New SOAP API for Condition Record for Pricing in Purchasing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 548
New OData API for Condition Record for Pricing in Purchasing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 549

Content PUBLIC 9
Enhancements in OData API for Purchase Requisitions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 550
10.4 Integration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 551
ALERT: End of Support for SAP Ariba Cloud Integration (CI) Solutions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 551
10.5 Customizing and Business Add-Ins for Sourcing and Procurement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 551
10.6 Commodity Procurement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 558
10.7 Integration with Trader's and Scheduler's Workbench. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .558
10.8 Sourcing and Contract Management. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 558
Source Assignment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 558
Purchase Contract Management. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 563
10.9 Operational Procurement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 566
Enhancements to Create Purchase Requisition. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 566
Enhancements to My Purchase Requisitions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .567
Enhancements to Default Settings for Users. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .568
Requirements Processing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 569
Purchase Order Processing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 573
10.10 Central Procurement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 579
Central Purchasing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .579
Mass Changes to Central Purchase Contracts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 584
Enhancements in Manage Central Purchase Contracts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 585
Central Procurement Operations Monitor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .586
Central Purchasing Analytics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 588
Manage Central RFQs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .589
Manage Central Supplier Quotations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 590
Create Purchase Order from Central Supplier Quotation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 591
10.11 Invoice Management. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 591
Manage Supplier Invoices. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 591
Create Supplier Invoices - Advanced. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 593
Edit Supplier Invoices Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 594
Park Supplier Invoices. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 595
10.12 Supplier Management. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 596
10.13 Obsolete Backend Roles. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 596
10.14 Procurement Analytics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 597
Supplier Evaluation Score History. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 597
View Document Type and Item Category Attributes in Analytics Apps. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 598
Operational/Overall Supplier Evaluation by Top/Bottom 10 Suppliers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 599
Purchase Order Changes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 599
Purchase Requisition Average Approval Time – Flexible Workflow. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 600
Situation Handling for Purchase Contract Item. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 601
Request for Quotation Types. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 601
Performance Optimization for Analytics Apps. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .602
10.15 SAP Best Practices Content. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .604

10 PUBLIC Content
Contingent Workforce Procurement via SAP Fieldglass (22K) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 604
Procurement of Materials with Variant Configuration (2XU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 605
Central Purchase Contracts (2ME) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 606
Request for Price (1XF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 607
Analytics - Purchase Order Visibility and Procurement Spend (2QU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 608
Legal Content Management (1XV) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 609
Intelligent Approval Workflow (43E) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .610
Prediction of Delivery Date for Purchase Order Items (3FY) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 611
Central Sourcing (3ZF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .612
Procurement of Services (22Z) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 612
Blockchain-Verified RFQ Processing (3DT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 613
Supplier Evaluation and Performance Monitoring (SL4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .614
Central Purchasing (2XT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 615
Central Requisitioning (1XI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 616
Purchase Contract (BMD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 617
Image-Based Buying (3UH) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 618
11 Supply Chain. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 620

11.1 Inventory. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 620
CDS Views for Inventory. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 620
API for Material Stocks (Replicate). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 620
Output Management for Inventory. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 621
Extensibility for Adobe Output Forms of Material Documents. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 622
Goods Movement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 623
Inventory Analytics and Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 629
Physical Inventory. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 638
Batch Management. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 642
11.2 Warehouse Management. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .643
Pack Warehouse Stock. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 643
Process Warehouse Tasks - Picking. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 643
Process Warehouse Tasks - Putaway. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 644
Warehouse KPIs - Operations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 645
CDS Views for Warehouse Orders, Warehouse Tasks, and Outbound Delivery Orders. . . . . . . . . 645
Warehouse Billing in Decentralized EWM. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 646
Enhancements to Physical Inventory. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 647
Distribution of Packing Instructions as Packaging Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 648
Enhancements to the Warehouse Management Monitor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 648
Warehouse Kanban Supply into Production. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 650
Change Documents for Control Cycle in Warehouse Management. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 650
Change Documents for Fixed Storage Bin Assignments. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 651
Automatic Replication of Production Supply Area / Control Cycle Harmonization. . . . . . . . . . . 652

Content PUBLIC 11
Stock Consolidation: Maximize Number of Free Bins. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 653
Stock Consolidation: New Selection Criteria. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 654
Stock Consolidation: Batch Consolidation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 654
Migration Objects for Scenario 'SAP EWM to Decentralized EWM'. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .655
EWM-QM Integration Without Inspection Rules. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .656
Enhancement to the Counting of Inbound Deliveries (IOT 2). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .658
Scenario-Based Authorization Check for Enhanced Warehouse Number Checks and Activity
Checks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 658
Authorization Object for Warehouse Requests with Warehouse Number. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 660
Distribution Equipment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .661
Display Change Documents for Inspection Rules. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 663
Synchronous Goods Movements from Repetitive Manufacturing into EWM embedded in SAP
S/4HANA. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 663
Integration of Quality Inspection Engine to Multiple Enterprise Management Systems. . . . . . . . 665
Automatic Master Data Synchronization to Control QM Processes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 665
Decentralized EWM - Routes and Batches. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 666
Decentralized EWM - Integration Features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 668
11.3 Delivery and Transportation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 669
Delivery Management. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 669
Transportation Management. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 679
11.4 Advanced Order Promising/ATP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .694
Configure Substitution Strategy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 694
Data Configuration for Backorder Processing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 695
Configure Custom BOP Sorting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .696
Monitor BOP Run. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 697
Data Configuration for Release for Delivery. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 698
Configure Order Fulfillment Responsibilities. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 699
Release for Delivery. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 700
Schedule Deletion of ATP Results Logs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 700
Manage Characteristic Catalogs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 701
Manage Product Allocation Sequences. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 702
Product Allocation Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 704
OData APIs for Product Allocation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 705
Procurement of Direct Materials (J45) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 706
Subcontracting (BMY) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 707
Supplier Consignment (2LG) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 708
Complementary Procurement Functions (2TW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 709
Quality Management for Complaints against Suppliers (2F9) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 710
Direct Procurement with Inbound Delivery (2TX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .711
Consumable Purchasing (BNX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .712

12 PUBLIC Content
12 Sustainability. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 714
13 Integration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 715
Data Migration to SAP S/4HANA from Staging (2Q2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 715
Data Migration to SAP S/4HANA from File (BH5) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 716
Responsibility Determination (1NJ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 716
13.2 SAP S/4HANA Migration Cockpit – Transfer Data Directly from SAP Source System. . . . . . . . . . . . 717
14 Cross Components. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 719

14.1 Master Data Maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 719
New Features in Mass Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 719
14.2 Master Data Governance, Consolidation and Mass Processing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 719
New Features in Consolidation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 719
New Features in Mass Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 720
14.3 Master Data Governance, Central Governance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 721
New Features for Master Data Governance for Business Partner. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 721
New Features for Master Data Governance for Customer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 722
New Features for Master Data Governance for Supplier. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 723
New Features for Master Data Governance for Financials. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 724
New Features for Master Data Governance for Material. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 724
New Features for Master Data Governance Application Framework. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 726
14.4 Master Data Governance, Data Quality Management. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 728
Enable Automation with Rule Mining for Master Data Quality Management. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 728
Enable Data Quality Management for Business Partner Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 728
Extend Scope in Data Quality Management for Product Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 729
Deprecated and Successor Apps. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 729
Enable Data Quality Management for Custom Object Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 730
14.5 Display Search Models. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 730
14.6 Shifted Gregorian Calendar Date. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .731
14.7 Analytics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 732
14.8 Manage KPIs and Reports. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 732
14.9 Responsibility Management. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 733
14.10 Manage Teams and Responsibilities. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 733
14.11 Situation Handling. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 734
14.12 New Features for Situation Handling. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 734
14.13 Legal Content Management. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 736
Legal Content Creation with SAP Cloud Platform Legal Content Assembly. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 736

Content PUBLIC 13
Enhancements in Manage Legal Transactions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 737
Enhancements in Legal Content Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 738
Enhancements in Categories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .739
Enhancements in Manage Legal Documents. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 739
Enhancements in Manage Contexts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 740
Enhancements in Request Legal Content. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 740
Manage Legal Tasks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 741
Customizing and Business Add-Ins for Legal Content Management. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .742
APIs for Integration with Legal Content Management. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .743
Situation Handling (31N) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 744
Legal Content Creation with SAP Cloud Platform (2OQ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 745
Output Management (1LQ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 745
14.15 Access Protection for Value Helps. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .746
14.16 SAP CoPilot Skills. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 747
14.17 Touch Enablement of the Classic UIs (SAP GUI for HTML, Web Dynpro). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 748
14.19 What's New in ABAP Platform. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 749
15 Country/Region Specifics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 751

15.1 Austria. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 751
Finance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 751
15.2 Argentina. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 752
Finance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 752
15.3 Belgium. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 754
Cross-Application Functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 754
15.4 Brazil. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 755
Integration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 755
Finance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 756
15.5 China. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .760
Finance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .760
15.6 Denmark. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 760
Finance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .760
15.7 France. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 761
Finance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 761
15.8 Germany. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 762
15.9 India. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 763
Finance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .763
15.10 Italy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 764
Finance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .764
15.11 Japan. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 765

14 PUBLIC Content
Finance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 765
15.12 Mexico. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 766
Finance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .766
15.13 Netherlands. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 767
15.14 Norway. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 768
Finance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .768
15.15 Poland. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 770
Finance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 770
15.16 South Korea. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 771
Finance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 773
15.17 Spain. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 774
Finance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 774
15.18 Switzerland. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 776
Finance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 776
15.19 Thailand. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .778
Finance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 778
15.20 Turkey. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 785
Finance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 785
15.21 #United States. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 785
Finance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 785
16 Industries. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 787
16.1 Consumer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 787
Retail and Fashion. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 787
16.2 Discrete Manufacturing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 818
16.3 Energy & Natural Resources. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 818
Oil & Gas. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 818
Utilities. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 823
Machine Learning for Implausible Meter Readings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .832
Machine Learning for Outsorted Billing Documents. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 833
16.4 Financial Services. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 835
Banking. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 835
Insurance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 842
16.5 Public Services. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 873
Defense & Security. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .873
Public Sector. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 878
16.6 Services. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 881

Content PUBLIC 15
1 What's New
What's New in SAP S/4HANA provides you with delta information on all new, changed or deleted features of
this product. The What's New Viewer provides the same information in an interactive format.

16 PUBLIC What's New
2 Asset Management
2.1 Maintenance Operations
2.1.1 Actual Cost Analysis
This app supports you in monitoring and evaluating actual costs resulting from current maintenance orders. It
enables you, for example, to analyze the actual costs for materials and labor in maintenance or to compare the
total corrective and preventive actual maintenance costs during a selected time period. In addition, you can
easily identify the maintenance activities leading to the highest costs or the parts of the asset that were
particularly costly on inspections. Altogether, this analytical list page offers you multiple possibilities to
evaluate actual maintenance costs stored in the Universal Journal Entry.
Technical Details
Type New
Functional Localization Not applicable
Scope Item BH1 (Corrective Maintenance), BH2 (Emergency Mainte

nance), BJ2 (Preventive Maintenance)
Application Component PM (Plant Maintenance)
Available As Of SAP S/4HANA 1909
Additional Details
Filters allow you to analyze critical costs in a specific fiscal year from different perspectives, such as the order
type, the construction type, the location, the planner group or the manufacturer. A condensed view enables you
to identify and compare relevant areas within data sets using data visualization and business intelligence. On
the other hand, you can also navigate directly to significant single instances. All this can be done seamlessly
within one page that combines transactional and analytical data using chart and table visualization.
This app is available for the maintenance planner user role.

Asset Management PUBLIC 17
Related Information
Actual Cost Analysis
2.1.2 Maintenance Notification and Order: Change

Scheduling
With this product feature you can select several maintenance notifications in the Find Maintenance Notification
app or several maintenance orders in the Find Maintenance Order app and set, overwrite or clear the values of
the scheduling-related fields, such as the priority, the revision, the required start date and the required end
date.
Technical Details
Type New
Scope Item BH1 (Corrective Maintenance), BJ2 (Preventive Mainte

nance)
Effects on Existing Data
To set, overwrite or clear the values of scheduling-related fields, you open a popup by clicking on the new
Change Scheduling button. The proposed field values on the corresponding popup reflect the existing field
values in the selected maintenance notifications or maintenance orders. To assign different values, you can
open the value help and choose a different field value from the dropdown list or clear the field value of optional
fields.
Related Information
Find Maintenance Notification

Find Maintenance Order

18 PUBLIC Asset Management
2.1.3 Find Maintenance Plans
This app enables you to find and display maintenance plans. You can also view the properties of a maintenance
plan.
Technical Details
Type New
Scope Item BJ2 (Preventive Maintenance)
Related Information
Find Maintenance Plans
2.1.4 Find Maintenance Plans: Viewing End Date for

Scheduling
With this feature, you can display validity data of the respective maintenance plan in the Find Maintenance
Plans app. You can display the new fields End Date for Scheduling and Remaining Schedule Days as table
columns. Moreover, for performance-based single cycle plans and strategy plans, you can also display the new
fields End Counter for Scheduling, Remaining Counter and Counter Unit as table columns.
Technical Details
Type New

Additional Details
The end dates and end counters are not considered during the scheduling process if the respective
maintenance plans have the maintenance plan category Outline Agreement. Moreover, the system does not
consider the end date or end counter if the maintenance call object is a service order.
The Find Maintenance Plans app has been enhanced with the following fields, displayed as table columns:
● End Date for Scheduling

● Remaining Schedule Days
● End Counter for Scheduling (only for performance-based single cycle plans and strategy plans)
● Remaining Counter (only for performance-based single cycle plans and strategy plans)
● Counter Unit (only for performance-based single cycle plans and strategy plans)
Related Information
Find Maintenance Plans
2.1.5 Find Maintenance Items
This app enables you to find and display maintenance items. You can also view properties of a maintenance
item.
Technical Details
Type New

Related Information
Find Maintenance Items
2.1.6 Mass Time Confirmations
With this feature, you can do the following:
● Download a template (spreadsheet) to record collective time confirmations.

● Verify and upload collective time confirmations using the template.
● Post collective time confirmations into the system.
● Post collective time confirmations immediately as background jobs.
Technical Details
Type New
Scope Item BH1 (Corrective Maintenance)
BH2 (Emergency Maintenance)
BJ2 (Preventive Maintenance)
Application Component PM
Additional Details
You can upload time confirmations in the Find Maintenance Order and Operation app. To upload time
confirmations immediately as background jobs, select the Post Immediately check box.
When you upload time confirmations, you are taken to the Create Time Confirmations app where you can view
the status of uploaded time confirmations. The time confirmations in the Ready tab are ready to be posted. The

time confirmations in the Errors tab can be posted only after you correct the errors and validate them once
again.
Related Information
Create Time Confirmations

Find Maintenance Order and Operation
2.2 Environment, Health, and Safety
2.2.1 Incident Management
2.2.1.1 Injury/Illness Log
With this feature, you can enter and manage different kinds of medical assistance provided to employees at
your company. You can record first aid and the treatment of minor injuries, as well as the treatment of pre-
existing injuries and aid given to employees who are not feeling well. You can enter details such as provided
medication, health center visits, and visits to physicians.
Technical Details
Type New
Scope Item Not applicable
Application Component EHS-SUS-IM (Incident Management)
Additional Details
In addition, this feature enables you to:
● Report an incident based on an injury/illness log entry.

You can create an incident related to an existing injury/illness log entry and transfer the available data from
the injury/illness log entry to the newly created incident using the data transfer function.

● Create a medical service based on an injury/illness log entry.
You can create a medical service for an injured person assigned to an injury/illness log entry. You can enter
and manage data such as diagnoses, examination results, work restrictions for health reasons, and follow-
up activities. This feature is available if the SAP EHS Management for SAP S/4HANA, occupational health
application is implemented.
Effects on System Administration
The new role Employee - First Aid has been introduced for managing injury/illness log entries. The technical
names are as follows:
● Front end: SAP_BR_EMPLOYEE_FIRST_AID

● Back end: SAP_EHSM_HSS_EMPL_FIRST_AID
Effects on Customizing
For the new Injury/Illness Log functionality, the following Customizing activities have been added under
Environment, Health and Safety Incident Management Injury/Illness Log :
● Define Entry Locations

● Specify Types of Aid Given
● Specify Injury/Illness Log Entry Types
Related Information
Injury/Illness Log
Manage Injury/Illness Log [page 23]
Injury/Illness Log - Detailed Analysis [page 24]
2.2.1.2 Manage Injury/Illness Log
With this feature, you can enter and manage medical assistance provided to an injured or sick employee at your
company. You can search for injury/illness log entries, create new entries, or edit existing ones.

Technical Details
Type New
Additional Details
You can use the Manage Injury/Illness Log app to:
● Search for injury/illness log entries by multiple criteria.

● Create injury/illness log entries.
● Navigate to injury/illness log entries and edit their data.
Related Information
Injury/Illness Log
2.2.1.3 Injury/Illness Log - Detailed Analysis
With this feature, you can analyze injury/illness log entries. You can add several analysis steps to create an
analysis path. With this analysis path, you can evaluate the data you need for information and reporting
purposes.
Technical Details
Type New

Additional Details
You can use the Injury/Illness Log - Detailed Analysis app to:
● View a graphical representation of injury/illness log entries grouped by various criteria.

● Analyze injury/illness log entries by specific characteristics such as injury/illness classification, type, body
part, body side, or common characteristics such as location and date.
2.2.1.4 Task Calendar
With this feature, you can monitor tasks for your team in a calendar view. You can get an overview of existing
task instances in a time schedule. Based on the overall schedule, status, and workload of the team members,
you can adjust the plan by reassigning and rescheduling the tasks between assignees.
Technical Details
Type New
Application Component EHS-SUS-FND (Sustainability Foundation)
Additional Details
You can use the Task Calendar app to:
● Get an overview of planned tasks based on the filtering criteria of your view.
● Add and remove contacts in your calendar to manage the task plan for one or multiple teams.
● Navigate to the Display Task Instance and Manage Task Definition apps for detailed management.
● View contact details and task definition details directly from your calendar.

Related Information
Display Task Instance

Manage Task Definition
2.2.1.5 Improved User Interface for Managing Summary

Reports
The Manage Summary Reports app has been redesigned with an improved user interface and a simplified use
of search criteria in the filter bar.
Technical Details
Type Changed
Additional Details
You can use the Manage Summary Reports app to:
● Generate report forms for incidents, injuries, and illnesses in order to fulfill legal, regulatory, or company-
specific reporting requirements.
● Search for and display generated incident summary reports that you want to make available internally in
your company or submit to authorities, such as the Occupational Safety and Health Administration
(OSHA) in the United States.
2.2.1.6 Implementation Changes for the Report Incident

Mobile App
You can now deploy the Report Incident app as a native mobile application using the SAP Web IDE, hybrid app
toolkit add-on.

Technical Details
Type Changed
Additional Details
Application Deployment
You can implement the app by using the SAP Web IDE, hybrid app toolkit add-on. This extension for SAP Web
IDE enables developers to create, test, and build hybrid mobile applications. You can find more information on
the SAP Help Portal under SAP Web IDE Hybrid Application Toolkit.
Additional Licenses Required
To implement the app, you need to subscribe to SAP Fiori Cloud or SAP Cloud Platform Mobile Services. For
further information, please contact your SAP account executive.
Related Information
App Implementation: Report Incident

SAP Fiori Cloud
SAP Cloud Platform Mobile Services
2.2.1.7 Redesign of the Workflow for the EHS Incident

Investigation Lifecycle
The workflow for the EHS incident investigation lifecycle has been redesigned and now uses a new workflow
architecture. The end-to-end investigation process for incidents has not been changed.

Technical Details
Type Changed
For more information on the required manual migration of incident investigation lifecycle processes to the new
architecture, see SAP Note 2801072 .
For more information, see simplification item SI27: Logistics_EHS - Investigation Lifecycle Workflow .
2.2.2 Health and Safety Management
2.2.2.1 Enhancements in Chemical Business Object
With the enhancements to the chemical business object, you can now do the following:
● Maintain an extended set of physical/chemical properties

● Maintain hazard classifications according to SARA/EPCRA
The new attributes are used in the following apps:.
● Mange Hazardous Substance Inventory

● Search Hazardous Substance Inventory Data
● Extract Data for SARA 312 Reports
● Analyze SARA-Relevant Stock Details
● Manage Safety Instructions
● Manage Safety Instruction Text Blocks
● Monitor Safety-Relevant Changes

Technical Details
Type Changed
Application Component EHS-BD
Additional Details
The physical and chemical properties node of the chemical business object has been extended with the
following attributes:
● OpenCupFlashPointTempQty
● OpenCupFlashPointTempUnit
● OpenCupFlashPointTempOperator
● DecompositionTemperatureQty
● DecompositionTemperatureUnit
● DynamicViscosityQty
● DynamicViscosityUnit
● KinematicViscosityQty
● KinematicViscosityUnit
● DustExplosionClass
● ChemicalDensit
● ChemicalDensityUnit
The basic information node of the chemical business object has been extended with the
US_EPCRAIsExtremelyHzdsSubst attribute.
The chemical business object has been extended with the new SARA_CLASSIFICATION node. This node has
the US_EPCRAHazardClass attribute.
Effects on Data Transfer
The new attributes can be transferred from the specification database via the existing transfer report
R_EHFND_FILL_CHM_BY_EHS_SUBST.

You define the dust explosion classes in Customizing for Environment, Health, and Safety under Health and
Safety Management Master Data Configuration Specify Dust Explosion ClassesChemicals Specify
Physical and Chemical Data .
2.2.2.2 Manage Safety Instructions
With this app, you can now manage your safety instructions centrally. For every location, you can define an
individual safety instruction structure. To fill the structure with the relevant data, you can use automatic
functions to derive data from the chemical business object and at the same time you can add information
manually wherever necessary.
Technical Details
Type New
Application Component EHS-SUS-HS
Define your safety instruction structures in Customizing for Environment, Health, and Safety under Health
and Safety Management Safety Instruction Configure Safety Instruction .
To adapt the data extraction from the chemical business object to the safety instructions, use the BAdI in
Customizing for Environment, Health, and Safety under Health and Safety Management Safety Instruction
BAdI: Definition of Default Text and Images for Safety Instruction .
Related Information
Manage Safety Instructions

Managing Safety Instructions

2.2.2.3 Manage Safety Instruction Text Blocks
With this feature, you can define and manage frequently used text snippets as text blocks to be used in your
safety instructions created in the Manage Safety Instructions app.
Technical Details
Type New
Related Information
Manage Safety Instruction Text Blocks
2.2.2.4 Manage Hazardous Substance Inventories
With this feature, you can keep track of all hazardous substances which are handled in the locations you are
responsible for. An inventory is a list of hazardous substances that are used, handled, manufactured or stored
at any location that you manage or control. It’s important and a legal requirement to know what hazardous
substances you have in order to safely manage their risks to your workers and others who may be exposed to
hazardous substances in your workplace. You can use the Manage Hazardous Substance Inventories app to
create and maintain these inventories.
Technical Details
Type New

Additional Details
You can use the Search Hazardous Substance Inventory Data app to search through all hazardous substance
inventories of your company.
Configure the settings for your hazardous substance inventories in Customizing for Environment, Health, and
Safety under Health and Safety Management Hazardous Substance Inventories .
Related Information
Manage Hazardous Substance Inventories

Preparing and Using Hazardous Substance Inventories
2.2.2.5 Search Hazardous Substance Inventory Data
With this feature you can search data throughout all hazardous substance inventories of your Manage
Hazardous Substance Inventories app in status Released and Historic.
Technical Details
Type New

Related Information
Search Hazardous Substance Inventory Data
2.2.2.6 Extract Data for SARA 312 Reports
With this feature, you can prepare data you need for reports prescribed by the U.S. Superfund Amendments
and Reauthorization Act (SARA) 312.
Technical Details
Type New
Additional Details
You can use the Analyze SARA-Relevant Stock Details app to further analyze stock details and stock
development on substance or material level.
You can adapt the data extraction for SARA reports in Customizing for Environment, Health, and Safety under
Health and Safety Management Hazardous Substance Inventories BAdI: Data Determination for SARA
Reporting .
Related Information
Extract Data for SARA 312 Reports

Setting Up Data Extraction for SARA 312 Reports

2.2.2.7 Analyze SARA-Relevant Stock Details
With this feature, you can analyze stock details and stock development on substance or material level. You can
get into details about stock amounts, have a close look at their development over a certain period, or analyze
the detailed composition of a specific stock amount displayed in the Extract Data for SARA 312 Reports app.
Technical Details
Type New
Related Information
Analyze SARA-Relevant Stock Details
2.2.2.8 Monitor Safety-Relevant Changes
This feature provides a work list of all changes to the substance master data that could have influence on the
following processes:
● Hazardous Substance Inventories

● Safety Instructions
● Risk Assessments
● Chemical Approvals
This app helps you to keep track of all changes, shows all relevant information to support your decision, and if
the changes to the substance master data have an impact on your processes.
Technical Details
Type New

The report Update Safety-Relevant Changes (R_EHHSS_UPDATE_SRC_DATA) creates the database entries for
the Monitor Safety-Relevant Changes app based on the change log information written for the chemical
business object. For more information, see the report documentation.
 Note
To ensure that the data displayed in the Monitor Safety-Relevant Changes app is always up to date, run this
report on a regular basis via a scheduled job.
Related Information
Monitor Safety-Relevant Changes

Monitoring Safety-Relevant Changes
2.2.3 Environment Management
2.2.3.1 Task Calendar
With this feature, you can monitor tasks for your team in a calendar view. You can get an overview of existing
task instances in a time schedule. Based on the overall schedule, status, and workload of the team members,
you can adjust the plan by reassigning and rescheduling the tasks between assignees.
Technical Details
Type New

Additional Details
You can use the Task Calendar app to:
● Get an overview of planned tasks based on the filtering criteria of your view.
● Add and remove contacts in your calendar to manage the task plan for one or multiple teams.
● Navigate to the Display Task Instance and Manage Task Definition apps for detailed management.
● View contact details and task definition details directly from your calendar.
Related Information
Display Task Instance

Manage Task Definition
2.2.3.2 My Data Collections
With this feature, you can record environment-related data in the environment management system for later
processing.
Technical Details
Type New
Application Component EHS-SUS-EM (Environment Management)

Additional Details
You can use the My Data Collections app to:
● Get an overview of all active data collections you are responsible for. These data collections are organized
in the All, Pending, and No Schedule tabs.
● Provide and save values for relevant data collection activities.
● Export and import data collection values in a spreadsheet format.
2.2.3.3 Improvements to Air Emission Management
With the improvements to air emission management, you can now handle the chemical and physical properties
master data in a single business object - chemical/physical property. You can use additional data sources in
calculations. You can set up a location-based aggregation activity to be executed automatically.
Technical Details
Type Changed
Additional Details
● The new chemical/physical property business object significantly improves the process of working with the
master data across multiple applications, as it is no longer necessary to handle two separate objects. You
can use the Manage Chemical/Physical Properties app to create, edit and delete records in the chemical/
physical property business object.
● The records of the new chemical/physical property object could be assigned as property to both location
and chemical objects. These properties can be used as input for calculations.
● The enablement of automatic location aggregation extends the chain of automatically executed activities.
● You can perform location aggregations based on listed substance groups. If you select a listed substance
group as a subject for a location aggregation, the matching data section for this aggregation will also list
the relevant data collections and calculations created for the listed substances belonging to the same
group.

The following tables have been made obsolete:
● Chemical Physical Properties (EHFNDC_CHEM_PR)

● Chemical Physical Properties – Translations (EHFNDC_CHEM_PR_T)
● Chemical Physical Property Units (EHFNDC_CHEM_UNI)
Their data has been moved to the new chemical/physical property business object with the following report:
● Migrate chemical properties to physical/chemical properties (R_EHFND_CHEM_PROP_MIGRATION)
The following Customizing activity has been removed:
● Specify Chemical Properties (EHFND_CHEM_PR)
Customizing activity Specify Regulatory List Types (EHFND_REG_LISTS_TYPE) has been changed, so that it
allows assignment of a chemical/physical property.
Related Information
Manage Chemical/Physical Properties
2.2.3.4 Improvements to Sampling Activity
With the improvements to sampling activity, you can now change the analytes of already initiated samplings in
the Edit Compliance Scenario app. You can also use an operator (>, >=, <, <=) to submit sampling results that
are outside of the detectable ranges. When you submit sampling result values outside of the detectable ranges,
the value provided by the lab equipment is considered as a detection limit.
Technical Details
Type Changed
Functional Localization Not Applicable
Scope Item Not Applicable

Related Information
Edit Compliance Scenario
2.2.3.5 Content Update
With this feature, the content provided with the default delivery is updated with regulatory lists in the following
chapters:
● AP-42 Compilation of Air Emissions Factors

Issuing Organization: United States Environmental Protection Agency (EPA)
Paragraph: Chapter 7 Liquid Storage Tanks
● Australian National Greenhouse Accounts
Issuing Organization: Australian Government - Department of the Environment
Paragraph: Appendix 1 - Greenhouse Gas Global Warming Potentials
Technical Details
Type Changed
2.2.3.6 Additional Support
With these additional support features, the solution provides the following additional support:
● Archiving of transactional data for the compliance scenario is now supported. You can now remove large
volumes of data when it is no longer needed.

● Converting SAP Environmental Compliance (EC) 3.0 to the environment management component (EM) of
Environment, Health, and Safety in SAP S/4HANA 1909 is now supported to facilitate the onboarding of
Environmental Compliance customers to SAP S/4HANA for environment management.
Technical Details
Type New
Additional Details
● The 1909 release is the recommended target release for EC customers to perform data conversion to the
environment management component (EM) of Environment, Health, and Safety in SAP S/4HANA. The
release comes with a guide for such conversions. For more information, see SAP Note 2805204 .
2.3 Resource Scheduling
2.3.1 Scheduling of Maintenance Order Operations
The resource scheduling apps now cover the scheduling process end-to-end, from the monitoring of schedules
in the Resource Scheduling for Maintenance Planners app to the tracking of schedule execution and schedule
attainment in the Schedule Maintenance Order Operations app.
Technical Details
Type Changed

Application Component CA-RSH-EAM
Additional Details
The following list is a cross-app overview of what has been changed with regard to the scheduling of order
operations:
● You can now create multiple schedules per week for any future calendar week.
● We've introduced a status concept for schedules to represent the life cycle of a schedule. The schedule
statuses are: Scoping, Refinement, Frozen, Execution, Closed.
● You can now freeze a schedule to lock it against further changes and to track schedule attainment once the
target week has started.
● The scheduling logic has been enhanced as follows:
○ In addition to manually setting a start day, you can now use automatic scheduling and have the app
find a start day for you.
○ In addition to finish-start (FS) relationships, start-start (SS) relationships are now also taken into
account during scheduling.
● You now have more options to access the schedules you created:
○ There's a new Schedule Maintenance Order Operations tile in the SAP Fiori launchpad.
○ There's a new My Schedules card in the Resource Scheduling for Maintenance Planners app.
○ In the Manage Work Center Utilization app, you can now add an Included in Schedule column to the list
of order operations. If an order operation is included in a schedule, you can directly navigate to the
schedule from here.
○ You can use the enterprise search to quickly find and open a specific schedule.
● In the Manage Work Center Utilization app, you can now change work center capacity for a specific target
week by adjusting the number of resources.
For more detailed information about what has changed in the individual apps, see the relevant links in the
Related Information section.
● We've provided a Customizing activity for enabling the freezing of schedules. Although this setting isn't a
prerequisite for using the apps, it's needed so that maintenance planners can track schedule execution and
review schedule attainment.
The activity is available in Customizing for Plant Maintenance and Customer Service under Maintenance
and Service Processing Resource Scheduling Make Settings for Resource Scheduling .
● If you want app users to be able to use the enterprise search, make sure that the search is set up in your
system.

Related Information
New Features: Resource Scheduling for Maintenance Planners App [page 42]
New Features: Schedule Maintenance Order Operations App [page 43]
New Features: Manage Work Center Utilization App [page 45]
Information for Key Users
2.3.2 New Features: Resource Scheduling for Maintenance

Planners App
The Resource Scheduling for Maintenance Planners app is your dashboard for monitoring key figures, such as
work center utilization and number and priority of maintenance orders that you need to work on. As of this
release, we've included two new cards for you.
Technical Details
Type Changed
Additional Details
The My Schedules card shows your top 5 schedules that are either upcoming, in execution, or have just been
closed. You can use this card to open the Schedule Maintenance Order Operations app.
The Unassigned Work card shows you how many hours of work in your work centers haven't yet been assigned
to a person responsible. You can use this card to open the Assign Maintenance Order Operations app.
Related Information
Scheduling of Maintenance Order Operations [page 40]

New App: Assign Maintenance Order Operations [page 47]
Monitoring Key Figures for Your Work Centers

2.3.3 New Features: Schedule Maintenance Order Operations
App
We've made extensive changes to the Schedule Maintenance Order Operations app. The app now covers the
scheduling process end-to-end, from the initial setup and refinement of a schedule to the tracking of schedule
attainment.
Technical Details
Type Changed
Additional Details
We've restructured the user interface to accommodate new features related to scheduling. Here's an overview
of the most important changes:
● When you open the app, a list of your schedules is shown. If you open a specific schedule, this list is shown
as a side panel next to the schedule that is currently open.
● A schedule status is shown in the header area of a schedule. The schedule status determines which
buttons and elements are available on the current screen.
● When setting up a schedule (that is, when the schedule status is Scoping and Refinement), you'll now see
two tabs: List View and Graphical View.
The list view is the default view that you know from earlier releases. The new graphical view allows you to
visualize your schedule in a Gantt chart. You can also enable the display of relationships between order
operations, which helps you to identify scheduling conflicts.
● In the Scoping phase, you'll see a new Change Work Center button. You can use this button to move order
operations to another work center.
● A new Schedule Automatically button allows you to have the app find a start day for order operations.
● In the list view, a filter button has been added. This button allows you to filter the order operations in your
schedule, for example, by processing status or planned start and end.
● In the Refinement phase, in addition to the Set Start Day button, you can now use a calendar control to set
a start day for order operations.
● A new Change Name and Add Description button allows you to change the name of a schedule and to add a
schedule description. This button is available in the Scoping and Refinement phases.
● New buttons for freezing and deleting a schedule have been added. Freezing is required so that you can
track schedule execution once the target week starts.

● Once the target week starts, micro charts for tracking schedule attainment and the completion of order
operations are shown in the schedule header.
The Open Weekly View button has been renamed to Go Back to Scoping.
The freezing of schedules must be enabled in Customizing. Although this setting isn't a prerequisite for using
the apps, it's needed so that maintenance planners can track schedule execution and review schedule
attainment.
To make the setting, go to Customizing for Plant Maintenance and Customer Service Maintenance and
Service Processing Resource Scheduling Make Settings for Resource Scheduling .
Related Information
Scheduling Maintenance Order Operations
2.3.4 New Features: Maintenance Scheduling Board App
You can now enable the display of relationships. The visualization of relationships helps you to detect
relationship violations and scheduling conflicts before dispatching order operations.
Technical Details
Type Changed

Additional Details
You can enable the display of implicit and explicit relationships in the chart settings. The settings dialog
provides two new options.
Related Information
Visualization of Relationships between Order Operations [page 46]
2.3.5 New Features: Manage Work Center Utilization App
We've made some changes to the Manage Work Center Utilization app. For example, you can now change work
center capacity for a specific target week by adjusting the number of resources per work center. In addition,
you can show a new column and filter to check if an order operation is already included in one or more
schedules.
Technical Details
Type Changed
Additional Details
You'll see the following changes on the user interface:
● In the table settings, you can add an Included in Schedule column to the list of order operations. This
column shows you if you've already added an operation to one or more of your schedules. If one or more
schedules are shown, you can directly open them from here.
● In the Adapt Filters dialog, you can add an Included in Schedule filter to the filter bar.
● A new Change Work Center Capacity button is available next to the My Work Centers button. This button
opens a dialog in which you can change the number of resources per work center and shift for a specific
target week.

● We've also adjusted the Add to Schedule dialog. This dialog opens when you select order operations for
scheduling. You can now decide whether you want to create a new schedule or whether you would like to
add the selected operations to an existing schedule.
Related Information
Setting Up Your Schedule
2.3.6 Visualization of Relationships between Order

Operations
You can now enable the display of relationships in the Maintenance Scheduling Board app and in the Schedule
Maintenance Order Operations app. The visualization of relationships helps you to detect relationship violations
and scheduling conflicts before dispatching order operations.
Technical Details
Type New
Additional Details
You can enable the display of implicit and explicit relationships in the chart settings. In the Maintenance
Scheduling Board app, the settings dialog provides two new options. In the Schedule Maintenance Order
Operations app, the relevant settings are part of the new graphical view.
If relationships exist between order operations, you'll see arrows of different colors in the chart when the rows
in the table area are expanded:
● Grey arrow: The relationship is implicit. That is, it wasn’t explicitly defined by the maintenance planner but
is based on the sequence defined by the operation number.
● Black arrow: The relationship was explicitly defined in the maintenance order.
● Red arrow: The relationship is violated as a result of the current scheduling situation.

 Note
This feature is only available in the Maintenance Scheduling Board app. In the graphical view of the
Schedule Maintenance Order Operations app, relationship violations aren't visualized in red.
● Link icon: The operation is related to an operation that is currently not visible in the chart.
When you hover over the link icon or the arrowhead, details about the type of relationship are shown.
Related Information
New Features: Schedule Maintenance Order Operations App [page 43]

New Features: Maintenance Scheduling Board App [page 44]
2.3.7 New App: Assign Maintenance Order Operations
With the new Assign Maintenance Order Operations app, you can assign maintenance order operations to a
person responsible. You can also change or delete existing assignments.
Technical Details
Type New
Additional Details
This app provides the following key features:
● Assign maintenance order operations to a person responsible

● Change the person responsible for a maintenance order operation
● Unassign the person responsible from a maintenance order operation

Make sure that all required ICF nodes are active. Checking the activation of ICF nodes is especially important if
you've upgraded your SAP S/4HANA release. ICF nodes for new apps aren't activated automatically after
software upgrades.
Implementation information, including information about the required ICF nodes, is available in the app entry in
the SAP Fiori apps reference library.
Related Information
Assigning Maintenance Order Operations to a Person Responsible

Assign Maintenance Order Operations (app entry in the SAP Fiori apps reference library)
2.4 Country/Region Specifics
For country/region-specific changes, please see Country/Region Specifics [page 751].
2.5 SAP Best Practices Content
2.5.1 Preventive Maintenance (BJ2)
Use
The scope item now includes the following:
● The preventive maintenance process flow is segregated into preventive maintenance (time-based) and
preventive maintenance (performance-based).
● The process flow for preventive maintenance (time-based) is extended to include both single cycle and
strategy maintenance plans.
● The process flow for preventive maintenance (performance-based) includes all the maintenance plan
types supported; namely single cycle, strategy, and multiple counter.

Technical Details
Type Changed
Scope Item BJ2 ( Preventive Maintenance )
Application Component PM
Additional Information
A localized version of this scope item is available for the following countries/regions:
United Arab Emirates, Austria, Australia, Belgium, Brazil, Canada, Switzerland, China, Czech Republic,
Germany, Denmark, Spain, Finland, France, Great Britain, Hong Kong, Hungary, Indonesia, Ireland, India, Italy,
Japan, South Korea, Luxembourg, Mexico, Malaysia, Netherlands, Norway, New Zealand, Philippines, Poland,
Portugal, Romania, Russia, Saudi Arabia, Sweden, Singapore, Thailand, Turkey, Taiwan, United States of
America, South Africa
For more information about this scope item and additional deliverables, refer to the fact sheet in the SAP
Best Practices Explorer.

3 Finance
3.1 Name Changes for Finance Apps
The names of some Finance apps change in this release.
Technical Details
Type Changed
Scope Item See the table below
Application Component See the table below
Additional Details
The following changes have been made:
Accounting and Financial Close
App delivered in
the following
business cata Relevant Scope Application Com
Previous Name New Name More Information log(s) Item ponent
Display Financial Balance Sheet / Balance Sheet / General Ledger - J58 (Accounting FI-GL-GL-IS
Statement Income Statement Income Statement Reporting and Financial
(SAP_SFIN_BC_G Close)
L_REPORTING)
Financial Balance Sheet / Balance Sheet / General Ledger - J58 (Accounting FI-GL-GL-IS
Statement - Grid- Income Statement Income Statement Reporting and Financial
Based - Multidimensional - Multidimensional (SAP_SFIN_BC_G Close)
L_REPORTING)

50 PUBLIC Finance
App delivered in
the following
Manage Profit Manage Profit Manage Profit Profit Center Ac J58 (Accounting CO-FIO
Centers Centers (Obsolete) Centers counting - Profit and Financial
Center Master Close)
Data
(SAP_SFIN_BC_O
H_MD_PCA)
Interunit Interunit Interunit Reconcili Consolidation - 1SG (Group Re

FIN-CS
Reconciliation - Reconciliation - ation Data Preparation
porting - Financial
Subsidiary View Unit View (SAP_FIN_BC_CC
Consolidation)
ON_PRDTPRE)
Manage Cost Manage Cost Manage Cost Cen Profit Center Ac J54 (Overhead
CO-FIO
Centers (New) Centers ters counting - Profit
Cost Accounting)
Center Master
Data
(SAP_SFIN_BC_O
H_MD_CCA)
Define Financial Define FS Items Define FS Items Consolidation - 1SG (Group Re
FIN-CS
Statement Items Master Data Finan
porting - Financial
cial Statement
Consolidation)
Items Manage
ment
(SAP_FIN_BC_CC
ON_MDFSITM)
Import and Export Import/Export Import/Export Val Consolidation - 1SG (Group Re
FIN-CS
Validation Rules Validation Settings idation Settings Validation Rule
porting - Financial
and Methods Definition
Consolidation)
(SAP_FIN_BC_VE
_RULE)
Financial Operations
App delivered in
the following
Manage Down Manage Customer The name of the Accounts Receiva J59 (Accounts Re FI-AR-AR-DP
Payment Requests Down Payment Re ble - Incoming Pay ceivable)
tile has changed.
- For Customers quests ments
(SAP_SFIN_BC_A
R_INC_PAYM ),
Accounts Receiva
ble - Invoices
(SAP_SFIN_BC_A
R_INVOICES)

Finance PUBLIC 51
App delivered in
the following
Manage Down Manage Supplier The name of the Accounts Payable - J59 (Accounts Re FI-AP-AP-DP
Payment Requests Down Payment Re Operational Proc ceivable)
tile has changed.
- For Suppliers quests essing
(SAP_SFIN_BC_A
P_DOC_PROC ),
Accounts Payable -
Payments
(SAP_SFIN_BC_A
P_PAY_PROC)
See Also
For information about the scheduling apps for Settlement Management that have been renamed in this release,
see Renamed Scheduling Apps [page 247].
3.2 Fiori Content for Finance
Changes to Finance objects related to user management and authorizations for Fiori apps are delivered with
this release. These objects include, for example, business catalogs, technical catalogs, business role templates,
and target mappings.
Technical Details
Type Changed
Application Component All Finance components
Additional Details
Details about the changes for Finance are summarized in in the following SAP Notes:

52 PUBLIC Finance
Affected content Related software components Link to SAP Note
Fiori content for Settlement Manage S4CORE,UIS4HOP1 2824477 - Release Information:

ment Changes in SAP Fiori Content for Set
tlement Management in SAP S/4HANA
1909
Fiori content for International Trade S4CORE,UIS4HOP1 2824597 - Release Information:

Changes in SAP Fiori Content for Inter
national Trade in SAP S/4HANA 1909
All other Finance Fiori content S4CORE,UIAPFI70 2730981 - Release Information:

Changes in SAP Fiori Content for Fi
nance in SAP S/4HANA 1909
For more details about the Finance applications affected by changes to value help authorizations, see Value
Help Authorizations in Finance [page 53].
For information about the user management and authorization content needed for new Fiori apps, see the SAP
Fiori apps reference library at https://fioriappslibrary.hana.ondemand.com.
See Also
For more information about user management and authorizations, see the SAP S/4HANA UI Technology Guide
on the SAP Help Portal at http://help.sap.com/s4hana_op_1909.
3.3 Value Help Authorizations in Finance
SAP has refined the access protection of value helps, resulting in modified authorization proposals.
Technical Details
Type Changed
Application Component FI, BC-SEC-AUT

Finance PUBLIC 53
Additional Details
Please see SAP Note 2800871 for a list of the affected applications, transactions, and application objects in
Finance.
To ensure smooth working of the system for your users, we strongly recommend that you perform the
postprocessing steps as described in SAP Note 1539556 (question 2) during the upgrade of your system.
Related Information
Access Protection for Value Helps [page 746]
3.4 Financial Planning and Analysis
3.4.1 Apps No Longer Available
Apps No Longer Available as of SAP S/4HANA 1909
The following apps are no longer available as of SAP S/4HANA 1909:
● Display Cost Line Items (Orders - Actual)

● Schedule Actual Overhead Allocation - Cost Centers
● Schedule Actual Settlement - Projects
Individual users who choose not to work with the apps can still use the transactions as before.
Apps and Factsheets No Longer Available as of SAP S/4HANA 2009
Deprecated App Fiori ID Successor App Fiori ID
Manage Cost Center Master F1023 Manage Cost Centers F1443A

Data

54 PUBLIC Finance
Deprecated App Fiori ID Successor App Fiori ID
Manage Activity Type Master F1025 Manage Activity Types 1605A

Data
Manage Statistical Key Fig F1603 Manage Statistical Key Fig F1603A
ures ures
Activity Type - Factsheet F1717 Manage Activity Types F1605A
Controlling Document – Fact F1720 Display Line Items - Cost Ac F4023
sheet counting
Cost Center Group - Fact F1722 Manage Cost Centers F1443A

sheet
Cost Center - Factsheet F0123 Manage Cost Centers F1443A
Statistical Key Figure - Fact F1731 Manage Statistical Key Fig F1603A
sheet ures
Technical Details
Type Changed
Scope Item J54 (Overhead Cost Accounting)
Application Component CO-OM
3.4.2 Business Catalogs for Planning
As of SAP S/4HANA On Premise 1909 a new business catalog, SAP_SFIN_BC_OH_PLN_ADM, is available. It

can be found in the Planning business group SAP_SFIN_BCG_PLAN.
Technical Details
Type Changed
Scope Item 1HB (Financial Plan Data Upload from File)

Finance PUBLIC 55
Application Component CO-OM-CCA-B
3.4.3 Overhead Cost Accounting
3.4.3.1 Apps Removed from Overhead role
The following apps have been removed from the SAP_BR_OVERHEAD_ACCOUNTANT business group:
● Display Actual Cost Line Items for Cost Centers

● Display Actual Cost Documents
● Manage Cost Center Master Data
Individual users who choose not to work with the apps, can still use this transaction as before.
Technical Details
Type Changed
Application Component CO-OM-IS
3.4.3.2 Manage Statistical Key Figures (Version 2)
This app is a new version of the Manage Statistical Key Figures app. You can use Manage Statistical Key Figures
(Version 2) to display and manage statistical key figures master data. You can create new statistical key figures
as well as copy, edit, and delete existing ones. You can also view other objects that mention each statistical key
figure by navigating to the Where-Used List – Statistical Key Figures app.
Manage Statistical Key Figures (Version 2) replaces the Manage Statistical Key Figures app.

56 PUBLIC Finance
Technical Details
Type New
Application Component CO-FIO
This app replaces the Manage Statistical Key Figures app. The Manage Statistical Key Figures app is no longer
supported and will be removed from the system as of SAP S/4HANA 2020. As of now, it is no longer available
by default on the SAP Fiori launchpad. If you need this app, you can find it in the App Finder until it is
deprecated. We recommend that you switch to the new successor app Manage Statistical Key Figures (Version
2) as soon as possible.
Related Information
Where-Used List - Statistical Key Figures [page 62]

Manage Statistical Key Figures (Version 2)
3.4.3.3 Manage Activity Types (Version 2)
This app is a new version of the Manage Activity Types app. You can use the app Manage Activity Types (Version
2) to search for activity types, display their master data, create new and edit existing activity types. You can
also view other objects that mention each activity type by navigating to the Where-Used List – Activity Types
app.
Manage Activity Types (Version 2) replaces the Manage Activity Types app.
Technical Details
Type New

Finance PUBLIC 57
This app replaces the Manage Activity Types app. The Manage Activity Types app is no longer supported and
will be removed from the system as of SAP S/4HANA 2020. As of now, it is no longer available by default on the
SAP Fiori launchpad. If you need this app, you can find it in the App Finder until it is deprecated. We
recommend that you switch to the new successor app Manage Activity Types (Version 2) as soon as possible.
Related Information
Where-Used List - Activity Types [page 61]

Manage Activity Types (Version 2)
3.4.3.4 SAP CoPilot Skill: Manage Cost Centers
Use this skill to find and view cost center master data. You can see the cost centers' validity periods, assigned
profit centers, controlling areas, categories, users responsible, and other details.
Technical Details
Type New

58 PUBLIC Finance
Related Information
Skill: Manage Cost Centers
3.4.3.5 Change Log - Activity Types
With this app you can see details of changes made to activity type master data. You can see what was changed,
by who, and when, and you can filter for changes made to particular activity types, or by a particular user.
Technical Details
Type New
3.4.3.6 SAP CoPilot Skill: Activity Type Change Log
This skill allows you to use SAP CoPilot to view changes made to activity type master data. You can simply say
or type your query to see a list of changes to whichever activity type you specify.
Technical Details
Type New

Finance PUBLIC 59
Related Information
Skill: Activity Type Change Log
3.4.3.7 Change Log - Cost Centers
With this app you can see details of changes made to cost center master data. You can see what was changed,
by who, and when, and you can filter for changes made to particular cost centers, or by a particular user.
Technical Details
Type New
3.4.3.8 SAP CoPilot Skill: Cost Center Change Log
Use this skill to see details of changes made to cost center master data. You can see what was changed, by
who, and when, and you can filter for specific changes.
Technical Details
Type New

60 PUBLIC Finance
Related Information
Skill: Cost Center Change Log
3.4.3.9 Where-Used List – Cost Centers
You can use this app to find all objects that mention a specific cost center. These objects may include activity
types, cost allocation cycles and segments, cost center groups, hierarchies, cost centers using budget, and
many other. To explore additional details, you can click the object links and navigate to other apps related to
these objects.
Technical Details
Type New
Related Information
Where-Used List – Cost Centers
3.4.3.10 Where-Used List - Activity Types
With this app you can find all mentions of a specific activity type in a wide range of objects, such as cost
centers, receiving orders, receiving WBS elements, activity type groups, and production (routings and work
centers). You can specify one or more activity types and view all objects where these activity types are
mentioned. To explore additional details, you can click the object links and navigate to other SAP Fiori apps
related to these objects.

Finance PUBLIC 61
Technical Details
Type New
3.4.3.11 Where-Used List - Statistical Key Figures
With this app you can find all mentions of a specific statistical key figure in statistical key figure groups, cost
allocation cycles and segments, and a range of other objects. You can specify one or more statistical key
figures and view the objects where these statistical key figures are mentioned. To explore additional details, you
can click the object links and navigate to other SAP Fiori apps related to these objects.
Technical Details
Type New
3.4.3.12 Upload Material Inventory Prices
With this app you can make mass changes to material inventory prices. You can download a blank spreadsheet
to use as a template or you can download your existing material prices for a given company code, its plants and
currency type, make your changes, then upload the new prices.

62 PUBLIC Finance
Technical Details
Type New
Scope Item 1ZT (1ZT)
Application Component CO-PC-ML
Related Information
Upload Material Inventory Prices
3.4.3.13 Display Line Items - Cost Accounting
With this app you can display line items in cost accounting. You can filter, sort, and group the items based on
various criteria. By default, the line items are grouped by cost center, but you can create your own variants
according to the needs of your business.
Technical Details
Type New
Scope Item 1GA (1GA)
Application Component FI-FIO-GL
Related Information
Display Line Items - Cost Accounting

Finance PUBLIC 63
3.4.3.14 Manage Direct Activity Allocation
With this feature you can view, create, and reverse direct activity allocations.
Technical Details
Type New
Scope Item 1NT (1NT)
Related Information
Manage Direct Activity Allocation
3.4.3.15 Run Allocations
This feature enables you to view the run result report in tabs for allocation results, senders, receivers, and
messages. You can also display the run result report as a network graph.
Technical Details
Type New
Scope Item J54 (J54), 2QL (2QL)

64 PUBLIC Finance
Related Information
Run Allocations
3.4.3.16 Manage Allocations
This feature enables you to perform allocations for actual data, allocate between profit centers, and download a
template to use when importing CSV files.
Technical Details
Type New
Scope Item 2QL (2QL), J54 (J54)
Related Information
Manage Allocations
3.4.4 Financial Planning
3.4.4.1 Revenue Planning with SAP Analytics Cloud
This SAP Analytics Cloud content (Revenue Planning, Cost Center Budgeting and Activity Planning for SAP
S/4HANA) facilitates the sales and revenue planning process including sales price and sales quantity planning,
revenue and deduction calculation. It supports users with simulation capabilities based on past actual data. It
is based on the S/4HANA data model in FI-CO. Master data and transaction data from S/4HANA can be loaded
into SAP Analytics Cloud and planning results can be written back to S/4HANA.

Finance PUBLIC 65
Technical Details
Type New
Scope Item 1YB
Related Information
Integration of SAP Analytics Cloud for Planning with SAP S/4HANA
3.4.4.2 Delete Financial Plan Data
Use this app to ensure data consistency by resetting financial plan data to a specified point in time
(timestamp). This makes it possible to correct previous, erroneous plan data imports, for example. Resetting
plan data deletes the data permanently and irrevocably. Please ensure that you archive any financial plan data
that you are no longer using. Do not delete such data using this app.
Technical Details
Type New
Scope Item 1HB
To use this app, the Deleting Financial Plan Data checkbox must be selected for each plan category from which
you want to delete plan data in the Maintain Category for Planning customizing activity. In the Implementation
Guide, go to Controlling General Controlling Planning Maintain Category for Planning .

66 PUBLIC Finance
Related Information
Delete Financial Plan Data
3.4.5 Product Costing
3.4.5.1 Production Cost Analysis
The Production Cost Analysis app now enables target cost calculation for collective orders.
It supports order standard costs and target cost calculation at time of goods receipts for collective orders.
Technical Details
Type Changed
Scope Item BEI (Period-End Closing - Plant)
3.4.5.2 Analyze Costs by Work Center/Operation
The Analyze Costs by Work Center/Operation app now reports on Work Center/Operation to help analyze
production costs. It also enables plan costs based on new planning solution.
It supports order standard costs and target cost calculation at time of goods receipts for collective orders.
Technical Details
Type Changed
Scope Item BEI (Period-End Closing - Plant)

Finance PUBLIC 67
3.4.6 Sales Accounting
3.4.6.1 Sales Accounting Overview
The Sales Accounting Overview app has been updated with a number of new cards. These include Monthly
Gross Margin, Gross Margin per Product, Monthly Sales Deductions, and Sales Deductions.
Technical Details
Type Changed
Scope Item BGC (SAP Fiori Analytical Apps for G/L Accounting in Fi
nance)
Additional Details
The following semantic tags need to be assigned to your financial statement version:
● Billed Revenue (BILL_REV)

Only items connected to the sale of products or goods with both billed revenue and a quantity < > 0 are
included in the model. Items with billed revenue but no quantity connected are excluded.
● Recognized Revenue (RECO_REV)
● Sales Deductions (SALES_DED)
● Recognized Margin (REC_MARGIN)
● Cost of Goods Sold (RECO_COS)
● Revenue Adjustments (ADJ_REV)
● Price Difference (PRICE_DIF)

68 PUBLIC Finance
Related Information
Sales Accounting Overview
3.4.6.2 Monitor Predictive Accounting - Predictive Quality
You use this app to monitor and check for how many of the sales orders created in the system it was possible to
simulate all follow-on documents in predictive accounting. If it was possible to simulate all follow-on
documents in the system you have an accurate prediction of costs and revenues for your products. If the
system could not simulate the follow-on documents in predictive accounting you can check with this app where
in the simulation process the errors occurred. You can correct the errors and then you can start reprocessing in
predictive accounting.
Technical Details
Type New
Scope Item 2FD
Application Component FI-PRA
In order to use predictive accounting and the app Monitor Predictive Accounting - Predictive Quality you have to
activate predictive accounting and make the settings necessary for it.
To do so in the SAP Reference IMG choose Financial Accounting Predictive Accounting .
Related Information
Predictive Accounting

Finance PUBLIC 69
3.4.7 Budget Availability Control
3.4.7.1 Budget Availability Control for Cost Centers
Budget availability control helps you avoid budget exceedances in your cost centers. When you post an
expense, the available budget is checked. If the budget consumption exceeds a defined limit, either a warning
or an error message appears. This system response is based on the settings that you have defined in the
Budget Availability Control Profile for your cost centers. The Cost Center Budget Report app provides you with
information about budget, actual costs, commitments, and available budget for your budget-carrying cost
centers.
Technical Details
Type New
Application Component CO-OM-CCA
Additional Details
You can use the Cost Center Budget Report app to:
● View budget, plan data, actual costs, and commitments of budget-carrying cost centers. The information
displayed is based on filter criteria such as company code or fiscal year.
● View costs and budget details of multiple budget-carrying cost centers from different company codes
● Switch between visual filter and compact filter for available budget
● Navigate to view the details of a cost center
● Navigate to the line item overview for actual costs and commitments.
Budget availability control can be used for cost centers only after you have created a Budget Availability Control
Profile for these cost centers.
You create a Budget Availability Control Profile and assign account groups to this profile. The assignment of
account groups defines:

70 PUBLIC Finance
● Which accounts are checked during actual cost postings and
● Which accounts are analyzed with the Cost Center Budget Report
Related Information
Budget Availability Control for Cost Centers

Cost Center Budget Report
3.5 Accounting and Financial Close
3.5.1 General Ledger Accounting
3.5.1.1 Edit Options for Journal Entries: Payment

Reference Option
In the Edit Options for Journal Entries app, the Payment Reference as Search Criterion option is now available.
Selecting this option allows you to search for line items to be cleared that have a payment reference (KIDNO). In
the Clear Incoming Payments and Post Incoming Payments app, you can then search for items with payment
reference.
This procedure for identifying invoices is common practice in Scandinavian countries.
Technical Details
Type New
Scope Item J58 (Accounting and Financial Close)
Application Component FI-GL
Related Information
Edit Options for Journal Entries

Finance PUBLIC 71
3.5.1.2 Display Line Item Entry App - Items Without
Leading Ledgers
You can now also display line items in the app that were posted to ledger groups without the leading ledger.
Additionally, you can also change journal entry items without leading ledgers, that is, change the assignment
(for sorting documents) and the item texts for line items by selecting the respective line item and clicking
Change Journal Entries. This functions the same way as for normal items (items of a journal entry that neither
have a special document status nor do they portray special G/L account transactions) and for noted items
(items that remind you of outstanding payments).
Technical Details
Type Changed
Application Component FI-FIO-GL (Fiori UI for General Ledger Accounting)
Related Information
Display Line Item Entry
3.5.1.3 App Extensibility: Public Sector Fields in Specific

Reporting Apps for G/L Accountants
This feature enables you to display additional fields for Public Sector in the following apps:
● Display Line Items in General Ledger

● Trial Balance
● Trial Balance Comparison
You can use the Custom Fields and Logic app to do that.

72 PUBLIC Finance
Technical Details
Type New
Additional Details
The following fields for Public Sector are available natively in the Display Line Items for General Ledger app, the
Trial Balance app and the Trial Balance Comparison app:
● Financial Management Area

● Funds Center
● Funded Program
● Fund
● Grant
● Budget Period
● Partner Fund
● Partner Grant
● FM: Partner Budget Period
Additionally, by using the Custom Fields and Logic app, you can display the fields listed below for Public Sector.
You use the Custom Fields and Logic app to create and publish a data source extension with additional fields for
the above listed reporting apps for the G/L accountant. You choose from a list of available fields the ones that
you want to have additionally displayed, put them into the Selected Fields area and save and publish the data
source extension with the additional fields that you selected.
Fields You can Choose to Add for Public Sector:
● Cash Ledger: Company Code for Expense/Revenue

● Cash Ledger: Expense or Revenue Account
● Budget Account
● Budget Account Company Code
● Budget Consumption Date
● CC Fiscal Period to Budget Consumption Date
● CC Fiscal Year to Budget Consumption Date
● Budget-Relevant Indicator
● Budget Consumption Amount Type
● Budget Consumption Type

Finance PUBLIC 73
Related Information
App Extensibility: Display Line Items in General Ledger

App Extensibility: Trial Balance
Extensibility
3.5.1.4 CDS Views for SAP BW/4HANA Extraction in

General Ledger Accounting
CDS (Core Data Services) views have been enabled and released for SAP Business Warehouse/4HANA
extraction.
Technical Details
Type Changed
Application Component FI-GL (General Ledger Accounting)
Additional Details
● G/L Account Line Item - Raw Data (I_GLAccountLineItemRawData)

You can use this CDS view to obtain details for G/L account line items (without ledger).
● Source Ledger (I_LedgerSourceLedger)
You can use this CDS view to obtain details for the assignment of a ledger to the source ledger.
● Financial Planning Entry Item (I_FinancialPlanningEntryItem)
You can use this CDS view to obtain details for financial planning entry items.
● Accounting Document Item: Operational View (I_OperationalAcctgDocItem)
You can use this CDS view to obtain details for operational accounting documents.
● Journal Entry (I_Journal Entry)
You can use this CDS view to obtain details for journal entries.
● Company Code (I_CompanyCode)
You can use this CDS view to obtain details for company codes.
● Cost Center (I_CostCenter)
You can use this CDS view to obtain details for cost centers.

74 PUBLIC Finance
● Profit Center (I_ProfitCenter)
You can use this CDS view to obtain details for profit centers.
Related Information
CDS Views
CDS Views for Finance
Extracting CDS Views to SAP BW/4HANA
3.5.1.5 CDS Views for General Ledger Accounting
CDS (Core Data Services) views have now been released for General Ledger Accounting.
Technical Details
Type Changed
Additional Details
The following CDS views have now been released:
● CDS Views for Master Data

○ Accounting Principle (I_AccountingPrinciple)
○ Accounting Principle Text (I_AccountingPrincipleText)
● CDS View for Transaction Data

○ Company Code User Default Value (I_UserSettingsForCompanyCode)
For more information about the CDS views available, see the product assistance at http://help.sap.com/
s4hana_op_1909.000 under Cross Components The Virtual Data Model in SAP S/4HANA CDS Views
CDS Views for Finance .

Finance PUBLIC 75
Related Information
CDS Views for Finance
3.5.1.6 Balance Sheet / Income Statement: Display Zero-

Balance Accounts
This app was previously called Display Financial Statement.
You can now use it to display zero-balance accounts.
Technical Details
Type Changed
Scope Item J58 (J58)
Additional Details
Zero-balance accounts are accounts to which no postings have been made or for which the credit and debit
postings offset each other.
For more information, see Displaying Zero-Balance Accounts.
Related Information
Balance Sheet / Income Statement

76 PUBLIC Finance
3.5.1.7 Changes in Automatic Account Determination
You can use the Automatic Account Determination app to configure G/L account assignments. New processes
and transaction keys in different areas have been added. To open this app, you can search for the app name in
the App Finder.
Technical Details
Type New
Available As Of SAP S/HANA 1909
Additional Details
See new areas, processes, transaction keys, and applications in the following table:
Area/Subarea-Process/Transaction
Item Type Group
UMS: Tax payable posting (advance tax New transaction key Financial Accounting - General Ledger
return) Accounting - Define Tax Accounts - STE
Define Zero-Balance Clearing Account New process Financial Accounting - General Ledger
Accounting
Define Alternative Reconciliation Ac New process Financial Accounting - Accounts Re
counts for Special G/L Transactions ceivables and Payables
Personnel Management New area (New)
SAP S/4HANA for Human Resources New subarea Personnel Management
Define Reconciliation Accounts for Em New process Personnel Management - SAP S/
ployees in Role FI Supplier 4HANA for Human Resources
Application V: C017 New application Sales - Sales Billing - Assign G/L Ac
counts
Application V: C020 New application Sales - Sales Billing - Assign G/L Ac
counts
Application V: Customer-created condi New application Sales - Sales Billing - Assign G/L Ac
tion tables counts

Finance PUBLIC 77
Area/Subarea-Process/Transaction
Item Type Group
Application VC: C018 & C019 New application Sales - Sales Billing - Assign G/L Ac
counts
Application VD: C006 New application Sales - Sales Billing - Assign G/L Ac
counts
Related Information
Automatic Account Determination
3.5.1.8 Manage Journal Entry Templates
This app enables you to define a journal entry template for postings based on your needs, which means you
can select fields and values in a template for specific posting use. Then the template can be used in the Post
General Journal Entries app. After you create a journal entry template, you can also choose to share it publicly
and the access level. The templates can help save time when you enter journal entries.
Technical Details
Type New
Related Information
Manage Journal Entry Templates

78 PUBLIC Finance
3.5.1.9 Profitability Segment Fields
With this feature, you can add profitability segment fields in a template file for upload in the Upload General
Journal Entries app. Make sure that you add correct technical names of the fields. You can add profitability
segment fields such as billing type, sales group, and customer group.
Technical Details
Type New
Related Information
Adding Field Columns in Template

Upload General Journal Entries
3.5.1.10 Changes in Manage Journal Entries
You can navigate to the Display Journal Entries - In T-Account View app from the Manage Journal Entries app,
and view journal entries in the T-Account view. In addition, related documents of a journal entry are listed a
hierarchy view, compared with a flat view before this release. These changes provide you with an easy and
organized view of journal entries.
Technical Details
Type Changed

Finance PUBLIC 79
Additional Details
To access Display Journal Entries from the Manage Journal Entries app, select a journal entry, and choose T-
Account View in the entry view.
The Manage Journal Entries app also provides some country or region specific features, for example, creating
and sending electronic customer tax invoices in XML format to an integrated external system.
Related Information
Manage Journal Entries

Creation and Sending of Electronic Customer Tax Invoices in XML Format [page 771]
3.5.1.11 Changes in Manage Global Accounting Hierarchies
It is supported to transport global accounting hierarchies from your quality system to the production system.
Note that this feature is applicable only for the financial statement version type.
Technical Details
Type New
Related Information
Manage Global Accounting Hierarchies

80 PUBLIC Finance
3.5.1.12 Manage Custom Hierarchy Type
In the Manage Custom Hierarchy Type app, you can choose additional dimensions to use to create hierarchies.
You can then use Manage Global Accounting Hiearchies to build hierarchies based on your attribute. For
example, you can define a Country attribute and then use Manage Global Accounting Hierarchies to build
country hierarchies.
Technical Details
Type New
Additional Details
To use this app, you need the same minimum authorizations as the Overhead Account
(SAP_BR_OVERHEAD_ACCOUNTANT) business role template.
Related Information
Manage Custom Hierarchy Type
3.5.1.13 Manage Teams and Responsibilities - General Journal

Entry Verification
This app enables you to authorize processors who are required to verify submitted G/L journal entries. This
app is also the successor of the Define Responsibilities app that is deprecated as of this release.

Finance PUBLIC 81
Technical Details
Type New
Additional Details
Before SAP S/4 HANA 1909, the Manage Teams and Responsibilities app is used for defining group of users not
only for verifying G/L journal entries, also for other purposes.
If you've configured in the Manage Teams and Responsibilities app and specified the Type field with FGLVG, the
data about teams is also automatically available in the Manage Teams and Responsibilities - General Journal
Entry Verification app. It's unnecessary to copy data from the old app to the new one.
Related Information
Managing Teams and Responsibilities
3.5.1.14 Accounting Enhancements for Banking
You can use the following enhancements for Multi Currency Accounting:
● ADB Key Figure Calculation (Fiori App)

● Mass approval workflow for parked documents

82 PUBLIC Finance
Technical Details
Type Changed
Application Component ● AC-INT-ECS (Error Correction and Suspense Account

ing)
● FI-GL-CU-MCA (Multi Currency Accounting)
● FI-GL-GL-ADB (Average Daily Balances)
Additional Details
SAP Easy Access Menu

The SAP Easy Access Menu has been changed. Error Correction and Suspense Accounting, Multi Currency
Accounting, Average Daily Balances and Move and Merge are also available under Accounting Bank
Applications Enhancements for Accounting .
SAP Customizing
The SAP Customizing structure has been changed. Error Correction and Suspense Accounting, Multi Currency
Accounting, Average Daily Balances and Move and Merge are also available under SAP Banking
Enhancements for Accounting .
3.5.1.15 Changes in Monitor GR/IR Account Reconciliation

App
You can use the Monitor GR/IR Account Reconciliation app to get an overview over the status of open items on
your GR/IR accounts that need clarification. New features and content have been added. To open this app, you
can search for the app name in the App Finder of the SAP Fiori Launchpad.
Technical Details
Type Changed

Finance PUBLIC 83
Application Component FI-GL-IS
Additional Details
This app displays Key Performance Indicators (KPIs) both from the logistics and the accounting point of view
which enables real-time insight into the workload of the teams and the risk of open amounts for the period
close result. It can be used, for example, by team leads in a shared services center to track the progress of their
teams.
New Feature Description
Overview Over Absolute Amount of Open FI Items The new tile allows you to get an overview over the total bal
ance amount without sign of open FI items in global currency
and grouped by the dimension you choose (company code,
supplier, purchase organization, purchasing group, material
group, controlling area, profit center or plant).
The absolute open amount is an indicator for the risk ex

posed in the balance sheet.
Overview Over Debit & Credit Amount of Open FI Items The new tile enables you to get an overview over the debit
amount & credit amount of open FI items in global currency
summed up as total amount and grouped by the dimension
you choose (company code, supplier, purchasing organiza
tion, purchasing group, material group, controlling area,
profit center or plant.)
The chart puts the open credit and debit amount in relation
to the total amount which is reflected in the size of the bub
ble. Negative total amounts are displayed as empty bubbles
and positive total amounts are shown as filled bubbles.
New Content Description
Overview Over Different Amounts: For the two tiles business users can now choose to display
the debit amount, the credit amount or the absolute amount
● For the Open FI Items by Company Code tile
of open items.
● For the Open FI Items by Supplier tile

84 PUBLIC Finance
The graphic illustrates the new tiles and the new content for existing tiles that have been added to the Monitor
GR/IR Account Reconciliation app:
Related Information
Monitor GR/IR Account Reconciliation
3.5.1.16 Changes in Reconcile GR/IR Accounts App
You can use the Reconcile GR/IR Accounts app to clarify and resolve issues for purchase order items with
goods receipts and invoice receipts where amounts and quantities do not match. New features have been
added to especially integrate more automation to ease and fasten your tasks when working with the app. To
open this app, you can search for the app name in the App Finder of the SAP Fiori Launchpad.
Technical Details
Type Changed

Finance PUBLIC 85
Application Component FI-GL-IS
Additional Details
The entry page of the Reconcile GR/IR Accounts app provides powerful capabilities for analyzing the workload
in detail and enables easy access to purchase order items of interest. It allows you to do mass-processing for
decision taking as well as for writing off delivery costs or goods amounts.
The object page provides all relevant details related to a purchase order item, its open FI items and the
purchase order history, in an easy-to-consume fashion for quickly understanding the situation and taking a
decision.
New Features in Reconcile GR/IR Accounts

Area: New Feature Description
Entry Page: Excel Export You can export the list of purchase order items you filtered
and which need clarification to excel.
Entry Page: Easy Detection of Outdated Decisions In the list of purchase order items, you can filter for purchase
order items with not matching amounts or quantities in in
voice receipts or goods receipts for which postings have
been made after those items were last processed or
changed.
This allows you to do mass-processing for revising the deci

sions you previously took for such purchase order items and
decide newly based on the changed situation, that is, the
postings that have been made.
Entry Page: Easy Access of Action History For each such purchase order item you can access the ac
tion log in an additional screen.
Entry Page: Input Validation of Processor When entering a processor for such a purchase order item
the input is validated, so that you can easily detect and cor
rect any mistakes before you save.

86 PUBLIC Finance
Area: New Feature Description
Situation Handling Proactively inform business users through automated notifi-

cations based on relevant changes of a purchasing docu
ment item and provide business users with contextual infor
mation and actions, all in one place.
Examples:
● A business user is notified as soon as he or she is en

tered as the processor for the purchase order item.
● A business user is notified as soon as the next process
ing step (status) of a purchase order item is set to
Write-off.
New Content in Reconcile GR/IR Accounts

Area: New Content Description
Entry Page: Show a Quality Mark for the ML Proposal If you are using the Reconcile GR/IR Accounts app with ma
chine learning, machine learning provides recommendations
for processing such purchase order items. The machine
learning service learns from decisions taken by the users in
the past and provides proposals for decision taking. It also
shows a confidence level for the machine learning service as
table columns, and also shows the confidence level for the
machine learning proposal in the processing dialog.
Object Page: History of Posted Journal Entries and User Ac A timeline shows the complete history of posted journal en
tions tries and user actions with the state of the purchase order
item. This enables you to understand the What and the Why
during processing.
As a key user you require authorization to access a standard situation template

FIN_GRIRPROCESSORCHANGED. Your user must be assigned to the authorization role SAP_BR_BCP_EXPERT to
be able to copy a standard situation template. For detailed information, see Authorizations for Situation
Handling. You perform the following steps to copy the standard template for the GR/IR reconciliation scenario
and adapt it to your needs:
1. Log on to the SAP Fiori launchpad and open the Manage Situation Type app.
2. Search for the FIN_GRIRPROCESSORCHANGED template.
3. Select the template and then choose the Copy button to copy the template to a new situation type.
4. In the new situation type, define the settings according to your needs and save and enable the situation
type.
Related Information
Changes in Monitor GR/IR Account Reconciliation App [page 83]

Finance PUBLIC 87
Reconcile GR/IR Accounts
Situation Template: GR/IR Clearing Processor Was Changed
3.5.1.17 Deprecated Apps in General Ledger Accounting
Several apps and factsheets in General Ledger Accounting will be replaced soon. We recommend that you
switch to the successor app as soon as possible. For more information about the deprecated apps and the
successor apps, please see the links below.
Deprecated apps will be deleted two releases from now. They have been removed from the business catalog
and are no longer visible on the Fiori launchpad. If you need the apps, you can find them in the App Finder until
they are deleted.
Deprecated Apps
App Name Similar Functionality Scope Item
Manage Profit Centers (Obsolete) Profit Centers J58 (Accounting and Financial Close)
Manage Profit Center Master Data Profit Centers J58 (Accounting and Financial Close)
Technical Details
Type Changed
Available As SAP S/4HANA 1909
Related Information
Manage Profit Centers

88 PUBLIC Finance
3.5.1.18 Changes to Authorization Objects in General Ledger
Accounting
Changes to authorization objects delivered for General Ledger Accounting require you to recheck your
business roles and the business catalogs assigned to them. Ensure that the restrictions included in the
business catalogs are set correctly to allow your users to use their business apps as needed.
Technical Details
Type Changed
Use the Business Role Templates app to check the following business role templates or business catalogs and
their restriction types:
 Note
You can also see which business catalogs have changed in the Business Catalogs app. Read the description
displayed for each business catalog in the system for more information about the authorizations controlled
by the catalog and its restriction types.
New Role and Changed Business Catalogs

The following changes were made to the business role templates.

Finance PUBLIC 89
Changes with This Re Relevant Scope
Name of Object Object Type lease Details Item(s)
Division Accountant Business role New business role The following business J58 (Accounting and
Financial Close)
(SAP_BR_DIVISION_ catalogs are assigned
ACCOUNTANT) to this role:
● SAP_SFIN_BC_OH
_MD_PCA
● SAP_SFIN_BC_OH
_REP_PCA
● SAP_SFIN_BC_OH
_GPA_PCA
Profit Center Business catalog New business catalog The app Run Allocation J54 (Overhead Cost
is part of the business
Accounting - General Accounting)
catalog.
Posting Activities J58 (Accounting and
( SAP_SFIN_BC_OH_ Financial Close)
GPA_PCA)
Profit Center Business catalog Business catalog re The business catalog J58 (Accounting and
Financial Close)
Accounting - Profit named and apps BC
Center Master Data added SAP_SFIN_BC_OH_MD
( SAP_SFIN_BC_OH_ _PCA has been re
MD_PCA) named from Overhead
Accounting - Profit
Center Master Data to
Profit Center
Accounting - Profit
Center Master Data.
The following apps

have been added to
the business catalog::
● Manage Profit
Centers, in re
placement of
Manage Profit
Centers
(Obsolete)
● Where-Used List –
Profit Centers
● Change Log -
Profit Centers
● Manage
Allocations

90 PUBLIC Finance
Changes with This Re Relevant Scope
Name of Object Object Type lease Details Item(s)
Financial Close)
Accounting - Profit named and apps BC
Center Reporting added SAP_SFIN_BC_OH_RE
( SAP_SFIN_BC_OH_ P_PCA has been re
REP_PCA) named from Overhead
Accounting - Profit
Center Reporting to
Profit Center
Accounting - Profit
Center Reporting.
The following apps

have been added to
the business catalog:
● Manage Global
Accounting
Hierarchies
● Manage Flexible
Hierarchies
named and app re Financial Close)
Accounting - Profit BC
moved
Center Display SAP_SFIN_BC_OH_FA
(SAP_SFIN_BC_OH_F CT_PCA has been re
ACT_PCA) named from Overhead
Accounting - Profit
Center Display to Profit
Center Accounting -
Profit Center Display.
The Profit Center Fact

Sheet has been re
moved from the busi
ness catalog.
Enablement of Tablet Usage

Tablet usage has been enabled for the following apps:
● Profit Centers - Plan/Actual

● Profit Centers - Actuals
● Profit Centers - Plan/Actual YTD
● Profit Centers - Plan/Actual with Currency Translation
● Manage Profit Center Groups
● Edit Profit Centers - Collective
● Profit Center Assignment Monitor
● Edit Company Code Assignment - Profit Centers

Finance PUBLIC 91
● Edit Sales Order Substitution
● Compare ROI Profit Centers
● Display Key Figures Profit Center Groups
3.5.1.19 Manage Profit Centers
With this app you can search for, create, view, and edit the master data of profit centers. You can also assign
company codes when you create a profit center. To view objects that are associated with a profit center, you
can go to the Where-Used section.
Technical Details
Type New
Related Information
Manage Profit Centers
3.5.1.20 Change Log - Profit Centers
With this app, you can see the details of changes made to profit center master data.
Technical Details
Type New

92 PUBLIC Finance
Related Information
Change Log - Profit Centers
3.5.1.21 Where-Used List - Profit Centers
Technical Details
Type New
Related Information
Where-Used List - Profit Centers
3.5.1.22 Journal Entry - Post APIs
The APIs Journal Entry - Post (Asynchronous) and Journal Entry - Post (Synchronous) are
enabled for SAP S/4HANA and have been updated as follows:
New feature in MessageHeader node

Simulation is supported.

Finance PUBLIC 93
New features in JournalEntry header node
● ExchangeRate
● IndirectQuotedExchangeRate
● Reference1InDocumentHeader and Reference2InDocumentHeader
● AccountingDocument, which enables the accounting document number
● TaxDeterminationDate
New features in Item node

● Extension fields in AccountingAssignment and ProfitabilitySupplement
● FunctionArea and PersonnelNumber in AccountingAssignment
● SoldMaterial and SoldMaterialGroup in ProfitabilitySupplement
● AmountInGroupCurrency
New features in DebtorItem node

● Extension fields
● Reference1IDByBusinessPartner
● BusinessPlace
● TaxItemGroup
● DownPaymentTerms
● OneTimeCustomer
New features in CreditorItem node

● HouseBank
● BusinessPlace
● DownPaymentTerms
New features in ProductTaxItem node

● TaxItemGroup
● ConditionType
Posting over 999 line items

If the number of document line items is lower than or equals 999, the items are not compressed. The details
are stored in both the Entry View and Ledger View.

94 PUBLIC Finance
If the number of document line items is higher than 999 and open items, cross company items, or tax items are
included, the items are compressed in the Entry View. This is done by deleting the content from the account
assignment, except for the functional area. The details, however, are still stored in the Ledger View.
If the number of document line items is higher than 999 and open items, cross company items, and tax items
are excluded, the items are stored in the Ledger View without being compressed.
If the number of document line items in the Entry View is still higher than 999 after compression, the posting
fails.
Technical Details
Type Changed
Scope Item Accounting and Financial Close
Application Component AC-INT
Additional Details
For more information, see the business documentation of the services on the SAP API Business Hub .
3.5.1.23 Display Journal Entries – In T-Account View
With this app you can inspect how one or multiple journal entries affect ledger accounts where they are posted.
Technical Details
Type New

Finance PUBLIC 95
Related Information
Display Journal Entries – In T-Account View
3.5.1.24 Currency Exchange Rates
With this feature you can monitor, create, and change currency exchange rates.
Technical Details
Type New
Related Information
Currency Exchange Rates
3.5.1.25 Display Document Flow
With this feature you can display all documents that are part of a business transaction.

96 PUBLIC Finance
Technical Details
Type New
Related Information
Display Document Flow
3.5.1.26 Universal Allocation
With this feature, you can allocate and distribute overhead from one object to one or more others. For example,
the costs incurred at a cost center that provided services for other cost centers can be charged to the
requesting cost centers by means of overhead allocation.
 Note
This information is relevant for you if you have implemented SAP Fiori apps.
Technical Details
Type New
Scope Item J54, 2QL, 2US
Application Component FI, FI-GL, CO

Finance PUBLIC 97
Additional Details
You can use Universal Allocation instead of the traditional allocation functions for profit centers and segments
known from General Ledger Accounting, where you can also periodically allocate amounts and quantities from
sender to receiver objects.
With the Universal Allocation features, however, you can manage and perform various overhead allocation and
distribution tasks for different allocation contexts from two central apps – Manage Allocations and Run
Allocations –, such as cost centers or profit centers, and for actual and plan data. You can periodically allocate
amounts and quantities from sending objects to receiving objects.
Related Information
Universal Allocation
3.5.1.27 Accruals Management
With SAP S/4HANA 1909, new features in accruals management enhance the process for calculating,
checking, and posting accruals. A highlight is the addition of utilization – you not only create accruals but can
also have the system automatically reduce them by the related postings of actual costs.
Technical Details
Type Changed
Scope Item J58, 2VB
Application Component FI-GL-ACE
Additional Details
Here are some new things you can do in accruals management:
● Implement utilization and release postings for accruals.

● Pause, suspend, and resume accrual objects (relevant for purchase order accruals only).
● Review purchase order accruals and adjust revised costs in the transaction currency.

98 PUBLIC Finance
● Display a comprehensive overview of purchase order accruals.
● Schedule accruals jobs using the templates provided.
● Transfer existing accruals data to the SAP S/4HANA Accrual Engine from an outside system or even from a
manually maintained spreadsheet (relevant for manual accruals only).
● Run the preprocessing program for archiving accrual objects.
Related Information
Utilization and Release Postings for Accruals [page 99]

Review Purchase Order Accruals - For Cost Accountant [page 104]
Display Purchase Order Accruals [page 103]
Schedule Accruals Jobs [page 106]
Legacy Data Transfer for Accruals [page 108]
Preprocessing Program for Archiving Accruals [page 108]
3.5.1.27.1 Utilization and Release Postings for Accruals
Accruals help you to recognize expenses and revenues that are already known to your company and will be due
in the future with a high degree of certainty.
To keep your accruals up-to-date and adjust the amounts as changes arise, you can now use an end-to-end
solution for accruals: You create accruals and deferrals as before but now you can also have the system reduce
them as soon as actual costs are posted with reference to the corresponding accrual objects. You can also
release accrual amounts that you no longer require. The postings enabling this are called utilization and release
postings.
Technical Details
Type New
Scope Item J58, 2VB

Finance PUBLIC 99
Additional Details
In addition to using utilization and release postings for the current fiscal period, you can distinguish between
the current fiscal period and earlier periods, that is, you can utilize and release accruals amounts not only from
the current fiscal period but also from earlier fiscal periods, and thus benefit from an even more accurate
accruals process. Such utilization and release postings are called late utilization and late release postings.
This comprehensive process enables you to understand the financial position of your company in detail and
ensures that revenues and expenses are reported correctly.
The following posting types have been added for these process:
● UP - utilization posting
● RP - manual release posting
● UL - late utilization posting (utilizing amounts from an earlier fiscal period)
● RL - late manual release posting (releasing amounts from an earlier fiscal period)
● FL - late automatic release posting (automatically releasing amounts from an earlier fiscal period, for
example, when a user closes a purchase order)
If you want to use the utilization and release process, you need to make the relevant settings in Customizing
(see the links in the Related Links section below).
To be able to make utilization and release postings referring to earlier fiscal periods, you need to configure the
accrual closing frequency and use a value, such as annually or quarterly (so the system can use the accrual
value date which is only relevant in this case). You do this using the Define Accrual Item Types Customizing
activity.
Only relevant for manual accruals:
For the system to be able to make utilization and release postings for a business transaction, such as an
invoice, and its assigned accrual object, users need to enter a reference to the corresponding accrual objects
when they post actual costs from the business transaction. Users enter this reference to an accrual object in
the posting screens of the corresponding transactions, such as supplier invoices (MIRO) or manual journal
entries (FB01 and FB50). You make these accrual object fields available using the Maintain Field Status Group
transaction (OB14).
Related Information
Utilization and Release of Manual Accruals

Customizing for Manual Accruals
Utilization and Release of Purchase Order Accruals
Customizing Purchase Order Accruals

100 PUBLIC Finance
3.5.1.27.2 Release, Pause, and Suspend Accrual Objects in
Purchase Order Accruals
If you are using the utilization and release process for purchase order accruals, you can release accrual
amounts that you probably won't need anymore. It is also possible to revert this step if you later need the
released accrual amounts.
In addition, you can pause or suspend accrual postings for a certain period of time and resume them later, if
necessary.
Technical Details
Type New
Scope Item J58, 2VB
Additional Details
There are different ways to release accrual amounts or put them on hold:
● Release accruals
When you release accruals, the system sets the accrual balance to zero. You use this option if you don't
expect actual cost postings anymore relating to this purchase order item (that is, the accrual object).
● Pause accruals
When you pause accruals, the system doesn't post any new accruals for this purchase order item. The
accrual balance remains unchanged. You use this option if you expect that at a later point in time you will
again need to post accruals for this purchase order item (that is, the accrual object).
● Suspend accruals
When you suspend accruals, the system doesn't post any new accruals for this purchase order item (that
is, the accrual object). The accrual balance is set to zero.
● Resume accruals
When you resume an accrual object, you can continue to post accruals.
 Note
You can utilize accrual amounts even if you have paused or suspended accruals.

Finance PUBLIC 101
Related Information
Release, Pause, and Suspend Accrual Objects
3.5.1.27.3 Customizing Settings For Accrual Item Types and

Posting Schemas
For each accrual item type that performs accrual postings, you must assign at least one posting schema.
This process has slightly changed and some fields have been moved from the Define Accrual Item Types
Customizing activity to the Assign Accrual Item Types to Journal Entry Types and Posting Schemas Customizing
activity. In addition, they’ve been rearranged from a horizontal to a vertical layout on the relevant views.
Technical Details
Type Changed
Scope Item J58, 2VB
Additional Details
For each type of posting, you create a new line with the accrual item type in question and enter the type of
posting in the ACE TType column and the corresponding posting schema in the Posting Schema column. For
example, if you need an opening posting (IP), a periodic posting (PP), and a final posting (FP) for the COSTS
accrual item type, you add three separate lines for this accrual item type. In each line, you assign the
corresponding posting type and posting schema. If you only need periodic postings, you just create one line
and enter PP in the ACE TType column.
You do this using the Assign Accrual Item Types to Journal Entry Types and Posting Schemas Customizing
activity.
If you’re using the utilization and release process, make sure to select the Post Deltas checkbox. This is
important as utilization and release postings are delta postings. This setting also ensures correct currency and
exchange rate handling.

102 PUBLIC Finance
These settings replace the following fields that used to be in the Define Accrual Item Types Customizing
activity:
● AccrPs column
● Post Deltas checkbox
● Opening Entry: Post Deltas checkbox
● Period Posting: Post Deltas checkbox
● Closing Entry: Post Deltas checkbox
There's nothing to do for you because those changes are automatically migrated.
Related Information
Define Accrual Item Types for Manual Accruals

Accrual Item Type Settings for Utilization and Release of Manual Accruals
Assign Posting Schema for Manual Accruals
Posting Schema Settings for Utilization and Release of Manual Accruals
Define Accrual Item Types for Purchase Order Accruals
Accrual Item Type Settings for Utilization and Release of Purchase Order Accruals
Assign Posting Schema for Purchase Order Accruals
Posting Schema Settings for Utilization and Release of Purchase Order Accruals
3.5.1.27.4 Display Purchase Order Accruals
This app enables you to have a comprehensive overview of purchase order accruals. In this app, you can view
all key information about purchase order accruals form being transferred to being posted at the end of periods.
The information includes accrual lifecycle status, accrual amounts, review history, and so on. You can find this
app in the App Finder.
Technical Details
Type New
Scope Item 2VB (Purchase Order Accruals)

Finance PUBLIC 103
Related Information
Display Purchase Order Accruals
3.5.1.27.5 Review Purchase Order Accruals - For Cost

Accountant
With this new app, you can review purchase order accruals and adjust revised costs in transaction currency. For
purchase order accruals, you can choose to have accrual amounts reviewed before the system posts them.
With this option, a reviewer can check the periodic planned costs that the system proposes, and adjust them if
needed.
Technical Details
Type New
Additional Details
Before you use the app, you must define thresholds for accrual amounts that require to be manually reviewed.
To define the lower limit and the upper limit of a threshold, you must create a threshold variant that you can
assign to company codes, item types, ledger groups, and currency types. When you create a threshold variant,
you can specify values for the following fields:
● Upper Threshold Amount

● Lower Threshold Amount
● Threshold Currency

104 PUBLIC Finance
Related Information
Review Purchase Order Accruals - For Cost Accountant
3.5.1.27.6 Review Purchase Order Accruals - My Inbox
This feature enables you to use the My Inbox app to review purchase order accruals and adjust accrual
amounts. For purchase order accruals, you can choose to have accrual amounts reviewed and approved before
the system posts them. A reviewer can then check the periodic planned costs that the system proposes and
adjust them if needed.
Technical Details
Type New
Scope Item 2VB (2VB)
Additional Details
The system calculates periodic accrual amounts as follows:
Accrual amounts = Planned Costs - Actual Costs
Planned costs are proposed amounts that are calculated periodically over the lifetime of an item using an
accrual method. Actual costs are based on the receipt value or the invoice value of received goods or services.
Related Information
Review Purchase Order Accruals - My Inbox

Finance PUBLIC 105
3.5.1.27.7 Manage Workflow for Purchase Order Accruals
Review
With this feature you can configure workflows for reviewing purchase order accruals in the Review Purchase
Order Accruals - My Inbox app. The app provides several options for determining the approver, such as the
approval by the cost center responsible, but you can also assign specific users. If a workflow with one or more
steps is activated and the configured start conditions are fulfilled, the approval process is initiated.
Technical Details
Type New
Application Component FI-GL-GL-POA
Related Information
Manage Workflows for Purchase Order Accruals Review
3.5.1.27.8 Schedule Accruals Jobs
This app enables you to schedule accruals jobs using the templates provided. For example, you can perform
periodic posting runs and propose periodic accrual amounts.
Technical Details
Type New

106 PUBLIC Finance
Additional Details
You can use the scheduling options to carry out the following periodic accrual activities:
● Perform Periodic Posting Runs

● Propose Period Amounts
● Transfer Purchase Orders to Accrual Engine
The templates are available only when you've registered them in customizing view APJ_C_SCOPE . Follow the
steps to register for the three templates:
1. Run tcode SM30.

2. Enter APJ_C_SCOPE for Table/View, and click Maintain.
3. Add the following new entries:
○ SAP_FIN_GL_ACE_POSTING_RUN
○ SAP_FIN_GL_ACE_PROPOSAL_RUN
○ SAP_FIN_GL_POAC_MMPO2ACE_TRANS
4. Save your changes.
Related Information
Schedule Accruals Jobs
3.5.1.27.9 Analyze Accrual Postings
With this feature you can display an overview of accrual postings. You can filter the postings by various criteria
and navigate to a specific posting in related apps to investigate.
Technical Details
Type New

Finance PUBLIC 107
Related Information
Analyze Accrual Postings
3.5.1.27.10 Legacy Data Transfer for Accruals
This feature enables you to move existing accruals data to the SAP S/4HANA Accrual Engine from an outside
system or even from a manually maintained spreadsheet. You can choose to upload legacy data with a
template provided. Note that legacy data transfer and upload are applicable to manual accruals only.
Technical Details
Type New
Related Information
Legacy Data Transfer

Upload Legacy Data
3.5.1.27.11 Preprocessing Program for Archiving Accruals
You can execute the archiving preprocessing program for archiving accrual objects. This program sets an
accrual object to status To Be Archived based on conditions that are predefined in the system.

108 PUBLIC Finance
Technical Details
Type New
Scope Item J58 (Accounting and Financial Close), 2VB (Purchase Order
Accruals)
Additional Details
If the conditions are fulfilled, it also fills the Business Completion Date in the accrual object with the date when
the accrual object is set to status To Be Archived. In addition, a generic check on the accrual balance is done by
the Accrual Engine before you run the program. Make sure that the balance is zero before running this
program. In other words, an accrual object can be set to status To Be Archived only when all accruals are
finished.
Related Information
Archiving Accruals: Preprocessing Program
3.5.2 Asset Accounting
3.5.2.1 BAdI: Customer-Specific Change to Line Items in

Asset Document
When posting documents, you can use the new Business Add-In (BAdI) Customer-Specific Change to Line
Items in Asset Document (FAA_DOCLINES_CUSTOMER). This new BAdI replaces the previous BAdI Change of
Line Items in Asset Document (BADI_FIAA_DOCLINES).
Technical Details
Type Changed

Finance PUBLIC 109
Scope Item 1GB; 1GF; 1IH; BFH; J62; 33F; 33G
Application Component Asset Accounting (FI-AA)
Additional Details
With the interface methods of the new BAdI FAA_DOCLINES_CUSTOMER, you can achieve the following:
● You can change the document, for example, by adding user-defined characteristics to the line items.
● You can change the type of the document.
● You can derive the line item schema of the document.
● You can change the account determination for the line items to be posted.
None.
None.
If you have used the previous BAdI BADI_FIAA_DOCLINES until now, note the following: The system no longer
calls existing implementations of the BAdI BADI_FIAA_DOCLINES.
Instead, implement the interface of the BAdI FAA_DOCLINES_CUSTOMER.

110 PUBLIC Finance
The new BAdI Customer-Specific Change to Line Items in Asset Document (FAA_DOCLINES_CUSTOMER) is
available in Customizing for Asset Accounting in the following place:
Asset Accounting Transactions Enhancements Business Add-Ins for Enhancements Customer-

Specific Change to Line Items in Asset Document
For more information, see the system documentation for the BAdI and the interface methods.
3.5.2.2 Execute/Undo Year-End Closing
Until now a transaction was available which you could use to define the settings for company codes and for the
legacy data transfer. This transaction has been enhanced.
The tree structure with the company codes was enhanced with the corresponding ledgers and depreciation
areas. The following applies for a ledger:
You can close a fiscal year from an accounting view for a ledger or for a depreciation area.
You can also reopen the fiscal year last closed for one or more depreciation areas.
Technical Details
Type Changed

Finance PUBLIC 111
Additional Details
Tree Structure
The tree structure on the left part of the screen shows the following objects:
● Up to this point: Company codes that are relevant for Asset Accounting
● New: For each company code: Ledgers that are relevant for Asset Accounting. These are the representative
ledgers of an accounting principle. Extension ledgers, for example, are not displayed.
You can see the corresponding depreciation areas in the details for a ledger.
Execute Year-End Closing

You can execute the year-end closing by either using the SAP Easy Access menu, or by using the new activity in
Customizing for Asset Accounting. You can find more detailed information about this below under “Effects on
Customizing”.
Undo Year-End Closing

If you have closed a fiscal year by mistake and still have to make adjustments, you can reopen the fiscal year
last closed for one or more depreciation areas of a company code.
None.
None.
Transactions and programs

The previous transactions and programs as of release SAP S/4HANA 1909 are handled as follows:
Transaction/Program System Response
Transaction AJAB (program RAJABS00) - Year-End Closing Can still be called (for reasons of compatibility)
Asset Accounting
Transaction OAAR – Reset Year-End Closing Valuation Area Is redirected to transaction FAA_CMP - Make Company Code
Settings

112 PUBLIC Finance
Transaction/Program System Response
Reset Transaction OAAQ - Year-End Closing for Company Is redirected to transaction FAA_CMP - Make Company Code
Code Settings
SAP Easy Access
So far there have been several menu entries for executing and undoing the year-end closing in the SAP Easy
Access menu for Asset Accounting. These have been changed as follows:
Previous Menu Entries New Menu Entry
Accounting Financial Accounting Fixed Assets Accounting Financial Accounting Fixed Assets
Year-End Closing Year-End Closing
● Execute [Transaction AJAB] ● Execute/Undo [Transaction FAA_CMP]

● Undo
○ Company Code Complete [Transaction OAAQ]
○ Area [Transaction OAAR]
Fiori Launchpad
If you use the SAP Fiori Launchpad, please note the following changes in the role of accountant:
Replacement of Job Template "Year-End Closing Asset Accounting”
The job template Year-End Closing Asset Accounting is being replaced as follows:
Previous app/
Previous job template Is replaced by
From the Schedule Asset Accounting Jobs app: Execute/Undo Year-End Closing app
Job template Year-End Closing Asset Accounting
Replacement of the app "Undo Year-End Closing - For Asset Accounting” and renaming the tile
From now on, the previous tile Reset Year-End Closing - For Asset Accounting (from the application catalog
SAP_FIN_BCG_AA_PERIODIC_PC) contains the Make Company Code Settings app with the function Reopen
Last Fiscal Year. The tile has the title Year-End Closing Execute/Undo. The changes are as follows:
Previous content Is replaced by
App Reset Year-End Closing - For Asset Accounting Execute/Undo Year-End Closing app, function Reopen Last
Fiscal Year
[Based on SAP GUI transaction OAAQ]
[Based on SAP GUI transaction FAA_CMP]

Finance PUBLIC 113
Customizing until now

Until now, you made settings in the following places in Customizing for Asset Accounting:
● Preparations for Going Live Production Startup Define Settings for Company Code
● Asset Data Transfer Parameters for Data Transfer Define Transfer Date and Additional Parameters
Customizing changed
In Customizing for Asset Accounting, previously, there was the activity Reset Year-End Closing under
Preparations for Going Live Tools . This has been changed as follows:
Previous Customizing Activity New Customizing Activity
Asset Accounting (New) Preparations for Going Live Asset Accounting (New) Preparations for Going Live
Tools Tools
● Reset Year-End Closing [transactions OAAR and OAAQ] ● Execute/Undo Year-End Closing [transaction FAA_CMP]
For more information, see:
● The documentation for the Customizing activities in the system

● In the application documentation (product assistance) for Asset Accounting:
○ Year-End Closing
○ Legacy Data Transfer
3.5.2.3 Schedule Asset Accounting Jobs
If you use the SAP Fiori Launchpad for the fixed asset accountant, please note the following:
In the schedule Fixed Asset Accounting Jobs app, the following job templates have been removed:
Asset Transactions, Annual Financial Statements, Fill Master Data for Segment Reporting
Technical Details
Type Changed

114 PUBLIC Finance
Additional Details
The job templates are not necessary for the following reasons:
No job template Reason for the removal
Asset Transactions It is replaced by the Asset Transactions app.
Year End Closing Is replaced by the app Execute/Undo Year-End Closing
Fill Master Data for Segment Reporting Is no longer required
For more information, see:
● In the application documentation (product assistance) for Asset Accounting under Asset Transactions:
● Under Execute/Undo Year-End Closing [page 111]
3.5.2.4 "Journal Entry" Dimension in Asset Balances and

Asset History Sheet
In the Asset Balances app and the Asset History Sheet app, the Journal Entry dimension is now available. When
displaying a report for posted values, you can now display a list of asset transactions with the corresponding
journal entries for each asset.
Technical Details
Type Changed

Finance PUBLIC 115
Scope Item J62 (Asset Accounting)
Application Component FI-AA
Related Information
Asset Balances
Asset History Sheet
3.5.2.5 Asset Transactions and Depreciation Lists
The following feature is now available in the Asset Transactions app and the Depreciation Lists app: When
navigating away from these apps, for example jumping to another app, and returning to the same app, you
return at the same point from which you left. That is, when you navigate back into the app, you return to the
same data displayed.
For example, let’s say you had set filter criteria to define data to display in a table, then navigated away from the
app. When you navigate back into the app, you return to find the same table with the same filter criteria and the
same data displayed.
Technical Details
Type Changed
Scope Item J62 (Asset Accounting)
Application Component FI-AA
Related Information
Asset Transactions
Depreciation Lists

116 PUBLIC Finance
3.5.2.6 Asset Accounting Overview
For improved user experience and performance, the Asset Accounting Overview app now has filters for fiscal
year and fiscal year period.
The fiscal year and fiscal period filters only affect the data shown in the following cards:
● Asset Balances
● Asset Balances - Chart View
● Asset Depreciation Values
● Assets Under Construction
● Depreciation to Be Posted
● Origin of Assets
The remaining cards continue to show data for the current fiscal period.
Technical Details
Type Changed
Scope Item 2QY (SAP Fiori Analytical Apps for Asset Accounting in Fi
nance)
Application Component FI-FIO-AA
Related Information
Asset Accounting Overview
3.5.3 Revenue Accounting and Reporting
3.5.3.1 Optimized Contract Management
You can now use an optimized new version of the revenue accounting contract management.
A new version of revenue accounting contract management is introduced in parallel with the existing contract
management. To distinguish between the two different versions, the existing contract management is now
referred to as classic contract management.

Finance PUBLIC 117
The new contract management makes use of dedicated SAP S/4HANA capabilities such as FIORI. It also
focuses on performance optimization as well as other specific features such as day-based contract
modifications.
This requires some changes, yet the overall existing database table design and processes remain stable
between the optimized and classic contract management.
Technical Details
Type New
Functioal Localization Not applicable
Application Component FI-RA
You can activate the new contract management for new contracts based on a contract category in Customizing
under Revenue Accounting Revenue Accounting Contracts .
In the Customizing activity Define Contract Categories, you define the contract category.
In the Customizing activity Select Contract Management for Contract Categories, set the indicator Create
Contracts with CM Instead of CM Classic for all contract categories that are to use the optimized contract
management.
Related Information
Contract Management
3.5.4 Joint Venture Accounting
3.5.5 Joint Venture Accounting on Universal Journal
With this feature you can run Joint Venture Accounting (JVA) on the universal journal as the single source of
truth for processing and reporting. The cash call and the month-end processing transactions are re-developed,
spool output is refined, error reporting is improved, and drill down functionality is added. You can use the
funding reimbursement process for inter-venture liablities. The reporting tools are redesigned and available as
SAP Fiori apps.

118 PUBLIC Finance
Technical Details
Type New
Scope Item 3F7
Application Component CA-JVA-JVA
The business function JVA on ACDOCA must be activated if you want to use Joint Venture Accounting on
universal journal.
The G/L splitter needs to be customized if you want to use Joint Venture Accounting on universal journal.
Related Information
Joint Venture Accounting (JVA)
3.5.6 Intercompany Matching and Reconciliation
The Intercompany Matching and Reconciliation (ICR) is introduced to speed up your intercompany
reconciliation process from company close to corporate close. As a built-in solution in SAP S/4HANA, it
matches transactions without any ETL (extract, transform, load) processes and reconciles your financial data
in real time. By defining flexible matching and reconciliation rules, you can achieve high automation and
continuous reconciliation. In addition, its in-app communication and workflow features eliminate the latencies
very often seen in dealing with intercompany discrepancies, and at the same time, improves visibility and
transparency of your reconciliation process.

Finance PUBLIC 119
Technical Details
Type New
Scope Item 40Y (Intercompany Reconciliation Process)
Application Component FIN-CS-ICR
Additional Details
The solution comes with the following key features:
● Flexible matching and reconciliation rule definition

● High visibility on your reconciliation process
● User-friendly Fiori apps to manage your matching assignments on aggregation or line item level
● In-app communication and workflow
● Possibility to enable automatic discrepancy adjustment
● Real-time reconciliation
● High performance on matching and reconciliation
● Supports user-defined organizational dimensions for matching and reconciliation
This is a video showing how to use the ICR solution, from running document matching, checking matching
results, making and approving adjustment postings, to viewing reconciliation reports and drilling through to
their matching items and original documents (English only): Video Link.
You need to create business roles in your front-end system by referencing the standard role General Ledger
Accountant - Intercompany (SAP_BR_RECON_ACCOUNTANT) that contains all the business catalogs for
Intercompany Matching and Reconciliation. Then assign the created business roles to the relevant users
according to their job responsibilities. Additionally, you need to set up the necessary authorizations for users in
the back-end systems, for example, by using the transaction code PFCG.
You can make the necessary customizing settings in Customizing for Intercompany Matching and
Reconciliation under SAP S/4HANA for Group Reporting or under Financial Accounting General Ledger
Accounting Periodic Processing Check/Count .

120 PUBLIC Finance
Product Assistance Links
The Intercompany Matching and Reconciliation product documentation is located in both of the following
structures at https://help.sap.com//s4hana_op_1909 with the direct link Intercompany Matching and
Reconciliation (New):
● Finance Accounting and Financial Close General Ledger Accounting (FI-GL) Periodic Processing
Closing Operations
● Finance Accounting and Financial Close Group Reporting Consolidation
3.5.7 Group Reporting
3.5.7.1 Consolidation Reporting Logic
The consolidation reporting logic is renovated to support both legal and management consolidation while
providing high flexibility in re-organizations. It combines two different views of consolidated data: Group
consolidation view and hierarchy consolidation view.
Technical Details
Type New
Scope Item 1SG (Group Reporting - Financial Consolidation)
Application Component FIN-CS
Additional Details
In the Group Consolidation View, the consolidation group is a flat list of the assigned consolidation units with
group-dependent attributes such as consolidation method, acquisition date, and divestiture date.
The Hierarchy Consolidation View is based on the hierarchies of consolidation units, profit centers, and
segments that are maintained in the Manage Global Accounting Hierarchies app.
Both views retrieve the same set of consolidated data but based on different dimensions and with a specific
reporting logic described below. When generating a report for consolidated data, by specifying both
consolidation group and any relevant hierarchies, you can get a combined view.

Finance PUBLIC 121
With the new reporting logic introduced, two new analytical report apps are made available: Group Data
Analysis (New) and Group Data Analysis - With Reporting Rules (New). You use these reports to display a group
consolidation view, a hierarchy consolidation view, or a combined view by specifying the corresponding values
in the report Prompts.
In addition, the Display Group Journal Entries - With Reporting Logic app is also introduced to provide drill-
through capability from the above reports to group journal entries at line item level.
For more information about report prompts and the derivation logic for consolidation groups, hierarchy
members, and elimination members in the respective views, see Reporting Logic (New).
The following apps can be used using the new group reporting logic:
● Manage Consolidation Group Structure - Group View

● Manage Consolidation Group Structure - Unit View
● Import Consolidation Master Data for FS items, group structure, and consolidation units.
● Group Data Analysis
● Group Data Analysis - With Reporting Rules
● Display Group Journal Entries - With Reporting Logic
Preparation for Consolidation Group Changes

With the new reporting logic, the Preparation for Consolidation Group Changes (PCC) task in the Consolidation
Monitor is enhanced to increase traceability and eliminate data replication.
Additional Details:
The PCC postings (at posting levels 02, 12, and 22) are adjusted as follows:
● Revoke data for the periods when the consolidation unit is not yet first consolidated (record type A)
● Revoke data for the periods when the consolidation unit is already divested (record type D)
● Revoke data when the consolidation unit is consolidated using the equity consolidation method (record
type E)
● Other existing adjustments remain posted with record type 0.
In addition, the following new scenarios are supported:
● First consolidation at end of period

● Divestiture at beginning of period
With this change, the Integration of Data into Consolidation Group task is no longer needed and has been
removed from the Consolidation Monitor.
In addition to the PCC enhancements, the Customizing activity Define Reclassification Methods now combines
Accounting Technique and Start/End Period settings to restrict the trigger data to the correct period, for
example, first consolidation at end of period or divestiture at beginning of period.
 Note
The changes described above are only applicable if you have an initial release SAP S/4HANA 1909. If you
have an initial release earlier than 1909, you are not affected unless you have contacted SAP to activate the
new reporting logic.

122 PUBLIC Finance
Related Information
Group Data Analysis (New)

Group Data Analysis - With Reporting Rules (New)
Group Data Analysis - With Reporting Rules (New)
Reporting Logic (New)
Import Consolidation Master Data (New)
Manage Consolidation Group Structure - Group View (New)
Manage Consolidation Group Structure - Unit View (New)
3.5.7.2 Group Structure Definition
The Manage Consolidation Group Structure apps are introduced for you to assign consolidation units to
consolidation groups and make consolidation-related settings for these assignments, such as the period of the
first consolidation, the period of the divestiture, and the consolidation method.
Technical Details
Type New
Additional Details
With the new apps, you maintain consolidation groups as plain lists of consolidation units with group-
dependent attributes. This facilitates the data analysis from the group consolidation view as described in the
help documentation Reporting Logic (New).
 Note
The new group structure maintenance apps are only applicable if you have an initial release SAP S/4HANA
1909. If you are upgrading from an earlier release, use the Consolidation Group Hierarchy - Display &
Change and Accounting Method Assignment - Display & Change apps instead or contact SAP to activate the
new reporting logic.

Finance PUBLIC 123
Related Information
Manage Consolidation Group Structure - Group View (New)

Manage Consolidation Group Structure - Unit View (New)
3.5.7.3 From Year for New Group Reporting Logic
The From Year for New Group Report Logic is now enabled in the Check Global System Settings Customizing
activity.
Technical Details
Type New
Additional Details
The From Year for New Group Reporting Logic is the starting year for using the new group reporting logic in SAP
S/4HANA. The new group reporting logic includes a set of features (for example, consolidation group structure
manager, group view, hierarchy views, and enhanced group dependent postings) to support legal and
management consolidation while providing high flexibility in reorganizations. The new group reporting logic is
activated and the starting year is set to 1001 for customers with an initial release of SAP S/4HANA 1909 or
higher.
 Note
If you have an initial release earlier than SAP S/4HANA 1909, contact SAP to activate the new reporting
logic. Note that once activated, it is not possible to deactivate the new group reporting logic.
Related Information
Reporting Logic (New)

124 PUBLIC Finance
3.5.7.4 Import Consolidation Master Data
The Import Consolidation Master Data app allows you to import consolidation-related master data entries for
master data types, such as consolidation group structure, financial statement items, and consolidation units
into the consolidation system.
Technical Details
Type New
Additional Details
With this new app, you can download a template file or a file with existing master data, enter or change the
master data, and upload the completed file back to the app. You can then import the validated master data into
the database.
To import other master data types, such as account number, chart of accounts, cost center, functional area,
profit center, segment for segmental reporting, and transaction type, you should continue using the Import
Master Data for Consolidation Fields app.
 Note
The consolidation group structure import function is only available if you have the New Group Reporting
Logic activated in the Check Global System Settings Customizing activity. This logic is activated by default if
you have an initial release SAP S/4HANA 1909 or higher. The import function for all other master data
types is applicable to all customers. Contact SAP to activate the new reporting logic.
Related Information
Import Consolidation Master Data (New)

Finance PUBLIC 125
3.5.7.5 Master Data Hierarchies
You can maintain hierarchies for the relevant master data types so that you can customize your report layout or
use the hierarchies in the selection definition and the rule definition. The following additional master data types
are now enabled:
● Consolidation posting level

● Consolidation document type
● Consolidation subitem
Technical Details
Type New
Related Information
Define Hierarchies
3.5.7.6 Financial Statement Item Maintenance
The Define FS Items app allows you to display and maintain financial statement (FS) items. To upload,
download, and import FS items into the system, use the Import Consolidation Master Data app. With this
release, new FS item attributes are also made available.
Technical Details
Type New

126 PUBLIC Finance
Additional Details
After creating or updating any FS items, you may need to perform the following activities:
● Include the new FS items in any relevant FS item hierarchies or reporting item hierarchies using the
Manage Global Accounting Hierarchies app. See the SAP help topic Define Hierarchies for details.
● Map the new FS items with general ledger accounts using the Map FS Items with G/L Accounts app.
● Update all FS item-related configuration settings as necessary, such as:
○ Selected FS items for automatic posting (annual net income and deferred taxes), currency translation
methods, and reclassification methods in the respective Customizing activities
○ FS items to be carried forward or not, validation rules, selections, and reporting rules using the
respective app on the SAP Fiori launchpad
You can also assign additional financial statement (FS) item attributes. In addition to the existing selection
attributes, elimination and currency translation, SAP delivers the following new selection attributes:
● FS Item Role
● Scope
● Data Collection
● Cash Flow
● Other Selection Attribute
A FS item selection attribute is a classification that you assign to FS items so that all FS items that share the
same attribute value can be selected in order to be treated in the same way, for example, in consolidation
tasks.
SAP also delivers the following new target attributes:
● Elimination Target
● Non-Controlling Target
● Planning Target
FS item target attributes are designed to derive an FS item based on another FS item for specific purposes.
This may be used, for example, for automatic postings in reclassification rules. You assign target attributes for
FS items and then specify the target attributes in the reclassification rules.
Related Information
FS Item Attributes
Define Hierarchies
Map FS Items with G/L Accounts

Finance PUBLIC 127
3.5.7.7 Currency Translation Settings
With this release, a new app and multiple Customizing activities are made available for customizing currency
translation settings and configuration.
Technical Details
Type New
Additional Details
The new Currency Exchange Rates Fiori app replaces the Maintain Exchange Rates Web GUI app with a modern
look and feel. It enables you to maintain exchange rates for combinations of exchange rate type, source and
target currency, and effective period.
3.5.7.8 Activity-Based Consolidation of Investments
Consolidation of investments (C/I) enables you to eliminate investment relationships that exist between
consolidation units in a consolidation group.
Technical Details
Type New

128 PUBLIC Finance
Additional Details
A parent company's investments are eliminated against the stockholders' equity of a subsidiary. During the
time span of this investment relationship, different activities can occur that require elimination and
adjustments in consolidation. The following activities are supported by the consolidation of investments:
● First consolidation
● Subsequent consolidation
● Step acquisition
● Capital increase and decrease
● Partial and total divestiture
With this release, new Customizing activities for making settings related to C/I are made available:
● Node: Consolidation of Investments

● Node: Preparation of Consolidation Group Changes
Related Information
Consolidation of Investments (Activity-Based)

Consolidation of Investments
Consolidation of Investments (Rule-Based)
3.5.7.9 Validation Settings
Selections, validation rules, and methods can be exported between systems through a spreadsheet.
Technical Details
Type Changed

Finance PUBLIC 129
Additional Details
All validation settings (selections, rules, and methods) can now be imported/exported by using the Import/
Export Validation Settings app. They can all be activated en masse by using Schedule Mass Activation Jobs -
Rules, Methods, and Selections.
In addition, the following changes are made to the validation-related apps:
● Entering leading zeroes is no longer needed for the relevant fields when defining validation rules using the
Like and Not Like operators. For example, you can now enter 1* to search for all values starting with 1,
alphanumeric or purely numeric. In prior releases, you need to add all necessary leading zeroes before your
keyword followed by a wildcard (*) to include purely numeric values. You may need to revisit and update
the rules that were defined with leading zeroes in prior releases.
● Simulation Run is now supported when you run validation tasks directly through the Manage Data
Validation Tasks apps. Previously, it was only possible by running tasks in Data Monitor or Consolidation
Monitor with the Test with Original List option
Related Information
Import/Export Validation Settings
3.5.7.10 Define Selections
In the prior release, selections were maintained using the Define Selections customizing activity. Starting from
this release, you can define selections using the Define Selections Fiori app with enhanced functionalities and
more user-friendly interfaces. All selections you defined in prior releases have been migrated to this app during
your system upgrade. The customizing activity is therefore removed.
Technical Details
Type Changed

130 PUBLIC Finance
Additional Details
A selection groups a range of consolidation master data, typically the financial statement (FS) items, by using
various filter criteria. You can use value ranges, attributes, or hierarchy nodes for individual master data to
define selections.
The defined selections can then be reused in consolidation-related settings, such as validation rules,
reclassification methods, currency translation (CT) methods, and breakdown categories. The app also provides
the feature to check the where-used list for each selection.
Related Information
Define Selections
3.5.7.11 Schedule Jobs for Consolidation Tasks
The job scheduling app is introduced to support various data monitor and consolidation monitor tasks .
Technical Details
Type New
Additional Details
You can schedule an immediate job or recurring jobs for the following tasks, which are also available in Data
Monitor or Consolidation Monitor:

Finance PUBLIC 131
● Balance carryforward
● Calculation of net income
● Currency translation
● Preparation for consolidation group changes
● Reclassification
● Validation of universal journals
● Validation of reported data
● Validation of standardized data
● Validation of consolidated data
Related Information
Schedule Jobs for Consolidation Tasks
3.5.7.12 Task Logs
Three validation task categories are now supported in the Task Logs app:
● Reported Data Validation

● Standardized Data Validation
● Consolidated Data Validation
By choosing each validation task log, you navigate to the validation result page, which contains the overall
validation result, calculated left-handed and right-handed values based on each relevant validation rule,
tolerance, difference, and drill-down capabilities to the original accounting documents or group journal entries.
Technical Details
Type Changed

132 PUBLIC Finance
Related Information
Task Logs
3.5.7.13 CDS Views for Group Reporting
The following CDS (Core Data Services) views for Group Reporting have now been released. This CDS view
provides access to the consolidated data for both statutory and management consolidation reporting.
● I_MatrixConsolidationReportC (Group Data Analysis Cube)

● I_MatrixConsolidationRptEnhcdC (Rule-Based Group Data Analysis Cube)
Technical Details
Type New
Additional Details
With the Group Data Analysis Cube CDS view, you can create group reports for consolidation groups, such as
consolidated balance sheets and consolidated P&L statements based on organizational units such as profit
centers, segments, and companies, with the data provided by this CDS view.
With the Rule-Based Group Data Analysis Cube CDS view, you can create rule-based group reports for
consolidation groups, such as cash flow statements based on organizational units such as profit centers,
segments, and companies, with the data provided by this CDS view.
You can look at all released CDS views and their fields by using the View Browser app. You can design your own
queries based on these released CDS views by using the Custom Analytical Queries app.
Related Information
Group Data Analysis Cube

Rule-Based Group Data Analysis Cube

Finance PUBLIC 133
3.5.7.14 APIs for Group Reporting
The Transaction Data for Group Reporting service enables you to read transaction data in SAP S/4HANA
Finance for group reporting. You can open this service to build your own application using the transaction data
in group reporting.
The Master Data for Group Reporting service enables you to read SAP S/4HANA Finance for group reporting
master data, the master data attributes, and hierarchy definitions through an API call. You can open this
service to build your own application using the group reporting master data.
Technical Details
Type New
Scope Item 2U6 (Group Reporting - Data from External Systems)
See also
For more information about APIs for SAP S/4HANA, see the SAP API Business Hub https://api.sap.com/ .
3.5.8 Central Finance
3.5.8.1 Replication of Material Cost Estimates
This feature enables you to replicate material cost estimates from source system(s) to the Central Finance
system. For a mixed costing, the material cost estimates are replicated together with the relevant procurement
alternatives.

134 PUBLIC Finance
Technical Details
Type New
Application Component FI-CF (Central Finance)
You need to make settings for cost estimate replication in the Customizing of Central Finance (transaction:
CFINIMG) under Central Finance: Target System Settings Replication Settings for Cost Estimates Define
Rule for Cost Estimate Replication .
Related Information
Material Cost Estimates Replication
3.5.8.2 Replication of Activity Rates
This feature enables you to replicate activity rates from source system(s) to the Central Finance system. If a
primary cost component split exists for a certain activity rate, the activity rate is replicated together with the
cost component split data.
Technical Details
Type New

Finance PUBLIC 135
Related Information
Activity Rates Replication
3.5.8.3 Third-Party System Interface: Replication of

Clearing Information
This feature enables you to transfer clearing information via the third-party system interface of Central
Finance. Together with the payments, also the clearing information is transferred. A new staging table on the
SAP LT Replication Server is added to include the clearing information and the connection between payments
and open invoice items. In the Central Finance system, a new clearing entry is posted.
Technical Details
Type New
Additional Details
The following processes are supported for replicating clearing information via the third-party system interface:
● Complete clearing of one invoice with one payment

● Clearing of one invoice by down payment
● Partial clearing of one invoice by partial payment
● Clearing several invoices by payment
● Replicating and updating clearing information for residual items
● Clearing by credit memo
● Clearing of several invoices by one payment
● Update of withholding tax from original invoice

136 PUBLIC Finance
● Reverse payment and reset clearing
In the third-party system interface the clearing information is stored in the CLRITM clearing item table and the
CLEARING_DATA and INVOICE_REFERENCE fields. The clearing function is only triggered when both the
CLRITM clearing item table and the CLEARING_DATA field on header level are filled. For partial payments, the
INVOICE_REFERENCE and INVOICE_REFERENCE_ITEM fields must be filled with the journal entry number and
the line item number of the invoice for which partial payments were made. The fields are available on the
CREDITM structure for supplier invoices and the DEBITM structure for customer invoices or payments.
The graphic below shows the architecture of the third-party system interface including the staging tables
relevant for clearing:
Related Information
Replicating Clearing Information Using the Third-Party System Interface

Installing Financial Data Structures on SAP LT Replication Server
3.5.8.4 Third-Party System Interface: Replication of CO-PA

Characteristics
In SAP S/4HANA you perform Profitability Analysis (CO-PA) in the Universal Journal using criteria based on
which you analyze your operating results and perform sales and profit planning. A combination of values for
these criteria in an Operating Concern is called a profitability segment. Examples for such criteria can be
product, billing type (such as invoice), customer, sales organization.
This feature enables you to transfer such criteria via the third-party system interface in Central Finance as
name-value pairs.

Finance PUBLIC 137
Technical Details
Type New
Additional Details
Via the third-party system interface of Central Finance, you can transfer journal entries into the Central Finance
system, such as invoices or credit memos which contain data representing a profitability segment and are
called Characteristics in SAP S/4HANA.
When such a journal entry is posted into the Central Finance system, a profitability segment is generated
(PAOBJNR in ACDOCA table). The profitability segment number (PAOBJNR) as well as values for all relevant
characteristics are written into the ACDOCA table.
The replication of CO-PA data is integrated into existing message handling with SAP AIF. The values for the CO-
PA characteristics are mapped according the defined values in the key and value mapping.
The third-party system interface has been enhanced with an additional structure and fields for the profitability
segment data. It is added as a new staging table on the SAP LT Replication Server as you can see in the graphic
below which shows the architecture of the third-party system interface in Central Finance.

138 PUBLIC Finance
Related Information
Replicating CO-PA Characteristics Using the Third-Party System Interface

Profitability Analysis (CO-PA)
Universal Journal
Introduction to Data Mapping
3.5.8.5 Third-Party System Interface: Group Currency
In SAP S/4HANA journal entries can be posted in group currency which enables reporting in group currency.
With this feature journal entries containing group currency information and amounts in group currency can be
replicated via the third-party system interface of Central Finance.
Technical Details
Type New
Additional Details
In the third-party system interface the staging tables and fields containing the financial accounting data have
been enhanced to enable the replication of group currency information and amounts. The SAP note referenced
in Installing Financial Data Structures on SAP LT Replication Server has an excel list attached to which you can
refer for the structure and fields relating to the group currency.
You have defined the group currency for the respective ledger in Customizing of Financial Accounting under
Financial Accounting Global Settings Ledgers Ledger Define Settings for Ledgers and Currency
Types .

Finance PUBLIC 139
Related Information
Currencies Managed in Parallel in the Universal Journal

3.5.8.6 Initial Load Optimizations
The feature enables you to benefit from the following improvements to the initial load:
● Balance load - take profit center information or trading partner information into account for Classic G/L
● Take document splitting information into account
● Different fiscal year variant for non-leading ledger
Technical Details
Type Changed
Application Component FI-CF
Additional Details
● Balance load - use profit center ledger or consolidation ledger (trading partner information) for
Classic G/L
If your source system operates on classic G/L you can define an alternative ledger from which balances are
read during the extraction step of the initial load instead of ledger GLT0. For each company code and range
of accounts you can specify either ledger 8A for profit center information (table GLPCT) or ledger 09 for
trading partner information (table GLT3). As these ledgers are not compatible, you can choose only one.
You make these settings in the IMG activity Specify Alternative Ledger for Balance Load for Classic G/L
in your source system.
● Take document splitting information into account
Document splitting information is now replicated in the initial load of documents and open items, in
addition to being replicated as part of ongoing replication.
● Different fiscal year variant for non-leading ledger
If you want to replicate data to your Central Finance system and the leading ledger has a different fiscal
year variant than the non-leading ledger, it is necessary to ensure that the initial load can load the balances
into the correct periods. To enable this, you can install two SAP Notes (2764810 and 2764851 ) into

140 PUBLIC Finance
your source system. These notes enable the system to align the different fiscal year variants of the leading
and non-leading ledgers, ensuring all relevant data is replicated and assigned to the correct periods in the
Central Finance system.
The only restriction is that the periods of both ledgers must match, for example, they must both start on
the same day of the month.
3.5.8.7 Advanced Compliance Reporting: Country/Region-

Specific Reports
With this feature you can use a number of country/region-specific reports in advanced compliance reporting
that are supported for Central Finance.
Technical Details
Type New
Application Component FI-CF
Additional Details
For a complete list of the supported reports, see the documentation linked below.
Related Information
Advanced Compliance Reporting: Country/Region-Specific Reports Supported in Central Finance
3.5.8.8 Replicating Project Data from SAP S/4HANA Cloud
This feature enables you to transfer in real time project master data, such as project definitions and WBS
elements, as well as changes to those master data from a SAP S/4HANA Cloud source system to the Central
Finance (SAP S/4HANA on-premise) system in a Central Finance scenario. FI documents (journal entries) and

Finance PUBLIC 141
CO documents with the account assignment to a WBS element are also replicated to the Central Finance
system, where you can perform a centralized project reporting on costs and revenues posted to WBS elements.
Technical Details
Type New
Scope Item 3W1, 1W4, 1NT in SAP S/4HANA Cloud
Additional Details
You are using a Central Finance scenario, where you are creating and editing projects in a SAP S/4HANA Cloud
source system and want to do the project reporting in the Central Finance system.
The WBS elements are maintained as part of a project in your source system. To allow the reporting in the
Central Finance system, the project definition and WBS elements for projects created in a source system are
replicated in real time to the Central Finance system. Also changes to project definitions or WBS elements are
replicated.
For the replication of project data SOAP and the Cloud Connector is used.
Constraints
● Reposting projects with user changes in SAP AIF is not supported.

● You edit or change the projects in the SAP S/4HANA Cloud source system. You cannot edit or change them
in the Central Finance system.
● Once a project is released in the source system and thus replicated to the Central Finance system, you
cannot delete WBS elements anymore.
● Once the projects are replicated to the Central Finance system, the IDs can no longer be changed, neither
in the SAP S/4HANA Cloud source system, nor in the Central Finance system.
● The WBS project structure only is replicated. Networks are not replicated.

142 PUBLIC Finance
After you have set up the integration scenario 3W1 in the SAP S/4HANA Cloud source system and configured
the related Application Link Enabling (ALE) settings in the Central Finance (SAP S/4HANA on-premise)
system, you can use this feature.
Related Information
● Central Finance
● Replicating Project Data from SAP S/4HANA Cloud to Central Finance
3.5.8.9 Central Finance Operations Monitor with Focused

Run
In a Central Finance scenario in a typical set-up, multiple source systems are connected to one SAP System
Landscape Transformation Replication Server (SAP SLT Replication Server) which in turn is connected to one
Central Finance system. In this scenario when operating Central Finance, you can monitor the replication
processes in SAP SLT, that is, do the system monitoring by using SAP SLT.
This feature enables you to use Focused Run (F-Run) for performing the SLT monitoring.
Technical Details
Type New
Additional Details
Focused Run addresses customers and partners with advanced needs in monitoring larger system landscapes.
F-Run has a dashboard-based visualization, for example with systems.
For more details on using F-Run to monitor SAP SLT replications, see Focused Run - SAP Landscape
Transformation Replication Server (SLT) .

Finance PUBLIC 143
3.5.9 Advanced Compliance Reporting
3.5.9.1 Advanced Compliance Reporting
Technical Details
Type Changed
Scope Item 1J2 (Advance Compliance Reporting)
Application Component Run Compliance Reports app: FI-LOC-SRF-RUN
Define Compliance Reports app: FI-LOC-SRF-DEF
Additional Details
The following features are available for Advanced Compliance Reports app:
● Due Date Adjustments for Reporting Periods

If the reporting period due date falls on a non-working day, you can adjust the due date based on the laws
defined by your country. You can select the relevant factory calendar, and then choose one of the below
options, based on your legal requirements:
○ Next Working Day
○ Previous Working Day
○ Nearest Working Day (Prepone – Only If Equidistant)
○ Nearest Working Day (Postpone - Only if Equidistant)
● Report Submission at Different Organizational Unit Levels
For your business operations, if required, you can submit compliance reports at different organizational
units levels. In advanced compliance reporting, you can achieve this by configuring optional organizational
units for your report category.
Related Information
Advanced Compliance Reporting

144 PUBLIC Finance
3.6 Treasury Management
3.6.1 Cash and Liquidity Management
3.6.1.1 Migrate House Bank Accounts
You can now use the Start and Monitor Data Migration activity to migrate house bank accounts.
Technical Details
Type Changed
Application Component FIN-FSCM-CLM-BAM
Additional Details
You can find the Customizing activity Start and Monitor Data Migration in Customizing under Conversion to
SAP S/4HANA Data Migration .
For more information about how to migrate house bank accounts, see the Implementation Guide Migration of
House Bank Accounts. You can find it in Customizing under Conversion to SAP S/4HANA Data Migration
Documentation of Data Migration .
3.6.1.2 Bank Relationship Overview
With this app, you can access key information about bank relationship management and gain insights into
current trends. The app provides a central source of information for recent payments, bank profiles, bank fees,
and bank account statuses.

Finance PUBLIC 145
Technical Details
Type New
Scope Item J77 (Advanced Bank Account Management)
Related Information
Bank Relationship Overview
3.6.1.3 Manage Global Accounting Hierarchies - For Bank

Accounts
With this app, you can create and edit bank account group hierarchies and their validity timeframes. You can
also quickly create hierarchies based on existing hierarchies in case of structure changes or changing reporting
needs. Additionally, you can easily expand hierarchies by adding levels or importing nodes from other
hierarchies.
Technical Details
Type New
Additional Details
Starting from this release, you use the Manage Global Accounting Hierarchies - For Bank Accounts app to define
bank account group hierarchies. Bank account groups that are defined in the Manage Bank Accounts - Bank

146 PUBLIC Finance
Hierarchy View app can only be displayed. For more information on how to managing the bank account group
hierarchies, see Managing Bank Account Group Hierarchies.
Consequently, in the Cash Flow Analyzer app, you can no longer use the old bank account groups as the display
hierarchy. Instead, you can choose the new bank account group hierarchies to display the report. For more
information, see Cash Flow Analyzer.
If you have defined bank account groups in the Manage Bank Accounts - Bank Hierarchy View app in earlier
releases, you can migrate the bank account groups or nodes of the bank account groups to this app by using
the import function. For more information, see Managing Bank Account Group Hierarchies.
Related Information
Managing Bank Account Group Hierarchies

Manage Global Accounting Hierarchies - For Bank Accounts
3.6.1.4 Review Bank Accounts
Due to design changes, specifying a reviewer for bank account reviews or designating the bank account contact
persons as reviewers is no longer supported. After a review is initiated, all the users that have the authorization
to change the relevant bank accounts receive the review requests and are able to perform the review. In
addition to the notification from the SAP Fiori launchpad, reviewers also receive an email notification.
Technical Details
Type Changed

Finance PUBLIC 147
With this change, only users who are assigned with the authorization activity 31 Confirm of authorization object
F_CLM_BAM are able to receive and process bank account review requests. Please assign proper authorization
to reviewers.
Related Information
Reviewing Bank Accounts
3.6.1.5 CDS View for Cash and Liquidity Management
With this release, a CDS (Core Data Services) view has been released. The view makes it possible to read
information about banks, house banks, bank accounts, and house bank accounts.
Technical Details
Type New
Scope Item BFA (Basic Bank Account Management), J77 (Advanced

Bank Account Management)
Additional Details
The CDS view name is I_HouseBankAccountLinkage (House Bank Account Linkage).
You can look at all released CDS views and their fields in detail by using the View Browser app.
 Note
You need to have the Analytics Specialist role (SAP_BR_ANALYTICS_SPECIALIST) assigned to you.

148 PUBLIC Finance
s4hana_op_1909.000 under Cross Components The Virtual Data Model in SAP S/4HANA Cloud CDS
Views CDS Views for Finance CDS Views for Treasury Management .
Related Information
View Browser
3.6.1.6 Situation Handling for the Dual Control Mode
If you use the dual control mode to manage bank accounts, you can now configure a situation type to inform a
specific group of users about when bank account revisions are pending activation for a certain number of days.
Technical Details
Type New
To use this feature, configure the settings that are described in Situation Template: Bank Account Revisions to
Be Activated.
3.6.1.7 Situation Handling for House Bank Account Check
You can now configure a situation type to inform a specific group of users to check the house bank account
setting in payment configuration after the relevant bank account is closed.

Finance PUBLIC 149
Technical Details
Type New
Before using this situation template, you must first define the notification recipients. You can also customize
the template by modifying the default settings.
After receiving the notification, configuration experts can then check the relevant house bank account in the
Set Up Bank Determination for Payment Transactions Customizing activity and decide whether to keep or
remove the setting for this house bank account.
You can find this Customizing activity in Customizing under Financial Accounting (New) Accounts
Receivable and Accounts Payable Business Transactions Outgoing Payments Automatic Outgoing
Payments Payment Method/Bank Selection for Payment Program .
Related Information
Situation Template: Check House Bank Account in Payment Configuration
3.6.1.8 Manage Global Accounting Hierarchies - For

Liquidity Items
You can now use the Manage Global Accounting Hierarchies - For Liquidity Items app to define and manage
liquidity item hierarchies for use in the Cash Flow Analyzer app as well as the Liquidity Planning feature on SAP
Analytics Cloud.

150 PUBLIC Finance
Technical Details
Type New
Scope Item J78 (Advanced Cash Operations)
Application Component FIN-FSCM-CLM-COP
If you have defined liquidity item hierarchies in the Define Liquidity Item Hierarchies Customizing activity in
earlier releases, please migrate the legacy liquidity item hierarchies to the successor app Manage Global
Accounting Hierarchies - For Liquidity Items by using the Import Hierarchy function. For more information about
how to migrate legacy hierarchies, see Managing Liquidity Item Hierarchies
The Liquidity Planning feature based on SAP Analysis for Microsoft Office still uses the liquidity item hierarchies
that are defined in the transaction M_LQH.
The Customizing activity Define Liquidity Item Hierarchies has been removed. You can still access the program
using the M_LQH transaction code.
Related Information
Managing Liquidity Item Hierarchies

Manage Global Accounting Hierarchies - For Liquidity Items
3.6.1.9 Liquidity Planning with SAP Analytics Cloud
You can plan your future liquidity using the liquidity planning feature of SAP Analytics Cloud. After setting up
the connection between SAP S/4HANA and SAP Analytics Cloud, you can develop liquidity plans in SAP
Analytics Cloud based on the integrated data sources from SAP S/4HANA.

Finance PUBLIC 151
Technical Details
Type New
Scope Item 3L5 (Liquidity Planning)
For more information about how to set up the feature, see the documents at https://rapid.sap.com/bp/
scopeitems/3L5 and https://rapid.sap.com/bp/scopeitems/3Y0 .
Find general information about SAP Analytics Cloud, see https://www.sapanalytics.cloud/product .
Related Information
Liquidity Planning with SAP Analytics Cloud
3.6.1.10 House Bank Account Determination for Cash Pools
For each bank account, you can now use the Use in Cash Pooling checkbox in the Manage Bank Accounts app to
set a house bank account as the one to be used by cash pooling payment requests generated by the Manage
Cash Concentration app.
Technical Details
Type Changed
Scope Item BFB (Basic Cash Operations), J78 (Advanced Cash Opera
tions)

152 PUBLIC Finance
Additional Details
For each bank account, you must select one of the linked house bank accounts and set the Use in Cash Pooling
checkbox for it. Otherwise, the system cannot identify the house bank account to use for generating cash
pooling payment requests.
You can find the Use in Cash Pooling checkbox on the House Bank Account Connectivity tab of the Manage Bank
Accounts app.
3.6.1.11 Planning Level Setting for Intraday Memo Record
Starting from this release, you must specify a planning level for each bank account that is set for intraday bank
statements in the Manage Bank Accounts app. Otherwise, the system cannot generate intraday memo records
from intraday bank statements.
Technical Details
Technical Details
Type New
Additional Details
You make the specification in the Planning Level (Memo Record) field. You can find the field under the Bank
Statement Data section on the Bank Relationship tab.
You must specify this setting for bank accounts that have intraday bank statements. Otherwise, the system
cannot automatically generate intraday memo records for intraday bank statements that you import using the

Finance PUBLIC 153
Manage Incoming Payment Files app. As a result, the cash flows for intraday bank statements cannot be
identified properly and displayed in the Cash Flow Analyzer app and the Reconcile Cash Flows - Intraday Memo
Records app.
Related Information
Manage Incoming Payment Files

Manage Bank Accounts
Cash Flow Analyzer
Reconcile Cash Flows - Intraday Memo Records
3.6.1.12 Make Bank Transfers
With this app, you can either create and clear the payment request in one single action, or create, release, and
clear the payment request in separate steps. This gives you flexibility in managing bank transfers between bank
accounts of your company.
Technical Details
Type Changed
Additional Details
Previously, the payment requests are automatically cleared once they are generated. Now, depending on the
process in your company, you can do either of the following:
● Create, release, and clear payment requests in separate steps

You can either carry out all the actions yourself or ask different users to take responsibilities for certain
steps.
● Create, release, and clear payment requests in one single action
To do so, when creating a bank transfer, you select the Release and Pay checkbox before you save it. This
way, the system automatically releases the payment request and makes the payment. If the payment run is
successful, the status of the payment request is changed to Cleared.

154 PUBLIC Finance
Related Information
Make Bank Transfers
3.6.1.13 Define Bank Transfer Templates
With this app, you can define templates for bank transfers between bank accounts of your company that are
likely to occur in a recurring pattern. The templates help you save time and eliminate errors when creating
frequent bank transfers.
Technical Details
Type New
Related Information
Define Bank Transfer Templates

Make Bank Transfers - Create with Templates
3.6.1.14 Make Bank Transfers - Create with Templates
With this app, you can create one or more bank transfers in a batch based on the defined templates. The app
helps you speed up your routine work for regular bank transfers between bank accounts of your company.

Finance PUBLIC 155
Technical Details
Type New
Before you use this app, you must first define templates in the Define Bank Transfer Templates app.
In addition, you need to have configured the required settings for making bank transfers. For more information,
see the “Prerequisites” of the Make Bank Transfers app.
Related Information
Make Bank Transfers

Make Bank Transfers - Create with Templates
Define Bank Transfer Templates
3.6.1.15 Manage Cash Pools
With the new service provider bank, you can now define cash pools that are operated by banks in the Manage
Cash Pools app.
Technical Details
Type Changed

156 PUBLIC Finance
Additional Details
For cash pools whose service provider is bank, you must define the Pool Usage as Both Directions.
You cannot perform cash concentration for cash pools of this type using the Manage Cash Concentration app,
as they are operated by banks.
Related Information
Defining Cash Pools

Defining Cash Pool Hierarchies
3.6.1.16 Manage Cash Concentration
You can now perform cash concentration for multi-level cash pools. In addition to the system proposed transfer
amount, you can also view simulation details in child cash pools to understand how balances are calculated in a
multi-level cash pool.
Technical Details
Type Changed
Additional Details
For information about how to define a multi-level cash pool, see Defining Cash Pool Hierarchies.

Finance PUBLIC 157
For information about how to perform cash concentration and the logic of cash concentration simulation, see
Performing Cash Concentration.
If you specify a cash pool that contains one or more child cash pools of the enterprise type for cash
concentration, the system only simulates the cash movements for the child cash pools and uses the simulation
results to propose the cash concentration transfers for the top-level cash pool. No payment requests will be
generated for child cash pools even though they are defined as the enterprise type.
3.6.1.17 Manage Memo Records
You can now create multiple memo records in a recurring pattern by copying or distributing a memo record.
You can also specify an offsetting bank account for memo records when necessary.
Technical Details
Type Changed
tions)
Additional Details
You can create several memo records in one go for cash flows that are expected in a repetitive pattern by
copying or distributing an existing memo record. The Copy function creates memo records with the identical
amount to the original memo records, the Distribute function splits the original memo record evenly into
smaller ones.
With the new Offsetting Information section, you can now specify an offsetting bank account for a memo record
if there is one. This attribute is for information only and your specification does not create any offsetting cash
flows in reports.

158 PUBLIC Finance
Related Information
Manage Memo Records
3.6.1.18 Selection of House Banks and House Bank Accounts
The selection of bank accounts has been enhanced by adding the selection of house banks and house bank
accounts. You can see this change in apps including Make Bank Transfers, Define Bank Transfer Templates, and
Manage Memo Records.
Technical Details
Type Changed
tions)
3.6.1.19 Adjust Assigned Liquidity Items
With this app, you can adjust liquidity items, which indicates the source and use of cash flows in your
company, by leveraging machine learning capabilities. You can compare the actual liquidity items that are
assigned and the predicted liquidity items that are automatically proposed by the predictive models. By
accepting the system proposal, the assigned liquidity items are then adjusted and replaced by the proposed
liquidity items.
Technical Details
Type New

Finance PUBLIC 159
Application Component FIN-FSCM-CLM-LM
Related Information
Adjust Assigned Liquidity Items
3.6.1.20 Bank Account Balance
With this app, you can now have a quick visual overview of the bank account balance for a selected period of
time. It illustrates the bank account balance by available balance, which is the amount of opening balance, cash
flows, overdue cash flows and overdraft limits in display currency and bank account currency for bank
accounts. You can also customize your analysis with several filtering options in chart or table views.
Technical Details
Type New
tions)
Related Information
Bank Account Balance

160 PUBLIC Finance
3.6.1.21 Cash Trade Request in the Manage Memo Records
App
With this feature, you can now create a cash trade request for a specific financial instrument which will
automatically trigger the creation of trade requests in the treasury and risk management systems. An approval
process is also available for you to manage the status of the cash trade request.
Technical Details
Type New
Make sure you have made the configuration settings in the Customizing activity Assign Planning Levels to Cash
Requests under Financial Supply Chain Management Cash and Liquidity Management Cash Management
Memo Records .
Related Information
Create Cash Trade Requests
3.6.1.22 Cash Flow Analyzer
With this app, you can now display the report with the following hierarchy views:
● Bank Account Hierarchy

In this view, you can choose bank account group hierarchy, bank hierarchy or cash pool to display the
report.
● Liquidity Item Hierarchy
In this view, you can use liquidity item hierarchy to display the report.

Finance PUBLIC 161
● Cash Concentration Simulation
In this view, you can display the results of cash concentration by cash pool.
Technical Details
Type Changed
tions)
Additional Details
To use each hierarchy views, you need to define the different hierarchies in the following different apps:
● Define bank account group hierarchies in the Manage Global Accounting Hierarchies - For Bank Accounts
app
● Define bank hierarchy in the Manage Bank Accounts - Bank Hierarchy View app.
● Define a cash pool hierarchy by assigning a header account and subaccounts to the cash pool in the
Manage Bank Accounts app.
● Define the liquidity item hierarchy in the Manage Global Accounting Hierarchies - For Liquidity Items app.
● Perform the cash concentration in the Manage Cash Concentration app.
Related Information
Cash Flow Analyzer

Manage Global Accounting Hierarchies - For Bank Accounts
Manage Global Accounting Hierarchies - For Liquidity Items
Manage Cash Pools
Manage Cash Concentration
3.6.1.23 Cash Flow Comparison - By Timestamp
With this app, you can select any two snapshot timestamps in the past and compare the forecasted cash flows
as well as compare the forecasted flows with the actual flows. It helps you understand the accuracy of your
past forecast records and assists you in improving your cash flow forecasts continuously.

162 PUBLIC Finance
Technical Details
Type New
Additional Details
To be able to view the forecast values in the past, make sure that the snapshot function is enabled in the
Configuration Step (SSCUI) Define Basic Settingsof the Configure Your Solution app.
Related Information
Cash Flow Comparison - By Timestamp
3.6.2 Treasury and Risk Management
3.6.2.1 Treasury Position History
With this app, you analyze the changes of important Treasury position values such as the book value or the
amortized acquisition value over one or multiple periods at a glance. You can compare the position values of a
valuation area at the different dates on a high aggregation level or break down the position values into
dimensions like company codes, currencies, valuation classes, and account assignment references. The
breakdown on a more detailed level provides you more insight about the reconciliation between the Treasury
subledger and the general ledger. The app calculates the position values, such as the book value, in the display
currency and shows them in a chart view and a table view. The chart view provides you with different chart
types, such as Bar Chart and Column Chart. You can use predefined views or change the displayed measures
and dimensions. For a further analysis, you can navigate to the Display Treasury Position Values app.

Finance PUBLIC 163
Technical Details
Type New
Scope Items 1WV (Debt and Investment Management), 1X1 (Foreign Cur
rency Risk Management)
Application Component FIN-FSCM-TRM
Additional Details
Calculation of Position Values

The position values are calculated according to your settings in the filters. In the filters, you defined for which
dates the position values are calculated. You also defined, which Treasury positions are selected using
dimensions such as company code, product type, position currency, and valuation area. In addition, you
decided on the display currency and the relevant exchange rate type for the currency conversion.
The app shows the calculated position values in a chart view and a table view. You can switch between the
different view types using the following buttons:
●  Chart and Table View

●  Chart View
●  Table View
Which positions components are displayed depends on the chosen view. Using the  Settings button, you
can choose the position values (type Measure) from the list.
Examples:
○ Purchase Value in DC
○ Acquisition Value DC
Chart View of Position Values

For the Chart View, the following predefined views are available:
● Standard
This view displays the Book Value in DC of the selected positions, for all relevant dates.
 Note
You can manually change the displayed position values (measures), and the characteristics (dimensions)
by which you want to aggregate the values.
● View By
Using this button, you can choose more characteristics to split the calculated values accordingly.
Examples:
○ Accounting Code

164 PUBLIC Finance
○ Product Type
● Using the  Settings button, you can choose extra characteristics of the positions (of type Dimension)
from the list and also more position values in display currency (of type Measure).
● Using  Toggle Legend Visibility, you can display or hide the legend, which explains the displayed
position values.
Table View of Position Values

● You can use the predefined Standard view to display the selected positions. This view displays the Book
Value in Display Currency on the aggregation level Date / Company Code / Product Type.
● For a detailed analysis, you can mark a row in the table and press the Display Position Values button. You
navigate to the Display Treasury Position Values app. The app lists the Treasury positions contributing to
the value displayed in the row. You can see the position values in position currency and valuation currency.
Further, you can use drilldown functionality to position flows or you can view the position indicator or the
position management procedure.
● Using the  Settings button, you can choose extra characteristics (of type Dimension) and position values
in display currency (of type Measure) from the list.
● Using  Export to Spreadsheet function, you can export your currently filtered results into a spreadsheet
and save it to your computer.
Business Catalog, Roles, Grouping

The app is assigned to the business catalog TRM - Position Management, which is assigned to the Treasury
Accountant, Treasury Specialist - Back Office, and Treasury Risk Manager roles. Users with these roles find the
app on the SAP Fiori Launchpad in the Treasury Reporting group.
See Also
For more information about the Treasury Position History app, see the product assistance on http://
help.sap.com/s4hana_op_1909.000 under Finance Treasury Management Treasury and Risk
Management Treasury Reporting Treasury Positions .
 Note
You can also reach the product assistance of Treasury and Risk Management using the new quick link
http://help.sap.com/s4_op_trm to jump straight to the latest version in SAP S/4HANA.
3.6.2.2 Market Data Overview
With this app, you can display an overview of foreign exchange related financial risks including current foreign
exchange (FX) spot rate, historic FX spot rate, and FX swap rate on a selected key date. You can also get an
overview of market data related financial risks, including historic reference interest rate, current security price
and historic security price.

Finance PUBLIC 165
Technical Details
Type New
Scope Item 1WV (Debt and Investment Management
1S4 (Automatic Market Rates Management
1XN (Market Rates Management - Manually via Upload
Related Information
Market Data Overview
3.6.2.3 Stock Futures
With this feature, you can now create stock futures in the Transaction Manager of Treasury and Risk
Management.
Technical Details
Type New
Scope Item 1WV (Debt and Investment Management), 1X1 (Foreign Cur
Application Component FIN-FSCM-TRM-TM

166 PUBLIC Finance
The price calculator of the Market Risk Analyzer calculates the net present value of stock futures depending on
the evaluation type settings, either as 0 due to daily margin payments, or as described in the formula below:
where
NPVe = Net present value in evaluation currency
Sc,e(t e) = Spot FX rate used in the conversion from contract currency to evaluation currency on the evaluation
date
Dc(te,ts) = Discount factor in contract currency on the evaluation date for the future settlement date
Nf = Number of futures in the lot
Nc = Contract size, that is, the number of shares one future contract refers to
Pc(M) = Market price of the future in contract currency
P c(C) = Contract price of the lot-generating transaction in contract currency
The contract currency is the currency of the lot-generating transaction equal to the currency that is maintained
in the future master data. If no market price is found that is younger than the maximum security price age
specified in the evaluation type, the system issues an error message.
It is now possible to define a product type for stock futures in Customizing under Treasury and Risk
Management Transaction Manager Listed Derivatives Master Data Product Types Define Product
Types .
See Also
For more information about stock futures, see the product assistance at http://help.sap.com/
s4hana_op_1909.000 under Finance Treasury Management Treasury and Risk Management
Transaction Manager Manage Financial Transactions Securities Listed Derivatives .
 Note
You can also reach the product assistance of Treasury and Risk Management using the new quick link
http://help.sap.com/s4_op_trm to jump straight to the latest version in SAP S/4HANA.

Finance PUBLIC 167
3.6.2.4 Treasury Correspondence Integration with SWIFT
Network
This product feature allows you to exchange Treasury correspondence with your counterparties using MT300
and MT320 SWIFT messages for your FX and money market transactions. The process requires the Treasury
Correspondence Integration via SWIFT Network integration scenario. The integration is enabled using SAP
Multi-Bank Connectivity for communication with the SWIFT infrastructure.
Technical Details
Type New
Scope Item 3QM (Treasury Correspondence Integration with SWIFT Net

work)
Additional Details
For communication via SWIFT, the receiver, the sender, and the kind of message must be identified explicitly:
● Receiver ID
○ Outbound process: Bank identifier code (BIC) of the counterparty
○ Inbound process: BIC of your company
● Sender ID
○ Outbound process: BIC of your company
○ Inbound process: Bank identifier code (BIC) of the counterparty
● Message ID
○ Outbound process: ID of correspondence object
 Note
● You assign the bank identifier code (BIC) for business partners using the function Assign BIC and
External Security Account ID to Business Partner (transaction FTR_BP_BIC)
● You assign the bank identifier code (BIC) for your company codes in the Customizing of Treasury and
Risk Management under Define Company Code Additional Data configuration step.

168 PUBLIC Finance
Effects on Configuration
● Set up the Treasury Correspondence Integration via SWIFT Network integration scenario.
For more information, see the Treasury Correspondence Integration with SWIFT Network (3QM) scope
item in the Best Practices Explorer https://rapid.sap.com/bp/scopeitems/3QM .
● In the Customizing of Treasury and Risk Management, you find the following configuration steps to enable
the Exchange Treasury Correspondence via SWIFT process:
○ Define Company Code Additional Data
○ Assign Format Mappings for Outbound Process
To define format mappings for the outbound process, you use the Extended Data Medium Exchange
(DME) Engine (transaction DMEEX) in the SAP Client.
○ Assign Format Mappings for Inbound Process
To define format mappings for the inbound process, you use the Map Treasury Correspondence Format
Data app on the SAP Fiori launchpad.
For more information about the Exchange Treasury Correspondence via SWIFT process, see in product
assistance at http://help.sap.com/ for SAP S/4HANA, version 1909, and choose Finance Treasury
Management Treasury and Risk Management Transaction Manager Treasury Correspondence .
3.6.2.5 Enhancements to the Hedge Accounting for

Exposure Items Process
With this feature, you get several new features for the Hedge Accounting for Exposure Items process. You can
now change the reclassification-relevant dates of a hedging relationship. New settings influencing the
designation process are available in the Customizing activities Define Hedging Profile and Effectiveness Test
Method. In addition, a new setting in the evaluation type enables the calculation of NPVs for FX options from
the settlement or termination date onwards until the payment date.
Technical Details
Type Changed
Scope Item 1XD (Hedge Accounting for FX Forward - Group Ledger

IFRS), 2RW (Hedge Accounting for FX Option - Group Ledger
IFRS), 2UF (Hedge Accounting for FX Swap - Group Ledger
IFRS), 3X1 (Hedge Accounting for FX Forward - Local GAAP),
3X2 (Hedge Accounting for FX Option - Local GAAP), 3X3
(Hedge Accounting for FX Forward - Group Ledger US
GAAP), 3X4 (Hedge Accounting for FX Option - Group
Ledger US GAAP)

Finance PUBLIC 169
Additional Details
Change Reclassification-Relevant Dates
The new function Change Reclassification-Relevant Dates (transaction TPM122) is available as an app on the
SAP Fiori launchpad and in the area menu of the Treasury and Risk Management back-end system under
Hedge Management and Accounting Hedge Accounting for Positions Master Data Automated
Designation Process .
With this function, you can change the automatically determined balance sheet recognition date or the
reclassification date for a hedging relationship that has already designated .
The new date must fulfill the following rules:
● The new balance sheet recognition date must be later than the designation date and earlier than the
planned dedesignation date.
● The new reclassification date must be later than the dedesignation date.
New/Changed Settings in the Hedging Profile
● Intrinsic Value = 0 at Contract Date

The Intrinsic Value = 0 at Contract Date indicator is relevant for hedging profiles with hedging scenario 943
CFH: FX Risk with Intrinsic, Time + Premium Amort..
The hedge accounting key figure for the intrinsic value (NPV_INTR) is calculated according to the settings
in the hedge accounting calculation type and stored in the market data container at designation date.
○ If you set this indicator, the classification applies the intrinsic value (hedge accounting key figure
NPV_INTR) = 0 for the calculation on the contract date. Therefore, the classification assumes the
intrinsic value to be zero and adds the calculated intrinsic value stored in the market data container to
the NPV_OTHERS component. Afterwards, the classification starts based on these new values. Note:
The values in the market data container are not changed.
○ If you do not set this indicator, the classification is based on the calculated hedge accounting key
figures at contract date.
Example:
Classification if "Intrinsic Value = 0 at Contract Date" indicator is not set

Premium/ Book
Value Intrinsic Value Time Value Others
Values at designation 1000 82,72 1090,86 - 173,58
Values at valuation/ 958,08 82,72 875,36 0

classification
Posting - 41,92 - 124,64

170 PUBLIC Finance
Classification if "Intrinsic Value = 0 at Contract Date" indicator is set
Premium/ Book
Value Intrinsic Value Time Value Others
Values at designation 1000 0 1090,86 - 90,86
Values at valuation/ 958,08 82,72 875,36 0

classification
Posting - 41,92 82,72 - 41,92
● Skip Valuation at Contract Date

The exception for FX options has changed slightly:
For an FX option with a premium that has been activated: In classifications after the payment date of the
premium, the calculated values for the elements and components are used as start values during
classification (with the Run Classification app) and are not assumed to be 0.
New Indicator in Customizing activity Effectiveness Test Method

In the Linear Regression area, you now find the new Set to Effective If All Points Are Zero indicator.
If you set this indicator, the result of the effectiveness test is set to Effective if all points required for the linear
regression have been calculated successfully but they are all zero. The linear regression cannot be applied.
Example:
If the designated component for an FX option is the intrinsic value and the FX option is out of the money (that
is, the intrinsic value is equal to zero) for the current market as well as for all market data constellations given
by the market data set, all calculated delta values are zero. If this applies to both the hedging instrument as well
as to the hypothetical derivative, all points for the linear regression are zero.
New Indicator in Define and Set Up Evaluation Type Function

You find the new indicator Consider Option Settlement Flow in the Define and Set Up Evaluation Types
(transaction JBREVAL) function (available in the Treasury and Risk Management area menu under Market
Risk Analyzer Evaluation Control Valuation Settings ) on the Evaluation Control tab in the Valuation Control
area.
This indicator controls whether the settlement or the termination flow of a plain vanilla FX option is used for the
NPV calculation.
● If you set this indicator, the system uses the settlement or the termination flow for the NPV calculation
from the settlement or termination date onwards until the payment date.
● If you do not set this indicator, the system does not calculate a NPV for the FX option after the settlement
or termination date.
Requirements
● Set the Select on Day of Cancellation/Settlement indicator in the evaluation type.

● In the Customizing activity Assign Cash Flow Indicator to Flow Types, assign a cash flow indicator to the
settlement flow. Do not set the flow as fictitious.

Finance PUBLIC 171
Related Information
Change Reclassification-Relevant Dates

Settings for Hedge Accounting for Exposure Items
3.6.2.6 New Data Source for Balance Sheet FX Risk

Reporting
With this feature, you can consider operational data from One Exposure, such as memo records, during the
review of your balance sheet FX risk.
Technical Details
Type Changed
Scope Item 1X1 (Foreign Currency Risk Management)
Additional Details
The One Exposure is now available as data source within the definition of the key figures for the balance sheet
FX risk reporting.
If you define key figures based on One Exposure the user calling the balance sheet FX risk apps, needs display
authorization for One Exposure data which is, for example, granted with the Cash Manager role.
In the Define Key Figures - Balance Sheet FX Risk app, you must define the required key figures.

172 PUBLIC Finance
For key figures using One Exposure as their data source, the following fields are available:
● Certainity Level
● Planning Level
● Planning Group
● Liquidity Item
● Transaction Date
Here, you create rules dictating how the system selects dates dynamically on the basis of the key date from
the apps.
○ KD-1 Key Date - 1 Day
○ KD-2 Key Date - 2 Days
○ KD Report Key Date
○ KD+ Key Date + 1 Day
○ KD+2 Key Date + 2 Days
○ BOM-1 Start of Preceding Month
○ BOM Month Start
○ EOM Month End
○ EOM+1 Start of Following Month
3.6.2.7 Authorization Check for Reference Category
With this authorization check, you can check a user's authorization on reference based on the reference
category (and the company code) in the function of reference maintenance in transaction management. You
can then check whether the user who wants to create, change, display, undo, or collectively process references
has the required authorization for the reference category. The following apps are available:
● Create Reference (transaction TBR6)

● Change Reference (transaction TBR7)
● Display Reference (transaction TBR8)
● Reverse Reference (transaction TBR9)
● Collective Processing: Reference (transaction TBRL)
Technical Details
Type New

Finance PUBLIC 173
Application Component FIN-FSCM-TRM-TM
Additional Details
By default, the authorization checks are not activated. If you want to use the authorization check, you have to
do the following:
● Activate the functionality in this IMG activity

● Define the different reference categories needed.
● Give the needed authorizations to the users which are responsible for the maintenance of reference.
You can made the settings of the Reference Authorization in the Customizing activity Make Settings for
Authority Checks under Financial Supply Chain Management Treasury and Risk Management Transaction
Management General Settings Organization .
3.6.2.8 CDS Views for Treasury and Risk Management
With this feature, a great many CDS (Core Data Services) views have been released. The views make it possible
to read system data, configuration data, master data, transactional data, and market data relevant for financial
transactions/positions of Treasury and Risk Management. Most of them have been enabled for SAP Business
Warehouse/4HANA extraction.
Based on released CDS views you can create your own query views.
The CDS query views can be used by any tool/solution that supports CDS views, such as the Analysis for
Microsoft Office, Design Studio, SAP Lumira, or SAP Analytics Cloud.
Technical Details
Type New

174 PUBLIC Finance
Additional Details
The following CDS views for Treasury and Risk Management are available:
● CDS Views for System Data

○ Product Category and Product Category Text
○ Transaction Category and Transaction Category Text
○ Securities Account Category and Securities Account Category Text
○ Security Class Stock Category and Security Class Stock Category Text
○ Security Class Quotation and Security Class Quotation Text
○ Listed Derivative Quotation and Listed Derivative Quotation Text
○ Listed Derivative Category and Listed Derivative Category Text
○ Option Put/Call Code and Option Put/Call Code Text
○ Debt Investment Indicator and Debt Investment Indicator Text
○ Fixed Variable Interest Category and Fixed Variable Interest Category Text
● CDS Views for Configuration Data
○ Treasury Valuation Area
○ Treasury Valuation Class and Treasury Valuation Class Text
○ Security Account Type and Security Account Type Text
○ Product Type and Product Type Text
○ Security Class General Classification and Security Class General Classification Text
○ Bond Classification and Bond Classification Text
○ Security Class Security Type and Security Class Security Type Text
○ Security Class Fund Type and Security Class Fund Type Text
○ Transaction Type and Transaction Type Text
○ Portfolio and Portfolio Name
○ Treasury Hedging Classification and Treasury Hedging Classification Name
○ Treasury Account Assignment Reference and Treasury Account Assignment Reference Text
○ Treasury Position Management Procedure and Treasury Position Management Proc. Name
○ Securities Account Group
○ Market Data: Basis Spread ID
○ Credit Spread ID
○ ReferenceEntity Attribute
○ Volatility Name Definition and Volatility Name Description
○ Volatility Profile Information

Finance PUBLIC 175
○ Volatility Type and Volatility Type Text
● CDS Views for Master Data
○ Treasury Securities Account
○ Central Clearing Account
○ Security Class
○ Security Class Stock
○ Security Class Bond
○ Security Class Listed Derivatives
○ Treasury Position Account
○ Counterparty
● CDS Views for Transactional Data
○ Financial Transaction
○ Treasury Facility Contract
○ Treasury Facility Utilization
○ Letter of Credit
○ Treasury Position Values Cube
○ Query View for Maturity Profile
○ Maturity Profile Cash Flow Data Cube
● CDS Views for Market Data
○ Market Data Query for Implied Volatility
○ Market Data Query for Basis Spread
○ Basis Spread Value Cube View
○ Market Data Query for Credit Spread
○ Credit Spread Value Cube View
○ Market Data Query for FX Rate
○ Market Data Cube View for FX Rate
○ Currency Pair Dimension View
○ Market Data Query for Reference Interest Rate
○ Market Data Cube View for Reference Interest Rate
○ Reference IR Dimension View
○ Market Data Query for Security Price
○ Market Data Cube View for Security Price
○ Security Exchange Dimension View
○ Security Price Type Dimension View
○ Reference Interest Rate
○ Implied Volatility Cube View
 Note
You need to have the Analytics Specialist role (SAP_BR_ANALYTICS_SPECIALIST) assigned to you.
s4hana_op_1909.000 under Cross Components The Virtual Data Model in SAP S/4HANA Cloud CDS
Views CDS Views for Finance CDS Views for Treasury Management .

176 PUBLIC Finance
Related Information
View Browser
3.6.2.9 Restructuring of SAP Fiori Launchpad for Treasury

and Risk Management
The SAP Fiori launchpad for Treasury and Risk Management has been restructured. The reduced number of
groups and the removal of seldom used apps from the SAP Fiori launchpad leads to a clearly arranged
launchpad for the specific roles.
Technical Details
Type Changed
Additional Details
Besides the rearrangement and renaming of the groups and the removal of some seldom used apps from the
SAP Fiori launchpad, some apps are now available on the SAP Fiori launchpad via link.
 Note
● The removed apps are still available on the SAP Fiori launchpad. You can find them using the App
Finder.
● The assignment of apps to roles remains unchanged.
● The following groups are available for Treasury and Risk Management:
○ Treasury Reporting
○ Risk Management
○ Hedge Management
○ Creation of Financial Transactions
○ Processing of Financial Transactions

Finance PUBLIC 177
○ Treasury Accounting
○ Market Data Management
● The Money Market Transactions, FX Transactions, Derivatives, Trade Finance Transactions, Securities
Transactions, and Financial Transactions groups are obsolete. The affected apps are moved to the new
groups Creation of Financial Transactions and Processing of Financial Transactions.
● The Hedge Management and Accounting group is obsolete. The apps relevant for hedge management are
moved to the new Hedge Management group and the apps relevant for hedge accounting are moved to the
Treasury Accounting group.
● The Securities Account Management and Correspondence groups are obsolete, the affected apps are
moved to Treasury Accounting or Processing of Financial Transactions groups.
● Apps for reversing, entering of master data and datafeed notations have been removed.
● Apps for manually entering market data are available as links now.
See the following table to get an detailed overview.
SAP Fiori Launchpad of Treasury and Risk Management
Treasury Treasury
Original Treasury Specialist - Specialist - Treasury
Business New Busi Specialist - Front Of Middle Of Treasury Risk Man
App Name Group ness Group Shown As Back Office fice fice Accountant ager
Adjustment Financial None x

Schedule - Transac
Interest tions
Rates/
Prices
Analyze Risk Man Risk Man Tile x

NPV agement agement
Assign Ba Market None x

sis Spread Data Man
Notations - agement
Datafeed
Assign Market None x

Credit Data Man
Spread No agement
tations -
Datafeed
Assign Cur Market None x

rency Nota Data Man
tions - Da agement
tafeed

178 PUBLIC Finance
Treasury Treasury
Assign Ex Market None x

change Data Man
Rate Volatil agement
ity Nota
tions - Da
tafeed
Assign FX Market None x

Swap Rate Data Man
Notations - agement
Datafeed
Assign Gen Market None x

eral Volatil Data Man
ity Nota agement
tions - Da
tafeed
Assign In Market None x

terest Rate Data Man
Notations - agement
Datafeed
Assign Pro Corre None x

file and BP spondence
Group - In
ternal Re
cipients
Assign Pro Corre None x

file and BP spondence
Group - Ex
ternal Re
cipients
Assign Se Market None x

curity Price Data Man
Notations - agement
Datafeed

Finance PUBLIC 179
Treasury Treasury
Automatic Securities Treasury Tile x

Debit Posi Account Accounting
tion and Manage
Posting - ment
Security
Accounts
Balance Hedge Man Hedge Man Tile x

Sheet FX agement agement
Risk (Web and Ac
Dynpro Ver counting
sion)
Balance Hedge Man Hedge Man Tile x

Sheet FX agement agement
Risk - In and Ac
Transaction counting
Currency
(Web Dyn
pro Ver
sion)
Balance None None x

Sheet FX
Risk (De
sign Studio
Version)
Balance None None x

Sheet FX
Risk - In
Transaction
Currency
(Design
Studio Ver
sion)
Calculate Money Mar None x

Amounts - ket Trans
Commer actions
cial Paper

180 PUBLIC Finance
Treasury Treasury
Calculate Risk Man Risk Man Tile x x

Clearing agement agement
Threshold
Key Figures
Calculate Risk Man Risk Man Tile x

Market Risk agement agement
Key Figures
Calculate Accounting Treasury Tile x

Net Present Accounting
Values
Calculate Accounting Treasury Tile x

Net Present Accounting
Values -
With CVA
and DVA
Change Ad Financial None x

justment - Transac
Interest tions
Rates/
Prices
Change Financial None x

Counter Transac
party - Fi tions
nancial
Transaction
Change Financial None x x

Netting Transac
tions
Change Financial None x x

Reference Transac
tions
Clearing Risk Man Risk Man Tile x x

Threshold agement agement
Report

Finance PUBLIC 181
Treasury Treasury
Create Ad Financial Processing Link x

justment - Transac of Financial
Interest tions Transac
Rates/ tions
Prices
Create Trade Fi Creation of Tile x

Bank Guar nance Financial
antee Transac Transac
tions tions
Create CA Money Mar Creation of Tile x

Style In ket Trans Financial
strument actions Transac
tions
Create Money Mar Creation of Tile x

Cash Flow ket Trans Financial
Transaction actions Transac
tions
Create Col FX Transac Creation of Tile x

lar FX Op tions Financial
tion Transac
tions

Commer ket Trans Financial
cial Paper actions Transac
tions
Create De Money Mar Creation of Tile x

posit at No ket Trans Financial
tice actions Transac
tions
Create Fa Money Mar Creation of Tile x

cility ket Trans Financial
actions Transac
tions

Fixed Term ket Trans Financial
Deposit actions Transac
tions

182 PUBLIC Finance
Treasury Treasury
Create FX FX Transac Creation of Tile x

Option tions Financial
Transac
tions

Spot/ tions Financial
Forward Transac
tions

Swap tions Financial
Transac
tions
Create IR Derivatives Creation of Tile x

Derivative Financial
Transac
tions
Create IR Money Mar Creation of Tile x

Instrument ket Trans Financial
actions Transac
tions
Create Let Trade Fi Creation of Tile x

ter of Credit nance Financial
Transac Transac
tions tions
Create Securities Treasury Tile x

Manual Account Accounting
Posting Manage
ment
Create Net Financial Processing Link x

ting Transac of Financial
tions Transac
tions
Create Pre Trade Fi Creation of Tile x x

sentation - nance Financial
Letter of Transac Transac
Credit tions tions

Finance PUBLIC 183
Treasury Treasury
Create Ref Financial Processing Link x

erence Transac of Financial
tions Transac
tions
Create Ref Market None x

erence Enti Data Man
ties - Busi agement
ness Part
ners
Create Se Securities Creation of Tile x

curities Transac Financial
Transaction tions Transac
tions
Credit Line Reporting Treasury Tile x x x

Analysis Reporting
Currency Market None x x x

Converter Data Man
agement
Debt and Reporting Treasury Tile x x x

Investment Reporting
Analysis
Debt and Reporting Treasury Tile x x x

Investment Reporting
Maturity
Profile
Define Dis Reporting None x

play Order -
Currency
Pairs
Define Fi Reporting None x

nancial Po
sitions
Define Fix Corre None x

ing Refer spondence
ence

184 PUBLIC Finance
Treasury Treasury
Define Hedge Man Hedge Man Tile x x

Hedging agement agement
Area and Ac
counting
Define Key Hedge Man None x

Figures - agement
Balance and Ac
Sheet FX counting
Risk
Define Accounting None x

NPVs on
Term Start
Define Time Hedge Man None x x

Pattern agement
and Ac
counting
Define Trad Master None x

ers Data
Define User Master None x

Data Data
Define Val Corre None x

ues for Ex spondence
piry Time -
FX Option
Display Ad Financial None x

justment - Transac
Interest tions
Rates Pri
ces
Display Ex Hedge Man Hedge Man Link x

posure Po agement agement
sition Flows and Ac
counting
Display Risk Man Risk Man Tile x

agement
Limit Over agement
view

Finance PUBLIC 185
Treasury Treasury
Display Financial None x x

Netting Transac
tions
Display Financial None x x

Netting Transac
Proposals tions
Display OCI Hedge Man None x

Balances - agement
Hedge Ac and Ac
counting counting
Display Financial None x

Payment Transac
Schedules tions
Display Ref Financial None x x

erence Transac
tions
Display Se Securities Treasury Tile x x x

Accounting
curities Ac Account
count Class Manage
Positions ment
Display Financial None x

Transac Transac
tions - tions
Changed
Counter
party
Display Reporting None x x

Treasury
Alerts - Cor
respond
ence

Treasury
Alerts - In
terest Rate

186 PUBLIC Finance
Treasury Treasury

Treasury
Alerts - Pay
ment

Treasury
Alerts -
Posting

Treasury
Alerts - Re
lease

Treasury
Alerts - Set
tlement
Display Reporting Treasury Link x

Treasury Reporting
Payments
Display Reporting Treasury Tile x x

Treasury Reporting
Position
Flows
Display Reporting Treasury Tile x x

Treasury Reporting
Position
Values
Display Accounting Treasury Tile x

Treasury Accounting
Posting
Journal
End-of-Day Risk Man None x

Processing agement
Enter Basis Market Market Link x

Spreads Data Man Data Man
agement agement

Finance PUBLIC 187
Treasury Treasury
Enter Credit Market Market Link x

Spreads Data Man Data Man
agement agement
Enter Ex Market Market Link x

change Data Man Data Man
Rate Volatil agement agement
ities
Enter Fac Market Market Link x

tor Values Data Man Data Man
agement agement
Enter FX Market Market Link x

Spot Rates Data Man Data Man
agement agement
Enter FX Market Market Link x

Swap Rates Data Man Data Man
agement agement
Enter Inter Market Market Link x

est Rates Data Man Data Man
agement agement
Enter Inter Market Market Link x

est Rates Data Man Data Man
Volatilities agement agement
Enter Net Accounti Treasury Link x

Present Val ng Accounting
ues
Enter Se Market Market Link x

curities Pri Data Man Data Man
ces agement agement
Execute Securities Treasury Tile x

Debit Posi Account Accounting
tion - Man Manage
ual Debit ment
Position

188 PUBLIC Finance
Treasury Treasury
Execute Accounting Treasury Tile x

Valuation Accounting
Class
Transfer
Financial Reporting Treasury Tile x

Status - Reporting
Book Value
Financial Reporting Treasury Tile x

Status - Reporting
Nominal
Amount
Fix FX Financial Processing Link x

of Finanial
Rates Transac
Transac
tions
tions
Foreign Ex Reporting Treasury Tile x x

change Reporting
Overview
Hedge Man Hedge Man Hedge Man Tile x x

agement agement agement
Cockpit and Ac
counting
Import For Market None x

eign Ex Data Man
change agement
Rates
Import Mar Market Market Tile x

ket Data Data Man Data Man
agement agement
Import Raw Hedge Man Hedge Man Tile x x

Exposures - agement agement
Speadsheet and Ac
counting
Interest Reporting Treasury Tile x x x

Rate Over Reporting
view

Finance PUBLIC 189
Treasury Treasury
Manage Ex Hedge Man None x

posure agment and
Hedging - Accounting
Hedge Ac
counting
Manage Hedge Man Treasury Tile x

Hedging agment and Accounting
Relation Accounting
ships
Manage Risk Man Risk Man Link x

Limits agement agement

Market agement agement
Data Shift
Manage Po Accounting Treasury Link x x

sition Indi Accounting
cator
Manage Market None x

Reference Data Man
Entities agement

Scenarios agement agement
Manage Se Securities None x x

curities Ac Account
counts Manage
ment
Manage Se Securities None x x

curities Account
Classes Manage
ment
Manage Hedge Man Hedge Man Link x x

Snapshots agement agement
and Ac
counting

190 PUBLIC Finance
Treasury Treasury
Manage Financial None x

Trader Au Transac
thorizations tions
Manage Market Market Link x

Yield Data Man Data Man
Curves agement agement
Market Reporting Treasury Tile x

Data Over Reporting
view
Post De Accounting Treasury Tile x

rived Busi Accounting
ness Trans
actions
Post Flows Accounting Treasury Tile x

Accounting
Process Accounting Treasury Tile x

Business Accounting
Transac
tions
Process Corre Processing Tile x

Corre spondence of Financial
spondence Transac
- Monitor tions
Process Ex Hedge Man Hedge Man Tile x x

posure Po agement agement
sitions and Ac
counting
Process FX FX Transac Processing Tile x x

Options - tions of Financial
Collective Transac
Processing tions
Process Hedge Man Hedge Man Tile x

Hedge Re agement agement
quests and Ac
counting

Finance PUBLIC 191
Treasury Treasury
Process IR Derivatives Processing Tile x x

Derivatives of Financial
- Collective Transac
Processing tions
Process Money Mar Processing Tile x x

MM Trans ket Trans of Financial
actions - actions Transac
Collective tions
Processing
Process Hedge Man Hedge Man Link x x

Raw Expo agement agement
sure and Ac
counting
Process Hedge Man Hedge Man Tile x x

Raw Expo agement agement
sure - Col and Ac
lective counting
Processing
Process Se Securities Processing Tile x x

curity Transac of Financial
Transac tions Transac
tions - Col tions
lective
Processing
Process FX Transac Processing Tile x x

Spots/ tions of Financial
Forwards - Transac
Collective tions
Processing
Process Trade Fi Processing Tile x x

Trade Fi nance of Financial
nance Transac Transac
Transac tions tions
tions - Col
lective
Processing

192 PUBLIC Finance
Treasury Treasury
Process Hedge Man Hedge Man Tile x x

Trade Re agement agement
quests and Ac
counting
Release Hedge Man Treasury Tile x

Hedging agement Accounting
Business and Ac
Transac counting
tions
Remaining Financial Processing Link x x

Term Sta Transac of Financial
tistics tions Transac
tions
Reprocess Hedge Man Treasury Tile x

Transac agement Accounting
tions - Au and Ac
tomated counting
Designation
Request Market Market Tile x

Current Data Man Data Man
Data - Data
feed
Request Market Market Tile x

Historical Data Man Data Man
Data - Data
feed
Reverse Ac Accounting None x

count As
signment
Reference
Transfer
Reverse Ac Accounting None x

crual/
Deferral

Finance PUBLIC 193
Treasury Treasury
Reverse Ad Financial None x

justment - Transac
Interest tions
Rates/
Prices
Reverse Au Financial None x

tomatic Ad Transac
justments - tions
Interest
Rates/
Prices
Reverse Accounting None x

Classifica-
tion
Reverse Securities None x

Debit Posi Account
tion Manage
ment
Reverse Re Hedge Man None x

lease of agement
Hedging and Ac
Business counting
Transac
tions

Valuation

Valuation
Class
Transfer
Review Bal Hedge Man Treasury Tile x

ance Sheet agement Reporting
FX Risk and Ac
counting
Review Risk Man Risk Man Tile x

Limit Uti agement agement
lizations

194 PUBLIC Finance
Treasury Treasury
Run Ac Accounting Treasury Tile x

crual/ Accounting
Deferral
Run Auto Financial Processing Link x

matic Ad Transac of Financial
justments - tions Transac
Interest tions
Rates/
Prices
Run Classi Accounting Treasury Tile x

fication Accounting
Run Effec- Hedge Man None x

tiveness
agement
Test -
and Ac
Hedge Ac
counting counting
Run OCI Re Hedge Man None x

classifica agement
tion - Hedge and Ac
Accounting counting
Run Valua Accounting Treasury Tile x

tion Accounting
Send Corre Corre None x

spondence spondence
Sensitivity Risk Man Risk Man Tile x

Key Figures agement agement
- Single
Analysis
Take Snap Hedge Man Hedge Man Tile x x

shot agement agement
and Ac
counting

Finance PUBLIC 195
Treasury Treasury
Terminate Hedge Man None x

Hedging agement
Relation and Ac
ships - Ex counting
pired Expo
sures
Transfer Ac Accounting None x

count As
signment
Reference
Treasury Reporting Treasury Tile x x x

Position Reporting
Analysis
Treasury Reporting Treasury Link x x x

Position Reporting
Flows -
Classic
Treasury Reporting Treasury Link x x x

Position Reporting
Values -
Classic
Treasury Reporting Treasury Link x

Posting Reporting
Journal -
Classic
Undo Net Financial None x x

ting Transac
tions
Undo Refer Financial None x x

ence Transac
tions
Update Financial None x

Cash Flow - Transac
Deposit at tions
Notice

196 PUBLIC Finance
Treasury Treasury
Update Financial None x

Planned Re Transac
cords tions
Update Securities Processing Tile x

Planned Re Account of Financial
cords for Manage Transac
Securities ment tions
Volatilities Market None x

with Mon Data Man
eyness - As agement
sign Cur
rency Pairs
Volatilities Market Market Link x

with Mon Data Man Data Man
eyness - En agement agement
ter Values
3.6.3 Payments and Bank Communication
3.6.3.1 Advanced Payment Management
The following apps provide you with the ability to manage payments in batches, as well as to analyze payments.
In the Manage Payment Batches SAP Fiori app, you can manage and process batched payments.
In the Payments Analyzer SAP Fiori app, you can analyze your payments by displaying their key figures in
different charts.
Technical Details
Type Changed
Scope Item No scope item required

Finance PUBLIC 197
Application Component FIN-FSCM-PF
Related Information
Manage Payment Batches (SAP Fiori)

Payments Analyzer (SAP Fiori)
3.7 Commodity Risk Management
3.7.1 Configuration Settings for Commodities
To make the Commodity Risk Management customizing for commodities easier accessible, from a single point
of entry in the SAP Implementation Guide, the customizing activities have been combined under Financial
Supply Chain Management Treasury and Risk Management Basic Functions Market Data Management
Master Data Commodities .
Technical Details
Type Changed
Application Component FIN-FSCM-TRM-CRM
Available As Of SAP S/4HANA 1909 FPS00

198 PUBLIC Finance
The IMG has been changed as follows:
In the Past From Now On
Node Name: Physical Commodities Node Name: Commodities
Node Name: Market Data Based on Derivative Contract Node Name: Derivative Contract Specification and MIC
Specifications
● Transaction Manager Listed Derivatives/OTC Treasury and Risk Management Basic Functions
Market Data Management Master Data Commodities
Derviatives Master Data Commodities Define
Define Commodity Types/Define Commodity Group 1/Define
Commodity Types/Define Commodity Group 1/Define
Commodity Group 2
Commodity Group 2
● Treasury and Risk Management Basic Functions
Market Data Management Market Data Based on
Derivative Contract Specifications Commodities

Define Commodity Types/Define Commodity Group 1/
Define Commodity Group 2
Treasury and Risk Management Basic Functions Treasury and Risk Management Basic Functions
Market Data Management Market Data Based on Market Data Management Master Data Commodities
Derivative Contract Specifications Derivative Contract Specification and MIC
● Treasury and Risk Management Basic Functions Treasury and Risk Management Basic Functions
Market Data Management Master Data Commodities
Market Data Management Master Data Master Data
Settings for Commodity Curve
Master Data Market Data Based on Derivative
Contract Specifications Settings for Commodity
Curve
● Treasury and Risk Management Basic Functions
Market Data Management Master Data
Commodities Settings for Commodity Curve
Treasury and Risk Management Basic Functions Treasury and Risk Management Basic Functions
Market Data Management Market Data Based on Market Data Management Master Data Commodities
Derivative Contract Specifications Datafeed Datafeed
Related Information
Commodity Risk Management

Finance PUBLIC 199
3.7.2 Exercise of Commodity Listed Options
With the exercise of the commodity listed option it is meant, that the right for the physical delivery of the
underlying commodity future is claimed.
The new business transaction category Commodity Listed Option available in transaction FWER (Option Right -
Exercise) allows the processing of a commodity listed option and the underlying commodity future(s) in one
step. This is also true for the reversal of an exercise.
The exercises of commodity listed options are considered in Commodity Risk Analytics.
Technical Details
Type New
Application Component FIN-FSCM-TRM-CRM
3.8 Financial Operations
3.8.1 Invoice Management
3.8.1.1 Import Supplier Invoices
This app enables you to import multiple supplier invoices into the system all at once. You download a template
file, enter the invoice information, and upload the completed file back to the app. You can then post the invoices
from the app. Changes have been made to the available fields in the downloaded file where you can enter
information for the invoices.
Technical Details
Type Changed

200 PUBLIC Finance
Scope Item J60 (Accounts Payable)
Application Component FI-FIO-AP
Available As Of SAP S/4HANA Cloud 1908
Additional Details
The downloaded file includes two sections, Header Data and G/L Account Items. The following changes have
been made to the fields in the two sections:
Technical Name
Section of Field Old Field Name New Field Name Length Change
Header Data BUSINESSPLACE Business Place <Unchanged> 4 This field is now by

default unhidden.
PAYMENTMETHODS <Not Payment Method 2 This field has been

UPPLEMENT available> Supplement added.
BUSINESSSECTIO Section Code 4

NCODE
PAYMENTTERMS Terms of Payment 4

Key
BUSINESSAREA Business Area 4
INVOICERECEIPT Invoice Receipt 8

DATE Date
DELIVERYOFGOOD Reporting Country 3

SREPORTINGCNTR for Delivery of
Y Goods Within the
EU
ISEUTRIANGULAR Indicator: Triangu 1

DEAL lar Deal Within the
EU?
TAXDETERMINATI Date for Defining 8

ONDATE Tax Rates
SUPPLIERINVOIC Origin of Uploaded 2

EUPLOADORIGIN Invoice

Finance PUBLIC 201
Technical Name
Section of Field Old Field Name New Field Name Length Change
DUMMY_MMIV_SI_ MMIV_SI_S_HEAD 1
S_HEADER_EEW_P ER_INCL_EEW
S
PAYTSLIPWTHREF Reference Number ISR/QR Reference 27 This field has been

REFERENCE for Purchase Order Number renamed.
INVOICEREFEREN Document Num Invoice Reference: 10

CE ber for Invoice Ref Document Num
erence ber for Invoice Ref
erence
INVOICEREFEREN Fiscal Year Fiscal Year of the 4

CEFISCALYEAR Relevant Invoice
(for Credit Memo)
PAYTSLIPWTHREF Subscriber Num ISR subscriber 11

SUBSCRIBER ber for Purchase number
Order
PAYTSLIPWTHREF Check Digit for ISR Check Digit 2

CHECKDIGIT Purchase Order
SUPPLIERINVOIC GUID for Supplier UUID of Invoice 16

EUPLOADFILEUUI Invoice Upload
D
G/L Account Items DUMMY_INCL_EEW <Not Custom Fields: 1 This field has been
_COBL available> Dummy for Use in added.
Extension Includes
(1)
Related Information
Import Supplier Invoices
3.8.1.2 Manage Supplier Line Items
You can now assign house banks and bank accounts of business partners to line items in the Edit Line Items
dialog.

202 PUBLIC Finance
Technical Details
Type Changed
Additional Details
If you want to edit several line items at once, note the following:
● You can change the house bank only for line items with the same company code.
● You can change the bank account of the business partner only for line items with the same customer ID or
the same supplier ID.
3.8.1.3 App Extensibility: Manage Supplier Line Items
This feature enables you to extend the Manage Supplier Line Items app.
The Manage Supplier Line Items app is based on the Supplier Line Items data source. In the Data Source
Extensions section of the Custom Fields and Logic app, key users can add standard SAP fields from supplier
master data to this data source.
Technical Details
Type New

Finance PUBLIC 203
Related Information
App Extensibility: Manage Customer Line Items
3.8.1.4 Data Management in Invoice Management
New data destruction objects have been added to Invoice Management.
Technical Details
Type New
Application Component FI-AP
Additional Details
Name of Data De Changes with This Re

struction Object Object Type lease Details More Information
BP_FKREDEB_SYNC_D Data destruction ob New data destruction You can use this data Destroying Synchroni
ESTRUCTION ject object added. destruction object to zation of Customer
destroy synchroniza Master Data Using
tion of customer mas BP_FKRE
ter data. DEB_SYNC_DE
STRUCTION
FI_DD_PRENOTIF_DE Data destruction ob New data destruction You can use this data Destroying Direct Debit
STRUCTION ject object added. destruction object to Pre-Notifications Using
destroy direct debit FI_DD_PRENOTIF_DE
pre-notifications. STRUCTION

204 PUBLIC Finance
3.8.1.5 CDS Views in Invoice Management
New CDS views have been added to Invoice Management.
Technical Details
Type New
Additional Details
The following CDS views have been added:
● Accounts Payable Aging Grid Cube

This CDS view provides you with an overview of the payables in an aging grid. It shows an aggregated view
of the payables per net due interval in the aging grid and per account (that is, per company code or
supplier) as well as the payable items.
● Accounts Payable Aging Grid
This CDS view provides you with an overview of the payables in an aging grid. It shows an aggregated view
of the payables per net due interval in the aging grid and per account (that is, per company code or
supplier) as well as the payable items.
● Aging Analysis Cube
This CDS view provides you with an overview of the payables in an aging grid. The result aggregates the
amount per net due interval in the aging grid and per account (that is, per company code or supplier).
● Aging Analysis
This CDS view provides you with an overview of the payables in an aging grid. The result aggregates the
amount per net due interval in the aging grid and per account (that is, per company code or supplier).
● Days Payable Outstanding Cube
This CDS view provides you with an insight into the average collection period of your company. It shows the
number of days it takes, on average, for your company to collect payables. The result aggregates the
payables amount per account (that is, per company code or supplier) and per month.
● Days Payable Outstanding
This CDS view provides you with an insight into the average collection period of your company. It shows the
number of days it takes, on average, for your company to collect payables. The result aggregates the
payables amount per account (that is, per company code or supplier) and per month.

Finance PUBLIC 205
3.8.1.6 Unique End-to-End Reference for Credit Transfers
With this feature, you can add a unique end-to-end transaction reference (UETR) to your credit transfers to
track the status of your payments. The tracking takes place in the SWIFT global payments innovation (gpi)
tracker enabling the checking and real-time monitoring of payments. You can manually enable the insertion of
the UETR data in the xx_CGI_XML_CT payment formats.
Technical Details
Type New
Application Component FI-AP-AP-B1
Related Information
Unique End-to-End Transaction Reference (UETR) Reporting
3.8.2 Receivables Management
3.8.2.1 Enhancement Spot: Adjust Result of Credit Check

(Local Scenario)
With this enhancement spot, you can change the answer from the Credit Management system to a query
before it is sent to the calling component. This is now also possible, instead of using Web services in a local
scenario.
Technical Details
Type New

206 PUBLIC Finance
Scope Item BD6 (Basic Credit Management), 1QM (Advanced Credit

Management)
Application Component FIN-FSCM-CR (SAP Credit Management)
Additional Details
You can find the enhancement spot Adjust Result of Credit Check (Local Scenario) in Customizing under the
following path:
Financial Supply Chain Management Credit Management Credit Risk Monitoring Credit Limit
Request:
If Your Financial Accounting (FI) and your Sales and Distribution (SD) are in the same system as SAP Credit
Management, then you can use a configuration web service interface to switch to a local configuration. In this
case, you can replace the following interfaces with this enhancement spot:
● UKM_FILL (credit_check_convert_outbound)
Contained in the BAdI BAdI: Fill Line Items for Credit Exposure Update.
See Customizing under:
Financial Supply Chain Management Credit Management Integration with Accounts Receivable
Accounting and Sales and Distribution Integration with Sales and Distribution Customer
Enhancements
● UKM_CREDIT_CHECK (convert_inbound, convert_outbound)
Contained in the BAdI BAdI: Adjust Result of Credit Check.
See Customizing under:
Financial Supply Chain Management Credit Management Integration with Accounts Receivable
Accounting and Sales and Distribution Integration with Accounts Receivable Accounting Customer
Enhancements
For more information, see the documentation for this enhancement spot.
3.8.2.2 Schedule Credit Management Jobs
With this app you can schedule periodic activities for SAP Credit Management.

Finance PUBLIC 207
Technical Details
Type New

Management)
Application Component FIN-FIO-CCD
Additional Details
You can schedule the following jobs with this app:
● Check Credit on SD Documents

● Update Score for Business Partners
● Update Credit Limit for Business Partners
● Update Rules for Scoring and Credit Check
● Assign Credit Management Role to Business Partners
Related Information
Schedule Credit Management Jobs
3.8.2.3 Schedule Collections Management Jobs
With this app you can schedule mass activities for SAP Collections Management.
Technical Details
Type New
Scope Item BFC (Collections and Dispute Management)

208 PUBLIC Finance
Additional Details
● Change Collection Segment Data for Business Partners

● Assign Collection Specialists
● Assign Collection Profile to Business Partners
Related Information
Schedule Collections Management Jobs
3.8.2.4 Schedule Dispute Management Jobs
With this app you can schedule periodic activities for SAP Dispute Management.
Technical Details
Type New
Scope Item BFC (Collections and Dispute Management)
Additional Details
● Closing Dispute Cases Using Automatic Write-Off

Finance PUBLIC 209
● Automatic Creation of Dispute Cases
Related Information
Schedule Dispute Management Jobs
3.8.2.5 Data Migration: SAP Credit Management
If you want to migrate from another system to SAP S/4HANA, a new migration object for SAP Credit
Management is available.
Technical Details
Type New

Management)
Application Component FIN-FSCM-CR
Additional Details
Find out about the migration object for SAP Credit Management: Customer - extend existing record by Credit
Management data.
For more details about the migration, see the product assistance for SAP Credit Management: Data Migration
3.8.2.6 New Authorization Setup for Documented Credit

Decisions
There is a new authorization setup for documented credit decisions which influences the integration of SAP
Credit Management with sales and distribution (SD). This set-up is only relevant if your SAP Credit
Management is running in a one-system-scenario.

210 PUBLIC Finance
Technical Details
Type Changed

Management)
Additional Details
Business scenario:
A sales representative carries out a credit check. The credit check fails. In the background, a documented
credit decision is automatically created in SAP Credit Management.
Old Authorization Concept:
To the sales representative carrying out the credit check, all authorizations necessary for creating a
documented credit decision had to be assigned.
New Authorization Concept:
The sales representative doesn't need any authorizations in SAP Credit Management.
The documented credit decision is now created by the workflow user SAP_WFRT. To this user, you must assign
a copy of the business role SAP_FIN_CR_DCD_WF. This business role includes all necessary authorizations for
creating documented credit decisions in SAP Credit Management.
If your SAP Credit Management is running in a one-system-scenario, the system administrator must assign a
copy of the business role SAP_FIN_CR_DCD_WF to the new workflow user SAP_WFRT.
Prerequisites
● In Customizing, the SAP Business Workflow is set up under the following path:
SAP Netweaver Application Server Business Management SAP Business Workflow Maintain
Standard Settings
● In addition, you have to activate the corresponding event type linkage:
1. Enter transaction SWE2 or choose the following path in the SAP menu:
Tools Business Workflow Development Administration Event Manager Type linkages

Finance PUBLIC 211
2. Open the object type CL_UKM_DCD_WF_EVENT and set the Linkage Activated field to active.
The following settings should be available:
Field Setting
Object Category CL ABAP Class
Event PUSH_DCD
Receiver Type PUSH_DCD
Receiver Call M Method
Event Delivery Using tRFC (Default)
Linkage Activated Yes
Behavior Upon Error Feedback 3 Do not change linkage
Receiver Status 0 No errors
3.8.2.7 Flexible Credit Check
A new setting in Customizing for SAP Credit Management allows you to decide which liabilities of a business
partner are considered for the credit check.
Technical Details
Type New

Management)
Additional Details
You can make the setting in the new field: Credit Check
To navigate to this new field, follow these steps:
1. In the IMG, follow this path: Financial Supply Chain Management Credit Management Credit Risk
Monitoring Master Data Create Credit Segments

212 PUBLIC Finance
2. Select a credit segment which is not marked as main segment and choose Details.
You find the Credit Check field with a dropdown menu.
Using the dropdown menu, you can decide which liabilities of a business partner are considered for the credit
check. You can decide whether the liability of the main segment only, of the chosen segment, or of both
segments should be taken into account.
This way, you can differentiate the following:
● Existing functionality: You can decide whether the liability of a Business Partner in a credit segment shall
contribute to the main credit segment. Set the flag in the Additive Contribution to Main Credit Segment
field.
● New functionality: Independent of that setting, you can decide how the liabilities of a Business Partner in a
credit segment should be considered for the credit check. Make your choice in the new Credit Check field.
You find more information in the F1 -help for these fields.
For your existing credit segments, per default the setting is selected that corresponds to your setting in the
Additive Contribution to Main Credit Segment field:
● If the Additive Contribution to Main Credit Segment field is active, the following default setting is selected
for your segment:
Credit Check: Liability of This Segment and of the Main Segment
● If the Additive Contribution to Main Credit Segment field is not active, the following default setting is
selected for your segment:
Credit Check: Liability of This Segment Only
You can change this setting according to your preferences.
Related Information
Credit Segments: Attributes
3.8.2.8 Doubtful Accounts Valuation
You can now adjust the age range of the categories into which overdue receivables and the related allowances
are grouped. The default is 30 / 60 / 90 days overdue, and you can change this using the new Net Due Interval
filters. There are also new visual filters which can help you to focus quickly on key items, and you now also have
the option to filter and display data by dunning block reason.

Finance PUBLIC 213
Technical Details
Type Changed
Scope Item 2PD (Provisioning of Overdue Receivables)
Application Component FI-FIO-AR
Related Information
Doubtful Accounts Valuation
3.8.2.9 SAP CoPilot Skill: Doubtful Accounts Valuation
This skill allows you to compare the value of overdue invoices for a particular customer with the related
allowances created by valuation runs as provisions against possible credit losses. The resulting entry displays
the allowance and overdue amount for the customer in question - clicking on an entry displays full details.
Technical Details
Type New
Scope Item 2PD (Provisioning of Overdue Receivables)
Related Information
Skill: Doubtful Accounts Valuation

214 PUBLIC Finance
3.8.2.10 Manage Customer Line Items
You can now assign house banks and bank accounts for business partners to line items in the Edit Line Items
dialog.
Technical Details
Type Changed
Scope Item J59 (Accounts Receivable)
Additional Details
If you want to edit several line items at once, note the following:
● You can change the house bank only for line items with the same company code.
● You can change the bank account of the business partner only for line items with the same customer ID or
the same supplier ID.
3.8.2.11 App Extensibility: Manage Customer Line Items
This feature enables you to extend the Manage Customer Line Items app.
The Manage Customer Line Items app is based on the Customer Line Items data source. In the Data Source
Extensions section of the Custom Fields and Logic app, key users can add standard SAP fields from customer
master data to this data source.
Technical Details
Type New

Finance PUBLIC 215
Scope Item J59 (Accounts Receivable)
Related Information
App Extensibility: Manage Customer Line Items
3.8.2.12 Use Payment Reference to Search for Open Items

(KIDNO)
In the Clear Incoming Payments and Post Incoming Payments apps, the search options have been extended: In
addition to journal entry and invoice number, you can now use the payment reference (KIDNO) to search for
open items.
To be able to search for open items using the payment reference, in the Edit Options for Journal Entries app, you
need to select the Payment Reference as Selection Criterion field. This field has been added to the app.
The new field looks like this (image is available in English only):
Technical Details
Type Changed
Application Component FI-AR-AR-DP

216 PUBLIC Finance
Additional Details
Especially in Scandinavian countries, it is common practice to state a payment reference when you pay an
invoice. This payment reference appears on the payee's bank statement and makes it easy to identify the
invoices that have been paid.
When you create an invoice in the Create Outgoing Invoices app, you can enter the payment reference on the
Payment tab in the Payment Reference field.
The screen looks like this (image is available in English only):
Until now, you could search for open items by entering an invoice or journal entry number in the Payment
Reference field on the Payment Reference tab. Now you can also use the payment reference.
The screen looks like this (image is available in English only):

Finance PUBLIC 217
Related Information
Edit Options for Journal Entries: Payment Reference Option [page 71]
Creating Invoices and Credit Memos
Post Incoming Payments
Clear Incoming Payments
3.8.2.13 Reprocess Lockbox Items
You can now reprocess lockbox items in the Reprocess Lockbox Items app.
Technical Details
Type New
Scope Item 1JT
Related Information
Reprocess Lockbox Items
3.8.2.14 Automate Reprocessing Rules
You can now automate bank statement reprocessing rules. You do so in the Manage Bank Statement
Reprocessing Rules app by selecting Automate Rule. To use this function, you need the appropriate
authorization. If you activate the automation of a reprocessing rule, the rule is automated with every import of
bank statements.

218 PUBLIC Finance
Technical Details
Type New
Scope Item J59 (Accounts Receivable), 1MV (Cash Application Integra

tion)
Additional Details
You can find the new function in the Manage Bank Statement Reprocessing Rules app as shown below:
To automate bank statement reprocessing rules, you must have the appropriate authorization. This
authorization is granted using the authorization object F_RP_BUKRS.

Finance PUBLIC 219
Related Information
Manage Bank Statement Reprocessing Rules

220 PUBLIC Finance
3.8.3 Settlement Management
3.8.3.1 Accruals Clearing at Manual Settlement
With this feature, you can automatically distribute the entered settlement amount over the underlying
condition contract settlement items during manual settlement. Two new algorithms support the distribution
along the existing accruals data, or based on the condition contract settlement document, by creating sub
items on the level of the split criteria defined in the profile for the business volume determination.
Technical Details
Type New
Application Component LO-AB
Additional Details
The following distribution rules are defined for manual settlement processes:
● 3 Distribution Based on Accruals (CCS)

● 4 Distribution Based on Settlement Document (CCS)
As a result of the automated distribution across settlement items based on the distribution rule, the right cost
objects are posted to accounting and the accruals are adjusted according to the calculated amounts in pricing.
3.8.3.2 Analyze Detailed Statement: Purchasing Rebate
This app enables the user to view an itemization of the business volume for selected condition contract
settlement documents. The Settlement Document Billing documents, the Goods Receipt Document and the
logistics invoice verification documents will be relevant for Business Volume Base.

Finance PUBLIC 221
Technical Details
Type New
3.8.3.3 Analyze Detailed Statement: Purchasing Rebate

(Accessible)
This app enables the user to view an itemization of the business volume for selected condition contract
settlement documents. The Settlement Document Billing documents, the Goods Receipt Document and the
logistics invoice verification documents will be relevant for Business Volume Base.
Technical Details
Type New
3.8.3.4 Analyze Detailed Statement: Sales Commission
With this app, you can view an itemization of the business volume for selected condition contract settlement
documents. The Settlement Document Billing relevant for sales commission agreements with external sales
agents will be the business volume base.
This app uses the C_DetStmntPurgRbteQry CDS view.

222 PUBLIC Finance
Technical Details
Type New
3.8.3.5 Analyze Detailed Statement: Sales Commission

(Accessible)
documents. The Settlement Document Billing relevant for sales commission agreements with external sales
agents will be the business volume base.
This app uses the C_DetStmntPurgRbteQrySettlement CDS view.
Technical Details
Type New
3.8.3.6 Analyze Detailed Statement: Sales Rebate
documents. The Settlement Document Billing documents and the Sales Orders will be relevant for Business
Volume Base.
This app uses the C_DetStmntSlsRbteQr CDS view.

Finance PUBLIC 223
Technical Details
Type New
3.8.3.7 Analyze Detailed Statements: Sales Rebate

(Accessible)
documents. The Settlement Document Billing documents and the Sales Orders will be relevant for Business
Volume Base.
This app uses the C_DetStmntSlsRbteQr CDS view.
Technical Details
Type New
3.8.3.8 CDS Views for Settlement Management
Several new CDS (Core Data Services) views have been released that enable you to read configuration data and
transactional data relevant for Settlement Management.

224 PUBLIC Finance
Technical Details
Type New
Scope Item 1B6 (Sales Rebates Processing)
2TT (Sales Commissions Processing for External Sales Rep

resentatives)
2R7 (Purchasing Rebates Processing)
Available As Of SAP S/4HANA On Premise 1909
CDS Views
Business Volume
View Name Technical Name Link
Business Volume Source Document I_BusVolDocCat Business Volume Source Document

Types Types
Business Volume Source Document I_BusVolDocCatText Business Volume Source Document

Type Descriptions Type Descriptions
Settlement Document I_SettlmtDoc Settlement Document
Settlement Document Bank Data I_SettlmtDocBankData Settlement Document Bank Data
Settlement Document Item I_SettlmtDocItem Settlement Document Item
Settlement Document Item Plain Long I_SettlmtDocItemPlainLongText Settlement Document Item Plain Long
Text Text
Settlement Document Plain Long Text I_SettlmtDocPlainLongText Settlement Document Plain Long Text
Customer Settlement
Customer Settlement Item Partner I_CustSettlmtItemPartner Customer Settlement Item Partner
Customer Settlement Bank Data I_CustSettlmtBankData Customer Settlement Bank Data
Customer Settlement Document I_CustSettlmt Customer Settlement Document
Customer Settlement Item I_CustSettlmtItem Customer Settlement Item
Customer Settlement Item Plain Long I_CustSettlmtItemPlainLongText Customer Settlement Item Plain Long
Text Text
Customer Settlement Item Pricing Ele I_CustSettlmtItmPrcgElmnt Customer Settlement Item Pricing Ele
ment ment

Finance PUBLIC 225
Customer Settlement Partner I_CustSettlmtPartner Customer Settlement Partner
Customer Settlement Plain Long Text I_CustSettlmtPlainLongText Customer Settlement Plain Long Text
Customer Settlement Pricing Element I_CustSettlmtPrcgElmnt Customer Settlement Pricing Element
Customer Settlement List

Customer Settlement List I_CustSettlmtList Customer Settlement List
Customer Settlement List Bank Data I_CustSettlmtListBankData Customer Settlement List Bank Data
Customer Settlement List Item I_CustSettlmtListItem Customer Settlement List Item
Customer Settlement List Partner I_CustSettlmtListPartner Customer Settlement List Partner
Customer Settlement List Plain Long I_CustSettlmtListPlainLongText Customer Settlement List Plain Long
Text Text
Expense Settlement
Expense Settlement I_ExpnSettlmt Expense Settlement
Expense Settlement Bank Data I_ExpnSettlmtBankData Expense Settlement Bank Data
Expense Settlement Item I_ExpnSettlmtItem Expense Settlement Item
Expense Settlement Item Partner I_ExpnSettlmtItemPartner Expense Settlement Item Partner
Expense Settlement Item Plain Long I_ExpnSettlmtItemPlainLongText Expense Settlement Item Plain Long
Text Text
Expense Settlement Item Pricing Ele I_ExpnSettlmtItmPrcgElmn Expense Settlement Item Pricing Ele
ment ment
Expense Settlement Partner I_ExpnSettlmtPartner Expense Settlement Partner
Expense Settlement Plain Long Text I_ExpnSettlmtPlainLongText Expense Settlement Plain Long Text
Condition Contract
Condition Contract I_ConditionContract Condition Contract
Condition Contract Type I_CndnContrType Condition Contract Type
Condition Contract Type Text I_CndnContrTypeText Condition Contract Type Text
Settlement Document
Settlement Document I_SettlmtDoc Settlement Document
Settlement Document Customer Pric I_SettlmtDocCustPrcgElmnt Settlement Document Customer Pric

ing Element ing Element
Settlement Document Item I_SettlmtDocItem Settlement Document Item

226 PUBLIC Finance
Settlement Document Item Customer I_SettlmtDocItmCustPrcgElmnt Settlement Document Item Customer

Pricing Element Pricing Element
Settlement Document Partner I_SettlmtDocPartner Settlement Document Partner
Settlement Document Item Partner I_SettlmtDocItemPartner Settlement Document Item Partner
Settlement Document Plain Long Text I_SettlmtDocPlainLongText Settlement Document Plain Long Text
Settlement Document Item Plain Long I_SettlmtDocItemPlainLongText Settlement Document Item Plain Long
Text Text
Settlement Document Partner I_SettlmtDocPartner Settlement Document Partner
Settlement Document Supplier Pricing I_SettlmtDocSuplrPrcgElmnt Settlement Document Supplier Pricing

Element Element
Settlement Document Type I_SettlmtDocType Settlement Document Type
Settlement Document Type Text I_SettlmtDocTypeText Settlement Document Type Text
Settlement Process Type

Settlement Process Type I_SettlmtProcessType Settlement Process Type
Settlement Process Type Text I_SettlmtProcessTypeText Settlement Process Type Text
3.8.3.9 Condition Contract
With this new app, you can display detailed information about your rebate and commission agreements in the
form of condition contracts related to your customers, suppliers, or external sales agents. You can quickly see
and analyze the most important information about your contract.
Technical Details
Type New
Scope Item 1B6 (Sales Rebate Processing)
2R7 (Purchasing Rebate Processing)
2TT (Commission)
Application Component LO-GT-CHB
Available as of SAP S/4HANA 1909

Finance PUBLIC 227
Related Information
Condition Contract (App)
3.8.3.10 Displaying Attachments for Condition Contracts
You can now filter customer condition contracts based on distribution channels and/or divisions and filter
supplier condition contracts based on purchasing groups.
Technical Details
Type New
2TT (Sales Commissions - External Sales Representative)
3.8.3.11 Fiori Content for Settlement Management
Changes to Settlement Management objects related to user management and authorizations for SAP Fiori
apps require that you recheck your business roles and the business catalogs assigned to them.
Technical Details
Type Changed

228 PUBLIC Finance
Scope Item Depending on the individual object:
1B6 (Sales Rebate Processing)
2TT (Sales Commissions – External Sales Representative)
LO-GT-CHG
Additional Details
 Note
You can also find information about the changes in SAP Fiori content for Settlement Management in SAP
Note 2824477 .
For information about the user management and authorization content needed for new SAP Fiori apps, see
the SAP Fiori apps reference library at https://fioriappslibrary.hana.ondemand.com.
New Business Catalogs for Settlement Management
Catalog Name Description Details Related Scope Item
SAP_PRC_BC_SDOC_MON
Purchasing – Monitor The business catalog con 2R7 (Purchasing Rebate
Settlement Documents tains the Monitor Settlement Processing)
Documents app.
SAP_PRC_BC_SDOC_MNG
Purchasing – Manage The business catalog con 2R7 (Purchasing Rebate
Settlement Documents tains the Manage Settlement Processing)
Documents app.
SAP_PRC_BC_SDOC_CHG
Purchasing – Change This business catalog con 2R7 (Purchasing Rebate
Settlement Document tains the navigation target to Processing)
change a settlement docu
ment.
SAP_PRC_BC_CC_DSTMT
Purchasing – Change The business catalog con 2R7 (Purchasing Rebate
Settlement Document tains the apps Analyze Processing)
Detailed Statement – Flexible
Analysis and Analyze Detailed
Statement – Accessible for
purchasing rebates

Finance PUBLIC 229
SAP_SD_BC_SDOC_MON
Sales – Monitor Settlement The business catalog con 1B6 (Sales Rebate Process
Documents tains the Monitor Settlement ing)
Documents app.
SAP_SD_BC_SDOC_MNG
Sales – Manage Settlement The business catalog con 1B6 (Sales Rebate Process
Documents tains the Manage Settlement ing)
Documents app.
SAP_SD_BC_SDOC_CHG
Sales – Change Settlement This business catalog con 1B6 (Sales Rebate Process
Document tains the navigation target to ing)
change a settlement docu
ment.
SAP_SD_BC_CC_DSTMT
Sales – Condition Contract The business catalog con 1B6 (Sales Rebate Process
Detailed Statement tains the apps Analyze ing)
Detailed Statement – Flexible
Analysis and Analyze Detailed
Statement – Accessible for
purchasing rebates.
SAP_SD_BC_CC_MNGECO
Sales – Manage A successor business cata 2TT (Sales Commissions –
Commissions for External log, External Sales Representa
Agents (Obsolete) SAP_SD_BC_CC_EC_MNG, is tive)
now available. All apps have
been moved from
SAP_SD_BC_CC_MNGECO to
SAP_SD_BC_CC_EC_MNG.
SAP_SD_BC_CC_EC_MNG
Sales – Manage The Manage Sales 2TT (Sales Commissions –
Commissions for External Commissions – External External Sales Representa
Agents Agents app was added to the tive)
Sales – Manage
Commissions for External
Agents business catalog and
is visible in the Sales
Commissions and Incentives
business group.
SAP_SD_BC_CC_EC_EXT
Sales – Extend Condition The Extend Condition 2TT (Sales Commissions –
Contracts for External Agents Contracts app was added to External Sales Representa
the Sales – Manage tive)
Commissions for External
Agents business catalog and
is visible in the Sales
business group.

230 PUBLIC Finance
SAP_SD_BC_CC_EC_SETLS
Sales – Commissions The Settle Sales 2TT (Sales Commissions –
Settlement for External Agent Commissions – External External Sales Representa
Agents app was added to the tive)
Sales – Commissions
Settlement for External Agent
business catalog and is visi
ble in the Sales Commission
and Incentive Processing
business group.
SAP_SD_BC_CC_EC_SETLS_
Sales – Reverse or Correct The business catalog con 2TT (Sales Commissions –
COR
Settlements of Commissions tains the following apps: External Sales Representa
for External Agent tive)
● Correct Settlements –
External Agent Contracts
● Reverse Settlement
Documents – Condition
Contracts
● Reverse Accruals –
● Update Accruals –
These apps are visible in the

Sales Commission and
Incentive Processing busi
ness group.
SAP_SD_BC_CC_EC_ANLYS
Sales – Business Analysis for The business catalog con 2TT (Sales Commissions –
External Agents tains the following apps: External Sales Representa
tive)
● Display Settlement
Calendars – Condition
Contracts
● Display Business Volume
– Condition Contracts

ness group.

Finance PUBLIC 231
SAP_SD_BC_CC_EC_JOBS
Sales – Periodic Activities for The business catalog con 2TT (Sales Commissions –
External Agent Commission tains the following apps: External Sales Representa
Settlement tive)
● Schedule Contract
Settlement – External
Agent Contracts
● Schedule Accruals
Reversal – External
Agent Contracts
● Schedule Accruals
Update – External Agent
Contracts

Periodic Activities for Sales
business group.
SAP_SD_BC_SDOC_EC_MON
Sales – Monitor Settlement The Monitor Settlement 2TT (Sales Commissions –
Documents for External Documents app was added External Sales Representa
Agents to the Sales – Monitor tive)
Settlement Documents for
External Agents business cat
alog and is visible in the Sales
Commission and Incentive
Processing business group.
SAP_SD_BC_CC_EC_DSTMT
Sales – Analyze Detailed The business catalog con 2TT (Sales Commissions –
Statement for External Agent tains the following apps: External Sales Representa
Commissions tive)
● Analyze Detailed
Statement – Flexible
Analysis
● Analyze Detailed
Statement – Accessible
The Analyze Detailed

Statement – Flexible Analysis
app is visible in the Periodic
Activities for Sales
business group.

232 PUBLIC Finance
SAP_SD_BC_PSDOC_MNG
Sales – Manage Personnel The business catalog con Not applicable
Settlements tains the following apps:
● Manage Personnel
Settlement Documents
● Release Documents –
Personnel Settlements

ness group.
SAP_SD_BC_PSDOC_MON
Sales – Monitor Personnel The Monitor Personnel Not applicable
Settlement Documents Settlement Documents app
was added to the Sales –
Monitor Personnel
Settlement Documents busi
ness catalog and becomes
visible in the Sales
Commission and Incentive
Processing business group.
SAP_SD_BC_PSDOC_JOBS
Sales – Periodic Activities for The Schedule Document Not applicable
Personnel Commission Release – Personnel
Settlement Settlements app was added
to the Sales – Periodic
Activities for Personnel
Commission Settlement busi
ness catalog and becomes
visible in the Periodic
Activities for Sales
business group.
SAP_SD_BC_PSDOC_IMP_JO
Sales – Periodic Commission The Schedule Commission Not applicable
B
Data Import Data Import – Personnel
Settlements app was added
to the Sales – Periodic
Commission Data Import
business catalog and is visi
ble in the Integration for SAP
Commissions business
group.

Finance PUBLIC 233
SAP_SM_BC_ABDOC_CONFIG
Settlement Management – The business catalog con Not applicable
URE
Settlement Management tains the following apps:
Document Configuration
● Manage Workflows for
Settlement Documents
● Manage Workflows for
Personnel Settlement
Documents

Settlement Management
Configuration business
group.
SAP_SM_BC_CC_CONFIGURE
Settlement Management – The Manage Workflows for Not applicable
Condition Contract Condition Contracts app was
Configuration added to the Settlement
Management – Condition
Contract Configuration busi
ness catalog and is visible in
the Settlement Management
Configuration business
group.
New and Renamed Business Groups for Settlement Management
Group Name Description Details Related Scope Item
SAP_LO_BCG_SETMAN_CC_J
Periodic Activities for The business group has been Not applicable
OB
Condition Contracts renamed.
SAP_PRC_BCG_CC_MANAGE
Purchasing Rebates The business group has been 2R7 (Purchasing Rebate
renamed. Processing)
SAP_PRC_BCG_CC_SETTLE
Purchasing Rebate The business group has been 2R7 (Purchasing Rebate
Processing renamed. Processing)
SAP_SD_BCG_CC_MANAGE
Sales Rebates The business group has been 1B6 (Sales Rebate Process
renamed. ing)
SAP_SD_BCG_CC_SETTLE
Sales Rebate Processing The business group has been 1B6 (Sales Rebate Process
renamed. ing)
SAP_SD_BCG_COM_MANAGE
Sales Commissions and The business group has been 2TT (Sales Commissions –
Incentives renamed. External Sales Representa
tive)

234 PUBLIC Finance
Group Name Description Details Related Scope Item
SAP_SD_BCG_COM_SETTLE
Sales Commission and The business group Sales 2TT (Sales Commissions –
Incentive Processing Commission and Incentive External Sales Representa
Processing has been created. tive)
SAP_SD_BCG_COM_SCHEDUL
Periodic Activities for Sales The business group Periodic 2TT (Sales Commissions –
E
Commissions and Incentives Activities for Sales External Sales Representa
Commissions and Incentives tive)
has been created.
SAP_SD_BCG_COM_INTEG
Integration for SAP The business group Not applicable
Commissions Integration for SAP
Commissions has been cre
ated.
SAP_SM_BCG_CONFIGURE
Settlement Management The business group Not applicable
Configuration Settlement Management
Configuration has been cre
ated.
See Also
on SAP Help Portal at https://help.sap.com/s4hana_op_1909.
3.8.3.12 Freight Cost Distribution Enhancements
New transfer events are available that allow you to transfer data from different reference documents to a
freight settlement document by configuration.
These new events allow you to apply your business requirements in an efficient, controlled, and transparent
way. You can reuse transfer groups, transfer rules, and source value classes to minimize the effort and risks
involved in implementation.
Technical Details
Type New

Finance PUBLIC 235
Additional Details
You can find the new transfer events under the following names:
● T1: TM: Transfer Purchase Order Data

● T2: TM: Transfer Sales Order Data
● T3: TM: Transfer Delivery Data
The new transfer events are called directly before the corresponding Business Add-In (BAdI) methods are
processed.
3.8.3.13 Manage Personnel Settlement Documents
With this app, you can manage commissions more effectively by displaying and processing the employees
corresponding personnel settlement documents.
Technical Details
Type New

236 PUBLIC Finance
Additional Details
In this app, you can check the status of personnel settlement documents, edit them manually, analyze them,
block individual documents from further processing, or release them to Accounting.
Related Information
Manage Personnel Settlement Documents
3.8.3.14 Manage Settlement Documents
With this app, you are able to easily manage multiple settlement documents with the ability to quickly search
and display them. The new list report based layout not only shows significant performance improvements, but
also provides you with the most relevant fields for filtering and display. Furthermore, the app now provides a
detailed view of a settlement document providing information about the settlement partners, amounts,
administrational data, contractual data as well as the documents items.
Technical Details
Type Changed

resentatives)
Related Information
Monitor Settlement Documents

Monitor Personnel Settlement Documents

Finance PUBLIC 237
3.8.3.15 Manage Workflows - Condition Contracts
With this app you can configure automatic workflows for the process of releasing condition contracts. Based on
the conditions you define for the workflow, an approver can approve, reject, or send documents for rework to
the document initiator.
Technical Details
Type New
2TT (Sales Commissions Processing - External Sales Repre

sentatives)
Application Component LO-GT-CHB (Charge Back)
For information about the steps required to set up workflows before configuring a release workflow, see
Workflows for Settlement Management.
Related Information
Manage Workflows - Condition Contracts
3.8.3.16 Monitor Personnel Settlement Documents
With this app, you can get an overview over the total amount of commissions that were paid or deducted within
any given time period and filter the total amount by quarter and/or compensation reason.

238 PUBLIC Finance
Technical Details
Type New
Related Information
Monitor Personnel Settlement Documents
3.8.3.17 Monitor Settlement Documents
The Manage Settlement Documents app has been renamed. The name of the app is now Monitor Settlement
Documents and it provides the same features and functions as the app version delivered with the previous
release.
Technical Details
Type Changed

resentatives)
LO-AB
Application Component

Finance PUBLIC 239
Related Information
Monitor Settlement Documents
3.8.3.18 New CDS View for Business Volume Determination
A new CDS (Core Data Services) view is available that you can use in condition contract settlement to ensure
that business volume is determined correctly. This view enables you to read incoming supplier invoices that
were created online or through batch processing.
Technical Details
Type New
Application Component LO-GT-CHB (Charge Back)
You need to define a new profile for the determination of business volume data in Customizing for Logistics -
General under Settlement Management Condition Contract Management Condition Contract Settlement
Define and Configure Profiles for Business Volume Determination . In the Business Volume Table field, assign
view V_WB2_RBKP_RSEG_2.
A profile is a central parameter used to determine the business volume data for the settlement process of
condition contracts. You need to assign it to a condition contract type.
Related Information
CDS Views for Settlement Management [page 224]

240 PUBLIC Finance
3.8.3.19 New Control Parameter for Material Validity Check
A new control parameter that determines whether a material requires a validity check is now available on
settlement document type level.
Technical Details
Type New
Additional Details
This feature enables you to determine if a validity check has to be executed or not, based on your business
requirements. This check is not needed in a pool payment or condition contract settlement scenario, because
you have to accept the invoice based on your contractual obligations. An inventory related scenario on the
other hand requires this check to avoid inventory updates after the valid to date of the material.
3.8.3.20 New Control Parameter for Profitability Segment

Determination
You can now use a new control parameter at settlement document type level to define which customer number
from the settlement document is used as customer for the profitability analysis. Instead of passing the payer
as a customer to the coding block, you can now define which customer number should be used.
Technical Details
Type New

Finance PUBLIC 241
Additional Details
The following settings can be made:
● Payer
● Bill-To Party
● Customer from Item / Payer:
Settlement document lists: If the payer on item level is filled, this customer is used, otherwise the payer
from the header is used.
Settlement documents: If the customer field on item level is filled, this customer is used, otherwise the
payer from the header is used.
● Customer from Item / Bill-To Party:
Settlement document lists: If the bill-to party on item level is filled, this customer is used, otherwise the
bill-to party from the header is used.
Settlement documents: If the customer field on item level is filled, this customer is used, otherwise the bill-
to party from the header is used.
3.8.3.21 New Display Variant for Amount and Quantity Fields
This feature enables you to define, at settlement document type level, how the system should consider the
amount and quantity fields during list reporting according to your business processes.
Type New
Additional Details
To use the pre-defined settings at list processing, you have to choose the value Apply Setting of Settlement
Document Type for the parameter that controls the sign of the amount and quantity fields.

242 PUBLIC Finance
3.8.3.22 New Events for the Transfer of Partner Data
Partner data can now be transferred to a target structure using the transfer manager. This helps you to easily
map additional business partners, like a ship-to party, to the KOMK or COBL structures, for example.
Technical Details
Type New
Additional Details
The feature is now available for the following events:
● 01 Profitability Analysis
● 02 Customer Profitability Analysis
● 20 Fill Pricing Header Supplier
● 21 Fill Pricing Header Customer
● 22 Fill Pricing Item Supplier
● 23 Fill Pricing Item Customer
A dedicated source value class to perform the mapping and field transfer is also provided.
3.8.3.23 New Settlement Capabilities for Non-Goods-Related

Condition Contracts
The condition contract process variant now also covers company code specific parameters to control the
settlement of non-goods-related condition contracts.

Finance PUBLIC 243
Technical Details
Type New
Additional Details
In the standard sales and purchase rebate settlement processes for non-goods-related contracts, the system
will determine the required tax code via pricing by using the full tax rate indicator. For certain settlement
scenarios, though, the tax code determination follows a different rule. Therefore, you can now specify an
alternative tax indicator at process variant and company code level for non-goods-related scenarios. This
alternative tax indicator will then be passed to the pricing application to derive the required tax code and rates.
3.8.3.24 New Visual Filters for Condition Contracts
This new feature enables you to use additional filters for condition contracts in the Settlement Management
apps Manage Supplier Condition Contracts, Manage Customer Condition Contracts, and Manage Sales
Commissions.
Technical Details
Type New
2TT (Sales Commissions - External Sales Representative)

244 PUBLIC Finance
Additional Details
You can now filter your customer condition contracts based on distribution channels and/or divisions and your
supplier condition contracts based on purchasing groups.
3.8.3.25 OData Service for Personnel Settlement Document

Retrieval
This new service enables you to read header and cost center related data of personnel settlement documents
that represent payments to an employee. It is based on the OData protocol and is intended for application
integration scenarios.
Technical Details
OData Service: Personnel Settlement Document – Read (API_PERS_SETTLMT_DOC)
Type New
Related Information
OData Service for Personnel Settlement Document Retrieval
3.8.3.26 OData Service for Reading Condition Contract Types
The new service Condition Contract Type - Read enables you to read condition contract type master
data in an API call. It is based on the OData protocol and can be consumed in SAP Fiori apps or other user
interfaces.

Finance PUBLIC 245
Technical Details
Type New
2TT (Sales Commissions Processing for External Agents)
Related Information
OData Service for Reading Condition Contract Types
3.8.3.27 Release Documents - Personnel Settlement
With this app you can search for groups of personnel settlement documents and perform mass releases to
Financial Accounting.
Technical Details
Type New
Additional Details
You can use this app to find and release a group of personnel settlement documents manually that were
blocked from an automatic posting to accounting.

246 PUBLIC Finance
For the release of individual personnel settlement documents, please see Manage Personnel Settlement
Documents
Related Information
Release Documents – Personnel Settlement
3.8.3.28 Renamed Scheduling Apps
The scheduling apps for Settlement Management were renamed for technical reasons.
Technical Details
Type Changed

resentatives)
Additional Details
The following scheduling apps were renamed:
Scheduling Apps for Settlement Management

Previous Name New Name
Schedule Import of Commission Data - Personnel Schedule Commission Data Import - Personnel Settlement
Settlements
Schedule Job for Document Output - Settlement Schedule Document Output - Settlement Management
Management
Schedule Job to Collect Documents - Settlement Document Schedule Document Collection - Settlement Document

Finance PUBLIC 247
Schedule Job to Release Documents - Personnel Settlements Schedule Document Release - Personnel Settlement
Schedule Job to Release Documents - Settlement Schedule Document Release - Settlement Management
Management
Schedule Job to Reverse Documents - Settlement Schedule Document Reversal - Settlement Management
Management
Scheduling Apps for Condition Contract Management

Schedule Job for Accruals Reversal - Customer Contracts Schedule Accruals Reversal - Customer Contracts
Schedule Job for Accruals Reversal - Supplier Contracts Schedule Accruals Reversal - Supplier Contracts
Schedule Job for Contract Settlement - Customer Contracts Schedule Document Output - Settlement Management
Schedule Job for Contract Settlement - Supplier Contracts Schedule Document Output - Settlement Management
Schedule Job to Update Accruals - Customer Contracts Schedule Accruals Update - Customer Contracts
Schedule Job to Update Accruals - Supplier Contracts Schedule Accruals Update - Supplier Contracts
Related Information
Schedule Document Release - Personnel Settlement [page 248]

Schedule Accruals Update - External Agent Contracts [page 249]
Schedule Accruals Reversal - External Agent Contracts [page 250]
Schedule Contract Settlement - External Agent Contracts [page 250]
3.8.3.29 Schedule Document Release - Personnel Settlement
With this app you can schedule jobs to perform a mass release of personnel settlement management
documents to Financial Accounting.
Technical Details
Type New

248 PUBLIC Finance
Additional Details
As a result of the scheduling job, the accounting status of the document is adjusted for each successfully
processed personnel settlement document and a journal entry is created (if needed). In case of errors,
corresponding error messages are stored in the spool and/or the application log.
Related Information
Schedule Document Release - Personnel Settlement
3.8.3.30 Schedule Accruals Update - External Agent

Contracts
This new feature enables you to create and schedule jobs to update the accruals for changed condition
contracts that are relevant to external agents’ commissions settlements. An update is required when you
change accruals relevant data retroactively, for example, the condition rate.
For each contract matching your selection and which requires a retroactive accrual update, an update of the
accruals is performed and corresponding settlement documents are created during the updating process.
Technical Details
Type New
Scope Item 2TT (Sales Commissions Processing for External Sales Rep
resentatives)

Finance PUBLIC 249
3.8.3.31 Schedule Accruals Reversal - External Agent
Contracts
This new feature enables you to create and schedule jobs to reverse open accruals for obsolete condition
contracts that were relevant to external agents’ commissions settlements.
For obsolete contracts matching your selection criteria, all accruals created after the last settlement are
selected and reversed during the reversal process.
Technical Details
Type New
resentatives)
Related Information
Schedule Accruals Reversal - External Agent Contracts
3.8.3.32 Schedule Contract Settlement - External Agent

Contracts
This feature enables you to create and schedule a job for the settlement of external agents’ commissions.
For each settlement date of a selected condition contract matching your selection, one or more settlement
documents will be generated during the settlement run.
Technical Details
Type New

250 PUBLIC Finance
resentatives)
3.8.3.33 Working with Long Texts
The condition contract and the settlement document both provide you with a set of text types to maintain long
texts in different languages at the level of your choice.
Technical Details
Type New

resentatives)
Additional Details
Some text types are predefined as external. These texts are foreseen to be part of forms when printing
settlement documents.
Related Information
Working with Long Texts

Finance PUBLIC 251
3.8.4 Integration with SAP S/4HANA Contract Accounting
(FI-CA) and SAP S/4HANA Cloud for Central Payment
Management
This scope item describes the steps required to integrate SAP S/4HANA Contract Accounting (FI-CA) with SAP
S/4HANA Cloud for central payment management, which is based on the SAP Cloud Platform.
Technical Details
Type New
Scope Item Central Payment Management (42Y)
Application Component FIN-FSCM-DP-CPM
Additional Details
As part of the integration scenario, central payment management receives payment batches from the SAP S/
4HANA system as well as from a non-SAP system via SAP Multi-Bank Connectivity. Central payment
management also retrieves data regarding bank accounts and signatories from Bank Account Management.
For detailed information about the central payment management app, see the administration guide and the
security guide.
Related Information
https://help.sap.com/viewer/p/CENTRALPAYMENTMANAGEMENT

252 PUBLIC Finance
3.9 Billing and Revenue Innovation Management
3.9.1 Convergent Invoicing
3.9.1.1 Display Consumption Items
With this app you can search for and display consumption items for Convergent Invoicing. These consumption
items provide the basis for the rating process.
Technical Details
Type New
Application Component FI-CA-INV-FIO
Related Information
Display Consumption Items
3.9.1.2 Create Credit/Debit Memos - Mass Processing
With this app you can create credit memos and debit memos for large numbers of invoicing documents. You
use credit memos and debit memos to adjust the amount already invoiced to a customer, without changing the
original invoice. In cases where it is not possible to reverse the invoicing document, the combination of original
invoicing document and credit memo or debit memo determines the effective amount invoiced to the
customer.

Finance PUBLIC 253
Technical Details
Type New
Application Component FI-CA-INV-FIO
Related Information
Create Credit/Debit Memos - Mass Processing
3.9.2 Receivables Management and Payment Handling
3.9.2.1 Access to Other Apps in the Fiori Launchpad
In the Fiori launchpad, you can now access more business roles with the apps assigned to them.
Technical Details
Type New
Application Component FI-CA-FIO (Contract Accounts Receivable and Payable)

254 PUBLIC Finance
Additional Details
The enhancements include the following business roles and their assigned apps:
● Accounts Payable and Accounts Receivable (FI-CA)

● Accounts Payable/Receivable Manager (FI-CA).
● Collections Specialist (FI-CA)
● Administrator - Contract Accounts Receivable and Payable (FI-CA)
● Reconciliation Specialist - Contract Accounts Receivable and Payable (FI-CA)
Related Information
Access to the System
3.9.2.2 New Fiori Apps
You can use the new Fiori apps Display Payment List, Find Payments in Lots, Find Payments in Payment Runs,
Display Correspondence, Maintain Dunning Notices, and Display Saved Open Item Lists.
Technical Details
Type New
Application Component FI-CA-FIO (Contract Accounts Receivable and Payable)
Additional Details
Previously, you could access the payment list in the menu of the payment run (transaction FPY1), under
Environment Payment List .
The Find Payments in Lots and Find Payments in Payment Runs apps replace the transactions FP30 and FP31
for searching for payments.
The Display Correspondence app replaces the transaction for displaying the correspondence history
(transaction CORRHIST).

Finance PUBLIC 255
The Maintain Dunning Notices app replaces the transaction for displaying the dunning history (transaction
FPM3).
If you create key-date-based open item lists using transactions FPO1 or FPO4 and save the lists (the Save Data
indicator is set), you can use the Display Saved Open Item Lists app to display these lists.
Related Information
Display Payment Lists

Search Payments
Display Correspondence
Maintain Dunning Notices
Display Saved Open Item Lists
3.9.2.3 Processing Incoming Payments by Using Lockbox
If you use a lockbox service to receive payments from your customers, you can now process the bank files with
the check information.
Technical Details
Type New
Functional Localization United States of America
Application Component FI-CA-BT-PY-PP (Processing Incoming and Outgoing Pay

ments)
Additional Details
Lockbox
In the transaction for transferring data from the electronic bank statement (FPB7), select bank statements of
bank statement type 0003 for transfer to a FI-CA payment lot. When you execute the transaction, the system
creates a payment advice note containing all the checks from the lockbox file. The check lot is the only item to
contain this payment advice note.

256 PUBLIC Finance
Related Information
Importing Electronic Account Information

Lockbox
3.9.2.4 API: Contract Accounting - SEPA Mandate Create,

Read, Update
You can use the OData service Contract Accounting - SEPA Mandate Create, Read, Update (technical service
name API_O2C_FICA_SEPA_MANDATE_SRV) to create, update, and read SEPA mandates in Contract Accounts
Receivable and Payable.
You can also use the API to create and read the use of SEPA mandates in Contract Accounts Receivable and
Payable.
Technical Details
Type New
Application Component FI-CA-BT-PY (Payments)
Related Information
APIs
3.9.2.5 Replication of Provider Contracts to SAP CC
If you use Billing and Revenue Innovation Management (BRIM), SAP Convergent Charging (SAP CC) creates a
subscriber account for each business partner for master data distribution in the standard system. If several
provider contracts are assigned to business partners, this can leader to longer runtimes during rating. Contract
Accounts Receivable and Payable creates a separate customer account for each provider contract in SAP CC
so that the workload can be distributed to the raters in a highly effective manner in a B2B scenario such as this.
Contract Accounts Receivable and Payable receives the information about the several subscriber accounts that
are to be created for a provider contract in SAP CC from the front-end system.

Finance PUBLIC 257
Technical Details
Type New
Scope Item Not relevant
Application Component FI-CA-INV
Additional Details
The provider contracts in question are indicated (indicator ASUAC) as an alternative subscriber account in a
scenario such as this in the S/4HANA system.
The indicator alternative subscriber account is displayed for supervising the provider contract replication
(transaction FKKCC_PC_MON) in a separate column as well as by displaying a provider contract under General
Data (transaction FP_VT3).
Related Information
Account Split [page 539]

Replication of Subscription Contracts to FI-CA and SAP CC
http://help.sap.com/BRIM
3.9.2.6 Value Adjustment According to IFRS9
You can now use a risk class defined in the business partner to make a flat-rate value adjustment of receivables
due and not yet due according to IFRS 9. In this way, you can post the expected loss as an expense for the total
amount of receivables depending on the risk class and age grid of the receivables.

258 PUBLIC Finance
Technical Details
Type New
Application Component FI-CA-BT (Business Transactions)
Additional Details
The calculation of total amounts are carried out as a flat-rate individual value adjustment for each receivable.
The system calculates the value adjustment of the open net value of the receivable at the valuation date and
posts the reset value adjustment (for example on payment or when written off) on separate accounts (in
accordance with IFRS 9).
Define the corresponding account determination in Customizing for Contract Accounts Payable and Receivable
under Business Transactions Doubtful Entries and Value Adjustment in the activities Maintain Flat-Rate
Value Adjustment Account Determination, and Alternative Account for the Resetting of Flat-Rate Value
Adjustments.
Maintain the percentages for the flat-rate value adjustments in Customizing for General Ledger Accounting
under Periodic Processing Enhanced Valuation in General Ledger Accounting Define Rates for Expected
Losses .
Related Information
Receivables Marked as Doubtful and Value Adjustments
3.9.2.7 Integration with Revenue Accounting (FI-RA)
As part of the migration, you can use the transaction Prepare Operative Load (FP_RAI_OL) to load records for
stock data, such as the provider contract items, billable items (including one-off charges), and invoice items to
revenue accounting.

Finance PUBLIC 259
You can now also undo the migration by running the transaction Prepare Operative Load with the Reset data
option.
Technical Details
Type New
Application Component FI-CA-IN (Integration)
Additional Details
If you reset the migration, the provider contract items, invoice items, billing document items and billable items
in Contract Accounts Receivable and Payable are reset to the status prior to the preparation of the operative
load. Doing this, for example, deletes the relevance indicator for revenue accounting from the corresponding
data records. The transfer records and legacy data generated by the operating data transfer are deleted.
After you have reset the data, you can prepare the operational load again.
Related Information
Loading of Revenue Accounting Items for Inventory Data
3.9.2.8 Integration with General Ledger Accounting (FI-GL)
You can configure your system so that manually posted and reversed FI-CA documents are updated directly in
the general ledger.
Technical Details
Type New

260 PUBLIC Finance
Application Component FI-CA-IN-GL (General Ledger Accounting)
You activate the direct posting in Customizing for Contract Accounts Receivable and Payable under
Integration General Ledger Accounting Define Direct G/L Transfer for Document Origins .
Related Information
Direct Update of the General Ledger
3.9.2.9 Archiving Deferred Revenues
You archive event-based deferred revenues by using the archiving object FI_MKKDRE. For archiving mass data,
there is a mass activity for archiving deferred revenues (transaction FPDR_BY_EVENT_ARCM).
Technical Details
Type New
Application Component FI-CA-IN (Integration)
Related Information
Archiving Event-Based Deferred Revenues (FI_MKKDRE)

Finance PUBLIC 261
3.10 Governance, Risk, and Compliance for Finance
3.10.1 International Trade
3.10.1.1 FIORI Content for International Trade
Changes to International Trade objects related to user management and authorizations for Fiori apps are
delivered with this release. These objects include, for example, business catalogs, technical catalogs, business
role templates, and target mappings.
Technical Details
Type Changed
Application Component All Finance components
Additional Details
Details about the changes for International Trade are summarized in in the following SAP Notes:
Affected content Related software component Link to SAP Note
Fiori content for International Trade UIS4HOP1 and S4CORE 2824597 - Release Information:
Changes in SAP Fiori Content for Inter
national Trade in SAP S/4HANA 1909
For more details about the Finance applications affected by changes to value help authorizations, see Value
Help Authorizations in Finance [page 53].
See Also
on the SAP Help Portal at http://help.sap.com/s4hana_op_1909.

262 PUBLIC Finance
3.10.1.2 Change Management: Retirement of Web GUI App
Manage Commodity Codes
The Manage Commodity Codes (/SAPSLL/CLSNR_01) app is removed from the business catalog
SAP_SLL_BC_CLS_CMMDTYCODE and technical catalog SAP_TC_SLL_BE_APPS with SAP S/4HANA OP1909.
The successor app has the Fiori ID F2516.
Technical Details
Type Deleted
Scope Item BDT, 1W8, 2U3
Application Component SLL-ITR-CLS
3.10.1.3 Change Management: Retirement of Web GUI App

Manage Intrastat Service Codes
The Manage Intrastat Service Codes ( /SAPSLL/CLSNR_03) app is removed from the business catalog
SAP_SLL_BC_CLS_ISSRVCCODE and technical catalog SAP_TC_SLL_BE_APPS with SAP S/4HANA 1909. The
successor app has the Fiori ID F2517.
Technical Details
Type Deleted
Scope Item BDT
Application Component SLL-ITR-ISR

Finance PUBLIC 263
3.10.1.4 Classification for International Trade
3.10.1.4.1 Manage Content from Data Provider - Customs

Tariff Numbers
You can use this app to display and activate data from external data providers. The data is provided as an
inactive version for checking and you can activate it to use it then for your product classification. You can
display the content of the data package using the details screen of the respective version. Before you can
activate the data in your system, the data is subject to a consistency check and then an activation check. The
data contains customs tariff numbers.
Technical Details
Product Feature is New
Used in Scope Item 2U3
Application Component SLL-ITR-CLS (International Trade Classification)
3.10.1.4.2 Schedule Content Request to Data Provider -

Customs Tariff Numbers
You can regularly schedule requests to your external data providers to receive updated and new versions.
These versions are then available in the Manage Data from Data Provider – Customs Tariff Numbers app.
Technical Details
Used in Scope Item 2U3

264 PUBLIC Finance
3.10.1.4.3 Manage Content from Data Provider - Control

Classes
You can use this app to display and activate data from external data providers. The data is provided as an
inactive version for checking and you can activate it to use it then for your product classification. You can
display the content of the data package using the details screen of the respective version. Before you can
activate the data in your system, the data is subject to a consistency check and then an activation check. The
data contains control classes.
Technical Details
Used in Scope Item 1W8
3.10.1.4.4 Schedule Content Request to Data Provider –

Control Classes
You can regularly schedule requests to your external data providers to receive updated and new versions.
These versions are then available in the Manage Data from Data Provider – Control Classes app.
Technical Details
Used in Scope Item 1W8

Finance PUBLIC 265
3.10.1.4.5 Classify Products - Commodity Codes
You can use this app to assign another commodity code time-dependently to unclassified products.
As a new key feature, you can now add a remark during classification of a product.
Technical Details
Type Changed
Scope Item 2U3
(International Trade Classification)
3.10.1.4.6 Reclassify Products - Commodity Codes
You can use this app to assign another commodity code time-dependently to classified products.
As a new key feature, you can now add a remark during reclassification of a product.
Technical Details
Type Changed
Scope Item 2U3

266 PUBLIC Finance
3.10.1.4.7 Classify Products - Legal Control
You can use this app to classify products for legal control time-dependently, to define the control relevance of
products and to assign control classes and control groups to the products. You can find unclassified products
at a particular time for a legal regulation. Additionally, you can assign multiple products to a classification for
the legal control.
As a new key feature, you can now add a remark during classification of a product
Technical Details
Type Changed
Scope Item 1W8
3.10.1.4.8 Reclassify Products - Legal Control
You can use this app to assign another control class and/or control grouping to classified products, and decide
if these are relevant for control.

Finance PUBLIC 267
Technical Details
Technical Details
Type Changed
Scope Item 1W8
3.10.1.4.9 Classify Products - Customs Tariff Numbers
You can use this app to assign a customs tariff number time-dependently to unclassified products.
Technical Details
Type Changed
Scope Item 2U3
3.10.1.4.10 Reclassify Products - Customs Tariff Numbers
You can use this app to assign another customs tariff number time-dependently to classified products.

268 PUBLIC Finance
Technical Details
Type Changed
Scope Item 2U3
3.10.1.4.11 Classify Products - Intrastat Service Codes
You can use this app to assign an Intrastat service code time-dependently to unclassified products.
Technical Details
Type Changed
Functional Localization Localized for Italy
Scope Item BDT
3.10.1.4.12 Reclassify Products - Intrastat Service Codes

Finance PUBLIC 269
Technical Details
Type Changed
Scope Item BDT
3.10.1.4.13 Display Classified Products - International Trade
You can use this app to display products which have been classified with a code number, like commodity codes,
customs tariff numbers, legal control relevant attributes or intrastat service codes.
You can display classification remarks created during classification/reclassification of a product, classification
history, as well as changed documents.
Technical Details
Type New
Scope Item BDT, 1W8, 2U3
3.10.1.4.14 Display International Trade Classification
You can display classification information for all active numbering schemes and legal regulations currently valid
for the selected product. You can call up this function via the Manage Product Master Data app.

270 PUBLIC Finance
Technical Details
Type New
3.10.1.5 International Trade Compliance
3.10.1.5.1 Display License Assignments - Trade Compliance
You can use this app to display documents that are assigned to licenses and to receive an overview of open
depreciation values and quantities.
Technical Details
Type New
Scope Item 1W8
Application Component SLL-ITR-TRC
(International Trade Compliance)
3.10.1.5.2 Integration of Purchasing Contracts for Embargo

and SAP Watch List Screening
The purchasing contracts are integrated in the following business processes:
● Embargo
● SAP Watch List Screening

Finance PUBLIC 271
These business processes are processed in the following apps:
● Manage Documents- Trade Compliance

● Resolve Blocked Documents- Trade Compliance
● Schedule Postprocessing - SAP Watch List Screening
Technical Details
Type New
Scope Item 1WC, 1WE
Application Component SLL-ITR-TRC
3.10.1.6 GTS Integration
3.10.1.6.1 Schedule Transfer of Procurement Indicators –

Global Trade Services
You can use this app to schedule the transfer of your procurement indicators to SAP Global Trade Services.
Technical Details
Type New
Scope Item 3JX
Application Component SLL-ITR-INT-GTS(Integration with SAP Global Trade Serv

ices)

272 PUBLIC Finance
3.10.1.6.2 Schedule Transfer of Product Prices – Global Trade
Services
You can use this app to schedule the transfer of your product prices to SAP Global Trade Services.
Technical Details
Type New
Scope Item 3JX
Application Component SLL-ITR-INT-GTS (Integration with SAP Global Trade Serv

ices)
3.10.1.6.3 Schedule Transfer of Min./Max. Product Prices –

You can use this app to schedule the transfer of your min./max. product prices to SAP Global Trade Services.
Technical Details
Type New
Scope Item 3JX

ices)

Finance PUBLIC 273
3.10.1.6.4 Schedule Transfer of Supplier Product Names –
You can use this app to schedule the transfer of your supplier product names to SAP Global Trade Services.
Technical Details
Type New
Scope Item 3JX

ices)
3.10.1.6.5 Schedule Transfer of Customer Product Names –

You can use this app to schedule the transfer of your customer product names to SAP Global Trade Services.
Technical Details
Type New
Scope Item 3JX

ices)

274 PUBLIC Finance
3.10.1.6.6 Schedule Transfer of Purchasing Documents -
You can use this app to schedule the transfer of your purchasing documents to SAP Global Trade Services.
Technical Details
Type New
Scope Item 3JX

ices)
3.10.1.6.7 Schedule Transfer of Material Documents - Global

Trade Services
You can use this app to schedule the transfer of your material documents to SAP Global Trade Services.
Technical Details
Type New
Scope Item 3JX

ices)

Finance PUBLIC 275
3.10.1.6.8 Schedule Transfer of Billing Documents - Global
Trade Services
You can use this app to schedule the transfer of your billing documents to SAP Global Trade Services.
Technical Details
Type New
Scope Item 3JX

ices)
3.10.1.7 Intrastat
3.10.1.7.1 Reuse of address data for company code in provider

of information
Prior to SAP S/4HANA 1909, users had to enter the following address data for providers of information in the
Manage Providers of Information app:
● Name
● Street/House Number
● Postal Code
● City
● Phone
● Fax
The address data for the company code is the same as for providers of information, so it can be reused.
Therefore - as of SAP S/4HANA 1909 - the address data for providers of information is no longer entered in the
Manage Providers of Information app, but is reused from the address data for company code.
This address data for the company code is displayed in the Manage Providers of Information app and used in
the Manage Intrastat Declarations app when creating the declaration file (if the country-specific file format
requires the address data).
After the upgrade to SAP S/4HANA 1909, check the completeness and correctness of the address data for
company code in the Manage Providers of Information app. If there is missing or incorrect address data, update
the address data for the company code in the Implementation Guide.

276 PUBLIC Finance
Be aware that all changes to the address data for the company code will be applied for providers of information.
Technical Details
Type New
Functional Localization Localized for all 26 countries that support Intrastat in SAP
S/4HANA 1909
Scope Item BDT
Application Component SLL-ITR-ISR
3.12.1 Lease-In Accounting (1T6)
Use
● General letter as part of the Output management that allows letter with free text field to be sent to
customers or vendors.
● Extensibility of certain fields in the contract that enables customers to substitute or insert some prefixes or
fill out some fields in the contract name auto-fill, for example the customer can use the contract type and
contract object name as prefix.
● Lease questionnaire - a questionnaire for leasing scenarios that helps simplify lease classifications.
● Two new chats form part of the Valuation cockpit and offer an overview of the status of the valuation.
● CDS views for contract master data as well as one for the contract object types that enable the customers
to make their own customized reports.

Finance PUBLIC 277
Technical Details
Type Changed
Scope Item 1T6 ( Lease-In Accounting )
Application Component RE-FX
Australia, Canada, Switzerland, Germany, Spain, France, Great Britain, Japan, Netherlands, Portugal, United
States of America, South Africa
3.12.2 Period-End Closing - Plant (BEI)
Use
● You can perform the settlement of co-products and by-products.

● You can now assign source G/L Accounts for Work in Process capitalization, so that Work in Process can be
capitalized according to this assignment.
Technical Details
Type Changed

278 PUBLIC Finance
Scope Item BEI ( Period-End Closing - Plant )
Application Component FI-CO
3.12.3 Service Contract (21R)
Use
● General letter as part of Output management that allows letter with free text field to be sent to customers
or vendors.
● Extensibility of certain fields in the contract that enable customers to substitute or insert some prefixes or
Technical Details
Type Changed

Finance PUBLIC 279
Scope Item 21R ( Service Contract )
United Arab Emirates, Austria, Australia, Belgium, Canada, Switzerland, China, Czech Republic, Germany,
Denmark, Spain, Finland, France, Great Britain, Hong Kong, Hungary, Indonesia, Ireland, India, Italy, Japan,
South Korea, Luxembourg, Mexico, Malaysia, Netherlands, Norway, New Zealand, Philippines, Poland, Portugal,
Romania, Russia, Saudi Arabia, Sweden, Singapore, Thailand, Taiwan, United States of America, South Africa
3.12.4 Accounting for Incoming Sales Orders (2FD)
Use
● Quality improvement of existing processes

● Monitoring UI for Predictive Accounting
Technical Details
Type Changed
Scope Item 2FD ( Accounting for Incoming Sales Orders )

280 PUBLIC Finance
Portugal, Romania, Saudi Arabia, Sweden, Singapore, Thailand, Turkey, Taiwan, United States of America,
South Africa
3.12.5 Basic Cash Operations (BFB)
Use
● Copying or distributing a memo record as an option when creating multiple memo records in a recurring
pattern. Also, it's now possible to specify an offsetting bank account for memo records when necessary.
● The Cash Position Analysis app offers cash position information. Customers can extend the measures
flexibly.
● The imported or manually created bank statement can be reversed via the Manage Bank Statements app.
Technical Details
Type Changed
Scope Item BFB ( Basic Cash Operations )
Application Component FIN-FSCM-CLM

Finance PUBLIC 281
3.12.6 Advanced Bank Account Management (J77)
Use
● Due to design changes, specifying a reviewer for bank account reviews or designating the bank account
contact persons as reviewers is no longer supported. After a review is initiated, all the users that have the
authorization to change the relevant bank accounts receive the review requests and can perform the
review. In addition to the notification from the SAP Fiori launchpad, reviewers also receive an email
notification.
● The Dual Control Revision Activate mode is enhanced with the Situation Framework so that the approver
gets system notifications when requests are pending for a certain period of time defined in the situation
type.
● Support both sequential and non-sequential payment approval patterns.
● Use the Manage Global Accounting Hierarchy app to support the maintenance of bank account group.
Technical Details
Type Changed
Scope Item J77 ( Advanced Bank Account Management )

282 PUBLIC Finance
3.12.7 Customs Management with SAP Global Trade Services

(2U1)
Use
● New apps for maintaining customs offices and their assignment to countries or routes.
Technical Details
Type Changed
Scope Item 2U1 ( Customs Management with SAP Global Trade Serv
ices )
Application Component SLL-ITR

Finance PUBLIC 283
Romania, Russia, Saudi Arabia, Sweden, Singapore, Thailand, Turkey, Taiwan, United States of America, South
Africa
3.12.8 Inventory Valuation for Year-End Closing (BEJ)
Use
● You can determine the lowest value rate based on the movement rate. In the determination of the lowest
value by movement rate, the system determines a devaluation indicator that specifies the number of
settlement periods that the material has been slow or non-moving. The determination can be carried out at
material level, or based on other selections such as the material type used.
● A job template for the Determine Lowest Value - Market Prices app is now available in the Schedule
Inventory Accounting Jobs app. This enables you to determine the lowest values based on market prices as
a background job.
Technical Details
Type Changed
Scope Item BEJ ( Inventory Valuation for Year-End Closing )

284 PUBLIC Finance
3.12.9 Universal Allocation (2QL)
Use
● SAP has significantly innovated allocations in terms of:

○ Usability
○ Process
○ Flexibility
○ Insights
● Proven allocation functionality based on the Universal Journal with a common structure of CO and FI
allocations.
● Harmonized Actual and Plan allocations.
● Allocations are organized by ledger and company code.
● The new Manage Allocations app provides a single point of maintenance of multiple types of cost
allocations and multiple cost object types.
● The Run Allocations app provides a single execution point for allocation cycles and displays allocation
results in a user-friendly manner.
● Allocation cycles are grouped and executed together to run the cycle in a specific sequence.
● New level of transparency through a graphical visualization of the value flow.
Technical Details
Type Changed

Finance PUBLIC 285
Scope Item 2QL ( Universal Allocation )
3.12.10 Provisioning of Overdue Receivables (2PD)
Use
● Documentation provided to describe the write-off process of an uncollectible, overdue receivable item.
Technical Details
Type Changed
Scope Item 2PD ( Provisioning of Overdue Receivables )

286 PUBLIC Finance
Application Component FI-AR
South Africa
3.12.11 Financial Plan Data Upload from File (1HB)
Use
● Broad set of functionalities to manage Financial Plan Data within SAP S/4HANA
Technical Details
Type Changed
Scope Item 1HB ( Financial Plan Data Upload from File )

Finance PUBLIC 287
3.12.12 Accounting and Financial Close (J58)
Use
● Added Display Journal Entries - In T-Account View.

● Enhancements to the Currency Exchange Rates.
● New Manage Templates for General Journal Entries.
● New Display Document Flow.
● Display Financial Statement renamed to Balance Sheet / Income Statement.
● Financial Statement (Grid-Based) renamed to Balance Sheet / Income Statement.
Technical Details
Type Changed
Scope Item J58 ( Accounting and Financial Close )

288 PUBLIC Finance
3.12.13 Bank Integration with SAP Multi-Bank Connectivity

(16R)
Use
● Supports fee analysis via MBC

● Get status feedback from MBC: Status feedback is sent to SAP S/4HANA in the application Monitor
Payments when messages have been received from SAP S/4HANA or have been forwarded to the bank
● Use standard status notification in MBC
● Use MBC Connector Monitor
Technical Details
Type Changed
Scope Item 16R ( Bank Integration with SAP Multi-Bank Connectivity )

Finance PUBLIC 289
3.12.14 Lease-Out for Sublease Accounting (2SB)
Use
● General letter as part of the Output management that allows letter with free text field to be sent to
customers or vendors.
Technical Details
Type Changed
Scope Item 2SB ( Lease-Out for Sublease Accounting )

290 PUBLIC Finance
Australia, Canada, Switzerland, Germany, Spain, France, Great Britain, Japan, Netherlands, Portugal, United
States of America, South Africa
3.12.15 Basic Credit Management (BD6)
Use
New Apps, including new job templates:
● Schedule Credit Management Jobs - With these job templates, you can make mass changes to the credit
data of business partners.
New Features for SAP Credit Management:
● SAP Credit Management Enhancement Spot: Adjust Result of Credit Check (Local Scenario) - You can
change the answer from the Credit Management system to a query before it is sent to the calling
component. This is now also possible,instead of using Web services in a local scenario.
● Data Migration: New migration object in SAP Credit Management if you want to migrate from another
system to SAP S/4HANA.
● New Authorization Setup for Documented Credit Decisions - There is a new authorization setup for
documented credit decisions which influence the integration of SAP Credit Management with sales and
distribution (SD). This set-up is only relevant if SAP Credit Management is running in a one-system-
scenario.
● Flexible Credit Check - A new setting in Customizing for SAP Credit Management allows you to decide
which business partner liabilities are considered for the credit check.
Technical Details
Type Changed
Scope Item BD6 ( Basic Credit Management )

Finance PUBLIC 291
3.12.16 Group Reporting - Financial Consolidation (1SG)
Use
● A new section introduces how to manage your organizational structure and show how the assignment is
time-dependent
● Flexible consolidation reports can be generated in real time, and the Integrate Data into Consolidation
Group task is removed from the consolidation process
● Introduction on how to define validation using selection
● Enhanced task logs for activity
● Preparation of consolidation group change is moved from data collection.
● Introduction on how to import consolidation master data
● Introduction on selection definition during FS item maintenance
● A new section introduces activity-based COI
● Removal of original intercompany reconciliation report

292 PUBLIC Finance
Technical Details
Type Changed
Scope Item 1SG ( Group Reporting - Financial Consolidation )
3.12.17 Restricted Party Screening with SAP Watch List

Screening (1WE)
Use
● Suppress communication from Output Management for sales documents blocked by Trade Compliance.
● Intelligent Screening learns from resolutions to avoid repetitive blocks for the same party.
Technical Details
Type Changed
Scope Item 1WE ( Restricted Party Screening with SAP Watch List
Screening )

Finance PUBLIC 293
Romania, Saudi Arabia, Sweden, Singapore, Thailand, Turkey, Taiwan, United States of America, South Africa
3.12.18 Purchase Order Accruals (2VB)
Use
This process supports the automatic calculation, review, approval, posting and analysis of purchase order
accruals.
Technical Details
Type New
Scope Item 2VB ( Purchase Order Accruals )

294 PUBLIC Finance
Africa
3.12.19 Embargo Control (1WC)
Use
● Integration of MM Scheduling Agreements and MM Contracts

● Suppress communication from output management for sales documents blocked by trade compliance
Technical Details
Type Changed
Scope Item 1WC ( Embargo Control )
South Africa

Finance PUBLIC 295
3.12.20 General Indirect Tax in the Canary Islands (3SS)
Use
This scope item describes the process for a standard sales process with a customer. The business process
covers order creation through the clearing of a customer account after the receipt of payment applicable for
the Canary Islands territory.
Technical Details
Type New
Scope Item 3SS ( General Indirect Tax in the Canary Islands )
Application Component FI-LOC-ES
Spain

296 PUBLIC Finance
3.12.21 Key Risk Indicator Monitoring with SAP Risk
Management (2U2)
Use
● Support CDS View OData services with drilldown functionality and input parameters
Technical Details
Type Changed
Scope Item 2U2 ( Key Risk Indicator Monitoring with SAP Risk Manage
ment )
Application Component GRC-INT-RM
3.12.22 Intercompany Reconciliation Process (40Y)
Use
This scope item covers the process of periodic controlling for accounting documents that describe the
accounting transactions within a corporate group.

Finance PUBLIC 297
Technical Details
Type New
Scope Item 40Y ( Intercompany Reconciliation Process )
3.12.23 Profitability and Cost Analysis (J55)
Use
● New Smart Cards for Sales Accounting Overview Page

● Service Contracts are enabled for Profitability Analysis
Technical Details
Type Changed
Scope Item J55 ( Profitability and Cost Analysis )

298 PUBLIC Finance
3.12.24 Legal Control (1W8)
Use
In relation to material maintenance:
● The ability to receive control classes from an external data provider via XML
● The ability to enter a comment when classifying or reclassifying products
● Display product master to check classification detail for every numbering scheme
● Introduction of a Product Classification Factsheet which is visible from the Material Master app
In relation to transactions:
● Support export control check for the supplying plant in Stock Transfer Orders (STOs)
● Suppress communication from output management for sales documents blocked by trade compliance
● The ability to display Block and Release Reason in the Manage Documents app
Technical Details
Type Changed
Scope Item 1W8 ( Legal Control )

Finance PUBLIC 299
South Africa
3.12.25 Predictive Analytics Model Training - Finance (30K)
Use
This scope item enables you to periodically train the preconfigured predictive scenarios with their own
historical data to enable the model to reflect their business context and transaction/master data history.
Technical Details
Type New
Scope Item 30K ( Predictive Analytics Model Training - Finance )
Application Component CA-GTF

300 PUBLIC Finance
3.12.26 Joint Venture Accounting (3F7)
Use
This scope item enables you to run JVA on the universal journal.
JVA records all data in the universal journal. The venture bank switching program is replaced by Joint Venture
Funding for an improved and transparent reimbursement process. All single cash call programs are grouped
into dedicated single operated and non-operated cash call programs. The farm-in/out programs are available in
one single program. Cutback posting options allow cutback posting by partner invoice and partner invoice with
cost objects.
Technical Details
Type New
Scope Item 3F7 ( Joint Venture Accounting )
Application Component CA-JVA
Great Britain, Norway, United States of America

Finance PUBLIC 301
3.12.27 Advanced Cash Operations (J78)
Use
● It's now possible to create a cash request for a specific financial instrument which will automatically trigger
the creation of trade requests in the treasury and risk management systems. An approval process is also
available for you to manage the status of the cash request.
● You can now use the Manage Global Accounting Hierarchies - For Liquidity Items app to define and manage
liquidity item hierarchies. The app replaces the Liquidity Item Hierarchy app.
● An additional hierarchy view of Cash Concentration Simulation in the Cash Flow Analyzer was added to
display the results of cash concentration by cash pool.
● The selection of bank accounts has been enhanced by adding the selection of house banks and house bank
accounts. This enhancement has been made in apps including Make Bank Transfers, Define Bank Transfer
Templates, and Manage Memo Records.
● In the new Adjust Assigned Liquidity Items - Anomaly Detection app, users can detect the abnormal
liquidity items by comparing the current assignment to that proposed by the trained Machine Learning
model. Users can then correct the wrong assignment of liquidity items by adopting the Machine Learning
proposals.
● Added process for the initiated bank transfers. The users can create, release, and pay the bank transfer in
one step or in separate steps. In the latter case, the bank transfer request can be reversed before it is finally
paid.
● Added the Define Bank Transfer Templates app to define templates for repetitive bank transfers (make
bank transfer - create with templates).
● New Reconcile Cash Flows - Intraday Memo Records app enables the manual reconciliation of the intraday
bank statement line items with the forecast cash flows.
● Added the Bank Statement Monitor Intraday app to enable the monitoring of the intraday bank statement
status for the user to check if they are imported as expected.
● Starting from this release, you must specify a planning level for each bank account that is set for intraday
bank statements in the Manage Bank Accounts app. Otherwise, the system cannot generate intraday
memo records from intraday bank statements.
Technical Details
Type Changed
Scope Item J78 ( Advanced Cash Operations )

302 PUBLIC Finance
3.12.28 Overhead Cost Accounting (J54)
Use
● New "Where Used List" apps (for example, Cost Centers, Activity Types, Statistical Key Figures) allow the
overhead accountant to analyze where and in which context a certain object is being used.
● New "Change Log" apps (for example, Cost Centers, Statistical Key Figures, Activity Types) allow a
controller to analyze changes by type of change, change type or a specific user.
● Various Overhead Accounting Jobs have been integrated into one Overhead Accounting Job Scheduler.
● Budget Availability Control for Cost Centers supports the business process from budget maintenance, runs
with each actual posting, and ends with the analysis of costs and budget.
● A new budget report is available that allows you to analyze the actual costs, commitments, and the
consumed and available budget.
Technical Details
Type Changed

Finance PUBLIC 303
Scope Item J54 ( Overhead Cost Accounting )
3.12.29 Accounts Receivable (J59)
Use
● Added the SAP Fiori app Manage Bank Statement Reprocessing Rules:
○ Allows A/R accountants to partially automate the reprocessing of bank statement items. The
accountant can create their own rules for processing bank statements by defining condition
parameters and a rule action.
○ Use Post to GL or AP/AR Account as an action in the reprocessing rules.
○ Analyze As now available as a new action in the reprocessing rules. Users can use several options to
analyze the Memo accordingly (for example, Payment Order).
○ Added a Select by Rule action to apply to the worklist. The condition of the newly created rule is
directly applied to the worklist filter so that only worklist items that satisfy the reprocessing rule are
displayed. The respective items can then be manually processed, or the accountant can choose to
apply the rule and execute the defined rule action. Worklist items can then be processed in a batch.
● With the Situations Framework, the information contained in the payment advice is automatically analyzed
and the AR accountant or manager is notified with any shortfall of payments instantly upon the receipt of
the payment advices. They can then contact the customer immediately and demand additional payment
much sooner than before.

304 PUBLIC Finance
Technical Details
Type Changed
Scope Item J59 ( Accounts Receivable )
3.12.30 Classification for Customs Tariff Number and

Commodity Code (2U3)
Use
● Receive tariff numbers from an external data provider.

● Display product master to check classification details for every numbering scheme and display change
logs.
● Introduction of a Product Classification Factsheet which is visible from the Material Master app.
● The ability to enter a remark when classifying or reclassifying product.
● Display change documents for products which have been classified for international trade.

Finance PUBLIC 305
Technical Details
Type Changed
Scope Item 2U3 ( Classification for Customs Tariff Number and Com
modity Code )
Africa
3.12.31 Cash Application Integration (1MV)
Use
● Reprocessing rules will be added to allow customer to create rules how to deal with bank statement items
that could not be cleared by posting rules or cash app.
● Customer can execute up to n rules in one step.
● Reprocessing rules can be executable in the background after bank statement import.

306 PUBLIC Finance
Technical Details
Type Changed
Scope Item 1MV ( Cash Application Integration )
3.12.32 Advanced Credit Management (1QM)
Use
New Apps, including new Job Templates:
● Schedule Credit Management Jobs - With these job templates, you can make mass changes to the credit
data of business partners.
New Features for SAP Credit Management:
● SAP Credit Management Enhancement Spot: Adjust Result of Credit Check (Local Scenario) - You can
change the answer from the Credit Management system to a query before it is sent to the calling
component. This is now a possible alternative to using Web services in a local scenario.
● Data Migration: New migration object in SAP Credit Management if you want to migrate from another
system to SAP S/4HANA.
● New Authorization Setup for Documented Credit Decisions - There is a new authorization setup for
documented credit decisions which influences the integration of SAP Credit Management with sales and
distribution (SD). This setup is only relevant if your SAP Credit Management is running in a one-system
scenario.
● Flexible Credit Check - A new setting in Customizing for SAP Credit Management allows you to decide
which of a business partner's liabilities are considered for the credit check.

Finance PUBLIC 307
Technical Details
Type Changed
Scope Item 1QM ( Advanced Credit Management )
3.12.33 Accounts Payable (J60)
Use
● Manage Automatic Payments: This app enables you to schedule payment proposals or schedule
payments directly and get an overview of the proposal or payment status. You can now view the items that
have been paid in a payment run in an accompanying sheet.
● Map Payment Format Data: This feature enables you to use enhanced functions in the Map Payment
Format Data configuration step, which is part of the Payment Medium Formats configuration item.
● Import Supplier Invoices: This app enables you to import multiple supplier invoices into the system all at
once. You download a template file, enter the invoice information, and upload the completed file back to
the app. You can then post the invoices from the app.

308 PUBLIC Finance
Technical Details
Type Changed
Scope Item J60 ( Accounts Payable )
Application Component FI-AP
3.12.34 Basic Bank Account Management (BFA)
Use
● Added the Transfer BIC Data app for the upload of a bank directory (International formats not included).
Technical Details
Type Changed

Finance PUBLIC 309
Scope Item BFA ( Basic Bank Account Management )
3.12.35 Liquidity Planning (3L5)
Use
The scope item supports the long-term plan of liquidity trend.
Technical Details
Type New
Scope Item 3L5 ( Liquidity Planning )

310 PUBLIC Finance
South Korea, Luxembourg, Mexico, Malaysia, Netherlands, Norway, New Zealand, Philippines, Poland,
3.12.36 Intrastat Processing (BDT)
Use
● Reuse of address from company code and plant abroad in Provider of Information.
● In the Change Documents tab, you can now see the details of changed data including old and new values,
created by, created on, and change types for the fields belonging to classification.
Technical Details
Type Changed
Scope Item BDT ( Intrastat Processing )
Austria, Belgium, Czech Republic, Germany, Denmark, Spain, Finland, France, Great Britain, Hungary, Ireland,
Italy, Luxembourg, Netherlands, Poland, Portugal, Romania, Sweden

Finance PUBLIC 311
3.12.37 Lockbox (1JT)
Use
Reprocessing of lockbox items in the Reprocess Lockbox Items app.
Technical Details
Type Changed
Scope Item 1JT ( Lockbox )
Canada, United States of America

312 PUBLIC Finance
3.12.38 Lease-Out Accounting (21Q)
Use
or vendors.
Technical Details
Type Changed
Scope Item 21Q ( Lease-Out Accounting )
Romania, Russia, Saudi Arabia, Sweden, Singapore, Thailand, Taiwan, United States of America, South Africa

Finance PUBLIC 313
3.12.39 Group Reporting - Matrix Consolidation (3LX)
Use
This scope item supports consolidation for managerial organizational entities such as profit center and
business segment. This functionality includes inter-unit eliminations and flexible management consolidation
reports generated at report run-time.
Technical Details
Type New
Scope Item 3LX ( Group Reporting - Matrix Consolidation )
3.12.40 Group Reporting - Predictive Consolidation (3JP)
Use
This scope item enables integration of predictive accounting documents to SAP S/4HANA Group Reporting
and subsequent consolidation of these documents to produce actual/predictive comparisons.

314 PUBLIC Finance
Technical Details
Type New
Scope Item 3JP ( Group Reporting - Predictive Consolidation )
3.12.41 Tax Service Integration (43D)
Use
The SAP S/4HANA and Tax Service Integration enables business transactions, such as sales orders or
purchase orders, to use the Tax Service as an engine for tax calculation.
Technical Details
Type New
Scope Item 43D ( Tax Service Integration )
Application Component FI-LOC-TXS

Finance PUBLIC 315
Brazil, Canada
3.12.42 Digital Payments (1S2)
Use
● Support for additional credit card provider "Union Pay"
Technical Details
Type Changed
Scope Item 1S2 ( Digital Payments )
South Africa

316 PUBLIC Finance
3.12.43 Group Reporting - Data from External Systems (2U6)
Use
● Extract the data object from SAP S/4HANA

● Extract the consolidated data from SAP S/4HANA
Technical Details
Type Changed
Scope Item 2U6 ( Group Reporting - Data from External Systems )

Finance PUBLIC 317
3.12.44 Lease-Out for Sublease Accounting - Group Ledger
IFRS (2SA)
Use
or vendors
contract object name as prefix
● Lease questionnaire - a questionnaire for leasing scenarios that helps simplify lease classifications
● Two new chats form part of the Valuation cockpit and offer an overview of the status of the valuation
Technical Details
Type Changed
Scope Item 2SA ( Lease-Out for Sublease Accounting - Group Ledger

IFRS )
United Arab Emirates, Austria, Australia, Belgium, Canada, Switzerland, China, Germany, Denmark, Spain,
Finland, France, Great Britain, Hong Kong, Hungary, Indonesia, Ireland, India, Italy, Japan, South Korea,
Luxembourg, Mexico, Malaysia, Netherlands, Norway, New Zealand, Philippines, Poland, Portugal, Romania,
Russia, Saudi Arabia, Sweden, Singapore, Taiwan, United States of America, South Africa

318 PUBLIC Finance
3.12.45 Preference Management with SAP Global Trade
Services (3JX)
Use
This scope item integrates SAP Global Trade Services Preference Management with SAP S/4HANA Cloud and
SAP S/4HANA on premise.
Technical Details
Type New
Scope Item 3JX ( Preference Management with SAP Global Trade Serv
ices )
Saudi Arabia, Sweden, Singapore, Thailand, Turkey, Taiwan, United States of America, South Africa

Finance PUBLIC 319
3.12.46 Continuous Control Monitoring with SAP Process
Control (2OH)
Use
● The ability to define multiple deficiency criteria for each business rule. Any data source value that meets
any of the specified deficiency criteria will be reported.
● Support CDS View OData services with drilldown functionality and input parameters.
Technical Details
Type Changed
Scope Item 2OH ( Continuous Control Monitoring with SAP Process

Control )
Application Component GRC-INT-SPC

320 PUBLIC Finance
3.12.47 Lease-In Accounting - Group Ledger IFRS (21P)
Use
or vendors.
Technical Details
Type Changed
Scope Item 21P ( Lease-In Accounting - Group Ledger IFRS )
Russia, Saudi Arabia, Sweden, Singapore, Taiwan, United States of America, South Africa

Finance PUBLIC 321
3.12.48 Actual Costing (33Q)
Use
This scope item enables actual costing for material inventory without cost component split functionality. This
supports legal requirement in some countries (such as Brazil).
Technical Details
Type New
Scope Item 33Q ( Actual Costing )
Russia, Saudi Arabia, Sweden, Singapore, Thailand, Turkey, Taiwan, United States of America, South Africa

322 PUBLIC Finance
4 Manufacturing
4.1 Manufacturing Execution for Discrete Industries
4.1.1 Schedule Technical Completion Job for Orders
This new Fiori app enables you to set an order to Technically Completed to end one or multiple production
orders from a logistical viewpoint. This is used, if the execution of an order has to be stopped prematurely or if
the order could not be executed in the required manner and open requirements for the order (reservations,
capacities) should be deleted.
Technical Details
Type New
Scope Item BJ5 (Make-to-Stock Production - Discrete Manufacturing)
Application Component PP-SFC
Related Information
Schedule Technical Completion Run for Orders
4.1.2 Value Help Authorizations in Manufacturing Execution

for Discrete Industries

Manufacturing PUBLIC 323
Technical Details
Type Not applicable
Application Component LE-JIT
Additional Details
Please see SAP Note <your note number> for a list of the affected applications, transactions and application
objects in Manufacturing Execution for Discrete Industries.
Related Information
4.1.3 Confirmation Settings for Discrete and Process

Manufacturing
This feature enables you to further refine confirmation profiles with settings dependent on plant and order
type. The Customizing activities Define Confirmation Parameters and Define Single-Screen Entry for Confirming
Production Orders or Define Single-Screen Entry for Confirming Process Orders can be linked to each other.

324 PUBLIC Manufacturing
Technical Details
Type New
Scope Item 1BM (Make-to-Order Production - Semifinished Goods Plan

ning and Assembly), BJ5 ( Make-to-Stock Production - Dis
crete Manufacturing), BJ8 (Make-to-Stock - Process Manu
facturing Based on Process Order), BJE (Make-to-Order Pro
duction - Finished Goods Sales and Final Assembly), BJH
(Make-to-Stock Production - Repetitive Manufacturing)
Application Component PP-SFC-PLN
Additional Details
 Note
To benefit from this new feature, the user must not have assigned a confirmation profile in the CORUPROF
user parameter.
In the Customizing activity for single-screen entry, you can define a standard profile with a nearly empty screen
for confirmations. This screen will be displayed until you enter a confirmation number or an order and
operation number in the confirmation application.
In the Customizing activity for confirmation parameters, you assign a confirmation profile to a specific
combination of plant and order type containing the desired layout and settings.
If you now select the new checkbox Use Profile for Plant/Order Type in the Customizing activity for single-
screen entry, the system searches for a confirmation profile specific for the combination of plant and order
type given by the confirmation number or order number that you enter in the confirmation application.
The system will then display your defined layout and settings.
New/changed Cus
Type of change tomizing activity How to find it What you can do Leading scope item
New field in Customiz Define Confirmation Production Shop Define a confirmation BJ5 ( Make-to-Stock
ing activity Parameters profile dependent on a Production - Discrete
Floor Control
plant and an order Manufacturing)
Operations type.
Confirmation

New/changed Cus
New fields in Custom Define Single-Screen Production Shop Define how the system BJ5 ( Make-to-Stock
izing activity Entry for Confirming determines the confir- Production - Discrete
Floor Control
Production Orders mation profile to be Manufacturing)
Operations used for single-screen
Confirmation Single- entry of confirmations.
Screen Entry
New fields in Custom Define Single-Screen Production Planning Define how the system BJ8 (Make-to-Stock -
izing activity Entry for Confirming for Process Industries determines the confir- Process Manufacturing
Process Orders mation profile to be Based on Process Or
Process Order
used for single-screen der)
Operations entry of confirmations.
Confirmation Single-
Screen Entry
4.2 Manufacturing Execution for Process Industries
4.2.1 Confirmation Settings for Discrete and Process

Manufacturing
This feature enables you to further refine confirmation profiles with settings dependent on plant and order
type. The Customizing activities Define Confirmation Parameters and Define Single-Screen Entry for Confirming
Production Orders or Define Single-Screen Entry for Confirming Process Orders can be linked to each other.
Technical Details
Type New
Scope Item 1BM (Make-to-Order Production - Semifinished Goods Plan

ning and Assembly), BJ5 ( Make-to-Stock Production - Dis
crete Manufacturing), BJ8 (Make-to-Stock - Process Manu
facturing Based on Process Order), BJE (Make-to-Order Pro
duction - Finished Goods Sales and Final Assembly), BJH
(Make-to-Stock Production - Repetitive Manufacturing)
Application Component PP-SFC-PLN

Additional Details
 Note
To benefit from this new feature, the user must not have assigned a confirmation profile in the CORUPROF
user parameter.
In the Customizing activity for single-screen entry, you can define a standard profile with a nearly empty screen
for confirmations. This screen will be displayed until you enter a confirmation number or an order and
operation number in the confirmation application.
In the Customizing activity for confirmation parameters, you assign a confirmation profile to a specific
combination of plant and order type containing the desired layout and settings.
If you now select the new checkbox Use Profile for Plant/Order Type in the Customizing activity for single-
screen entry, the system searches for a confirmation profile specific for the combination of plant and order
type given by the confirmation number or order number that you enter in the confirmation application.
The system will then display your defined layout and settings.
New/changed Cus
New field in Customiz Define Confirmation Production Shop Define a confirmation BJ5 ( Make-to-Stock
ing activity Parameters profile dependent on a Production - Discrete
Floor Control
plant and an order Manufacturing)
Operations type.
Confirmation
New fields in Custom Define Single-Screen Production Shop Define how the system BJ5 ( Make-to-Stock
izing activity Entry for Confirming determines the confir- Production - Discrete
Floor Control
Production Orders mation profile to be Manufacturing)
Operations used for single-screen
Confirmation Single- entry of confirmations.
Screen Entry
New fields in Custom Define Single-Screen Production Planning Define how the system BJ8 (Make-to-Stock -
izing activity Entry for Confirming for Process Industries determines the confir- Process Manufacturing
Process Orders mation profile to be Based on Process Or
Process Order
used for single-screen der)
Operations entry of confirmations.
Confirmation Single-
Screen Entry
4.3 Production Planning
4.3.1 Maintain PIRs

This feature enables you to create multiple versions of PIRs for one material. This means, for example, that you
can use different sources for creating different versions of PIRs such as the material forecast or an alternative

reference material. In addition, you can now also change the period for which you want to mass maintain your
PIR quantities. That is, you can always maintain the PIRs for a period of a year at a time - either in months or
weeks. The default period is set to start in the current month or week and in the case of monthly periods, you
can maintain 12 periods and in the case of weekly periods, you can maintain 52 periods. Now you can change
the start date to a period in the past or a period in the future and the system adjusts the period accordingly.
Technical Details
Type Changed
Scope Item J44 (Material Requirements Planning)
Application Component PP-MP_DEM
4.3.2 Rescheduling Check in the Managing Apps
This feature enables you to perform the rescheduling check in the Managing apps and, depending on the
execution message, to execute different actions.
Technical Details
Type Changed
Application Component PP-MRP (Material Requirements Planning)
Related Information
Manage Material Coverage

Manage External Requirements
Manage Internal Requirements

Manage Production Orders or Process Orders
4.3.3 Situation Handling in the Manage Material Coverage

App
With this feature, you can use situation handling in the Manage Material Coverage app to bring important issues
to the users' attention.
Technical Details
Type New
Related Information
Situation Handling
SAP Note 2809017
4.3.4 Manage Planned Orders
With this feature, you can use the Manage Planned Orders app to create, change, delete, or display planned
orders.
Technical Details
Type New

Related Information
Manage Planned Orders
4.3.5 Convert Planned Orders
With this feature, you can use the Convert Planned Orders app to convert planned orders into production
orders, process orders, or purchase requisitions.
Technical Details
Type New
Application Component PP-MRP (Material Requirements Planning
Related Information
Convert Planned Orders
4.3.6 Maintain MRP Controllers
The Maintain MRP Controllers app is deprecated as of SAP S/4HANA 1909. The app will not be replaced.

Technical Details
Type Deleted
In addition, the business catalog Production Planning - MRP Master Data (SAP_SCM_BC_MRPMD) will be deleted
with SAP S/4HANA 1909.
Instead of using the Maintain MRP Controllers app to maintain MRP controllers, you can maintain them in
Customizing for Production Planning under Material Requirements Planning Master Data Define MRP
Controllers .
4.3.7 Schedule Production
With this new app, you can pre-schedule your orders to be dispatched based on their priority. You can select
the source of supply (production version) and the pacemaker work centers to dispatch the orders on the dates
that you choose. A work center with capacity duration that meets the capacity required to complete the
operation is highlighted in the app.
Technical Details
Type New
Scope Item 3LQ

Application Component PP-CFS-SCH
Additional Details
Before you use the app, set the work center capacity to finite scheduling and make sure the right production
line is maintained in the production version.
Related Information
Schedule Production
4.3.8 Monitor Work Center Schedules
With this feature, you get an overview of the operations performed at your work centers by visualizing their
schedules over a time period. You can also plan optimum utilization of pacemaker work centers by matching
their capacities with those of the orders that have to be dispatched.
Technical Details
Type New
Scope Item 3LQ (Production Capacity Leveling)
Application Component PP-CFS-SCH
4.3.9 Schedule ATP Run for Production / Planned Orders
You can use this new Fiori app to do the following:
● Schedule and configure background jobs that check the availability of materials for several production
orders or planned orders according to the ATP method

● View the results of the availability checks scheduled with this app
Technical Details
Country Dependency Valid for all countries
Used in Scope Item No scope item required
Application Component PP-SFC
Availability SAP S/4HANA 1909
Related Information
Schedule ATP Run for Production / Planned Orders
4.3.10 API for Planned Orders (Read, Create, Update, Delete)
This service enables you to read, create, change, and delete planned orders as well as components belonging
to planned orders. It is based on the OData protocol.
Technical Details
Type New
Scope Item BJ5 ( Make-to-Stock Production - Discrete Manufacturing),

BJ8 (Make-to-Stock - Process Manufacturing Based on
Process Order)
Application Component PP-ES

Additional Details
This service enables the following operations:
● Read planned orders, for example, retrieve header values of a planned order, retrieve a set of components
related to a planned order, or retrieve capacity data of a planned order
● Create a planned order without components (system adds components automatically), for example, with
account assignment referring to project stock
● Create a planned order with components
● Create a component
● Schedule a planned order including creation of capacity data
● Change selected parameters of an existing planned order
● Change parameters of a component
● Delete a planned order
● Delete a component
Related Information
Planned Orders - Read, Create, Update, Delete
4.3.11 Material Requirements Planning (MRP)
4.3.11.1 MRP Area
The customizing for the MRP area has changed. The Customizing activity Define MRP Areas is now defined in
the following two Customizing activities:
● Define MRP Areas for Plant/ Storage Locations

● Define MRP Areas for Subcontractors
In the Customizing navigate to Material Requirements Planning Master Data MRP Areas or to
Consumption-Based Planning Master Data MRP Areas .
Technical Details
Type Changed

Application Component PP-MRP, PP-MRP-BD
Related Information
Implementing MRP Areas
4.3.11.2 Improved Performance for Splitting Quota

Arrangements in MRP
Quota arrangement splitting is used in material requirements planning (MRP) to distribute procurement
proposals among various sources of supply. This feature is now also available for high-performance scenarios
in SAP S/4HANA Cloud based on SAP HANA-optimized coding.
Technical Details
Type Changed
Scope Item BJ5 ( Make-to-Stock Production - Discrete Manufacturing)
Application Component PP-MRP
Related Information
Quota Arrangements
4.3.11.3 OData Service for Maintain Planned Independent

Requirements API
This new service enables you to read and update planned independent requirements (PIRs).

Technical Details
Type New
Scope Item J44 (Material Requirements Planning), BJ5 (Make-to-Stock

Production - Discrete Manufacturing), BJH (Make-to-Stock
Production - Repetitive Manufacturing)
Application Component PP-MP-DEM
Related Information
OData Service for Maintain Planned Independent Requirements API
4.3.11.4 API for Material Planning Data (Read)
This service enables you to read planning data for materials in Material Requirements Planning (MRP). The
service is based on the OData protocol, and can be consumed by external systems and user interfaces.
Technical Details
Type New
Application Component PP-ES
Additional Details
You can use this service to perform the following operations:

● Read material master data for one or more materials
● Read supply and demand information for materials over a certain time period; you can show supply and
demand information aggregated over a defined time period, for example, one week, or you can aggregate
the quantities on category group level over a certain time period.
● Read material coverage information
Related Information
Material Planning Data - Read
4.3.12 Demand-Driven Replenishment
4.3.13 Suspend and Resume Proposal Runs
With this feature, you can now suspend and resume proposal creation of products in the Manage Buffer Levels
app.
Technical Details
Type New
Scope Item 1Y2 (Demand-Driven Buffer Level Management)
Application Component PP-DD
4.3.14 BOM and BOM Usage in Network Graph
With this feature, in the Buffer Positioning app, you can now visualize a product BOM and its usage by choosing
BOM and BOM Usage from the dropdown list in the network graph view of the Upstream - Downstream section
of Buffer Analysis. With this change, you can no longer change the orientation of the network graph in the
settings.

Technical Details
Type New
4.3.15 Average Daily Usage in Buffer Proposal Calculation
With this feature, you can now decide if the average daily usage used for buffer proposal calculation in the
Schedule Buffer Proposal Calculation app is based on fixed interval or rolling interval.
Technical Details
Type New
4.3.16 API for Buffer Profile (Read)
The OData service Buffer Profile - Read (API_BUFFER_PROFILE_SRV) enables you to read buffer profile data,
such as, lead time factor and variability factor, and also for each plant, read spike horizon constant (SHC), spike
horizon DLT multiplier, spike threshold factor, and on-hand alert threshold factor of demand-driven relevant
products.

Technical Details
Type New
4.3.17 API for Buffer Sizing (Read, Write, Update)
The OData service Buffer Sizing - Read, Write, Update (API_API_BUFFERSIZING_SRV) enables you to read
and create buffer sizing data, such as, buffer proposals, average dailty usage (ADU), decoupled lead time
(DLT), demand and zone adjustments of demand-driven relevant products. It also enables you to update
demand and zone adjustment factors.
Technical Details
Type New
4.3.18 Predictive Material and Resource Planning
4.3.18.1 Predictive Material and Resource Planning (PMRP)
This feature enables you to to identify capacity issues related to demand-driven materials and solve them early
in the planning process. The following two new apps are available:
● Schedule pMRP Simulation Creation

In this app you define which set of data of your operative data should be considered for a simulation.
● Process pMRP Simulations

In this app you work with simulations. You can create multiple simulation, make changes to them and
compare them to decide what measure to solve capacity isssues works best for you.
Technical Details
Type New
Scope Item Demand-Driven Buffer Level Management (1Y2)
Application Component PP-PMR (predictive MRP)
Related Information
Predictive Material and Resource Planning (pMRP)
4.3.19 Production Planning and Detailed Scheduling
4.3.19.1 Value Help Authorizations in Production Planning

and Detailed Scheduling
Technical Details
Type Changed
Application Component SCM-APO-FCS-CSP, SCM-APO-MD-PPE, SCM-APO-PPS,

SCM-BAS-MD, LO-MD-BP

Additional Details
Please see SAP Notes 2794475 , 2794511 , 2794502 , 2794467 and 2794512 for a list of the
affected applications, transactions and application objects in Production Planning and Detailed Scheduling
(PP/DS).
Related Information
4.3.20 Kanban
4.3.20.1 Value Help Authorizations in Kanban
Technical Details
Type Changed
Scope Item 1E3 (Manufacturing with Kanban Supply into Production)
Application Component PP-KAB

Additional Details
Please see SAP Note 2793936 for a list of the affected transactions in Kanban.
Related Information
4.3.20.2 OData API for Production Supply Area (Create,

Update, Delete)
This service now additionally enables you to create, update, and delete production supply area (PSA) data in an
API call. The service is based on the OData protocol and allows you to query for specific PSAs with filter
parameters or by specifying the PSA key. The production supply area is an area on the shop floor where
material is provided that can be directly used for production. It is used, for example, in Kanban production
control and for material staging. The service can be consumed by external systems and user interfaces.
Technical Details
Type Changed

Related Information
Production Supply Area - Read, Write
4.3.20.3 OData API for Kanban Control Cycle (Create,

Update)
This service now additionally enables you to create and update kanban control cycles in an API call, and
includes lock and unlock operations on the corresponding kanban containers. The service is based on the
OData protocol and allows you to query for specific kanban control cycles and container data with filter
parameters or by specifying the relevant key. The service can be consumed by external systems and user
interfaces.
Technical Details
Type Changed
Related Information
Kanban Control Cycle - Read, Write
4.3.20.4 Set Kanban Container Status
With this app you can select or scan kanban containers to trigger kanban status changes. The kanban
processing cycle is controlled by setting containers to the appropriate status.

Technical Details
Type New
Application Component PP-KAB-FIO
Related Information
Set Kanban Container Status
4.3.20.5 Custom Fields and Custom Business Logic for

Kanban Control Cycles and Containers
You can use this feature to implement custom logic for Kanban control cycle maintenance and for container
check or change.
The following classic apps can be extended according to your business needs:
● Control Cycle Maintenance

● Kanban Board: Supply Source Overview
● Kanban Board: Demand Source Overview
In addition this feature enables data flow of custom fields from the kanban control cycle and container to
purchase order item in case the replenishment strategy for external procurement with purchase order is used.
You can use the Business Add-Ins (BAdIs) to change custom field values or to implement additional checks.
Technical Details
Type New

Additional Details
You can adapt the system with custom logic using the following Business Add-Ins:
Business Add-Ins (BAdIs) Business Context
Kanban Control Cycle Change Manufacturing: Kanban Control Cycle
Kanban Control Cycle Check Manufacturing: Kanban Control Cycle
Kanban Container Status Change Manufacturing: Kanban Container
Kanban Container Status Check Manufacturing: Kanban Container
Change Before Creation of Replenishment Element Manufacturing: Kanban Container
Related Information
App Extensibility for Kanban
4.3.20.6 Support of Production Supply Areas Managed in

EWM
Three features have been developed to support production supply areas managed in embedded EWM:
● Kanban Stock Transfer with EWM Warehouse Task

● External procurement with Kanban Summarized JIT Call
● Production Kanban with Repetitive Manufacturing
Technical Details
Type New

Additional Details
In Kanban, a new stock transfer replenishment strategy is available, allowing direct warehouse task creation in
embedded EWM.
See: Replenishment of EWM-Managed Storage Locations
The following Kanban replenishment strategies support destination bins:
● Stock Transfer with Warehouse Task

● External Procurement with Summarized JIT Calls
● In-house Production with Planned Orders
If a source production supply area but no source bin is maintained in the Kanban control cycle, the
replenishment strategy “Stock Transfer with Warehouse Task” will determine the source bin before creating the
EWM warehouse task.
In the Repetitive Manufacturing profile a flag to control synchronous/asynchronous goods movement posting
can be configured for the Kanban replenishment strategy In-house production with planned orders.
4.3.20.7 Output Management for Kanban Summarized JIT

Calls
SAP S/4HANA Output Control is now available for Kanban Summarized JIT Calls, alternatively you can choose
NAST-based output.
Output Control is based on Adobe® forms, form data providers, and BRF+ based configurations.
With the Schedule Kanban JIT Call Output app you can schedule background jobs for triggering the output of
Summarized JIT Calls.
Technical Details
Type New

Additional Details
You can start jobs to print or send e-mails for Kanban Summarized JIT calls immediately, or schedule them to
start later.
You can schedule background jobs for triggering the output of Summarized JIT Calls where the dispatch time is
set to scheduled.
The dispatch time is determined based on the settings in output control.
Related Information
Schedule Kanban JIT Call Output

Output Management for Summarized JIT Calls
4.4 Quality Management
4.4.1 Manage Defects
This feature enables you to view and manage defects using a simple interface that also includes a chart. You
can also navigate to view contextual information related to a defect.
Technical Details
Type New
Scope Item 2QN (Nonconformance Management)
Application Component QM-QN-DEF

4.4.2 Record Production Defects
With this feature you can record defects with the defect category Production Defect, which includes
production-relevant information from the production order.
Technical Details
Type New
Scope Item 2QN (Nonconformance Management), 1E1 (Quality Manage

ment in Discrete Manufacturing)
QM-QN-TSK
4.4.3 Define Follow-Up Actions for Quality Tasks
With this feature you can define follow-up actions for quality tasks in nonconformance management and use
them for further processing of the tasks. Only one follow-up action can be assigned to each task
The task type defines whether a task can be assigned a follow-up action. The task type is controlled by the
defect category. The follow-up action is assigned to a task with the task code.
Technical Details
Type New

Application Component QM-QN-TSK
4.4.4 Define Defect Categories
With this feature you can define customer-specific defect categories for defects recording. The defect category
controls the following settings:
● Using a customer-specific defect category, you can specify the task type for a defect. The task type
determines, for example, whether a follow-up action can be assigned to a task in a defect.
● You can add context-specific fields for a defect category. This requires knowledge of SAP Fiori Elements.
Defects of a customer-specific defect category can be selected via their defect category in the Process Defects
app.
You define a customer-specific defect category in Customizing for Quality Management under
Nonconformance Management Defects Recording Define Defect Categories .
Technical Details
Type New
4.4.5 Proposal of Defect Codes
Defect codes can be proposed using an analytical predictive model. The defect description and the detailed
description are taken into account for the determination of the proposals for defect codes. The
proposalfunction for defect codes is based on the Predictive Analytics Integrator (PAi), which integrates
predictive functions in business applications. The Predictive Analytics integrator comprises predictive models
and predictive scenarios.

Technical Details
Type New
4.4.6 New Functions for Quality Tasks
With this feature the following changes for quality tasks are available:
● You can create quality tasks for defects of all categories.

● The most important information like defect code or defect status is displayed.
● You can directly navigate from the task to the defect.
Technical Details
Type New
QM-QN-DEF
4.4.7 Manage Quality Tasks: Task Status
With this feature, you can now select one or more quality tasks and set the task status to In Process or
Complete.

Technical Details
Type New
4.4.8 Manage Workflows for Quality Task Processing
With this feature, you can activate the Assignment of Processor to Quality Task workflow to create notifications
for quality engineers and technicians when they are assigned as processors of tasks. The workflow also creates
new items for them in the My Inbox app. Here, you can not only view important information related to each
item, you can also, for example, claim or forward the item, and navigate to related apps. You can also configure
workflows for quality task processing.
Technical Details
Type New
4.4.9 Flexible In-Production Inspection
With this feature you can define that inspection lot characteristics are only created for released production
order operations. Hence, changes to unreleased order operations are still possible and are reflected in the
inspection lot as soon as they are released. This allows a flexible in-production inspection.

Technical Details
Type New
Application Component QM-IM (Quality Inspection)
You can activate this feature in Customizing under Quality Management Basic Settings Maintain Settings
at Client Level by setting the Late Characteristic Creation indicator under Further Settings.
Related Information
Inspections During Production
4.4.10 Value Help Authorizations in Quality Management
Technical Details
Type Changed
Application Component QM (Quality Management)
BC-SEC-AUT (Authorization Management)

Additional Details
Please see SAP Note 2805620 for a list of the affected transactions in Quality Management.
Related Information
4.4.11 Record Inspection Results in Table Form
With this feature you can record the inspection results for several master inspection characteristics for
different inspection lots in a table on a single screen. For example, you can use this feature if you have to
inspect one characteristic for several materials.
Technical Details
Type New
Scope Item 1E1 (Quality Management in Discrete Manufacturing), 1FM

(Quality Management in Procurement), 1MP (Quality Man
agement in Sales),
Application Component QM-IM-RR
Related Information
Record Inspection Results in Table Form

4.4.12 EWM-QM Integration Without Inspection Rules
With this feature you can integrate quality management in Extended Warehouse Management (EWM) without
inspection rules for the warehouse-dependent inspection object types 4 and 5.
 Note
QM without inspection rules is only possible in EWM embedded in SAP S/4HANA . It does not apply to
decentralized EWM based on SAP S/4HANA.
For the integration of quality management you can define that the inspection setup data of the Quality
Management view in the material master is used. An inspection rule is no longer required. In EWM the
inspection types 01 (Goods receipt insp. for purchase order), 04 (Goods receipt inspection from production),
08 (Stock transfer inspection) and 09 (Recurring inspection of batches) are supported.
● When using process Acceptance Sampling you specify the inspection type in the quality info record for the
material.
● When using process Presampling in Production you specify the inspection type in the Quality Management
view of the material master.
If you want to change your settings from inspections with inspection rules to inspections without inspection
rules, see SAP Note 2787302 .
Technical Details
Type New
Scope Item
Application Component SCM-EWM-QM
Additional Details
You can use quality inspection without inspection rule in the following processes:
● Acceptance sampling
● Inspections after goods receipt
● Presampling in production
● Stock inspections
● Recurring inspections

You define that you use QM without inspection rules in Customizing for Extended Warehouse Management
under Cross-Process Settings Quality Management Basics and Integration Define and Activate
Warehouse-Dependent IOTs :
● For Origin of the Inspection Lot Setup, you specify that no inspection rule is used and that the inspection lot
setup originates from the Quality Management tab of the material master.
● Under Insp. Planning w/o Rules, you specify the inspection settings and the quality inspection process.
Related Information
Configure Quality Management Without Inspection Rules
4.4.13 New Features for Record Inspection Results
With these features, you can perform the following operations in the Record Inspection Results app:
● View and edit the detailed data of a characteristic on the characteristic result details screen
● Add master inspection characteristics not planned in the inspection plan or routing to the selected
inspection lot and operation on the results recording screen
Technical Details
Type Changed
Scope Item 1E1 (Quality Management in Discrete Manufacturing), 1FM

(Quality Management in Procurement), 1MP (Quality Man
agement in Sales),
Application Component QM-IM-RR
Related Information
Record Inspection Results

4.4.14 Nonconformance Analytics
This feature enables you to analyze defects, based on time, master inspection characteristics, inspection
characteristics, material and plant, work center and plant, defect category, defect code and defect code group,
supplier, and customer. It also enables you to analyze quality notifications, based on time, material and plant,
and work center.
Technical Details
Type New
Scope Item 2V0 (SAP Fiori Analytical Apps for Quality Management)
Application Component QM-QC-IS
4.4.15 Nonconformance Detailed Analytics
This feature enables you to analyze recorded defects with or without notifications based on time, inspection
characteristics, master inspection characteristics, plant, material, work center, defect category, defect code
and defect code group, supplier, and customer. It also enables you analyze quality notifications in detail based
on notification type, supplier, and customer.
Technical Details
Type New
Scope Item 2V0 (SAP Fiori Analytical Apps for Quality Management)
Application Component QM-QC-IS

4.4.16 Defects in Quality Engineer Overview
With this feature, you now have three new analytical cards related to defects recording in the Quality Engineer
Overview app.
Technical Details
Type New
Scope Item 2QN (Nonconformance Management), 2V0 (SAP Fiori Ana

lytical Apps for Quality Management)
Application Component QM-FIO-IM
4.6.1 Make-to-Stock - Process Manufacturing Based on

Process Order (BJ8)
Use
This scope item provides a platform for process manufacturing, supporting processes in manufacturing for the
chemical, pharmaceutical, and food and beverage industries, as well as the batch-oriented electronics industry.

Technical Details
Type New
Scope Item BJ8 ( Make-to-Stock - Process Manufacturing Based on

Process Order )
Application Component PP
France, Great Britain, Hong Kong, Hungary, Indonesia, Ireland, India, Italy, Japan, South Korea, Luxembourg,
Mexico, Malaysia, Netherlands, Norway, New Zealand, Philippines, Sweden, Singapore, Thailand, Taiwan,
United States of America, South Africa
4.6.2 Analytics for Production Unit - Plan/Actual Production

Cost (2QW)
Use
● CDS-based Analytical Query Views provide the foundation to Manufacturing (Plan to Produce) analytics
content.
● "Delivery Items Shipped as Planned" CDS-based Analytical Query View (2CCSHPPLNDQRY) is available for
analytics consumption for Shipping Specialist analysis.
● "Manufacturing Order Item Scrap Amount" CDS-based Analytical Query View (2CCMFGORDITEMAMTQ) is
available for analytics consumption for Plant Manager analysis.
● "Current stock quantity and value" CDS-based Analytical Query View (2CCSHPPLNDQRY) is available for
analytics consumption for Inventory Analyst analysis.

● Customers can leverage the extensibility tool to build analytic application based on standard CDS view,
especially for boardroom for Manufacturing analytics topics.
Technical Details
Type Changed
Scope Item 2QW ( Analytics for Production Unit - Plan/Actual Produc

tion Cost )
4.6.3 Quality Management in Discrete Manufacturing (1E1)
Use
● Record Inspection Results app enhancement which includes graphical representation of results history and
statistical process control charts. Ability to upload attachments for an inspection characteristic when
recording results.
● Create additional inspection characteristics for the inspection lot that are not contained in the task list
during results recording. Create additional inspection characteristics even after an inspection lot has been
released.
● Inspection results for several master inspection characteristics for different inspection lots can be
recorded in tabular form on a single screen.
● Flexible inspections via characteristic creation on release of order operation. Checks whether inspection
lot characteristics should only be created for released order operations.

Technical Details
Type Changed
Scope Item 1E1 ( Quality Management in Discrete Manufacturing )
Application Component QM
Africa
4.6.4 Predictive Analytics Model Training - Supply Chain

(20N)
Use
● Updated with use case for "Defect Code Proposal"
Technical Details
Type Changed

Scope Item 20N ( Predictive Analytics Model Training - Supply Chain )
4.6.5 Make-to-Order Production - Process Manufacturing

(3OK)
Use
This scope item encompasses the Make-to-Order process of batch-managed finished goods from customer
quotation (optional), sales order creation, production planning, and execution using process orders to the
delivery and billing of the customer.
Technical Details
Type New
Scope Item 3OK ( Make-to-Order Production - Process Manufacturing )

Germany, United States of America
4.6.6 Tank Trailer Filling with Residuals (42N)
Use
This scope item supports the filling process of the manufactured product into the tank trailer from silos. This
filling process also considers the quantity of existing residuals in the tank trailer.
Technical Details
Type New
Scope Item 42N ( Tank Trailer Filling with Residuals )

4.6.7 Make-to-Stock Production - Discrete Manufacturing
(BJ5)
Use
● The new Maintain PIRS app enables the creation and monitoring of planned independent requirements
(PIRs) for up to 50 materials at a time in the long term, either in months or weeks, and mass maintenance
for these materials is also possible. With the function of download/upload PIRs is a function available to
create or upload a csv file for the creation of PIRs.
Technical Details
Type Changed
Scope Item BJ5 ( Make-to-Stock Production - Discrete Manufacturing )
Africa

4.6.8 Mass Change Manufacturing Bill of Material for
Production (3LP)
Use
This scope item covers the change-master-controlled change process for materials and components in the
manufacturing bills of materials.
Technical Details
Type New
Scope Item 3LP ( Mass Change Manufacturing Bill of Material for Pro
duction )

4.6.9 Make-to-Stock Production with Variant Configuration
(21D)
Use
● Enhanced user experience through enabling the grouping of characteristics with variant configuration.
Technical Details
Type Changed
Scope Item 21D ( Make-to-Stock Production with Variant Configuration )

4.6.10 Nonconformance Management (2QN)
Use
This scope item describes the management of nonconformances. The user enters defect data and documents
defect processing. Afterwards, the quality engineer analyzes the current defect situation, and if needed,
creates additional, manual inspection lots.
Technical Details
Type New
Scope Item 2QN ( Nonconformance Management )

4.6.11 Just-In-Time Supply to Customer from Stock (2EM)
Use
This scope item describes the Just-in-Time process (Supply to Customer from stock) for component
manufacturers. The business process encompasses steps from receiving Just-In-Time calls to billing.
● Supports the business process for Just-In-Time supply to customers from stock
● Enables the visibility of fulfillment progress and alerts based on errors in processing
● Helps to process the supply efficiently
● Provides flexibility through configuration and extensibility
Technical Details
Type New
Scope Item 2EM ( Just-In-Time Supply to Customer from Stock )

4.6.12 Rework Processing - Work-in-Process (BJQ)
Use
● A new Master Data script is available that explains the creation of a Reference Operation Set.
Technical Details
Type Changed
Scope Item BJQ ( Rework Processing - Work-in-Process )
Africa

4.6.13 Make-to-Stock with Co- and By-Products - Process
Manufacturing (3L7)
Use
This scope item enables production planning in make-to-stock scenarios with joint production capability (the
process of manufacturing two or more products in a single production run (for example, co- and by-products
along with the main product)).
Technical Details
Type New
Scope Item 3L7 ( Make-to-Stock with Co- and By-Products - Process

Manufacturing )

4.6.14 Inbound Storage Tank Management - Process
Manufacturing (3UK)
Use
This scope item enables the storage tank management process, which supports the procurement of a new
batch into the day tank and then mixing of this new batch with an existing batch in the main tank with a special
mixing process order type.
Technical Details
Type New
Scope Item 3UK ( Inbound Storage Tank Management - Process Manu

facturing )

4.6.15 SAP Fiori Analytical Apps for Quality Management
(2V0)
Use
This scope item provides overview pages and analytical apps for the quality technician and quality engineer
showing the most important information related to inspection and task management. Analytical apps enable
in-depth analysis of the quality situation.
Technical Details
Type New
Scope Item 2V0 ( SAP Fiori Analytical Apps for Quality Management )

4.6.16 Make-to-Stock - Process Manufacturing Based on
Production Order (2UG)
Use
The Maintain PIRs app enables the creation and monitoring of planned independent requirements (PIRs) for up
to 50 materials at a time, in the long term, either in months or weeks. You can perform mass maintenance for
these materials. You can create or upload a csv file for PIR creation with the function of download/upload PIRs.
Technical Details
Type Changed
Scope Item 2UG ( Make-to-Stock - Process Manufacturing Based on

Production Order )
Africa

4.6.17 Change Manufacturing Bill of Material for Production
(3LO)
Use
This scope item covers the process of executing change-number-managed BOM updates in the production
process.
Technical Details
Type New
Scope Item 3LO ( Change Manufacturing Bill of Material for Production )

4.6.18 Make-to-Order Production - Finished Goods Sales and
Final Assembly (BJE)
Use
● Improved usability with intuitive confirmation of production operation.

● Added new SAP Fiori App for Post Goods Receipt for Order. With this feature, you can post the receipt of
goods with reference to a production order. If a material is delivered for a production order, it is important
for all the departments involved that the goods receipt entry in the system references this production
order.
● Simplified quotation handling at the start of the process. Alignment with scope item "Sales Order
Processing with Customer Down Payment" (BKJ).
● Use of standard quotation type and sales order type, as well as billing plan of BKJ. Simplified invoice
handling at process end.
Technical Details
Type Changed
Scope Item BJE ( Make-to-Order Production - Finished Goods Sales and

Final Assembly )
Africa

4.6.19 Make-to-Order Production with Variant Configuration
(1YT)
Use
● Enhanced user experience through enabling the grouping of characteristics with variant configuration.
● Activation of billing plan in sales order for down-payment handling (optional).
Technical Details
Type Changed
Scope Item 1YT ( Make-to-Order Production with Variant Configuration )
Africa

4.6.20 Manufacturing with Kanban Supply into Production
(1E3)
Use
● The Maintain PIRs app enables the creation and monitoring of planned independent requirements (PIRs)
for up to 50 materials at a time in the long term either in months or weeks. With the app, you can perform
mass maintenance for these materials. You can create or upload csv files for the creation of PIRs with the
function of download/upload PIRs.
● New SAP Fiori app Set Kanban Container Status lets the user change the status of a Kanban container
easily and quickly to trigger material replenishment.
● Enhanced best practice content with additional Kanban replenishment strategies.
● New SAP Fiori app Set Kanban Container Status lets the user change the status of a Kanban container
easily and quickly to trigger material replenishment.
● Enhanced best practice content with additional Kanban replenishment strategies.
Technical Details
Type Changed
Scope Item 1E3 ( Manufacturing with Kanban Supply into Production )
Africa

4.6.21 Demand-Driven Replenishment Planning and

Execution (2QI)
Use
● Consideration of rounding values of products for replenishment.
Technical Details
Type Changed
Scope Item 2QI ( Demand-Driven Replenishment Planning and Execu

tion )

4.6.22 Production Capacity Evaluation (31L)
Use
● Visualization of capacities and loads on work center capacities in bucket view.

● Visualization of the already dispatched operations and the planner’s backlog of operations to be
dispatched.
● Self Service Configuration UI for Shift Definition of Workcenters.
● The Maintain PIRS app enables the creation and monitoring of planned independent requirements (PIRs)
for up to 50 materials at a time in the long term either in months or weeks.
● You can also perform mass maintenance for these materials.
● You can create or upload csv files for PIR creation with the function of download/upload PIRs.
● Capacity Evaluation for Process Manufacturing.
Technical Details
Type Changed
Scope Item 31L ( Production Capacity Evaluation )
Africa

4.6.23 Production Capacity Leveling (3LQ)
Use
The process of production capacity leveling enables the planning and scheduling (dispatching) of production
and process orders and operations.
Technical Details
Type New
Scope Item 3LQ ( Production Capacity Leveling )

4.6.24 Make-to-Order Production - Semifinished Goods
Planning and Assembly (1BM)
Use
● The Maintain PIRs app enables the creation and monitoring of planned independent requirements (PIRs)
for up to 50 materials at a time, in the long term, either in months or weeks. With the app, you can perform
mass maintenance for these materials. You can create or upload csv files for PIR creation using the
function of download/upload PIRs.
Technical Details
Type Changed
Scope Item 1BM ( Make-to-Order Production - Semifinished Goods Plan

ning and Assembly )
Africa

4.6.25 Make-to-Stock with Silo Material - Process
Manufacturing (3UL)
Use
This scope item focuses on more complex process manufacturing scenarios with silo materials and phantom
assemblies. Silo materials are generally stored in big silos or tanks. The silos are modeled as separate storage
locations.
Technical Details
Type New
Scope Item 3UL ( Make-to-Stock with Silo Material - Process Manufac

turing )

4.6.26 Demand-Driven Buffer Level Management (1Y2)
Use
● Extended calculation of average daily usage (ADU) of products, taking into account future demand based
on planned independent requirements (PIRs).
● Enablement of mass adoption for parameters in the Manage Buffer Levels app.
● Predictive Material and Resource Planning: This feature enables you to reduce inventory-carrying cost by
enabling preproduction for semi-finished materials and changes to sources of supply.
● In the Process pMRP Simulations app, you can use the multilevel Material Simulation view to get an
overview of the multilevel bill of material. You can solve capacity issues for a particular component by
preproducing component materials or by changing the source of supply.
● In the Schedule pMRP Simulation Creation app, you can now create reference data only, based on data for
particular top-level materials.
Technical Details
Type Changed
Scope Item 1Y2 ( Demand-Driven Buffer Level Management )
Africa

5 Manufacturing for Production
Engineering and Operations
5.1 Manufacturing Engineering and Process Planning
5.1.1 Manage Production Operators
With this feature you can view the the list of production operators assigned to a plant and work center
combination. You can view the current workload, qualifications, and team information of a production operator,
and assign one or more operation activities to the production operator, if required.
Technical Details
Type New
Application Component PP-PEO
Additional Details
With this app, you can view the list of production operators assigned to a plant and work center combination.
For each production operator, you can view details such as user, default work center, the total number of
operation activities assigned, and the time it takes to perform them. You can also identify if the production
operator is currently idle or at work. Using this information, you can analyze the current workload and
qualifications of each production operator and either assign or unassign operation activities, and define the
duration of labor for each of those operation activities.
Using the new features available in this app, you can:
● Assign operation activities to production operators.

For more information, see How to Assign Operation Activities to Production Operators.
● Assign the duration of labor for the operation activities assigned to the production operator.

Manufacturing for Production Engineering and Operations PUBLIC 383
5.1.2 Manage Production Versions
This feature enables you to include different master data for planning and execution in the production version.
Technical Details
Type Changed
Additional Details
● Specify different master data for planning and execution while creating a production version.
For more information, see How to Create Production Versions
5.1.3 Monitor Shop Floor Master Data
With this feature you can monitor planned orders for which no valid production master data exists. You can use
search criteria to filter for specific planned orders with production version issues. Also, you can navigate to a
details page where you can view the details of the production version and solve the issues by creating a shop
floor BOM version or routing, for example.
Technical Details
Type New

384 PUBLIC Manufacturing for Production Engineering and Operations
Available As Of SAP S4/HANA 1909
Additional Details
You must enter the relevant plant in the Monitor Shop Floor Master Data app, and then you can filter the
planned orders by material , MRP controller, or production supervisor. You can define a horizon and search for
all planned orders with opening dates that lie within this horizon. If you leave this filter blank, the system
searches for planned orders with opening dates on the current date or in the past. Also, this app analyzes the
opening dates of the planned orders for the material and displays the earliest planned order date. Furthermore,
you can navigate to a details page where you can view the details of the production version and solve the issues
by creating a shop floor BOM version or routing, for example.
● Solve shop floor master data issues.

For more information, see How to Solve Shop Floor Master Data Issues.
5.1.4 Manage Engineering Changes
With this feature you can use multiple new functions and features that are available for managing engineering
changes.
Technical Details
Type Changed
Additional Details
● Manage date-effective engineering changes.

● Create planning BOMs from a source date-effective or version-controlled engineering BOM.

● Create shop floor BOM versions from a source date-effective or version-controlled planning BOM.
● Create a production version for the planning BOM.
5.1.5 Additional PEO Features in VEMP
This feature enables you to assign manufacturing substitutes to a material during the EBOM to MBOM
handover in VEMP. In both the source and target panels, you can now also see which items are phantom
assemblies. A new column entitled Phantoms is available providing this information. You can also convert an
assembly to a phantom assembly.
Technical Details
Type Changed
Related Information
Additional Features in Visual Enterprise Manufacturing Planner
5.1.6 Manage Shop Floor Routings
With this feature you can create and manage your shop floor routings. You can now also use multiple new
functions and features that are available for maintaining shop floor routings.
Technical Details
Type Changed

Application Component PP-PEO-SFR
Additional Details
Using the new features available in the shop floor routing, you can:
● Enable a shop floor routing version for flexible processing.

For more information on flexible processing, see Flexible Processing.
● Select a workspace more easily using the new workspace selection dialog box.
● Select an MBOM more easily using the new MBOM selection dialog box.
● Use the enhanced features for maintaining work instructions.
For more information, see How to Maintain Work Instructions for Operation Activities.
● Maintain effectivity ranges at routing header level.
For more information, see How to Create a Routing with Parameter Effectivity.
● Enhanced favorites options with referenceable objects.
For more information, see Working with Referenceable Templates.
5.1.7 Manage Rework Routings
With this feature you can create and manage your rework routings. You can now also use multiple new
functions and features that are available for maintaining rework routings.
Technical Details
Type Changed

Additional Details
Using the new features available in the shop floor routing, you can:
● Maintain multiple rework routings per plant.

● Specify one or more defect codes for which the rework routing is valid.
● Create multiple operations for each rework routing.
● Assign all objects such as work instructions, PRTs, or documents, for example, to operation activities.
For detailed information on how to create rework routings, see How to Create Rework Routings
Related Information
Unplanned Rework
5.1.8 Manage Planning Routings
This feature enables you to create a simplified routing that you can use together with the planning BOM for
planning purposes long before the complex shop floor BOM and routing are completed. This means that you
can perform material requirements planning and capacity planning prior to the completion of the final shop
floor BOM and routing.
Technical Details
Type New
Additional Details
Using the planning routing, you can ensure that all the necessary components will be available for execution
including those components with very long procurement lead times. The planning routing also enables you to
make sure that sufficient work center capacity will also be available when needed. You can create simple, date-
effective planning routings or you can create a planning routing with parameter effectivity. In this case, you

specify the effectivity type at routing creation and then you can only select materials or version-controlled
planning BOMs that also have this effectivity type.
Using the new features, you can:
● Create a planning routing for a date-effective planning BOM (for non-unitized materials).
● Create a planning routing for a version-controller planning BOM (for unitized materials).
● Define the critical work center at routing header level that represents the capacity bottleneck and that is to
be used for capacity planning.
● Use change numbers to manage changes to the planning routing.
● Create operations.
● Assign the appropriate work centers to operations and maintain standard values as necessary.
● Assign one or multiple planning BOMs.
● Perform component assignment at operation level for each assigned planning BOM.
● Display the phantom assembly hierarchy in the component assignment workspace for date-effective
planning BOMs.
For more detailed information, see How to Create Planning Routings
Related Information
Planning with Date-Effective Planning BOMs

Planning with Unitized Parameter-Effective Planning BOMs
5.1.9 Manage Order-Specific Shop Floor Routings
This feature enables you to change a released production order that is currently in execution by creating an
order-specific shop floor routing. You can create the order-specific shop floor routing in the Manage Production
Operations and Manage Production Orders apps. The changes you make are only relevant to the production
order for which you create the order-specific routing.
Technical Details
Type New
PP-PEO-SFR
Application Component

Additional Details
Using the new features available, you can:
● Create order-specific shop floor routings.

For more information, see How to Create Order-Specific Routings.
● Change the structure of the routing by adding new operations, for example.
● Change the components assigned to the routing. That is, you can add new components or deleted existing
ones.
● Change the components assignments to operation activities, as necessary.
For more information, see How to Change Order-Specific Routings.
Related Information
Creating Order-Specific Routings
5.2 Extended Production Process Setup
5.3 Extended Production Operations
5.3.1 Production Control
5.3.1.1 Manage Production Orders
This feature enables you to monitor the progress of production. You can now also use new functions and
features that are available for making order-specific changes to master data.
Technical Details
Type Changed
Application Component PP-PEO-SFE

Additional Details
● Trigger the creation of an order-specific shop floor routing for shop floor orders that are released and
currently in execution.
For more information, see Creating Order-Specific Routings.
● Navigate to the Manage Order-Specific Shop Floor Routings app to make the necessary changes.
● Determine the processing type determined in the master data for a production order. The processing type
may be sequential or flexible.
For more information, see Flexible Processing.
Related Information
Order Change Management
5.3.1.2 Manage Production Operations
This feature enables you to monitor the progress of production. You can now also use new functions and
features that are available for making order-specific changes to master data.
Technical Details
Type Changed

Additional Details
● Trigger the creation of an order-specific shop floor routing for operations of shop floor orders that are
released and currently in execution.
For more information, see Creating Order-Specific Routings.
● Navigate to the Manage Order-Specific Shop Floor Routings app to make the necessary changes.
Related Information
Order Change Management
5.3.2 Production Execution
5.3.2.1 Assign Work
With this app, you can now unassign a single production operator or a selection of production operators from
an operation activity that you select. This provides greater flexibility when you want to change the existing
assignment of production operators to a particular operation activity.
Technical Details
Type Changed
Related Information
Assign Work

5.3.2.2 Enhancements for Rework
You can now use a range of new features that are available for rework in extended production operations and
quality management. For example, you can specify a rework routing and its placement when processing
defects that require a rework task with a follow-up action. In addition, when performing rework operation
activities, you can add unplanned materials if you need more or different materials to perform rework, or if
flexible processing has been enabled in the shop floor routing for the production order, you can start rework
operation activities without waiting for the predecessor operation to be completed.
Technical Details
Type Changed
Additional Details
Rework Routing Selection and Placement

While processing defects in the Process Defects app, you may need to create a quality task for rework. In such
cases, you navigate to the Process Quality Tasks app, where you specify task code 015 for Rework. For this
rework task, you can now define parameters for the follow-up action by choosing the Select Rework Routing
button, which appears in the Process Quality Tasks app after you have selected the rework task. The system
displays a list of rework routings linked to the defect code recorded by the production operator. Here you can
select the rework routing you require and specify after which operation in the current production order you
want to insert the operations of the rework routing.
For more information, see Select Rework Routing and How to Process Defects.
Add Unplanned Materials

When performing rework operation activities, you can now add unplanned materials, for example, if you need to
assemble more of one material or a different material than originally planned. Depending on the material's
assembly type, you may be prompted to enter a serial number or quantity.
For more information, see How to Add Unplanned Materials.
Start Rework Operation Activities Independent of Predecessor Operation

If Flexible Processing has been enabled in the shop floor routing for the production order, you can start rework
operation activities without waiting for the predecessor operation to be completed.

For more information, see Flexible Processing
Related Information
Unplanned Rework
Manage Rework Routings [page 387]
5.3.2.3 Perform Operation Activity
This feature enables you to perform operation activities. You can now also use new functions and features that
are available for production execution.
Technical Details
Type Changed
Additional Details
● Process operation activities for serialized materials without explicitly having to navigate to the next or
previous operation activity (these buttons have been removed). When you complete an operation activity,
the status of the serialized material at this activity changes from In Process to Completed. The next
operation activity is displayed automatically or you are prompted to select the operation activity you want
to perform next if multiple activities are possible.
● Perform work in serialized execution without having to follow the defined sequence of operations. This
feature is enabled if the Flexible Processing checkbox has been selected in the shop floor routing
associated with the production order. Note that other functionalities (such as scheduling, calculation of
scrap-adjusted quantities, and so on) still take the operation sequence into consideration. Essentially this
feature allows production operators to work on operations in parallel and in any sequence.

 Note
If cross-operation dependencies have been defined, you will only be able to start those operation
activities that have to be completed first.
● Add an unplanned material if you need to assemble a material that is not one of the components in the bill
of material associated with the routing.
● Select the stock type to which you want to return a component when disassembling a component.
Related Information
How to Add Unplanned Materials

Flexible Processing
How to Disassemble Components
5.3.2.4 Check Major Assembly Projects
This app enables you to check major assembly projects. You can now also use new functions and features that
are available for checking major assembly projects.
Technical Details
Type Changed
Additional Details
● Filter the list of major assembly projects by issue type.

● Check for the following types of issues:
○ BOM explosion issues
○ Activity duration issues

○ Scheduling issues
○ Nested major assembly issues
○ Material-type-related issues
Related Information
Check Major Assembly Projects
5.3.2.5 Manage Major Assembly Projects
With this app, you can display an overview of your major assembly projects based on a range of filters. You can
drill down into the detailed view for a major assembly project, open the project in the Project Builder, and
navigate to the Check Major Assembly Projects app to resolve any issues. In addition, you can create projects
based on the manufacturing BOM hierarchy for specific parameter effectivity values.
Technical Details
Type New
Additional Details
Reference points are not required if you use this app to create a project. The app explodes the end-item BOM
hierarchy and creates a project for the end item, networks for every major assembly, and network activities for
every installation kit.
Related Information
Manage Major Assembly Projects

Check Major Assembly Projects

6 Just-In-Time Processing
6.1 Next Generation Just-In-Time (JIT) Supply to

Production
This feature enables the following processes:
● Using the Manage Control Cycles app, the Production Planner - Lean Manufacturing can create, modify,
view and filter new JIT control cycles for each material used in the production supply areas (PSAs). These
control cycles can be used to raise requests for material replenishment from the warehouse.
● Using the Request Replenishments for Control Cycles app, the Production Operator – Lean
Manufacturing can raise JIT calls using new JIT control cycles to request material replenishments for the
PSAs.
● Using the Transfer Stock for JIT Supply to Production app, the Warehouse Clerk can prioritize and fulfil the
open replenishment requests (JIT calls) in a timely manner.
Technical Details
Type New
To use this feature optimally, make the following setting in Customizing under Logistics Execution Just-in-
Time Processing (New) JIT Supply to Production .

Just-In-Time Processing PUBLIC 397
7 R&D/Engineering
7.1 Enterprise Portfolio and Project Management
7.1.1 Project Financial Control
7.1.1.1 Change Document Enablement in Grouping WBS

Elements
This feature enables you to get an audit trail of any document changes to the Grouping WBS Elements. This
change is relevant to transactions GRM4 and GRM5.
Technical Details
Type New
Application Component PS-STR
Additional Details
The change document enablement is relevant for new data and changes to existing data.
7.1.1.2 Consistency Check for a Range of Grouping WBS

Elements
This feature now enables you to carry out consistency checks on Grouping WBS elements for multiple WBS
elements. You can view the result in the list viewer (ALV grid). This change is relevant to transaction GRM7.

398 PUBLIC R&D/Engineering
Technical Details
Type New
7.1.1.3 New transaction for Grouping WBS Elements
This feature enables you to carry out the assignment of WBS elements, plant and MRP Area to Grouping WBS
Elements. The new transaction introduced is GRM8.
Technical Details
Type New
Additional Details
You can access this transaction from SAP Menu Logistics Project System Material Planning
Requirements Grouping Maintain Grouping WBS Elements
A new RFC function module MAINTAIN_GROUPING_WBS_PARAMS is created to:
● Carry out a mass insertion or deletion of WBS elements

R&D/Engineering PUBLIC 399
● Carry out a mass insertion or deletion of validity area of WBS elements
7.1.2 Commercial Project Management
7.1.2.1 Mass Update of Team Members
With this feature, you can use the Add and Delete Team Member from Commercial Projects (/CPD/
PWS_MASS_TEAM_UPDATE) report to assign business partners to roles or remove business partners from roles
in a commercial project team.
Technical Details
Type New
Application Component CA-CPD-WS (Project Workspace)
You can define project team roles for commercial projects, in Customizing under Commercial Project
Management Master Data Commercial Project Define Role Profiles .
Related Information
Teams and Roles

7.1.2.2 Audit Log of Changes to Planning
With this feature, you can enable an audit log of changes to financial plans based on information stored in the
real-time BW InfoCube /CPD/PFP_R01. If you enable auditing for the InfoCube, the following information is
stored along with other changes to the InfoCube:
● The user that made the change, and the time at which it was made
● The audit mode (load or plan) in which the change was made
● The infoObject for which the change was made
Once you enable auditing, you can retrieve an audit log through a BEx query that suits your business needs.
Technical Details
Type New
Application Component CA-CPD-FP (Project Cost and Revenue Planning)
Additional Details
For more information on how to enable auditing, see SAP Note 2770658 .
Auditing will only apply to data changes after auditing is enabled.
If you enable auditing for the real-time InfoCube, you may observe slower performance for InfoCube-related
operations. Moreover, compression of the real-time InfoCube may also be affected.

Related Information
Change Logging
7.1.2.3 Progress Reporting from Multiple Progress Versions
With this feature, you can view the progress of a commercial project from the results of different progress
analysis versions. Users can choose the progress analysis version of their choice, in the Overview page of a
commercial project.
Technical Details
Type New
For reporting the progress of commercial projects, you can define progress analysis versions in Customizing for
Commercial Project Management, under Analytics Set Up Progress Analysis Versions in Analytics .
Related Information
Progress Analysis
7.1.2.4 Handling Change Requests in Active Versions
This feature allows you to handle the delay in approved change requests by re-baselining the active version.
Normally, it is not possible to create a new baseline version if the active version contains approved costs from
change request alternatives.
However, this is now possible by setting a status for the approved change request. This in turn changes the
status of the approved change request alternative.

Technical Details
Type New
Application Component CA-CPD-FP (Project Cost and Revenue Planning)
Additional Details
To defer inclusion of approved change request alternatives when creating a new baseline version, set the
system status of the corresponding change requests to Flag for deletion. This also sets the status of the
change request alternative to In Progress thereby allowing the creation of a new baseline. However, to
include approved change requests into the forecast, you must manually reset the status of the change request
alternative and the change request.
7.1.2.5 Project Variance
With this feature, project managers can quickly identify and address critical situations in projects that have
exceeded certain variance thresholds. Such projects can also be automatically grouped into a new category in
the Cross-Project View. In the Overview screen, the project variance report helps to narrow down focus to the
specific structure elements where the variance has occurred.
Technical Details
Type New

Additional Details
For more information, see SAP Note 2770478 .
Related Information
Project Variance
7.1.2.6 Flexible Definition of a User's Projects
The Cross-Project View provides a default category with a user's projects (projects to which the user is
assigned).
This feature provides the following:
● Automatically removes projects that are complete, from the My Projects category
● Allows you to define additional criteria to filter projects in this category, through a business add-in
implementation
Technical Details
Type New
Additional Details
For more information, see SAP Note 2821881 .
To define conditions that affect the list of projects in the My Projects category, you can create your own
implementation of the method FILTER_MASTER_PROJECTof BAdI: Custom Settings in Commercial Project

Header, in Customizing for Commercial Project Management Master Data Commercial Project
Business Add-Ins .
7.2 Integrated Product Development for Discrete Industries
7.2.1 Access Control Management for Change Master
With this feature you can provide direct controlled access for your users, both internal and external, to change
masters. This way you can ensure that users can only access change masters that are necessary for their work,
thus protecting your data.
Technical Details
Type New
Application Component PLM-WUI-APP-ACC
To enable the use of this feature, make sure to activate access control management for the change number
object in the Customizing activity Activate Object Types for PLM Authorization Check under Logistics -
General Product Lifecycle Management (PLM) PLM Web User Interface PLM Web Applications PLM
Authorizations and Access Control Context .
Related Information
Change Master Integration with Access Control Management

7.2.2 Access Control Management for Bill of Material
This feature enables you to control the access to specific material BOM by selected users using access control
management.
Technical Details
Type New
Application Component LO-MD-BOM
Related Information
Access Control Management
7.2.3 Assignment of Change Record to BOM
With this feature, you can assign engineering change record to bill of material.
Technical Details
Type New

Related Information
Assigning Change Record
7.2.4 Maintain Variable Size Item for BOM
With this feature, you can maintain data that is specific to variable-size items and document items. If you enter
variable-size item data, the system calculates the quantity. All calculations in BOMs are based on the
international system of units.
Technical Details
Type New
7.2.5 Deletion of Multiple BOM Items
With this feature, you can now delete multiple BOM items.
Technical Details
Type New

7.2.6 Business Event Handling in Bill of Material
This feature enables you to handle the business events for bill of material by using the SAP object type
BillOfMaterial.
Technical Details
Type New
Related Information
Business Events Handling
7.2.7 Value Help Authorizations in Bill of Material
Technical Details
Type Changed

Additional Details
Please see SAP Note 2809026 for a list of the affected applications, transactions and application objects in
Bill of Material.
Related Information
7.2.8 Document Search
With this feature, you can search documents using the search function in the SAP Fiori launchpad. You can use
the document search to search for an existing document info record (DIR) with different attributes.
Technical Details
Type New
Application Component CA-DMS
Related Information
Document Search

7.2.9 Assignment of Phantom Items to Routing
With this feature, you can now view the phantom items in multilevel hierarchy and perform the component
allocation of the phantom items to the routing.
Technical Details
Type New
Application Component PLM-VEP-VMP
Related Information
How to Assign Phantom Items to Routing
7.2.10 Define Phantom Items in Assembly
With this feature, you can define an item as phantom or a phantom item as non-phantom item depending on
your requirement.
Technical Details
Type New
Application Component PLM-VEP-VMP

Related Information
How to Define Phantom Items in Assembly
7.2.11 AVC - Enhanced Integration with Purchasing
With this feature you can:
● Use variant conditions in Purchasing to define surcharges and discounts for configurable materials that are
procured externally. The surcharges and discounts depend on the values assigned to the characteristics in
the sales order or (for material variants) the material master.
● Print a purhase order document with configuration data (characteristics and its values).
Technical Details
Type New
Scope Item 2XU (2XU)
Application Component LO-VCH
7.2.12 AVC - Enhanced Integration with Production Order
● Display configuration of the material being produced using the Manage Production Order app.
● View the variant configuration for production order items from a production order factsheet.
● View the variant configuration for a production order header linked to the operations of a workcenter in
Managed Workcenter Capacity app.
Technical Details
Type New

7.2.13 AVC - Apply Mass Changes to Material Variant
With this feature you can change the configuration for multiple material variants at the same time, when a
configuration model is changed. For example, a new characteristic is included in a class and this characteristic
is analyzed using object dependencies. Alternatively, object dependencies are changed and calculated
characteristic values change as a result. At the same time, multiple material variants, which would now have to
be changed, exist in order to adjust the stored configurations to the new model.
Technical Details
Type New
7.2.14 Enterprise Search for Classification Characteristic
This features provides an enterprise search to find classification characteristics based on the following basic
attributes:
● Characteristic name
● Characteristic description
● Characteristic value
● Characteristic value description

Technical Details
Type New
Application Component CA-CL-CHR
7.2.15 Enterprise Search for Classification Class
This features provides an enterprise search to find classification classes based on the following basic
attributes:
● Class name
● Class description
● Keyword
● Characteristics (name and description) assigned to the class
Technical Details
Type New
Application Component CA-CL-CLS
7.2.16 AVC - Handling Inconsistencies for Multi-level VC

Models
With this feature, you are able to see additional information to help resolve an inconsistent configuration,
including object dependency documentation.

Technical Details
Type New
Scope Item 22T (Set up Configurable Bill of Material using Variant Con
figuration)
7.2.17 AVC - Enhanced Functionality for Maintenance of

Characteristic Groups
With this feature you will have the following improvements for characteristic group maintenance: view the
number of characteristic assigned to a characteristic group, re-sort the assigned characteristics of a
characteristic group, re-sort the assigned characteristic groups of a configuration profile, move single or
multiple assigned characteristics of a characteristic group to the top or bottom position, move single or
multiple assigned characteristic groups of a configuration profile to the top or bottom position.
Technical Details
Type New
figuration)
7.2.18 Enhancements to Manage Engineering Changes
With this app, you can now do the following in a change process:
● identify where a selected material or BOM is used.

● assign a specific user to a workflow task.

● enable product structure variants for change records.
● support context-based access control management.
● support parameter effectivity based change number.
Technical Details
Type Changed
Scope Item 1NF (Engineering Change Management with Change Re

cords)
Application Component PLM-FIO-CR
Related Information
Manage Engineering Changes
7.2.19 AVC - Syntax Enhancements
This feature provides syntax enhancements for object dependencies.
Technical Details
Type New
figuration)

Related Information
Syntax per Characteristic Type
7.2.20 AVC - Enablement of BAdIs for the Advanced

Configuration Engine
With this feature, you can implement the following BAdIs:
VCH_HL_PRE_VALIDATE_ASSIGN
This BAdI allows you to make changes to all the characteristic value assignments on every active instance of
the configuration state (including all not validated changes) since the last configuration validation roundtrip.
VCH_HL_POST_VALIDATE_ASSIGN
This BAdI allows you to make changes to all the characteristic value assignments on every active instance of
the configuration state directly after the model was configured.
VCH_HL_MD_DOMAIN_MODIFY
This BAdI allows you to change all characteristic value domains of each configurable material of a configuration
model when this material is loaded into the active configuration.
Technical Details
Type New
figuration)
7.2.21 Integration of Order Engineering Workbench
This feature enables you to use the Order Engineering Workbench, supporting classical Variant Configuration
(LO-VC).
● Intuitive user interface (drag and drop, context menus, etc.)

● Versioning of order BOMs and characteristic value assignments

● Reimport of versions (rollback functionality)
● Reuse of previously created order BOMs for similar sales orders in the past
Technical Details
Type New
7.2.22 AVC - Enhancements for the Simulation Environment
With this feature, the following new functions are available for the Simuate Configuration Models app:
● New trace functionality, showing details of how object dependencies are processed in the configuration
engine
● Reload master data
● Improved handling of BOMs and routings
Technical Details
Type New
figuration)
Application Component LO-VCH-FIO-SIM

7.3 Integrated Product Development for Process Industries
7.3.1 Contribution-based Formulation
With this feature you can see the formula items in a hierarchical structure and understand how they contribute
to the primary output in terms of nutrients, cost, or composition. For nutrients and cost, you can define a
dedicated reference quantity that differs from the Calculation Parameters. You can create your own layouts and
save them so the most frequently needed information is always at hand. You can modify the recipe and see the
updated contribution values immediately.
Technical Details
Type New
Scope Item 1QC (Formulation - Recipe Development)
Application Component PLM-WUI-RCP
Additional Details
With this feature, you can perform the following tasks:
● Get a hierarchical view for better understanding the contribution of each formula item to the primary
output.
● Calculate the cost contribution of each formula item using a dedicated reference quantity.
● Calculate the nutrient contribution of each formula item to the primary output or to a stage output using a
dedicated reference quantity. Nutrient loss profiles are taken into consideration.
● Calculate the composition of each component and show how each formula item adds up these
components to the primary output.
● See basic intraformula calculations (eg. Mass per PO) for each formula item.
● Modify the recipe and see the updated contribution values in real time.
● Manage layouts and create user-specific layouts for the contribution view.
● Export the contents of the contribution view to a spreadsheet.
● Reorder columns within the contribution table, sorting them based on importance.
● Scale quantities in read-only mode.
● Get notification on missing nutrient values and/or exception values.
The Contribution view is available in the Manage Recipes app, under the Formula tab. For more information, see
Contribution-based Formulation.

7.3.2 Usability Enhancements in Recipe Development
This feature enables you to search recipes more effectively in the Manage Recipes and Recipe Finder apps. You
can now find recipes whose primary output specification is not yet valid on the current date, so you can access
and keep working on your future recipes. In Recipe Finder you can further narrow down your result list by the
validity dates of recipes, thus ensuring more accurate and relevant results.
Technical Details
Type Changed
Scope Item 1QC (Formulation - Recipe Development), 22R (Advanced In

gredient Replacement for Recipes)
Application Component PLM-FIO-RCP
Additional Details
The following usability improvements are now available in SAP Recipe Development:
● In the Manage Recipes app a Search Date field has been added, allowing you to search recipes whose
primary specification is not valid on the current date.
● In the Recipe Finder app you can now filter recipes by their valid-from and valid-to dates. This is especially
useful if you have executed a date-independent search and would like to narrow down your results for past
or future recipes.
Related Information
Manage Recipes
Recipe Finder

7.4 Product Compliance
7.4.1 Foundation for Product Compliance
7.4.1.1 Role Concept for Products
With this feature, you can assign logistics roles, such as Purchased, Produced, Transported, or Sold, to a
product to carry out compliance processes and maintain compliance data based on these roles. You can assign
and change logistics roles with the Manage Basic Compliance Data - Unpackaged Products and Manage Raw
Materials Compliance apps.
Technical Details
Type New
Scope Item 31G (Chemical Compliance Approval for Purchased Material

And Supplier), 31H (Assess Marketability of a Product), 3VR
(Manage Safety Data Sheets for Products), 3FC (Assess
Dangerous Goods for a Product)
Additional Details
Logistics roles affect compliance processes in the following ways:
● The assignment and propagation of compliance assessments is based on these logistics roles and role
changes.
● Certain logistics roles are connected to certain default compliance purposes, which are assigned to the
product or raw material automatically along with the role assignment.
The Compliance Assessment apps support the different logistics roles, which influence the calculation of the
assessments. For example, the substance list check, which is a compliance pattern for calculating
assessments, now considers the data in the following:
● Substance Assessment
● Raw Material Assessment
● Supplier Assessment

The data affected the different roles is considered with the best-case scenario. In other words, it ignores data
that isn’t available instead of treating it as missing. This behavior is different from the calculation of the
compliance status.
Related Information
Logistics Roles
7.4.1.2 Automatic Change Processing
With this feature, you can monitor product compliance events and follow-on tasks in the Process Product
Compliance Events app. For example, in activating a compliance requirement version, you can apply regulatory
changes and reprocess them after resolving errors. When an event has been processed, the initiator is notified
in the central notification area on the SAP Fiori launchpad. This feature increases data quality and consistency
by keeping calculated results in sync with base data.
Technical Details
Type New

And Supplier), 31H (Assess Marketability of a Product), 31J
(Chemical Compliance in Sales), 3G8 (Dangerous Goods in
Sales), 3FC (Assess Dangerous Goods for a Product), 3VQ
(Safety Data Sheets in Sales), 3VR (Manage Safety Data
Sheets for Products)
Additional Details
Automatic change processing recalculates compliance assessments based on various event triggers,
especially if a new compliance requirement version is activated. The Process Product Compliance Events app
supports asynchronous event processing for the activation of a new compliance requirement version, as well as
synchronous processing for other events. In some cases, a product compliance event triggers follow-on tasks,
which you can track and troubleshoot individually. For example, when a compliance requirement is added to an

active compliance purpose and the purpose is saved, the system creates an event of type Compliance Purpose
Saved. This event triggers the following tasks:
● Creation of compliance assessments for all active versions of the assigned compliance requirement
according to the defined compliance pattern
● Propagation of compliance assessments to subordinate products and raw materials according to the
defined compliance pattern
● Compliance check of the products and raw materials to which compliance assessments have been newly
added
● Automatic release of compliance assessments where possible
If any of these tasks causes the event to fail, you can open a log that displays the attempted tasks. Using the
information provided in the log, you can correct the failed tasks and trigger task processing again.
Upon the activation of a new compliance requirement version, a background job to recalculate the relevant
compliance assessments is started.
To activate the event type linkage so that the system can react to relevant product compliance events from the
application and perform the necessary follow-on activities, carry out the Customizing activity Product
Compliance Foundation for Product Compliance Product Compliance Event Processing Activate Event
Type Linkage .
To ensure that users receive a notification when the background processing of product compliance events has
finished or failed, carry out the Customizing activity Product Compliance Foundation for Product
Compliance Activate Notification Providers .
Related Information
Process Product Compliance Events
7.4.1.3 Integration into the Product Master
This feature makes the Compliance Relevant field available in the unified product API to ensure data
consistency for customers using both the Manage Product Master Data SAP Fiori app and update processes in
background programs. In addition, requests from logistics for compliance information about a material are
closed automatically when you release a market assessment of the material. The Compliance Relevant field
replaces the Environmentally Relevant field in triggering compliance processes.

Technical Details
Type New

(Chemical Compliance in Sales), 3G8 (Dangerous Goods in
Sales), 3FC (Assess Dangerous Goods for a Product), 3VQ
(Safety Data Sheets in Sales), 3VR (Manage Safety Data
Additional Details
The automatic closure of requests from logistics reduced time by combining the assessment tasks and the
tasks to update requests from logistics.
The system checks the compliance-relevant indicator in the product master when you activate product
compliance. If the compliance-relevant indicator is set to Yes, a compliance view is created to provide relevant
compliance insights. To activate product compliance, carry out the Customizing activity Product Compliance
Foundation for Product Compliance Activate Product Compliance .
Besides setting the compliance-relevant indicator manually in the Manage Product Master Data app, you can
have the indicator set automatically whenever a changed product is saved. To do so, carry out the Customizing
activity Product Compliance Integration Automatic Determination of Compliance Relevance .
7.4.1.4 Extended Compliance Purpose Management
With this feature, you can edit active compliance purposes. Upon saving, the system creates an event of the
type Compliance Purpose Saved in the Process Product Compliance Events app. For each compliance
requirement that has been added or removed, the system searches for the affected products and raw materials
and changes the relevant compliance assessments accordingly.

Technical Details
Type Changed
Scope Item 31H (Assess Marketability of a Product), 3FC (Assess Dan

gerous Goods for a Product), 3VR (Manage Safety Data
Additional Details
When you add or remove at least one compliance requirement and then save the active compliance purpose in
the Manage Compliance Purposes app, the system recognizes the relevant changes. The system then creates
an event of the type Compliance Purpose Saved in the Process Product Compliance Events app. The event is
processed in the background.
● For each compliance requirement that you've added to the compliance purpose, the system searches for
all unpackaged products and raw materials to which the purpose is assigned. The system then performs
the following actions:
○ Creates compliance assessments for all active versions of the assigned compliance requirement
according to the compliance pattern of the compliance requirement version. This action simulates a
manual compliance purpose assignment.
○ Propagates the compliance assessments to subordinate products and raw materials according to the
compliance pattern.
○ Carries out a compliance check for the products and raw materials to which the compliance
assessments have been newly added.
○ Attempts to release the new compliance assessments automatically if possible.
● For each compliance requirement that you’ve removed from the compliance purpose, the system searches
for all unpackaged products and raw materials to which the purpose is assigned. The system then
performs the following actions for both the unpackaged products and raw materials and all linked
packaged products:
○ Sets the processing status of all affected released compliance assessments for the compliance
requirement to Historical
○ Deletes all affected compliance assessments in progress. The deletion isn't propagated to any
subordinate unpackaged products or raw materials.

When you add a compliance requirement to or remove a compliance requirement from an active compliance
purpose and then save, an event of the type Compliance Purpose Saved is started. This event runs as a
background job and performs the actions described under Additional Details.
To activate the event type linkage so that the system can react to changes to compliance purposes and carry
out the necessary follow-on activities, carry out the Customizing activity Product Compliance Foundation
for Product Compliance Product Compliance Event Processing Activate Event Type Linkage for object type
CL_EHFND_PCEP_EVT_WF_PRP, event CHANGED.
Related Information
Compliance Purpose and Requirement

Compliance Patterns
Manage Compliance Purposes
7.4.1.5 Automatic Release of Compliance Assessments
With this feature, the system determines which pattern applies to each compliance assessment in status In
Progress and verifies whether the pattern-specific conditions are met to release the compliance assessment. If
these conditions are met, the compliance assessment is released automatically. You can view compliance
assessments in the various Compliance Assessment apps.
Technical Details
Type New
Scope Item 31H (Assess Marketability of a Product), 3VR (Manage

Safety Data Sheets for Products)

Application Component EHS-SUS-PMA (Product Marketability and Chemical Compli
ance), EHS-SUS-SDS (Safety Data Sheet Management)
Additional Details
The following pattern-specific details apply to the automatic release of compliance assessments:
Compliance Pat
tern Condition for Automatically Releasing a Compliance Assessment
Substance List If at least one of the following conditions is met, a compliance assessment can be released automati
Check cally:
● The calculated aggregated compliance status of the substance, raw material, and supplier as
sessment is either Compliant or Not Applicable.
● The calculated aggregated compliance status of the substance, raw material, and supplier as
sessment is Not Compliant, and a compliance assessment of the previous version with the same
compliance status and assessment details exists.
A typical use case of this condition is the activation of a new compliance requirement version in
which additional restricted substances have been added but aren't used in the assessed product.
Simple Compliance If the calculated compliance status is Compliant, meaning that all subordinate products, raw materi
Documentation als, and supplier raw materials are compliant, a compliance assessment can be released automati
cally.
Supplier Informa If the calculated compliance status is Compliant, meaning that all subordinate raw materials and sup
tion plier raw materials are compliant, a compliance assessment at the product or raw material level can
be released automatically.
Safety Data Sheet If safety data sheets are provided in all required languages, the compliance assessment can be re
Management leased.
If the conditions described in the Additional Details section are met, existing compliance assessments in status
In Progress are automatically set to Released.
The automatic release of a compliance assessment is a product compliance event, which can lead to
calculations that run as background jobs.

To activate the event type linkage so that the system can react to automatic releases of compliance
assessments and perform the necessary follow-on activities, carry out the Customizing activity Product
Compliance Foundation for Product Compliance Product Compliance Event Processing Activate Event
Type Linkage for object type CL_EHFND_PCEP_EVT_WF_CRR, event RELEASED.
Related Information
Compliance Patterns
Process Product Compliance Events
7.4.1.6 Integration into Outbound Delivery Processing
Integration into outbound delivery processing allows you to monitor and manage issues in delivery processing
due to compliance reasons. This streamlines processing of compliance issues and improves on-time delivery of
goods.
Technical Details
Type New
Scope Item 31J (Chemical Compliance in Sales), 3G8 (Dangerous Goods

in Sales), 3VQ (Safety Data Sheets in Sales)

Additional Details
● Enhancements in the Sales Order Fulfillment - Analyze and Resolve Issues app:
○ In this app, you can see the Dangerous Goods Status and the Safety Data Sheet Status for delivery
documents.
○ You can automatically update the corresponding items of sales orders and sales quotations when you
release a market assessment for the material of the given item. For example, the status of an item is
automatically set from Blocked to Approved.
○ You can navigate to the Compliance Information app from with the Sales Order Fulfillment - Analyze and
Resolve Issues app.
● Enhancements in the Manage Outbound Deliveries app:
In this app, you can see the following statuses:
○ Product Marketability Status
○ Dangerous Goods Status
○ Safety Data Sheet Status
● Enhancements in the Compliance Information - For Products app:
○ You can see compliance information for products and materials not only in the Compliance Information
- For Products app, but in all screens and activities where a material is visible.
○ The Compliance Information - For Products app supports the sales order context.
● Enhancements in the Process Requests from Logistics app:
This app supports the processing of requests from deliveries. With these enhancements, product
stewardship specialists can process market assessment requests on item level while the delivery is
processed.
○ They can accept requests and initiate compliance and market assessments, and exceptionally approve
or reject requests.
○ After the request has been processed, the marketability status for the delivery item is updated
automatically.
○ After a market assessment has been released, the marketability status for the delivery item is updated
automatically.
When you activate product compliance, the system uses compliance information and dangerous goods data in
sales and delivery processes, as long as you have activated the corresponding business features. To activate
product compliance, carry out the Customizing activity Product Compliance Foundation for Product
Compliance Activate Product Compliance .
Related Information
Manage Outbound Deliveries

Compliance Information - For Products

7.4.1.7 Enterprise Search for Compliance Views
With this feature, you can search for compliance views for raw materials and for products. From the search
results area, you can then navigate to other apps that support your product compliance business processes.
Technical Details
Type New

And Supplier), 31H (Assess Marketability of a Product), 3VR
(Manage Safety Data Sheets for Products), 3FC (Assess
Dangerous Goods for a Product)
Additional Details
The SAP Fiori launchpad offers an enterprise search function that searches across all apps and business
objects. To start a search, click the magnifying glass icon. To search for compliance views for raw materials or
products, you select the corresponding entry from the dropdown list next to the search input field. You then
enter your search query in the search field. The search results area lists all objects that match your search
query. You can expand and collapse the display area of search results to view more or fewer details.
The following enterprise search models are available for Product Compliance:
● Compliance View of Raw Materials

The system searches for compliance information for raw materials. In the results area, you can view the
matching raw materials with material-related information. In addition, you can use the links to navigate to
the apps that support you in managing the raw material compliance.
● Compliance View of Products
The system searches for compliance information for unpackaged products. In the results area, you can
view the matching unpackaged products with material-related information. In addition, you can use the
links to navigate to the apps that support you in managing compliance, assessing marketability, fulfilling
safety data sheet requirements, and classifying unpackaged products according to dangerous goods
regulations.
 Note
If you are not authorized to view a business object in the system, you will not be able to find it using any
search functions. Furthermore, you might need specific permissions or roles to access certain objects.

For information about configuring the enterprise search function, see Setting up Enterprise Search.
7.4.2 Product Marketability and Chemical Compliance
7.4.2.1 Regulatory Content Update
With this feature, the regulatory content has been updated to comply with requirements related to Product
Marketability and Chemical Compliance. The content reflects globally increasing country coverage,
continuously deepening regional specifics, and regular updates based on new or updated regulations
worldwide. This feature also facilitates compliance checks by extending automation for data calculations,
broadening standardization to reduce effort, and covering changing business requirements.
Technical Details
Type Changed

(Chemical Compliance in Sales)

ance)
Additional Details
The regulatory content has been updated with over 40 new compliance requirements, over 50 new compliance
requirement versions, and over 30 corrections of existing compliance requirement versions.
In addition, the Activate Compliance Requirements app has been enhanced in the following ways:
● The expiration date of the previous compliance requirement version is updated automatically upon
activation of a new version.
● The updated and new compliance requirement versions are displayed in both the Active and New or
Updated views, which increases visibility.
● The activation of a new compliance requirement version is carried out in the background.

The Compliance Assessment - Substance List Check app has been enhanced in that you can use more precise
operators in the compositions for upper and lower limit values, and the more precise calculation of the
compliance status is based on details of the regulations. Because the compositions now support the operators
<, <=, >, and >= for the values of the lower limits and upper limits of components, the calculation of the
compliance status can use these more precise limits if the rule set needs them.
The Manage Substances Compliance app has been enhanced in the following ways:
● You can manually adapt substance group assignments.

● Changes to the substance group assignments start a check of the corresponding compliance
assessments.
Related Information
SAP Content for Compliance Requirements

Activate Compliance Requirements - Product Marketability
Compliance Assessment - Substance List Check
7.4.2.2 Marketability Check in Outbound Delivery

Processing
With this feature, the system checks all compliance-relevant products to determine whether further processing
is allowed with regards to marketability. If this is not the case, the post goods issue is blocked for the delivery.
Technical Details
Type New
Scope Item 31J (Chemical Compliance in Sales)

ance)
Additional Details
If a product has been marked as relevant for compliance in the product master, the system checks
marketability data when a shipping specialist saves an outbound delivery. The system checks if a product can

be delivered to a certain country or region. If not, the system automatically blocks the item and informs the
shipping specialist about the issue. If the marketability is not yet assessed or released, the item is blocked, and
a request is triggered so that the product steward can assess the data for the product. If the product can be
delivered under restricted conditions, the shipping specialist is informed that there are restrictions, but the
item can be further processed.
7.4.2.3 Improved Compliance Assessment
With this feature, you can use the improved Compliance Assessment - Substance List Check, Compliance
Assessment - Supplier Information, and Compliance Assessment - Substance List Check apps to visualize
statuses and issues as pie charts or tables that provide more details. The apps display objects, such as raw
materials, suppliers, and substances, both with and without issues.
Technical Details
Type Changed
Scope Item 31H (Assess Marketability of a Product

ance)
Additional Details
The Compliance Assessment - Substance List Check app provides a substance list check with a graphical
overview and more detailed information about the raw material, supplier, and substance assessments. The
Compliance Assessment - Supplier Information and Compliance Assessment - Simple Compliance
Documentation apps display the aggregated result of the compliance calculation as pie charts.
Related Information
Compliance Assessment - Substance List Check

Compliance Assessment - Supplier Information
Compliance Assessment - Simple Compliance Documentation

7.4.2.4 Substance List Analytics
With this feature, you can use the three new analytics apps, Substance Lists - Impact on Sales, Substance Lists -
Impact on Production, and Substance Lists - Impact on Supplier, to monitor substances and analyze their
impact on sales, production, and suppliers. This allows you to streamline the processing of compliance issues,
prepare for upcoming regulatory changes, and analyze the impact of these changes on your portfolio.
Technical Details
Type New
Scope Item 31H (Assess Marketability of a Product

ance)
Additional Details
The Substance Lists - Impact on Sales app enables you to analyze the possible impact on sales if substances in
a monitoring list become restricted in the future. This allows you to plan for and trigger customer
communication and potential engineering changes.
The Substance Lists - Impact on Production app enables you to see the affected materials for products that
contain substances in a monitoring list. The app allows you to analyze the possible impact on produced
products if substances on this list become restricted in the future. This enables you to plan for and trigger
potential production and engineering changes.
The Substance Lists - Impact on Supplier app enables you to see affected materials and suppliers of raw
materials that contain substances in a monitoring list. The app allows you to analyze the possible impact on
raw materials if substances on this list become restricted in the future. This enables you to plan for and trigger
supplier communication and potential engineering changes.
Related Information
Substance Lists - Impact on Sales

Substance Lists - Impact on Production
Substance Lists - Impact on Supplier

7.4.3 Dangerous Goods Management
7.4.3.1 Manage Compliance Requirements
With this feature, you can manage and activate compliance requirements. A compliance requirement contains
data for a dangerous goods regulation. It has to be released and activated before it can be used in business
processes. If a compliance requirement is no longer needed, you can deactivate it.
Technical Details
Type New
Scope Item 3FC (Assess Dangerous Goods for a Product)
Application Component EHS-SUS-DG
Additional Details
A compliance requirement in Dangerous Goods Management contains data for a dangerous goods regulation.
Since only active compliance requirements are used in dangerous goods-related business processes, you can
activate the compliance requirements using the Activate Compliance Requirements - Dangerous Goods app.
You can create your own compliance requirements and review existing ones using the Manage Compliance
Requirements - Dangerous Goods app.
To support your dangerous goods processes, SAP delivers new and updated compliance requirements
containing dangerous goods information for certain dangerous goods regulations. After you have activated
these requirements, you can use them to assess and classify your products according to these regulations.
See Also
For more information about the apps, see the following app descriptions:
● Manage Compliance Requirements - Dangerous Goods.

● Activate Compliance Requirements - Dangerous Goods.

7.4.3.2 Classify Unpackaged Dangerous Goods
With this feature, you can classify unpackaged products according to the applicable dangerous goods
regulations.
Technical Details
Type New
Additional Details
When the product stewardship specialist for product compliance assigns a compliance purpose to a product,
the system generates classification requests for the unpackaged product. You can use the following apps to
assess these unpackaged products and classify them according to the assigned dangerous goods regulations:
● My Unpackaged Dangerous Goods

Get an overview of unpackaged products in your responsible unit that have to be classified according to
dangerous goods regulations. View the progress that shows how many regulations are assigned to the
product and how many of these regulations are already released.
● Classify Unpackaged Dangerous Good
Get an overview of the dangerous goods regulations that are assigned to the unpackaged product. View the
classification entered in the Classify Dangerous Good - Unpackaged Product app and dangerous goods
basic descriptions for all regulations in all available languages. To simplify the classification process, you
can also apply the classification from other products to all regulations, apply a classification for one
regulation to others, and release all regulations so that they can be used in other business processes. In
addition, you can use this app as a starting point to navigate to other apps that further support your
product compliance business processes.
● Classify Dangerous Good - Unpackaged Product
Classify an unpackaged product according to the dangerous goods regulation that you have selected in the
Classify Unpackaged Dangerous Good app. In addition, you can use this app as a starting point to navigate
to other apps that further support your product compliance business processes.
After you have released your classification for an unpackaged product, the system generates classification
requests for the packaged product that is assigned to the unpackaged product.

See Also
● My Unpackaged Dangerous Goods.

● Classify Unpackaged Dangerous Good.
● Classify Dangerous Good - Unpackaged Product.
7.4.3.3 Classify Packaged Dangerous Goods
With this feature, you can classify packaged products according to the applicable dangerous goods regulations.
Technical Details
Type New
Scope Item Assess Dangerous Goods for a Product
Additional Details
After you have released your classification for an unpackaged product, the system generates classification
requests for the packaged product that is assigned to the unpackaged product. You can use the following apps
to assess these packaged products:
● My Packaged Dangerous Goods

Get an overview of packaged products in your responsible unit that have to be classified according to
dangerous goods regulations. View the progress that shows how many regulations are assigned to the
product and how many of these regulations are already released.
● Classify Packaged Dangerous Good
Get an overview of the dangerous goods regulations that are assigned to the packaged product.
Get an overview of the dangerous goods regulations that are assigned to the product that you have
selected in the My Packaged Dangerous Goods app. Specify the enclosure variant and the description of
the dangerous good that is used on documents for all selected regulations. View all descriptions as they
will be printed on dangerous goods documents and on sales and delivery documents. You can also select
multiple regulations and release them in one step. In addition, you can use this app as a starting point to
navigate to other apps that further support your product compliance business processes.

● Classify Dangerous Good - Packaged Product
Classify a packaged product according to the dangerous goods regulation that you have selected in the
Classify Packaged Dangerous Good app. In addition, you can use this app as a starting point to navigate to
other apps that further support your product compliance business processes.
After you have released your classification for the packaged product, the system uses the classification data for
dangerous goods checks that are carried out in sales and delivery documents.
See Also
● My Packaged Dangerous Goods.

● Classify Packaged Dangerous Good.
● Classify Dangerous Good - Packaged Product.
7.4.3.4 Specify Applicable Dangerous Goods Regulations
With this feature, you can apply dangerous goods regulations to specific countries and specify the languages in
which dangerous goods data must be printed on sales and delivery documents.
Technical Details
Type New
Additional Details
When you transport dangerous goods into another country, you have to comply with the dangerous goods
regulations that are valid for this country. Compliance involves ensuring that the transport of a dangerous good
is allowed for the mode of transport you are using and that the dangerous goods documents are available in the
required languages.
Using the Apply Regulation - Dangerous Goods app, you, as a dangerous goods expert, can select regulations
that are applicable for a specific mode of transport in a certain country. The dangerous goods check that is

carried out in sales and delivery documents determines the classification of the transported product for the
specified regulation. Depending on the transport permission of the classification, the check either allows or
blocks further processing of the documents.
In addition, you can allow or forbid the transport of dangerous goods by a specific mode of transport. If you
select one of these options, the check always allows further processing of the documents or blocks them
independent of the classification of the transported product. These settings are useful if, for example, no
dangerous goods regulations are valid for a specific country.
SAP delivers applicable regulations and required languages for various countries. However, you can change the
data using the Apply Regulation - Dangerous Goods app.
You can use the Prefill Applicable Dangerous Goods Regulations Customizing activity to start report
R_EHDGM_REG_USE_FILL (Prefill Applicable Dangerous Goods Regulations). This report prefills database
tables with applicable dangerous goods regulations and applicable languages for the various modes of
transports in certain countries.
You can change the applicable dangerous goods regulations and languages for a country using the Apply
Dangerous Goods Regulation app. If you have entered any data using this app, this report will not overwrite your
changes.
See Also
For more information about the app, see the following app description:
● Apply Regulations - Dangerous Goods.
7.4.3.5 Analyze Products with Certain Dangerous Goods

Classifications
With this feature, you can analyze the dangerous goods classification of unpackaged and packaged products
step by step from different perspectives.

Technical Details
Type New
Additional Details
Using the apps Analyze Unpackaged Dangerous Goods and Analyze Packaged Dangerous Goods, you can view
classification data grouped by various criteria, such as where you want to transport the product, how is it
classified, or in which status the classification is. If you select a value in one of the charts in the filter area, the
data in the content area is adapted automatically to display only the data that meets your selection. This
feature enables you to easily get an overview of the classifications of your products. If a regulation is changed,
you can quickly identify the products that have to be reassessed.
See Also
● Analyze Unpackaged Dangerous Goods.

● Analyze Packaged Dangerous Goods.
7.4.3.6 Enhancements in the Compliance Information App
When transporting a packaged product that is classified as a dangerous good, you must know in which
countries and on which modes of transport you are allowed to transport the product. The new Dangerous
Goods view in the Compliance Information - For Products app gives you an overview of the transport
permissions for the packaged product in the different countries.
Technical Details
Type Changed

Scope Item 3G8 (Dangerous Goods in Sales)
Additional Details
With the Compliance Information - For Products app, you can view compliance information and dangerous
goods data for packaged products for which the Compliance Relevant indicator has been set to Yes in the
material master. When you select a product, you can now also view transport permissions and dangerous
goods data for different countries/regions as a world map. The colors of the countries indicate the effects on
the processing of sales and delivery documents so that you can get a quick overview of whether or not the
transport of your product is allowed in a certain country.
See Also
For more information about the app, see the following app description:
● Compliance Information - For Products.
7.4.3.7 Dangerous Goods Data in Sales Processes
Compliance with dangerous goods regulations is an important component of product compliance to ensure
safe transportation of dangerous goods. To support you in complying with dangerous goods regulations,
dangerous goods data is integrated into the processing of various sales document types. The data can be used
for transport checks.
Technical Details
Type New

Additional Details
Dangerous Goods Checks in Sales Documents

If a product has been marked as relevant for compliance in the product master, the system checks dangerous
goods data when an internal sales representative saves a sales document. If an item in the sales document has
been classified as a dangerous good, the system also checks if all necessary dangerous goods data is available,
and whether transportation of the product is allowed, forbidden, or restricted. Depending on the check results,
the system allows or blocks further processing of the sales documents.
Output of Dangerous Goods Data on Sales Documents

The form templates SD_SLS_ORDER_CONFIRM (Sales Order) and SD_SLS_ORDER_WO_CHARGE (Sales Order
Without Charge) include information about dangerous goods if the goods are picked up by the customer and
not transported by the seller (that is, if the corresponding shipping condition is used).
For sales orders and sales orders without charge, the delivery date and the confirmed quantity are excluded
from the output for items that are blocked by the dangerous goods check. Instead, the output contains the
information that further assessment is required before the relevant item can be delivered.
To use the dangerous goods integration into the sales processes, you have to activate the corresponding
business feature in the Customizing under Product Compliance Foundation for Product Compliance
Activate Business Features .
See Also
For more information, see Dangerous Goods in Sales Processes.
7.4.3.8 Dangerous Goods Data in Delivery Processes
Compliance with dangerous goods regulations is an important component of product compliance to ensure
safe transportation of dangerous goods. To support you in complying with dangerous goods regulations,
dangerous goods data is integrated into the processing of outbound deliveries. The data can be used for
transport checks.

Technical Details
Type New
Additional Details
If a product has been marked as relevant for compliance in the product master, the system checks dangerous
goods data when an internal sales representative saves a delivery document. If an item in the delivery
document has been classified as a dangerous good, the system also checks if all necessary dangerous goods
data is available, and whether transportation of the product is allowed, forbidden, or restricted. Depending on
the check results, the system allows or blocks further processing of the delivery documents.
To use the dangerous goods integration into the delivery processes, you have to activate the corresponding
business feature in the Customizing under Product Compliance Foundation for Product Compliance
Activate Business Features .
See Also
For more information, see Dangerous Goods in Delivery Processing.
7.4.4 Safety Data Sheet Management
7.4.4.1 Safety Data Sheet Management for Products
With this feature, you manage safety data sheets according to chemical regulations for your entire product
portfolio and ensure compliant hazard communication for your products. You can assign, view, and manage a
compliance requirement for safety data sheets. You can upload safety data sheets to fulfill the requirements
selected in the Unpackaged Product - Compliance Requirements app and release documents for use in follow-
up processes.

Technical Details
Type New
Scope Item 3VR (Manage Safety Data Sheets for Products)
Application Component EHS-SUS-SDS
Additional Details
A compliance requirement in Safety Data Sheet Management contains data that indicates in which languages a
safety data sheet is required for a certain country. Since only active compliance requirements are used in
safety data sheet-related business processes, you can activate the compliance requirements using the Activate
Compliance Requirements – Safety Data Sheets app.
You can create your own compliance requirements and review existing ones using the Manage Compliance
Requirements - Safety Data Sheets app. Eight example compliance requirements are predefined for safety data
sheets.
To support your safety data sheet processes, SAP delivers compliance requirements containing safety data
sheet information for certain regulations. After you have activated these requirements, you can use them to
manage your products according to these regulations.
7.4.4.2 Safety Data Sheet Integration with Sales and

Delivery
With this features, a safety data sheet check is integrated into the processing of various sales and delivery
document types to support compliance with safety data sheet regulations.
Technical Details
Type New
Scope Item 3VQ (Safety Data Sheets in Sales)

Additional Details
If a product has been marked as relevant for compliance in the product master, the system checks safety data
sheet data when a sales or delivery document is saved. Any relevant change to a material triggers a safety data
sheet check. If an item in the document is relevant for the check, the system first verifies that a ship-to country
and the address of the sales organization is given. If not, a warning is created and the user is informed about
the missing data.
As a next step, the system verifies whether, for the ship-to country, safety data sheets are required. If no safety
data sheet is required for a ship-to country, the check for the item is completed successfully. If the ship-to
country requires safety data sheets, the system checks whether the documents exist in all required languages.
If no released safety data sheets are available or languages or key information are missing, the system raises a
warning for the item, informs the user, and creates a request for the product stewardship specialist.
The request allows the product stewardship specialist to assess the data for the product and take or initiate the
required actions to provide the missing safety data sheets in required languages.
The delivery is blocked if particular information is missing. When the safety data sheet is provided with the
required information, the system releases the compliance requirement and closes the request. If the delivery
was blocked, the system changes the delivery status from Blocked to OK.
The system creates notifications to the product-stewardship department to complete missing data for checks
or to request the safety data sheets.
By default, these notifications are enabled. However, you can disable the notifications in the SAP Fiori
launchpad settings.
7.4.4.3 Analyze Safety Data Sheet Availability
With this feature, you can use the Analyze Safety Data Sheet Availability app to check the availability of safety
data sheets for unpackaged products, based on compliance requirements. By using various filter criteria, you
can look up available safety data sheets to respond to information inquiries or to fulfill auditing requirements.
You can also easily identify missing safety data sheets for later processing.

Technical Details
Type New
Additional Details
This app allows you to view safety data sheets grouped by various filter criteria. You can export the data
matching your filter selection to a spreadsheet. You can select an item from the table to navigate to its view in
the Manage Safety Data Sheets app. You can also save your settings as a view variant to easily access them the
next time you use the app.
7.4.4.4 Apply Safety Data Sheet Regulations to Countries
With this feature, you can use the Apply Regulations - Safety Data Sheets to specify the compliance
requirements that determine the safety data sheet regulations for a selected country. You can also add or
change safety data sheet languages that are required when selling to a selected country. This enables you to
ensure compliant hazard communication for your products.
Technical Details
Type New

Additional Details
Applying regulations is an initial configuration task. The system provides predefined settings to enable a quick
start.
When you change the safety data sheet languages for a country, the system updates the safety data sheet
requirements on all compliance-relevant products to which the compliance purposes are assigned. Missing
languages are added, but existing languages are not removed.
You can use this app to do the following:
● In a map view, see countries and the status of safety data sheet regulations for each country.
● In a table view, see an alphabetical list of countries or search for a specific country.
● Select a country to view its regulation information for safety data sheets.
● Assign a compliance requirement that specifies the safety data sheet requirements for a selected country.
● Add or remove languages required for safety data sheets for a selected country.
● Manage the compliance purposes associated with a selected country.
7.5.1 Recipe Handover to Production - Bill of Material (1QG)
Use
● Support non-overlapping validity dates for different recipe versions

● Use collaboration integration, internally and cross company
Technical Details
Type Changed
Scope Item 1QG ( Recipe Handover to Production - Bill of Material )
Application Component PLM

7.5.2 Assess Dangerous Goods for a Product (3FC)
Use
Transporting chemical products on public transportation routes requires product classification for each
applicable dangerous goods regulation. This scope item provides the means to identify these regulations and
to classify your products efficiently.
Technical Details
Type New
Scope Item 3FC ( Assess Dangerous Goods for a Product )
Application Component EHS-SUS

7.5.3 Product Structure Template Management (35Q)
Use
This scope item enables you to build up templates to structure a product as a set of hierarchically ordered
objects in SAP S/4HANA.
● Manual update of product structure

● Automatic update of product structure using block definition diagram
Technical Details
Type New
Scope Item 35Q ( Product Structure Template Management )
Africa

7.5.4 Assess Marketability of a Product (31H)
Use
● Applied regulatory update of compliance requirements

● Processes to support the new material master flag for compliance relevance
● Improved the versioning and activation of compliance requirements and purposes, incl. auto-release
● Added visualization overview of compliance check results
● Added background activity monitoring for asynchronous events
Technical Details
Type Changed
Scope Item 31H ( Assess Marketability of a Product )
Africa

7.5.5 Set up Configurable Bill of Material using Variant
Configuration (22T)
Use
● Enhanced multilevel configuration: multilevel BOM, multilevel routing
Technical Details
Type Changed
Scope Item 22T ( Set up Configurable Bill of Material using Variant Con
figuration )

7.5.6 Chemical Compliance Approval for Purchased Material
And Supplier (31G)
Use
● Processes to support the new material master flag for compliance relevance.
Technical Details
Type Changed
Scope Item 31G ( Chemical Compliance Approval for Purchased Material

And Supplier )
Luxembourg, Mexico, Malaysia, Netherlands, Norway, New Zealand, Philippines, Romania, Russia, Saudi
Arabia, Sweden, Singapore, Thailand, Turkey, Taiwan, United States of America, South Africa

7.5.7 Manage Safety Data Sheets for Products (3VR)
Use
This scope item lets you maintain final safety data sheets as documents for products.
Technical Details
Type New
Scope Item 3VR ( Manage Safety Data Sheets for Products )
7.5.8 Specification Management for Recipes (1QA)
Use
● Integrate collaboration, internally and cross-company

Technical Details
Type Changed
Scope Item 1QA ( Specification Management for Recipes )
7.5.9 Product Structure Management (3ND)
Use
This scope item lets you structure a product as a set of hierarchically ordered objects in SAP S/4HANA.
Additionally, the definition and maintenance of product structures has been optimized for SAP S/4HANA.
Technical Details
Type New

Scope Item 3ND ( Product Structure Management )
7.5.10 Manage Documents (22P)
Use
● Enterprise Search: Searching the Document Info Record (DIR) has been enabled from the main screen of
Fiori launchpad. As a result, the user is now able to search for all the DIRs/originals according to search
criteria such as 'document type', 'document number', 'description', 'status', 'created by' etc. The user can
also search on the document content and classification.
Technical Details
Type Changed
Scope Item 22P ( Manage Documents )

7.5.11 Bill of Material - Mass Change (1R5)
Use
● Spare Parts indicator

● Change Record integration
● Advanced Variant Configuration integration
● Handover to Manufacturing integration
● Software Management loose fixed coupling
Technical Details
Type Changed
Scope Item 1R5 ( Bill of Material - Mass Change )

7.5.12 Engineering Bill of Material - Change Master

Management (1R3)
Use
● Multi-level maintenance
● Spare Parts indicator
● Change Record integration
● Advanced Variant Configuration integration
● Handover to Manufacturing integration
● Software Management loose fixed coupling
● SSCUI for Change Record/Material Revision Level
Technical Details
Type Changed

Scope Item 1R3 ( Engineering Bill of Material - Change Master Manage
ment )
7.5.13 Formulation - Recipe Development (1QC)
Use
● Display all necessary information on an overview page, providing the user with a 360-degree domain view
while consolidating data from various sources
● Support non-overlapping validity dates for different recipe versions
● Use collaboration integration, internally and cross-company
Technical Details
Type Changed
Scope Item 1QC ( Formulation - Recipe Development )

7.5.14 Requirements Driven Development (2G4)
Use
● Create block definition diagrams

● Link the requirements to the block definition diagram
Technical Details
Type Changed
Scope Item 2G4 ( Requirements Driven Development )

Africa
7.5.15 Engineering Change Management with Change

Records (1NF)
Use
● Workflow - Enable customer roles in process

● Workflow - Enable agent determination, attachments in MyInbox
● Product Structure elements can be handled within change record
● Integration of team from SAP Responsibility Management into Change Record
Technical Details
Type Changed
Scope Item 1NF ( Engineering Change Management with Change Re

cords )


8 Sales
8.1 Order and Contract Management
8.1.1 Sales Master Data Management
8.1.1.1 Manage Customer Materials
With this feature, you can now assign several customer material information records to a single material
number. Change Documents information has also been added to customer materials in the Manage Customer
Materials app.
Technical Details
Type Changed
Scope Item BD9 (Sell from Stock)
Application Component SD-MD-AM-CMI (Customer Material Information)
Related Information
Manage Customer Materials
8.1.1.2 SOAP APIs for Sales Area Replication
With these asynchronous outbound SOAP services, you can replicate sales area-related master data and
configuration data in bulk to external systems. The replication logic of this data is handled by the Data
Replication Framework (DRF).

Sales PUBLIC 461
Technical Details
Type New
Scope Item 1VP (Opportunity-to-Order with SAP Cloud for Customer),

BD9 (Sell from Stock)
Application Component SD-MD (Master Data)
Additional Details
The following services are available:
● Sales Organization - Replicate (SalesOrganizationBulkReplication_Out)

● Distribution Channel - Replicate (DistributionChannelBulkReplication_Out)
● Sales Division - Replicate (SalesDivisionBulkReplication_Out)
● Distribution Chain - Replicate (DistributionChainBulkReplication_Out)
● Divisions Per Sales Organization - Replicate
(DivisionsPerSalesOrganizationBulkReplication_Out)
● Sales Area - Replicate (SalesAreaBulkReplication_Out)
● Sales Office - Replicate (SalesOfficeBulkReplication_Out)
● Sales Group - Replicate (SalesGroupBulkReplication_Out)
Related Information
Data Replication Framework

Sales Area - Replicate
Sales Organization - Replicate
Sales Office - Replicate
Sales Group - Replicate
Sales Division - Replicate
Distribution Chain - Replicate
Distribution Channel - Replicate
Divisions Per Sales Organization - Replicate

462 PUBLIC Sales
8.1.1.3 Material Substitution Apps Renamed
Several tiles on the SAP Fiori Launchpad related to material determination have been renamed to better reflect
the functions that you can access using these tiles.
Technical Details
Type Changed
Application Component SD-BF-MD (Material Determination)
Additional Details
The tiles have been renamed as follows:
Old Name New Name
Create Material Substitution Create Material Determination
Display Material Substitution Dislay Material Determination
Change Material Substitution Change Material Determination
Reference Material Substitution Create Material Determination with Reference
8.1.2 Price Management
8.1.2.1 OData API for Condition Records for Pricing in

Sales
The synchronous inbound OData service Condition Record for Pricing in Sales – Create, Read, Update, Delete
(API_SLSPRICINGCONDITIONRECORD_SRV) is now available for you to create, read, update, and delete
condition records for pricing that are used in Sales.

Sales PUBLIC 463
Technical Details
Type New
Scope Item BD9 (Sell from Stock), J11 (Customer Project Management -
Project-Based Services), 3D2 (Service Order Management
and Monitoring)
Application Component SD-BF-PR (Pricing and Conditions)
Additional Details
The service contains entities for condition record, validity of condition record, pricing scale, and condition
supplement.
If you need to create an incident regarding this service, use component SD-MD-CM.
Related Information
Condition Record for Pricing in Sales – Create, Read, Update, Delete
8.1.2.2 SOAP API for Condition Records for Pricing in Sales
The asynchronous outbound service Condition Record for Pricing in Sales - Replicate enables you to replicate
condition records for pricing that are used in Sales to external systems. The data replication uses the Data
Replication Framework (DRF).
Technical Details
Type New

464 PUBLIC Sales
Scope Item BD9 (Sell from Stock), J11 (Customer Project Management -
Project-Based Services), 3D2 (Service Order Management
and Monitoring)
Application Component SD-BF-PR (Pricing and Conditions)
Additional Details
The service contains nodes that respectively represent condition record, validity of condition record, pricing
scale, and condition supplement.
You need to make specific settings in your system before using this service. For more information, see
Configuration: Condition Record for Pricing in Sales - Replicate.
If you need to create an incident regarding this feature, use component SD-MD-CM.
Related Information
Condition Record for Pricing in Sales - Replicate
8.1.2.3 Freight Costs in Price Management - Integration

with Transportation Management
With this feature you can integrate freight costs coming from transportation management with price
management. You use this feature when, for a freight order, the system creates the corresponding billing
document and the freight costs are to be taken into account. To use this feature, you must set up the
integration between transportation management, price management, and billing.
Technical Details
Type New

Sales PUBLIC 465
Application Component SD-BF-PR (Pricing)
To enable the integration, a configuration expert must make the following settings in Customizing:
● In the activity Define Condition Types in Customizing under Sales and Distribution Basic Functions
Pricing Pricing Control , create new entries with the following details, then save:
Field Value Description
Condition Type <Enter condition type> <Enter a description>
Condition Class A Discount or Surcharge
Calculation Type B Fixed Amount
Condition Category F Freight
Plus/Minus A Positive
Condition Function FCTM Freight Costs fr. TM
Item Condition Select checkbox
Delete Select checkbox
Amount/Percent Select checkbox
● In the activity Define and Assign Pricing Procedures in Customizing under the same path, select the pricing
procedure relevant for your business or choose a predefined one to be copied. Add the newly created
condition type, then save.
● In the activity Set Pricing Procedure Determination in Customizing under the same path, adjust the settings
accordingly so that the newly created pricing procedure is used by the relevant business documents, then
save.
Related Information
Internal TM Component Integration

Billing the Freight Cost in TM to a Customer in SD
Billing of Freight Costs - Integration with Transportation Management
Billing of Freight Costs - Integration with Transportation Management [page 494]

466 PUBLIC Sales
8.1.3 Sales Quotation Management
8.1.3.1 OData APIs - Create with Reference
Several OData APIs can now be used to create sales documents with reference to other sales documents.
Technical Details
Type Changed
Scope Item BD9 (Sell from Stock), 1EZ (Credit Memo Processing), 1F1
(Debit Memo Processing), I9I (Sales Contract Management),
BDG (Sales Quotation), BDA (Free of Charge Delivery)
Application Component SD-SLS-API (SD API Interface)
Additional Details
You can now create sales documents with reference with the following service interfaces:
● Sales Quotation - Create, Read, Update, Delete (A2X) (API_SALES_QUOTATION_SRV)

● Sales Contract - Create, Read, Update, Delete (A2X) (API_SALES_CONTRACT_SRV)
● Sales Order - Create, Read, Update, Delete (A2X) (API_SALES_ORDER_SRV)
● Sales Order Without Charge - Create, Read, Update, Delete (A2X)
(API_SALES_ORDER_WITHOUT_CHARGE_SRV)
● Credit Memo Request - Create, Read, Update, Delete (A2X) (API_CREDIT_MEMO_REQUEST_SRV)
● Debit Memo Request - Create, Read, Update, Delete (A2X) (API_DEBIT_MEMO_REQUEST_SRV)
Related Information
Sales Quotation - Create, Read, Update, Delete (A2X)

Sales Contract - Create, Read, Update, Delete (A2X)
Sales Order - Create, Read, Update, Delete (A2X)
Sales Order Without Charge - Create, Read, Update, Delete (A2X)
Credit Memo Request - Create, Read, Update, Delete (A2X)
Debit Memo Request - Create, Read, Update, Delete (A2X)

Sales PUBLIC 467
8.1.3.2 OData API: Sales Quotation - Create, Read, Update,
Delete (A2X)
With this service (API_SALES_QUOTATION_SRV), you can now accept or deny approval requests for sales
quotations that cannot be processed without the consent of an approver.
Technical Details
Type Changed
Scope Item BDG (Sales Quotation)
If you want to use this service for approving or rejecting sales quotations, you must define at least one approval
request reason for sales quotations in the Define Reasons for Approval Requests and the Assign Reasons for
Approval Requests Customizing activities. You can find these activities in Customizing under Sales and
Distribution Sales Sales Documents Sales Document Approvals . This reason must then be flagged as
relevant for an external workflow.
Related Information
8.1.4 Sales Contract Management
8.1.4.1 CDS Views for Sales Contracts
Two Core Data Service (CDS) views for sales contracts have now been released. You can use the CDS views to
obtain information about sales contracts and sales contract items.

468 PUBLIC Sales
Technical Details
Type New
Scope Item I9I (Sales Contract Management)
Application Component SD-SLS-OA-CCO (Customer Contracts)
Additional Details
The following CDS views have been released:
● Sales Contract (I_SalesContract)

● Sales Contract Item (I_SalesContractItem)
Related Information
Sales Contract
Sales Contract Item
8.1.4.2 Sales Scheduling Agreement
With this app, you can display details and contextual information of a sales scheduling agreement on header,
item, and delivery schedule level. Examples include process flow, customer reference, requirements and
delivery relevance, customer fiscal year, and cumulative quantities. You can also extend the app according to
your business needs.
Technical Details
Type New
Scope Item 3NR (Sales Scheduling Agreements)

Sales PUBLIC 469
Application Component SD-SLS-OA-SCH (Customer Scheduling Agreement)
Related Information
Sales Scheduling Agreement
8.1.4.3 Manage Sales Scheduling Agreements
With this app, you can search for, display, filter, sort, and group all sales scheduling agreements. You can also
extend the app according to your business needs.
Technical Details
Type New
Related Information
Manage Sales Scheduling Agreements
8.1.4.4 OData API for Sales Scheduling Agreement
With this service Sales Scheduling Agreement - Create, Read, Update, Delete (A2X)
(API_SALES_SCHEDULING_AGREEMENT), you can retrieve sales scheduling agreements, as well as create,
update, and delete sales scheduling agreements on header and item level. You can also extend this OData
service according to your business needs.

470 PUBLIC Sales
Technical Details
Type New
Related Information
Sales Scheduling Agreement - Create, Read, Update, Delete (A2X)
Technical Details
Type Changed
Additional Details

Sales PUBLIC 471
Related Information

8.1.4.6 Assign Sold-to Parties
With this app, you can search for, create, copy, change, and display sold-to party assignments. You can also
display sold-to party changes in each sold-to party assignment. You maintain sold-to party assignments as
master data of sales scheduling agreements. Based on sold-to party assignments, the system determines the
appropriate sold-to party for each inbound delivery schedule in electronic data interchange (EDI) processing.
Technical Details
Type New

472 PUBLIC Sales
Additional Details
 Tip
It’s recommended to configure inbound EDI processing in the Assign Sold-to Parties and Manage Delivery
Schedule Processing apps rather than in Customizing.
Related Information
Assign Sold-to Parties
8.1.4.7 Manage Delivery Schedule Processing
With this app, you can search for, create, copy, change, and display delivery schedule processing options.
Delivery schedule processing options are saved as master data of sales scheduling agreements. Based on the
delivery schedule processing options, the system determines how to process inbound delivery schedules in
electronic data interchange (EDI) processing.
Technical Details
Type New
Additional Details
 Tip
It’s recommended to configure inbound EDI processing in the Assign Sold-to Parties and Manage Delivery
Schedule Processing apps rather than in Customizing.

Sales PUBLIC 473
Related Information
Manage Delivery Schedule Processing
8.1.5 Sales Order Management and Processing
8.1.5.1 Manage Sales Document Workflows
This feature enables you to create and manage workflows to optimize the approval process for various sales
documents. The workflows allow you to define conditions under which to approve sales documents as well as
define one or more approvers.
Technical Details
Type New
Application Component SD-SLS (Sales)
New or Changed Authorization Ob

Business Catalog Changes with this Release jects
Sales - Sales Configuration The catalog now applies to the manage Not relevant.
(SAP_SD_BC_CONFIGURE) ment of workflows of all sales docu
ments, including sales quotations and
sales orders. Previously, it was applica
ble to credit memo requests only.
Sales - My Inbox Make settings for new authorization ob Sales Document: Approval
Management(V_VBAK_APM)
(SAP_SD_BC_MYINBOX) jects.

474 PUBLIC Sales
Related Information
Manage Sales Document Workflows
8.1.5.2 Customizing Activities and BAdIs for Sales

Document Approvals
You can now use the Customizing activities Define Reasons for Approval Requests and Assign Reasons for
Approval Requests to define the reasons why sales orders, sales quotations, or credit memo requests need to
be approved (for example, whenever a net value is higher than USD 1,000). With the Business Add-In (BAdI)
Set Approval Request Reasons for Sales Documents, you then define for which sales orders this reason is valid.
Whenever a sales order matches these criteria, and the corresponding workflow has been set up, the system
automatically blocks the sales document and triggers an approval request. The approver can release the
document, send the document back for rework, or deny the approval. With the BAdI Set Sales Document
Rejection Reasons for Rejected Approval Requests, you can determine which rejection reason is used for sales
documents when the approval request is rejected by the approver.
Technical Details
Type New
Additional Details
You can see the approval status of documents in the Manage Sales Orders, the Manage Sales Quotations, and
the Manage Credit Memo Requests apps. The approval status and the approval request reason are also
displayed in the Sales Order object page, the Sales Quotation object page, and the Credit Memo Request object
page.

Sales PUBLIC 475
The Customizing activities are now available for the key user in Customizing under Sales and Distribution
Sales Sales Documents Sales Document Approvals .
The BAdIs are available in Customizing under Sales and Distribution Sales Sales Documents Business
Add-Ins (BAdIs) .
Related Information
Manage Sales Document Workflows [page 474]

Approval Processes for Sales Documents
8.1.5.3 Manage Sales Documents with Customer-Expected

Price
This feature enables you to list sales document items which are locked due to discrepancies between the
customer-expected price and the net price.
You can accept the customer-expected price for a sales document item. You will then be automatically
redirected to the overview screen of the selected sales document item in a related application, where you can
manually adapt the net price. Additionally, you can display contact info that is relevant for the selected sales
document item.
Technical Details
Type New
Scope Item BKK (Sales Order Fulfillment Monitoring)
Application Component SD-SLS-GF
Related Information
Manage Duplicate Sales Documents

476 PUBLIC Sales
8.1.5.4 Use Material ID to Search for Sales Documents
With this feature, you can now use the search function in various apps to search for all sales orders, credit
memo requests, debit memo requests, sales quotations, or sales orders without charge that contain a specific
material by searching for the material ID.
Technical Details
Type New
(Debit Memo Processing), BDA (Free of Charge Delivery),
BDG (Sales Quotation), and others
Additional Details
You can use this search criterion in the following apps:
● Manage Sales Orders

● Manage Credit Memo Requests
● Manage Debit Memo Requests
● Manage Sales Quotations
● Manage Sales Orders Without Charge
● Customer - 360° View
In this app, you can search for open sales quotations, sales orders, sales contracts, customer returns,
credit memo requests, debit memo requests, and billing documents using the material ID.
As long as a document contains at least one item with the specified material, it will show up in the search
results. Please note that you can only search by material ID, and not by material description.
Related Information
Manage Sales Orders

Manage Credit Memo Requests
Manage Debit Memo Requests
Manage Sales Quotations

Sales PUBLIC 477
Manage Sales Orders Without Charge
Customer - 360° View
8.1.5.5 Payment Data in Sales Documents
When you use the SAP digital payments add-on for payment cards and have set up your system to
automatically copy payment card data (the payment card and the authorization) from preceding sales
documents into subsequent sales documents, this is now also supported in the returns process. This means
that if a customer returns any ordered materials, the payment data is copied into all relevant subsequent
documents and the payment is refunded.
Technical Details
Type New
Scope Item BD9 (Sell from Stock), 1Z1 (Digital Payments - Sales), BKP
(Accelerated Customer Returns)
Additional Details
This copying process works for all payment cards types that start with DP, for example, DPVI or DPMC.
Related Information
Copying of Payment Card Data into Subsequent Return Documents
8.1.5.6 CDS Views for Sales Documents
Two basic CDS (Core Data Services) views for Sales have now been released. You can use them to construct
custom views or apps that need to retrieve data about the process flow of sales documents.

478 PUBLIC Sales
Technical Details
Type New
Additional Details
The following CDS views have now been released:
● I_SDDocumentProcessFlow
● I_SDDocumentMultiLevelProcFlow
Related Information
View Browser
SD Document Process Flow
SD Document Multi-Level Process Flow
8.1.5.7 Output of Sales Documents
If you use SAP S/4HANA output control, the predelivered form templates for sales orders and sales orders
without charge now include information about product compliance.
Technical Details
Type Changed
Scope Item BD9 (Sell from Stock), BDA (Free of Charge Delivery)

Sales PUBLIC 479
Additional Details
The following form templates have been enhanced:
● SD_SLS_ORDER_CONFIRM: sales order

● SD_SLS_ORDER_WO_CHARGE: sales order without charge
The form templates now include dangerous goods data if you use dangerous goods in sales processes.
For sales orders and sales order without charge, the delivery date and the confirmed quantity are now excluded
from the output for items that are blocked by a product compliance check (product marketability check,
dangerous goods check, or safety data sheet check). Instead, the output now contains the information that
further assessment is required before the relevant item can be delivered.
If you have used these form templates to create your own custom form templates before, note that these
enhancements are not automatically included in your custom form templates. If you want to use these
enhancements, please copy over the changes to your custom form templates or create new ones using the
predelivered form templates.
Related Information
Product Compliance in Sales and Delivery

Dangerous Goods in Sales Processes
How to Create and Use a Custom Form Template
8.1.5.8 Changed Output Customizing Activity Titles
The Customizing activities for the output of changed sales documents were renamed. You can find these
activities in Customizing under Sales and Distribution Basic Functions SAP S/4HANA Output Control
Output Control for Sales Documents Output for Changed Documents .

480 PUBLIC Sales
Technical Details
Type Changed
Application Component SD-BF (Basic Functions)
Additional Details
The following Customizing activities were renamed:
Assign Output Types Assign Output Types for Changed Documents
Define Message Texts Define Output Texts
Assign Message Texts to Table Fields Assign Output Texts to Document Data
Assign Message Texts to Partner Table Fields Assign Output Texts to Business Partner Data
Assign Message Texts to Document Text Types Assign Output Texts to Document Text Types
8.1.5.9 Transportation Management in Document Flow
In the apps for changing and displaying sales documents, you can now see documents related to
transportation management in the document flow on header level (where relevant).
Technical Details
Type Changed
BDA (Free of Charge Delivery), BDG (Sales Quotation)

Sales PUBLIC 481
Related Information
Structure and Data in a Sales Document

Transportation Management (TM)
8.1.5.10 OData API: Sales Order - Create, Read, Update,

Delete (A2X)
With this service (API_SALES_ORDER_SRV), you can now also process the following service entities: texts on
header level, payment card information on header level, and texts on item level. You can also process external
authorizations for payment cards (for example, when a sales order is created in a Web shop and the payment
card is also authorized externally) as well as external payments. If you use approval processes for sales orders,
you can accept or deny approval requests for sales orders that cannot be processed without the consent of an
approver.
Technical Details
Type Changed
If you want to use this service for approving or rejecting sales orders, you must define at least one approval
request reason for sales orders in the Define Reasons for Approval Requests and the Assign Reasons for
Approval Requests Customizing activities. You can find these activities in Customizing under Sales and
Distribution Sales Sales Documents Sales Document Approvals . This reason must then be flagged as
relevant for an external workflow.

482 PUBLIC Sales
Related Information
Customizing Activities and BAdIs for Sales Document Approvals [page 475]
Technical Details
Type Changed
Additional Details

Related Information


Sales PUBLIC 483
8.1.5.12 SOAP API: Sales Order - Replicate (A2A)
When you use this service (SalesOrderBulkReplication_Out) to replicate sales orders, it now reflects
status changes due to the creation of follow-up documents (for example, deliveries or billing documents). This
means that any changes of the delivery status or the billing status of the sales order in your system trigger
another replication to update the status.
Technical Details
Type Changed
Additional Details
In addition, you can now use the following fields:
● SalesOrderApprovalReason on header level

● SalesDocApprovalStatus on header level
● OverallTotalDeliveryStatus on header level
● OverallOrdReltdBillgStatus on header level
● HigherLevelItem on item level
● OrderRelatedBillingStatus on item level
● DeliveryStatus on item level
Related Information
Sales Order - Replicate (A2A)

484 PUBLIC Sales
8.1.5.13 OData API: Sales Order - Simulate (A2X)
With this synchronous service (API_SALES_ORDER_SIMULATION_SRV), you can simulate a sales order to
retrieve information regarding pricing, availability and credit limit. The result is provided synchronously. The
simulated sales order is not saved.
Technical Details
Type New
Additional Details
The service offers the following main functions:
● Pricing
● Availability check
● Credit limit check
Related Information
Sales Order - Simulate (A2X)
8.1.6 Sales Billing
8.1.6.1 Use Material ID to Search for Billing Documents and

Billing Document Requests
With this feature, you can now use the search function in the following two apps to respectively search for all
billing documents or billing document requests that contain a specific material by searching for the material ID:

Sales PUBLIC 485
● Manage Billing Documents
● Manage Billing Document Requests
As long as a document contains at least one item with the specified material, it will show up in the search
results. Unless you use a wildcard (*) operator, the system only shows exact matches. Please note that you can
only search by material ID, and not by material description.
Technical Details
Type New
Scope Item BD9 (Sell from Stock), 1MC (Convergent Billing)
Application Component SD-BIL (Billing)
Related Information
Manage Billing Documents

Manage Billing Document Requests
8.1.6.2 Extensibility for Revenue Account Determination
As a key user, you can extend the revenue account determination process with custom fields that you have
created in the Custom Fields and Logic app. You can use custom fields that you have created on billing
document header level, as well as on billing document item level. This allows you to control revenue account
determination more precisely in accordance with your individual business requirements.
Technical Details
Type New
Scope Item BD9 (Sell from Stock) and other scope items that include
the posting of billing documents

486 PUBLIC Sales
Application Component SD-BF-ACT (Account Determination)
Additional Details
You can extend revenue account determination with custom fields as follows:
1. Create your custom fields in the Custom Fields and Logic app in one of the following two business contexts:
○ Sales: Account Determination Header for header-level fields
○ Sales: Account Determination Item for item-level fields
2. Add the custom fields that you want to use to the field catalog for revenue account determination.
3. Choose these custom fields from the field catalog when you create one or more new condition tables.
4. Assign the new condition tables to an access sequence (for example, access sequence KOFI).
5. Create condition records to fill the new condition tables according to your business requirements.
For information about the necessary settings in Customizing, see Extensibility for Revenue Account
Determination.
Related Information
Extensibility for Revenue Account Determination

Custom Fields and Logic
8.1.6.3 Billing Process Extensibility and App Extensibility
The apps Create Billing Documents and Manage Billing Document Requests are now extensible with custom
fields. In addition, five new business scenarios for the forwarding of custom fields throughout the billing
process are now available. Key users can extend the mentioned apps and enable the new scenarios for custom
fields of their choosing in the Custom Field and Logic app.

Sales PUBLIC 487
Technical Details
Type New
Scope Item BD9 (Sell from Stock) and other scope items involving billing
document creation
Additional Details
Extensibility of the Billing Due List in the Create Billing Documents App
The following three business scenarios enable custom header fields in sales documents, billing document
requests, and delivery documents to be made visible in the billing due list within the Create Billing Documents
app.
● Sales Document Header Level to Billing Due List in business contexts Sales: Sales Document and Sales:
Billing Due List
● Billing Document Request Header Level to Billing Due List in business contexts Sales: Billing Document and
Sales: Billing Due List
● Delivery Header Level to Billing Due List in business contexts Shipping: Delivery and Sales: Billing Due List
A key user must enable the relevant business scenario for a specific custom field and also enable this field for
the Create Billing Documents app. Business users can then use the app's personalization options to add this
field to the billing due list as an additional column. They can also use the field as an additional filter and sort
criterion.
Filtering the billing due list according to custom fields is useful when you want to create combined billing
documents according to custom convergence criteria. For example, the custom header field in a delivery
document could be used to identify a specific container in a shipment. A billing clerk that is tasked with
creating a combined billing document for all orders that are shipped in the same container could easily achieve
this by using the corresponding filter settings to help identify the correct delivery documents to be converged.
Extensibility of the Manage Billing Document Requests App

As a key user, you can extend the Manage Billing Document Requests app according to your business needs by
displaying custom fields of billing document requests (BDRs).
 Note
These custom fields are read-only and can only be filled by enabling a business scenario for process
extensibility that copies custom fields from preceding documents to billing document requests (for
example, Service Transaction to Billing Document at Header Level). For a complete list of business scenarios
for sales and billing documents, see Process Extensibility for Sales Documents and Billing Documents.

488 PUBLIC Sales
Key users can now enable the following business scenarios in the Custom Fields and Logic app to enable the
flow of custom fields from service transactions to billing documents. (BDRs serve as intermediaries between
billed service transactions and the final billing document and therefore pass the custom fields along to the
billing document when these business scenarios are enabled).
● Service Transaction to Billing Document at Header Level in the business contexts Service Header and Sales:
Billing Document
● Service Transaction to Billing Document at Item Level in the business contexts Service Item and Sales:
Billing Document Item
Related Information
App Extensibility: Create Billing Documents

App Extensibility: Manage Billing Document Requests
Custom Fields and Logic
Process Extensibility for Sales Documents and Billing Documents
Process Extensibility for Delivery Documents
Extensibility
8.1.6.4 Export Document Lists in Billing Apps to

Spreadsheets
With this feature, four list-based billing apps can now export their list of documents to a spreadsheet file
(*.XLSX format).
The following apps have been enhanced with this feature:
● Create Billing Documents

● Manage Billing Documents
● Manage Billing Document Requests
● Manage Invoice Lists
Technical Details
Type New
Scope Item BD9 (Sell from Stock), 1MC (Convergent Billing), BKZ (Sales
Order Processing with Invoice List and Collective Billing)

Sales PUBLIC 489
Additional Details
In each app, you can export all items in the currently displayed list to a spreadsheet file (*.XLSX format). All
columns that you have previously configured to be visible on the screen are then included in the spreadsheet.
Any filter settings that you have made are also taken into account.
When exporting, you also have the following options:
● You can choose a filename that deviates from the default.

● The system can split cells that contain multiple values across separate worksheet columns.
● On a second worksheet, the system can list the specific filter settings that you have applied (for reference).
Related Information
Create Billing Documents

Manage Billing Documents
Manage Invoice Lists
8.1.6.5 Credit Items in Billing Document Requests
With this feature, standard billing document requests (BDRs) of type BDR1 can now contain credit items (item
category G2N). Previously, billing document requests only supported debit items. Billing document requests
that contain credit items can be billed to create invoices that contain credit items. Credit items reduce the total
net value of an invoice by the specified amount. You can use credit items in invoices to grant discounts and
other credits to customers.
Technical Details
Type Changed
Scope Item 1MC (Convergent Billing)

490 PUBLIC Sales
Additional Details
When you manually create billing document requests by importing billing data in spreadsheet format, this
billing data can now also include credit items. The resulting billing document request will then include those
credit items. The credit item category G2N is always negative, so no preceding minus sign (-) is needed to
signify credit (rather than debit) for the corresponding condition rate value (field CONDITIONRATEVALUE) that
is imported.
Please note that the BDR credit item category G2N can only be used for the stand-alone billing of BDRs (with
preceding sales document type EO01). This means that BDRs containing credit items cannot be converged
with other preceding documents to create combined invoices.
Please also note that you cannot create credit memos on the basis of these billing document requests. You can
only create invoices that contain credit items. For information about creating credit memos on the basis of
billing document requests, see External Credit Billing Document Requests and External Debit Billing Document
Requests [page 491].
Related Information
Billing Document Request

8.1.6.6 External Credit Billing Document Requests and

External Debit Billing Document Requests
With this feature, the following two new types of billing document request (BDR) are introduced:
● External debit billing document request (BDR type BDRD), used for creating debit memos (billing type L2)
based on external billing data
● External credit billing document request (BDR type BDRC), used for creating credit memos (billing type G2)
based on external billing data
Technical Details
Type New

Sales PUBLIC 491
Additional Details
The following table provides information about the two new external billing document request types. The
standard billing document request (type BDR1) is also included for comparison.

Type Name Description Billing Type
BDR1 External billing document A standard billing document Invoice type (for example,
request request that contains billing F2) depends on the chosen
data from an external source convergence use case.
(such as an integrated For more information, see
system or a spreadsheet Omnichannel Convergent
containing billing data). It Billing under Related
can contain debit as well as Information below.
credit items.
This type of BDR can either

be billed individually (stand-
alone billing) or, if it contains
only debit items, can be
converged with other billable
documents to create a
combined invoice.
BDRD External debit billing A billing document request L2 (Debit memo)

Document request that contains only debit
items from an external
source. It can only be billed
individually and therefore
cannot be converged with
other billable documents.
BDRC External credit billing A billing document request G2 (Credit memo)

document request that contains only credit
items from an external
source. It can only be billed
individually and therefore

492 PUBLIC Sales
Type Name Description Billing Type
cannot be converged with

other billable documents.
All three billing document request types can be created by using the SOAP API Billing Document Request -
Create or the spreadsheet import function in the Manage Billing Document Requests app.
Related Information

Creating External Billing Document Requests Manually
Billing Document Requests
8.1.6.7 Assign Delivery Blocks to Billing Plan Types
With this feature, you can assign a delivery block to a billing plan type. When you create sales orders with a
billing plan type that has been assigned a delivery block, the system automatically blocks deliveries on
schedule lines.
Technical Details
Type New
Scope Item BKJ (Sales Order Processing with Customer Down Payment)
Application Component SD-BIL-IV-BP (Billing Plan)
Additional Details
To assign delivery blocks to billing plan types, choose Billing Billing Plan Define and Assign Date
Categories Maintain Date Category for Billing Plan Type in Customizing for Sales and Distribution.
Based on the billing plan type, the system determines the delivery block for schedule lines and blocks deliveries
accordingly, with the following exceptions:

Sales PUBLIC 493
● When both the billing plan type and the schedule line category contain delivery blocks, the system doesn’t
determine the delivery block from the billing plan type, but from the schedule line category instead. If you
want to use the delivery block from the billing plan type, you must manually remove the delivery blocks
from the schedule line category.
● The system doesn’t remove or update the delivery block on schedule lines when you do one of the
following:
○ Delete the billing plan from the sales order
○ Change the sales document item category after sales order creation
○ Change the schedule line category after sales order creation
In such cases, you must manually remove the delivery block from schedule lines to process deliveries.
When delivery due list block is selected as the only delivery type for your blocking reason, the system doesn’t
block delivery creation on schedule lines.
8.1.6.8 Billing of Freight Costs - Integration with

Transportation Management
For transportation management scenarios that are initiated from a sales document, the freight cost of the
freight order can be taken into account when the corresponding billing document is created. This requires an
integration to be set up between the transportation management, pricing, and billing processes, so that the
freight costs can be added to the final amount due.
A typical use case for this scenario is when you want to charge the buyer back for the freight cost incurred for
you as the seller. In effect, this allows the costs for delivery that are initially paid by the seller to be passed on to
the buyer by adding them to the invoice for the sales transaction.
For more information about billing freight costs to a buyer, see Billing the Freight Cost in TM to a Customer in
SD.
Technical Details
Type New

494 PUBLIC Sales
For information about setting up the integration on the transportation management side, please see Internal
TM Component Integration.
Customizing for Sales Billing

To enable the integration on the Sales Billing side, a configuration expert must make settings in the
Customizing activity Copying Control: Delivery Document to Billing Document. You can find this activity in
Customizing under Sales and Distribution Billing Billing Documents Copying Control for Billing
Documents .
In this Customizing activity, the setting for price source for the relevant document types must be set to the
value I (order / freight order).
Customizing for Price Management

To enable the integration with Price Management in Sales, a configuration expert must make the following
settings in Customizing:
● In the activity Define Condition Types in Customizing under Sales and Distribution Basic Functions
Pricing Pricing Control , create new entries with the following details, then save:
Field Value Description
Condition Type <Enter condition type> <Enter a description>
Condition Class A Discount or Surcharge
Calculation Type B Fixed Amount
Condition Category F Freight
Plus/Minus A Positive
Condition Function FCTM Freight Costs fr. TM
Item Condition Select checkbox
Delete Select checkbox
Amount/Percent Select checkbox
● In the activity Define and Assign Pricing Procedures in Customizing under the same path, select the pricing
procedure relevant for your business or choose a predefined one to be copied. Add the newly created
condition type, then save.
● In the activity Set Pricing Procedure Determination in Customizing under the same path, adjust the settings
accordingly so that the newly created pricing procedure is used by the relevant business documents, then
save.
Related Information
Freight Costs in Price Management - Integration with Transportation Management [page 465]
Internal TM Component Integration

Sales PUBLIC 495
Billing the Freight Cost in TM to a Customer in SD
8.1.7 Solution Billing
8.1.7.1 Product Assistance for Solution Billing
As of the current release, you can find information about omnichannel convergent billing in the Sales product
assistance under Order and Contract Management Solution Billing Omnichannel Convergent Billing .
Technical Details
Type Changed
Related Information
Solution Billing
8.1.8 Incentive and Commission Management
8.1.8.1 Incentive and Commission Management
You can use Settlement Management for your incentive and commission management.
Technical Details
Type New

496 PUBLIC Sales
Scope Item 2TT (2TT)
Application Component LO-AB (Settlement Management)
Related Information
Incentive and Commission Management
8.1.9 Claims, Returns, and Refund Management
8.1.9.1 Workflow for Credit Memo Requests
Creation and management of approval workflows for credit memo requests, previously available in the Manage
Credit Memo Request Workflow app, is now only available in the new Manage Sales Document Workflows app.
Technical Details
Type Changed
Credit memo request workflows, created in previous versions using the Manage Credit Memo Request Workflow
app, will be displayed in the new Manage Sales Document Workflows app. As of SAP S/4HANA 1909, you can
create credit memo request workflows using the same highly flexible and customizable solution provided for
the creation of sales document workflows in the Manage Sales Document Workflows app. The old method of
creating approval workflows for credit memo requests is now considered obsolete, and is planned to be deleted
in SAP S/4HANA 2009.

Sales PUBLIC 497
Related Information
Manage Sales Document Workflows
8.1.9.2 SOAP API for Customer Return - Replicate (A2A)
With this asynchronous outbound SOAP service (CustomerReturnBulkReplication_Out), you can

replicate
customer returns in bulk to external systems. The replication logic is handled by the data replication framework
(DRF). You can apply any of the filters provided or replicate all existing data. This service is extensible.
Technical Details
Type New
Scope Item BKP (Accelerated Customer Returns)
Application Component SD-SLS-RE (Returns)
Related Information
Customer Return - Replicate (A2A)
Technical Details
Type Changed

498 PUBLIC Sales
Additional Details

Related Information

8.1.9.4 OData API: Credit Memo Request - Create, Read,

Update, Delete (A2X)
With this service (API_CREDIT_MEMO_REQUEST_SRV), you can now accept or deny approval requests for
credit memo requests that cannot be processed without the consent of an approver.

Sales PUBLIC 499
Technical Details
Type Changed
Scope Item 1EZ (Credit Memo Processing), BKL (Invoice Correction

Process with Credit Memo)
If you want to use this service for approving or rejecting credit memo requests, you must define at least one
approval request reason for credit memo requests in the Define Reasons for Approval Requests and the Assign
Reasons for Approval Requests Customizing activities. You can find these activities in Customizing under
Sales and Distribution Sales Sales Documents Sales Document Approvals . This reason must then be
flagged as relevant for an external workflow.
Related Information
8.1.10 Sales Monitoring and Analytics
8.1.10.1 Terminology Change: Billing Quantity to Sales

Volume Quantity
The data element Billing Quantity (MC_UMMENGE) has been changed to Sales Volume Quantity in order to
specify that this quantity refers to the total invoiced sales achieved during a specified period, based on invoice
items or debit memos that have not been canceled. This key figure originates from the Logistics Information
System (LIS), therefore this will affect you if you are still using LIS.

500 PUBLIC Sales
Technical Details
Type Changed
Scope Item 1BS (SAP Fiori Analytical Apps for Sales)
Application Component SD (Sales and Distribution)
Additional Details
The terminology change affects the following apps:
● Sales Volume - Flexible Analysis

● Sales Volume - Check Open Sales
Related Information
Sales Volume - Check Open Sales

Sales Volume - Flexible Analysis
8.1.10.2 Enhancements to My Sales Overview App
Various enhancements have been implemented to the My Sales Overview app, including the availability of the
new Display Currency section in the filter bar and a redesign of the Incoming Sales Orders card (previously
called Compare to Month of Previous Year card).
Technical Details
Type Changed

Sales PUBLIC 501
Related Information
My Sales Overview
8.1.10.3 Manage Sales Plans
With this app, you can now do the following:
● Set target quantities in sales plans

● Visualize the uploaded plan data in chart views
● Share a sales plan with other users by assigning it to a team
● Add additional standard fields from sales orders and billing documents as dimensions for planning
● As a key user, extend the app with custom dimensions according to your business needs
Technical Details
Type Changed
Scope Item 1O0 (Planning Apps for Sales)
Application Component SD-ANA-SP (Sales Planning)
Additional Details
To set quantity-based sales targets, you can choose to create a quantity plan. The sales targets in a quantity
plan can represent the following:
● Incoming sales orders quantity: Quantity of sales order items that are relevant for delivery or billing
● Sales volume quantity: Quantity of invoice items or debit memo items (debits) that have not been
canceled

502 PUBLIC Sales
To extend the Manage Sales Plans app with custom dimensions, key users need to enable usage of the custom
fields for both the Manage Sales Plans app and the Sales Performance – Plan/Actual app at the same time. This
allows the business users to compare the plan and actual data for the same custom dimensions.
Related Information
Manage Sales Plans

App Extensibility: Manage Sales Plans
8.1.10.4 Sales Performance – Plan/Actual
With this app, you can now compare planned sales volume to actual net sales volume (sales volume minus
credit memos). You can now extend the app with custom dimensions for which you compare the plan and
actual data.
Technical Details
Type Changed
Scope Item 1O0 (Planning Apps for Sales)
Additional Details
To make the net sales volume visible for comparison, you need to add the column of net sales volume to the
comparison table from the table view settings.
To compare the plan and actual data for the custom dimensions in this app, you must have also enabled the
same custom fields for the Manage Sales Plans app as well as for the sales orders and/or the billing
documents.

Sales PUBLIC 503
Related Information
Sales Performance – Plan/Actual

App Extensibility: Sales Performance – Plan/Actual
8.1.10.5 Dimension Sold-to Party Replaces Dimension

Customer in Analytical Apps
The dimension Sold-to Party replaces the dimension Customer in some analytical apps within Sales. In these
apps, additional business partner functions (such as ship-to party and bill-to party) are now also available as
customer-related dimensions for planning and analysis.
Technical Details
Type Changed
Additional Details
The dimension Sold-to Party replaces the dimension Customer in the following apps:
● Manage Sales Plans

● Sales Performance - Plan/Actual
The Manage Sales Plans app no longer supports uploading plan data that contains the Customer dimension.
Uploaded plan data that relates to the Customer dimension is now represented by the Sold-to Party dimension
automatically.

504 PUBLIC Sales
Related Information
Manage Sales Plans

Sales Performance – Plan/Actual
8.1.10.6 Sales Quotations - Flexible Analysis
With this app, you can analyze sales quotations based on flexible combinations of dimensions. For example,
you can get a monthly rolling trend of your quotations and see to what extent they are being referenced by
sales orders. You can quickly identify the critical quotations that are close to expiring, have expired, or are
rejected.
Technical Details
Type New
Application Component SD-ANA (Sales Analytics)
Related Information
Sales Quotations - Flexible Analysis
8.1.10.7 Manage Duplicate Sales Documents
With this feature, you can search for potential duplicate sales documents according to various criteria, such as
creation period, sales document, sales document category, sales organization, sold-to party, created by, and
overall status.

Sales PUBLIC 505
Technical Details
Type New
Application Component SD-SLS-GF
Related Information
Manage Duplicate Sales Documents
8.1.10.8 Enhancements to Sales Order Fulfillment - Analyze

and Resolve Issues
Sold-to party one-time account has been integrated into the Sales Order Fulfillment - Analyze and Resolve app.
You can filter on sold-to party one-time account, and display the name in the list.
Technical Details
Type Changed
Related Information
Sales Order Fulfillment - Analyze and Resolve Issues

506 PUBLIC Sales
8.1.10.9 Enhancements to Track Sales Order Details
You can now display information on internal and external contacts in the sales document details in Track Sales
Order Details. You can use their contact details to collaborate with them directly.
Internal contacts are contact persons and employees responsible, and external contacts are contact persons
for sold-to party and ship-to party.
Technical Details
Type Changed
Application Component SD
Related Information
Track Sales Order Details
8.1.10.10 Enhancements to Delivery Performance
The Key Performance Indicator (KPI) Delivered as Committed is now available for the Delivery Performance app.
This KPI considers sales order items delivered on time and for which delivery is complete in terms of the
committed delivery date.
A new tile is now available for the Delivery Performance app: Delivery Performance - Delivered as Committed.
This tile is preconfigured with the corresponding KPIs for easier use.
Technical Details
Type Changed

Sales PUBLIC 507
Related Information
Delivery Performance
8.1.10.11 Enhancements to Predicted Delivery Delay
Up till now, it was possible to predict the delivery delay by focusing on the predicted delay of delivery creation.
You can now also focus on the predicted delivery processing delay of the planned goods issue date of a delivery.
You can also display the overall predicted delivery delay for both of these predictions, that is, whether the
delivery is likely to be late, early, or on time.
Technical Details
Type Changed
Scope Item 2YJ (Predictive Analytics Model Training - Sales)
Related Information
Predicted Delivery Delay
8.1.10.12 App Extensibility: Predicted Delivery Delay
This feature enables you to extend the Predicted Delivery Delay app according to your business needs.

508 PUBLIC Sales
In the Custom Fields and Logic app, you can add custom fields to the Predicted Delivery Delay app by using the
business context Sales: Sales Document Item.
Technical Details
Type New
Scope Item 2YJ (Predictive Analytics Model Training - Sales)
Application Component SD
(Sales and Distribution)
Related Information
App Extensibility: Predicted Delivery Delay
8.1.10.13 Customer Returns - Flexible Analysis
With this app, you can analyze the monthly rolling trend of your customer returns based on flexible
combinations of dimensions.
Technical Details
Type New

Sales PUBLIC 509
Additional Details
You can analyze the following customer-return-related KPIs in multi-dimensional reports:
KPI Description
Customer Returns Net amount of customer return items that are relevant for
billing or delivery
Return Item Quantity Quantity of customer return items that are relevant for deliv
ery or billing
No. of Return Items Number of customer return items that are relevant for deliv
ery or billing
Related Information
Customer Returns - Flexible Analysis
8.1.10.14 Customer Returns - Return Rate
With this app, you can analyze the return rate of your incoming sales orders according to various dimensions.
Technical Details
Type New
Related Information
Customer Returns - Return Rate

510 PUBLIC Sales
8.1.10.15 App Extensibility: Sales Volume - Check Open Sales
This feature enables you to extend the Sales Volume - Check Open Sales app according to your business needs.
In the Custom Fields and Logic app, you can add custom fields to the Sales Volume - Check Open Sales app by
using the business contexts Sales: Sales Document Item, Sales: Billing Document Item, and Shipping: Delivery
Item.
Technical Details
Type New
Available As Of
 Example
SAP S/4HANA 1909
Additional Details
Note that you can only extend the app to be used with dimensions, not with measures.
Related Information
App Extensibility: Sales Volume - Check Open Sales
8.1.10.16 CDS Views for Data Extraction
The CDS views C_BILLINGDOCUMENTITEMBASICDEX (Billing Document Item Basic Extraction Data) and
C_SalesDocumentItemDEX (Data Extraction for Sales Document Item) have now been released for data
extraction. These CDS views are app-independent, and are available for all external consumers who want to
extract billing document item data or sales document item data to SAP BW or other external systems.

Sales PUBLIC 511
Technical Details
Type New
Application Component SAP-ANA (Sales Analytics)
Related Information
Data Extraction for Sales Document Item

Billing Document Item Basic Extraction Data
8.1.10.17 CDS Views for Sales Monitoring and Analytics
New CDS views for Sales Analytics and Monitoring now have been released. Some of the existing CDS views
have been updated or deprecated.
Technical Details
Type Changed
Additional Details
The following CDS views are now released.

512 PUBLIC Sales
● I_SalesQuotationItemCube_2: Analytics - Sales Quotation Cube
● C_SalesQuotationItemQry: Sales Quotations - Flexible Analysis
● C_SalesContractItemQry: Analytics - Sales Contract
● I_SalesSchedgAgrmtItemCube: Analytics - Sales Scheduling Agreement Item Cube
● C_SalesSchedgAgrmtItemQry: Analytics - Sales Scheduling Agreement Item
● I_SalesOrderCube: Analytics - Sales Order Cube
● C_SalesOrderQuery: Analytics - Sales Order
● I_CustomerReturnItemCube_2: Analytics - Customer Return Cube
● C_CustomerReturnItemQry_2: Customer Returns - Flexible Analysis
● C_SalesDocumentItemDEX: Data Extraction for Sales Document Item
● C_BILLINGDOCUMENTITEMBASICDEX: Billing Document Item Basic Extraction Data
These two CDS views have now been released for data extraction. These CDS views are app-independent,
and are available for all external consumers who want to extract sales document item data or billing
document item data to SAP BW or other external systems.
The following CDS views have been updated.
● I_SalesOrderItemCube: Analytics - Incoming Sales Order Cube

● C_SalesOrderItemQry: Analytics - Incoming Sales Orders
● C_RevenueFromInvoiceQry: Analytics - Sales Volume Flexible Analysis
The following CDS views have been deprecated.
Deprecated CDS View Replaced With
I_SalesQuotationItemCube (Analytics - Sales Quotation I_SalesQuotationItemCube_2 (Analytics - Sales Quota

Cube) tion Cube)
I_CustomerReturnItemCube (Analytics - Customer Re I_CustomerReturnItemCube_2 (Analytics - Customer Re

turn Cube) turn Cube)
C_CustomerReturnItemQry (Analytics - Customer Re C_CustomerReturnItemQry_2 (Analytics - Customer Re

turn) turn)
CDS view C_SalesQuotationItemQry (Analytics - Sales Quotation) has been renamed to Sales Quotations -
Flexible Analysis.
For more information about the mentioned CDS views, choose the relevant view names in the section Sales
Monitoring and Analytics under CDS Views for Sales.
Related Information
Data Extraction for Sales Document Item

Sales PUBLIC 513
Billing Document Item Basic Extraction Data
8.1.11 Enhancements to Functionality and Usability in Sales
With these new features and enhancements, you can benefit from improvements in functionality and usability
in the area of SAP S/4HANA Sales.
Technical Details
Type Changed
Application Component ● SD-SLS (Sales)

● SD-SLS-GF-AR (Archiving Sales)
● SD-SLS-GF-RE (SD Reporting)
● SD-SLS-SO (Sales Orders)
● SD-SLS-SO-TP (SD Third-party order processing)
● SD-BF-OC (Output Determination)
● SD-BF-PR (Pricing)
● SD-BF-TP (Word Processing)
● SD-BIL (Billing)
● SD-MD-CM (Conditions and Condition Maintenance)
Additional Details
The table below contains an overview of all available improvements for your back-end system. For more
detailed information about the availability, delivery and prerequisites of the individual features, consult the
indicated SAP Note for each item.
Delivered Improvements
Feature Description SAP Note
You can now modify and preview e-mail subjects and contents in SAP Note 2786303
sales and billing transactions.

514 PUBLIC Sales
You can now view the invoice and customer master data or business SAP Note 2769096
partner information when displaying all billing documents not re
leased to accounting using transaction VFX3.
With the new user parameter DISPLAY_SDOC_RE_NAVI, you can nav SAP Note 2761156
igate to sales documents in display mode from transactions for sales
document processing.
With the improved functionality of the Business Add-In SAP Note 2761154
BADI_SDOC_WRAPPER, you can now provide additional reference
fields for currency and quantity.
When creating sales orders, you can now attach documents using the SAP Note 2739451
GOS service Store Business Document directly.
With the new transaction VA71, you can now release output for sales SAP Note 2784287
documents.
Read Consulting Note 2750423 to learn how you can manually SAP Note 2750423
change conditions on the item overview screen.
With the new Business Add-In BADI_VKOE, you can sync condition re SAP Note 2755370
cords in source systems and target systems for certain combinations
of condition table, condition type, and variable key, effectively avoid
ing mismatches between condition records in a source system and its
target system.
Read Consulting Note 2791393 to learn how you can effectively SAP Note 2791393
use the standard SAP translation tools at your disposal to define your
own translations of condition tables for any possible combination of
source and target language.
Read Consulting Note 2739880 to learn how you can change the SAP Note 2739880
net value of an order item in a way that results in the desired change
to the net price.
With the new user exit USEREXIT_NUMBER_RANGE, you can define the SAP Note 2753397
number ranges for internal document number assignments depend
ing on the required logic.
Read Consulting Note 2776710 to learn how you can make SAP Note 2776710
changes to the delivery relevance in an item category after the time of
entry also valid for documents that have already been entered.
Read Consulting Note 2726768 to learn how you can add condition SAP Note 2726768
tables to the definition of an existing pricing report or a condition list.

Sales PUBLIC 515
With the new user parameter SD_TEXTID_DISPLAY, you can display SAP Note 2753787
the currently selected, active text type in the header and item data of
a sales or billing document on the Texts tab. This can help to prevent
entering a description for a wrong text type.
You can now choose to hide specified entries in the input help of or SAP Note 2781302
ganizational units in processing sales transactions.
With the new Delete billing block button in transaction V23 for mass SAP Note 2762902
processing of sales documents, you can now delete header and item
billing blocks from sales documents.
The material description from the material master record is now al SAP Note 2753355
ways being displayed on screen in transactions for sales document
processing.
Read Consulting Note 2772842 to learn how you can influence the SAP Note 2772842
content of various standard fields in the two central purchase requisi
tion tables EBAN and EBKN by means of customer programming and
how to add customer-defined fields to these tables.
You can now display a reference document by double-clicking on its SAP Note 2753511
document number or item number in the Sales A tab of a sales docu
ment item in sales processing transactions.
Read Consulting Note 2751648 to learn how you can customize SAP Note 2751648
the double-click event handler for the document flow of a sales and
distribution document.
When attempting to access a billing document that is locked using SAP Note 2779512
transaction VF02, the resulting message displayed by the system now
contains the user ID of the user who is currently processing the docu
ment.
When checking the archivability of sales orders, you can now choose SAP Note 2765704
to execute all archivability checks for a given document, even if a first
reason that prevents the document from being archived is found. Pre
viously, the report always terminated after finding the first issue, even
if multiple reasons persisted that prevented the document from being
archived.

516 PUBLIC Sales
8.2 Sales Force Support
8.2.1 Product Assistance for Sales Force Support Moved

From Service to Sales
You can now find the documentation for Sales Force Support under Sales, rather than under Service.
Technical Details
Type Changed
Application Component CRM-S4-SLS (S4CRM: Pre-Sales & Sales)
Related Information
Sales Force Support
8.3 Commodity Sales
8.3.1 Integration with Trader's and Scheduler's Workbench
The integration of the TSW, for nominations and tickets, with Commodity Procurement and Commodity Sales
enables oil companies to perform enhanced risk assessments.
The new Risk Object is a generic business object modeled in the Business Object Processing Framework to
integrate risk-related data, which cannot be directly derived from pricing procedures or pricing conditions. With
this data object, you can use the following features:
● An interface for any application to be integrated with Commodity Management

● Flexible pricing with the Commodity Pricing Engine (CPE)
● Evaluation of financial risks resulting from commodity positions
● Risk data can be assessed by performing reports of Commodity Risk Analytics
● Several possibilities to extend the data model and the business logic

Sales PUBLIC 517
Technical Details
Type New
Application Component LO-CMM, SD-SLS-OA-CCO, MM-PUR-OA-CON, CA-GTF-CPE
8.4.1 Predictive Analytics Model Training - Sales (2YJ)
Use
● Updates to the "Delivery Performance / Delivery in Time" use case
Technical Details
Type Changed
Scope Item 2YJ ( Predictive Analytics Model Training - Sales )

518 PUBLIC Sales
8.4.2 Convergent Billing (1MC)
Use
● Inclusion of debit and credit memo processes into convergent billing.
Technical Details
Type Changed
Scope Item 1MC ( Convergent Billing )
Application Component SD-BIL
South Korea, Luxembourg, Malaysia, Netherlands, Norway, New Zealand, Philippines, Poland, Romania, Russia,
Saudi Arabia, Sweden, Singapore, Thailand, Turkey, Taiwan, United States of America, South Africa

Sales PUBLIC 519
8.4.3 Accelerated Customer Returns (BKP)
Use
● Support return of goods that have been sold via down-payment or free of charge
Technical Details
Type Changed
Scope Item BKP ( Accelerated Customer Returns )
Application Component SD-SLS

520 PUBLIC Sales
8.4.4 Return Order Processing for Non-Stock Material (3TE)
Use
This scope item handles return order processing of non-stock items and corresponding compensation.
Technical Details
Type New
Scope Item 3TE ( Return Order Processing for Non-Stock Material )
8.4.5 Dangerous Goods in Sales (3G8)
Use
This scope item describes the dangerous goods transport check in sales order and sales quotation. The check
is performed for all compliance-relevant products. For chemical products that are added to sales orders, this
ensures that an appropriate dangerous good classification is established.

Sales PUBLIC 521
Technical Details
Type New
Scope Item 3G8 ( Dangerous Goods in Sales )
8.4.6 Digital Payments - Sales (1Z1)
Use
● Return orders with electronic payments are now enabled.

● PayPal as payment method is now enabled for sales order processing.
Technical Details
Type Changed

522 PUBLIC Sales
Scope Item 1Z1 ( Digital Payments - Sales )
8.4.7 Presales Management (41V)
Use
This scope item describes how to set up sales force automation (SFA) support and allow sales employees to
manage their activities, leads, and opportunities in a sales cycle.
Technical Details
Type New
Scope Item 41V ( Presales Management )
Application Component CRM-S4

Sales PUBLIC 523
8.4.8 Sales Order Processing with Customer Down Payment

(BKJ)
Use
● Support of customer down-payments for service and non-stock material
Technical Details
Type Changed
Scope Item BKJ ( Sales Order Processing with Customer Down Pay
ment )
Africa

524 PUBLIC Sales
8.4.9 Safety Data Sheets in Sales (3VQ)
Use
Placing chemical products on the market requires an efficient system support for handling mandatory
documentation as defined by regulators. This scope item focuses on the maintenance of Safety Data Sheets
for products during Sales processes.
Technical Details
Type New
Scope Item 3VQ ( Safety Data Sheets in Sales )

Sales PUBLIC 525
8.4.10 Chemical Compliance in Sales (31J)
Use
● Integrate marketability checks into sales and order processes, now including outbound delivery
● Enhanced support of life-cycle of products: Logistic roles
Technical Details
Type Changed
Scope Item 31J ( Chemical Compliance in Sales )
Luxembourg, Mexico, Malaysia, Netherlands, Norway, New Zealand, Philippines, Romania, Russia, Saudi
Arabia, Sweden, Singapore, Thailand, Turkey, Taiwan, United States of America, South Africa

526 PUBLIC Sales
9 Service
9.1 Service Contract Management
9.1.1 Price Adaptation for Service Contracts
With this feature, you can employ flexible pricing with service contract items for price adaptation (SCNA). One
method of achieving this is to set a required date (such as billing date, settlement start date, or settlement end
date) within a billing request line as the pricing date of a service contract item, so that varying prices can be
determined according to varying pricing dates. Alternatively, you can maintain the prices of service contract
items manually at billing request line level.
Technical Details
Type New
Scope Item 426 (Service Contract Management)
Application Component CRM-S4-SRV-CTR (Service Contract)
You can enable price adaptation in Customizing for Service under Transactions Basic Settings Define
Item Categories .
Related Information
Price Adaptation for Service Contracts

Service PUBLIC 527
9.1.2 Price Agreements in Service Contracts
With this feature, you can now offer your customers lower prices for services and service parts than those
defined in service orders. You can create the relevant condition records to maintain these prices or discounts
for service contract items by using transaction VK11. When your service orders are assigned to service
contracts after service contract determination, those prices in service contracts are copied to the service
orders.
Technical Details
Type New
Application Component CRM-S4-SRV-CTR (Service Contract)
Additional Details
To maintain the condition records, you must use the SD document category CSCT for price agreements in
service contracts. You can use the following condition types for service contracts:
● PSC0 (material price in service contract)

● DSC1 (material discount in service contract)
● DSC2 (group discount of material price in service contract)
Related Information
Price Agreements in Service Contracts
9.1.3 Auto Renewal for Service Contract Items
This feature enables you to automatically extend the duration of service contract items whose validity ends
within a certain period.

528 PUBLIC Service
Technical Details
Type New
Application Component CRM-S4-SRV-CTR
Additional Details
To activate the auto renewal of service contract items, you must select the Enable Auto Renewal checkbox for
the service contract item. You must also define the auto renewal period and the contract extension.
You can use the program Renew Service Contract Items (CRMS4_SERVICE_CONTRACT_RENEWAL) to select the
service contract items that are due and need to be renewed. The program then processes all service contract
items whose contract end is found within the auto renewal period that has been defined for the service
contract item.
In Customizing for Service in the Customizing activity Settings for the Maintenance Framework (BTMF), the
SC_ITEM_RENEW BTMF process must be entered in the Activate Change Process view.
Service contract items that support the pricing adaptation cannot be renewed automatically. In this case, the
Enable Auto Renewal checkbox is not displayed. The pricing adaptation is defined in the Customizing activity
Define Item Categories in the Customizing Item view for the respective item category.
See Also
For more information, see the product assistance for SAP S/4HANA at http://help.sap.com/s4hana_op_1909
under Product Assistance Enterprise Business Applications Service Service Processes Service
Contract Management Service Contracts Change Processes Auto Renewal of Service Contract Items .

Service PUBLIC 529
9.2 Solution Quotations
9.2.1 OData API for Solution Quotations
With the Web service Solution Quotations - Create, Read, Update, Delete
(API_BUS_SOLUTION_QUOTATION_SRV), you can create, read, and update solution quotations. You can delete
the header texts and item entities. In addition, you can use the service to accept solution quotations. This
triggers the automatic creation of follow-up transactions.
Technical Details
Type New
Application Component CRM-S4-SOL-SQ (Solution Quotation)
Additional Details
You can also do the following with this service:
● Etag handling
● Create and accept solution quotations in a single changeset
Related Information
External References
9.2.2 Subscription-Related Items Enabled in Solution

Quotations
With this feature, you can add subscription-related items to solution quotations. To do so, you must have
enabled Subscription Order Management. When you accept a solution quotation containing subscription-
related items, the system automatically creates a subscription contract as a follow-up transaction.

530 PUBLIC Service
Technical Details
Type New
Application Component CRM-S4-SOL-SQ (Solution Quotation)
Related Information
Solution Quotation in Subscription Order Management
9.3 Business Solution Portfolios
9.3.1 Business Solution Portfolios
This feature enables you to retain an overview of the service contract items and subscription contract items
that are referenced to a customer’s business solution.
A business solution portfolio acts as a record of the customer’s business solution and references the respective
service contract items and subscription contract items.
You can create business solution portfolios as follows:
● Automatically as a follow-up transaction for a solution quotation

● Manually using the app Manage Business Solution Portfolios
Technical Details
Type New
Application Component CRM-S4-SOL-BSP

Service PUBLIC 531
Additional Details
Create business solution portfolios from solution quotations

Once a solution quotation has been accepted, the system automatically creates a business solution portfolio
that has been assigned the relevant service contract items and subscription contract items.
To instruct the system to create business solution portfolios automatically, you must implement the API
API_BUS_SOLUTION_QUOTATION_SRV. For more information, see the section Effects on System
Administration.
Manage business solution portfolios using the app

You can use the app Manage Business Solution Portfolios to do the following:
● Manually create, change, and delete business solution portfolios: You can manually create a business
solution portfolio for a customer. You can also change data and delete the business solution portfolio.
● Search, filter, and display business solution portfolios: You can search and filter for specific business
solution portfolios and display the respective business solution portfolio.
● Add and remove items: You can add service contract items and subscription contract items to a business
solution portfolio and remove items.
In the API API_BUS_SOLUTION_QUOTATION_SRV, make sure that the BusSolnPrtfloReference property

has been maintained in the API_BUS_SOLUTION_QUOTATION_SRV - A_BusinessSolutionQuotation
entity.
You use this property to transfer the external reference ID (business solution portfolio reference) to the
business solution portfolio to be generated. You can only create a business solution portfolio automatically if
the external reference ID has been entered for the solution quotation.
In Customizing for Service in the Customizing activity Define Number Ranges, you must define the number
intervals that are assigned to the business solution portfolios as IDs.
The automatic creation of business solution portfolios from solution quotations requires you to make the
following settings in the Customizing activity Assign Action Profile to the Business Transaction Type for the
SRVP (solution quotation) transaction type:
● Assign the SERVICE_QUOTATION_PROD_PKG action profile to the SRVP (solution quotation) transaction
type.

532 PUBLIC Service
● For the SERVICE_QUOTATION_PROD_PKG action profile, define the CRMS4_CREATE_BUSSOLNPRTFLO
action definition as a follow-up transaction.
See Also
For more information, see the product assistance for SAP S/4HANA at http://help.sap.com/s4hana_op_1909
under Product Assistance Enterprise Business Applications Service Service Processes Business
Solution Portfolios .
9.4 Case Management
9.4.1 Case Management
This feature enables you to consolidate, manage, and process information about a complex problem or issue in
a central collection point, the case. Within a case, you can group diverse information, such as business
partners, transactions, products, and documents.
You can also use Case Management to process problems and issues that involve multiple processing steps or
multiple processors. Case Management therefore supports the processing and communication flow between
organizational units.
Technical Details
Type New
Application Component CRM-CM

Service PUBLIC 533
9.5 Cross Topics
9.5.1 External References for Service Transactions
With this feature, you can use external references as identifiers for service transactions in external systems.
You provide external references when you create service transactions (and service transaction items) through
API services. You can check them in the respective user interface (UI) for each service transaction type.
Technical Details
Type New
Application Component CRM-BTX-BF (Basic Functions for Business Transactions)
Additional Details
You can use external references in the following service transactions:
● Solution quotation
● Solution quotation item
● Business solution portfolio
Related Information
External References

534 PUBLIC Service
9.6 Integration
9.6.1 Integration with SAP Field Service Management
With this feature, the system automatically optimizes field service processes when a service call is received in
SAP Field Service Management. The integration ensures a seamless, fast, and flexible delivery of field services,
and helps you to provide more efficient customer services.
Technical Details
Type Changed
Scope Item 3D2 (Service Order Management and Monitoring)
Application Component CRM-S4-SRV-SVO
Related Information
Integration with SAP Field Service Management
9.7 Subscription Order Management
9.7.1 Solution Quotation
This feature now enables you to manage subscription products in addition to other products, such as sales and
service products. You are also able to create solution quotations with reference to master agreements to
leverage the predefined terms within these agreements.

Service PUBLIC 535
Technical Details
Type New
Application Component CRM-S4-SOM
Related Information
Solution Quotation in Subscription Order Management
9.7.2 Allowances
This feature enables you to manage the credit given to customers by service providers, for one or more of their
services.
Technical Details
Type New
Additional Details
You can use allowances to:
● Build customizable allowance definition groups and assign them to specific subscription products.
● Activate allowances during order capture and contract distribution.

536 PUBLIC Service
● Display allowance balance in subscription contract.
For more information about contract change processes, refer to Customizing structure under Service
Transactions Settings for Subscription Transactions Integration Integration with Convergent Charging
Business Add-Ins (BAdIs) .
Related Information
Allowances
9.7.3 Variant Configuration
This feature enables you to use characteristics defined in the advanced variant configuration to configure
subscription products marked as configurable in the product master.
Technical Details
Type New
Additional Details
You can use variant configuration to:
● Model subscription products using characteristics defined in variant configuration.

● Configure subscription items within subscription orders and solution quotations.

Service PUBLIC 537
To allow configuration of subscription items, you must maintain the relevant Configuration data in the
Customizing for Service Transactions Basic Settings Define Item Categories
Related Information
Configuring Subscription Items using Variant Configuration

Product Configuration
9.7.4 Subscription Item Quantity
This feature enables you to change the quantity of subscription items in subscription orders. The updated
quantity is then reflected in the subscription contract on submission of the subscription order.
Technical Details
Type New
Additional Details
You can use the quantity change feature to:
● Change the quantity of the parent item in a product bundle. The preconfigured subitems automatically
take up the quantity of the parent product. If a subitem is added manually, you can change the quantity for
it.

538 PUBLIC Service
To enable maintenance of subscription item quantity, select the Enable Qty flag for the relevant item category.
You can do so in the Customizing for Service Transactions Settings for Subscription Transactions
Define Settings for Item Categories .
Related Information
Item Quantity in Subscription Orders
9.7.5 Account Split
This feature enables you to handle the 1:many relationships between business partners and subscriber
accounts in SAP CC, by using the capabilities of a separate alternative subscriber account (aSUAC) associated
with each additional provider contract created for a business partner.
Technical Details
Type New
Additional Details
Transactions Settings for Subscription Transactions Integration Integration with Convergent Charging
Business Add-Ins (BAdIs) .

Service PUBLIC 539
Related Information
Account Split
9.7.6 Master Agreement
This feature enables you to manage terms of a service between a provider and a business partner. These terms
can be referred to via solution quotations and subscription orders. Master agreements help to establish long
term relationships with business partners, using requirement-specific products and pricing.
Technical Details
Type New
Additional Details
You can use master agreements to:
● Adapt product attributes and characteristics (for configurable products) as per customer requirement.
● Access the terms defined in the master agreement by creating solution quotations and subscription orders
as call-off documents.
● Replicate the master agreement to FI-CA in SAP S/4HANA, Here, you are able to assign agreements such
as invoice agreement and discount agreement.
Transactions Settings for Master Agreement .

540 PUBLIC Service
Related Information
Master Agreement
9.8.1 Service Order Management (41Z)
Use
This scope item enables the creation, planning, execution, confirmation and billing of service orders.
Technical Details
Type New
Scope Item 41Z ( Service Order Management )

Service PUBLIC 541
9.8.2 Interaction Center Service Request Management
(41W)
Use
This scope item enables service request management in the Interaction Center.
Technical Details
Type New
Scope Item 41W ( Interaction Center Service Request Management )
9.8.3 Service Contract Management (426)
Use
This scope item enables service contract management.

542 PUBLIC Service
Technical Details
Type New
Scope Item 426 ( Service Contract Management )

Service PUBLIC 543
10 Sourcing and Procurement
10.1 Generic Features
10.1.1 Configuration of the Flexible Workflow Made Easy
The product assistance for Sourcing and Procurement has been enhanced with comprehensive information
regarding the configuration of the flexible workflow. The flexible workflow is available for documents in
Sourcing and Procurement, such as purchase requisitions, purchase orders, supplier invoices and so on. For
each of the documents, there is a list of the optional and mandatory configuration steps, including the required
settings in Customizing, setup of approver determination, sending of e-mail notifications, workflow definition,
and Business Add-ins (BAdIs). In addition, you get detailed information about the apps that can be used for
troubleshooting.
Technical Details
Type Changed
Scope Item Relevant for all scope items where the flexible workflow is
used.
Application Component MM-PUR
Additional Details
This means that documentation for configuring the flexible workflow is now available for the following:
● Requests for quotation

● Supplier quotations
● Scheduling agreements
● Purchase contracts
● Central purchase contracts
● Purchase requisitions
● Centrally managed purchase requisitions

544 PUBLIC Sourcing and Procurement
● Purchase orders
● Centrally managed purchase orders
● Service entry sheets for Lean Services
● Supplier invoices
Related Information
Flexible Workflow for the Approval of Documents in Sourcing and Procurement
10.2 Value Help Authorizations in Sourcing and Procurement
Technical Details
Type Changed
Application Component MM
Additional Details
Please see SAP Note 2798130 and SAP Note 2798128 for a list of the affected applications, transactions
and application objects in Sourcing and Procurement.

Sourcing and Procurement PUBLIC 545
Related Information
10.3 APIs for Integration with Sourcing and Procurement
10.3.1 SOAP APIS for Service Entry Sheets (External

Services) - Renamed
The short description of five services formerly referred to as Acknowledgement has been changed to clarify the
reference to the business object Service Entry Sheet for external services (MM-SRV). The technical names were
not touched.
Technical Details
Type Changed
Scope Item 22Z (Procurement of Services)
Application Component MM-SRV (External Services Management)
Additional Details
The description of the following services has been changed:
ServiceAcknowledgementERPCreateRequestConfirmation_In
Previous Description: New Description:
ServiceAcknowledgement (Create Service Acknowl Service Entry Sheet – Receive Creation Conf.
edgement) (Ext.Srv.)
For more information see Service Entry Sheet – Receive Creation Conf. (Ext.Srv.)
ServiceAcknowledgementERPCreateRequest_In

ServiceAcknowledgementERPCreateRequest_In
Create Service Acknowledgement based on Ac Service Entry Sheet – Receive Creation Request
knowledgement Create Request (Ext.Srv.)
For more information see Service Entry Sheet – Receive Creation Request (Ext.Srv.)
ServiceAcknowledgementERPConfirmation_Out
Notify of Service Acknowledgement Confirmation Service Entry Sheet – Send Creation Confirmation
(Ext.Srv.)
Service Entry Sheet – Send Creation Confirmation (Ext.Srv.)
ServiceAcknowledgementERPCreateRequest_Out
Create Service Acknowledgement based on Ac Service Entry Sheet – Create (External Services)
knowledgement C...
ServiceAcknowledgementERPNotification_Out
ServiceAcknowledgementERPNotification_Out (No Service Entry Sheet - Send Update Notification

tify of Service Acknowledgement) (Ext.Srv.)
Service Entry Sheet - Send Update Notification (Ext.Srv.)
10.3.2 New SOAP APIs for Supplier Invoice Creation
The following services are now available for the integration of supplier invoices created in SAP S/4HANA with
external systems:
● Supplier Invoice - Create (B2B) (SupplierInvoiceCollaborationNotification_Out)

● Supplier Invoice - Create (A2A) (SupplierInvoiceS4CollaborationNotification_Out)
Both services enable integration of Evaluated Receipt Settlement (ERS) scenarios with external systems.
Technical Details
Type New

Application Component MM-EDI-IV (Invoice Verification)
 Note
Suppliers integrated with these services must be classified as subject to ERS in the buyer's S/4HANA
system.
Related Information
Supplier Invoice - Create (B2B)

Supplier Invoice - Create (A2A)
10.3.3 New SOAP API for Condition Record for Pricing in

Purchasing
This asynchronous outbound service Condition Record for Pricing in Purchasing – Replicate enables you to
replicate condition records for pricing that are used in Purchasing to external systems. The data replication
uses the Data Replication Framework (DRF).
Technical Details
Type New
Scope Item J45 (Procurement of Direct Materials)
Application Component ● SD-BF-PR (Pricing and Conditions)

● MM-PUR-GF (Basic Functions)

Additional Details
The service contains nodes that respectively represent condition record, validity of condition record, pricing
scale, and condition supplement.
You need to make specific settings in your system before using this service. For more information, see
Configuration: Condition Record for Pricing in Purchasing – Replicate.
If you need to create an incident regarding this feature, use component SD-MD-CM.
Related Information
Condition Record for Pricing in Purchasing – Replicate
10.3.4 New OData API for Condition Record for Pricing in

Purchasing
The synchronous inbound OData service Condition Record for Pricing in Purchasing – Create, Read, Update,
Delete (API_PURGPRICINGCONDITIONRECORD_SRV) is now available for you to create, read, update, and
delete condition records for pricing that are used in Purchasing.
Technical Details
Type New
Application Component ● SD-BF-PR (Conditions and Pricing)

● MM-PUR-GF (Basic Functions)
Additional Details
The service contains entities for condition record, validity of condition record, pricing scale, and condition
supplement.
If you need to create an incident regarding this service, use component SD-MD-CM.

Related Information
Condition Record for Pricing in Purchasing – Create, Read, Update, Delete
10.3.5 Enhancements in OData API for Purchase Requisitions
This API now enables you to:
● Validate a purchase requisition.

● Create and update purchase requisitions from external systems. Create multiple account assignments,
include item note texts and perform standalone (non-batch) operations; create, read and update.
● Allow external solutions integrated with SAP S/4HANA to enable purchase requisition items for
purchasing, or discard them from purchasing, in SAP S/4HANA.
Technical Details
Type Changed
Scope Item 18J (Requisitioning), 1ZM (Procure-to-Pay with SAP Ariba

Buying and Invoicing), 19W (Contingent Workforce Invoice
Processing via SAP Fieldglass), BNX (Consumable Purchas
ing), J13 (Service and Material Procurement - Project-Based
Services), J45 (Procurement of Direct Materials)
Application Component MM-PUR-REQ
Related Information
Purchase Requisitions - Read, Create, Update, Delete

10.4 Integration
10.4.1 ALERT: End of Support for SAP Ariba Cloud

Integration (CI) Solutions
If you have been using SAP Ariba Cloud Integration (CI) Solutions to integrate SAP S/4HANA with the Ariba
Network or with SAP Ariba solutions, please be aware that SAP Ariba announced the retirement of the Ariba
Network Adapter for SAP NetWeaver or Cloud Integration (also known as CI) for SAP Ariba strategic
procurement and operational procurement applications. We strongly recommend that you transition to SAP
Ariba Cloud Integration Gateway before the product retirement date, that is, before December 31, 2021.
Technical Details
Type End of support
Product Retirement Date December 31, 2021
Additional Details
Please contact your SAP Ariba representative to learn more and plan for transition to SAP Ariba Cloud
Integration Gateway or connect with an SAP Ariba Cloud Integration Gateway certified partner to plan for the
transition.
You will need to be on CI-9, CI9 SP1, or CI9 SP2 to take advantage of the end-of-support planning date of
December 31, 2021. Otherwise, the standard SAP Ariba support policy applies (see https://support.ariba.com/
item/view/96353?sid=0.9339239754251771 . See also the End of Support FAQ at https://
support.ariba.com/item/view/181502
10.5 Customizing and Business Add-Ins for Sourcing and

Procurement
This topic gives you an overview of all new or changed Customizing activities and Business Add-Ins (BAdIs)
available with SAP S/4HANA 1909.

Technical Details
Type New
Scope Item 18J (Requisitioning), 1XI (Central Requisitioning), 2XT (Cen

tral Purchasing), 3UH (Image-Based Buying), J45 (Procure
ment of Direct Materials), BME (Stock Transfer with Deliv
ery), 43E (Intelligent Approval Workflow), BMD (Purchase
Contract), 2ME (Central Purchase Contracts), 1JI (Real-Time
Reporting and Monitoring for Procurement), 22Z (Procure
ment of Services), BNX (Consumable Purchasing)
Application Component MM
Additional Details
New and Enhanced Customizing Activities and Business Add-Ins

Customizing Activity/
Application Area Sub-application Area IMG Node BAdI What you can do
Materials Management Purchasing Central BADI: Maintain Field You can use this BAdI
(MM) Procurement - Settings Control Properties to control the proper
in Hub System > ties of the various UI
Central Purchase elements for a con
Contract > Business tract.
Add-Ins
Materials Management Purchasing Central BAdI: Check of Central You can use this BAdI
(MM) Procurement - Settings Purchase Contract Be to raise messages
fore Saving
in Hub System > when processing cen
Central Purchase tral purchase con
Contract > Business tracts.
Add-Ins
Materials Management Purchasing Central BAdI: Change of Cen You can use this BAdI
(MM) Procurement - Settings tral Purchase Contract to modify header data
Before Saving
in Hub System > in central purchase
Central Purchase contracts.
Contract > Business
Add-Ins

Materials Management Purchasing Central BAdI: Change of Cen You can use this BAdI
(MM) Procurement - Settings tral Purchase Contract to modify item data in
Item Before Saving
in Hub System > central purchase con
Central Purchase tracts.
Contract > Business
Add-Ins
Materials Management Purchasing Business Add-Ins for BAdI: Change of Field You can use this BAdI
Control for Purchase
(MM) Purchasing to modify the proper
Requisitions
ties of different fields
that appear on the
user interface of pur
chase requisition apps.
Materials Management Purchasing Purchase Activate Intelligent Ap You can use this cus
proval of Purchase tomizing activity to ac
(MM) Requistion
Requisitions tivate intelligent appro
val scenario for pur
chase requisitions. You
can also configure set
tings related to the in
telligent approval sce
nario.
Materials Management Purchasing Purchase Requistion Activate Flexible Work You can use this cus
flow for Purchase tomizing activity to
(MM) Flexible Workflow for
Requisitions adapt the flexible
Purchase
workflow settings for
Requisitions purchase requisitions.
The flexible workflow
allows you to define
approval processes for
purchase requisitions
according to your re
quirements.
Materials Management Purchasing Procurement Setup Analytical Re You can use this cus
porting Currencies tomizing activity to
(MM) Analytics
setup two analytical re
porting currencies that
will be used in various
analytical KPIs and
queries in procure
ment apps.
Materials Management Purchasing Purchase Define Machine Learn You can use this cus
ing Scenarios tomizing activity to ac
(MM) Requisition Self-
tivate machine learn
Service Procurement ing scenarios and
make the correspond
ing settings in the SAP
S/4HANA system.

Materials Management Purchasing Purchase Define Mapping of Ma You can use this cus
terial Groups to Pur tomizing activity to
(MM) Requisition
chasing Group map various material
groups to a purchasing
group if you don't want
to allow all the pur
chasing groups to pro
cure from all the avail
able material groups.
Materials Management Purchasing Purchase BAdI: Check Draft Item You can use this BAdI
of a PR in a Self-Serv to implement checks
ice Scenario on the data entered in
Service Procurement various fields, while a
Business Add-Ins purchase requisition is
being created and is in
draft state.
Materials Management Purchasing Purchase BAdI: Modify PR Data You can use this BAdI
in Self-Service Requisi to perform custom
tion Scenario with OCI modification of data in
Service Procurement 4.0 Data a draft purchase requi
Business Add-Ins sition created in a self-
service scenario with
the OCI 4.0 data
Materials Management Purchasing Purchase BAdI: Default Delivery You can use this BAdI
Address for PR Items to auto-populate the
in Self-Service Sce delivery address while
Service Procurement nario adding an item to a
Business Add-Ins purchase requisition
Materials Management Purchasing Purchase Maintain Requisition You can use this cus
ing Groups tomizing activity to
add and maintain
Service Procurement requisitioning groups
for purchase requisi
tions
Materials Management Purchasing Purchase Order Activate Stock Transfer You can use this cus
Set up Stock Transport Between Storage Loca tomizing activity to en
(MM)
tions able the function for is
Order Set Up Stock
suing storage location,
Transfer Between
stock transport orders,
Storage Locations and stock transport
scheduling agree
ments.
Materials Management Purchasing Purchase Order Configure Delivery You can use this cus
Set up Stock Transport Type & Availability tomizing activity to
(MM)
Check Procedure by specify the delivery
Order Set Up Stock
Storage Location type based on supply
Transfer Between
plant, storage location,
Storage Locations and document type.

Materials Management Purchasing Partner Assign Partner Sche You can use this cus
mas to Document tomizing activity to as
(MM) Determination
Types sign partner schemas
Partner Settings in
to the various purchas
Purchasing
ing documents. The
Documents partner roles defined
for each schema are
associated with re
spective document
type.
Materials Management Purchasing Purchase Order Define Shipping Data You can use this cus
Set up Stock Transport for Stock Transfers Be tomizing activity to
(MM)
tween Storage Loca specify the shipping
Order Set Up Stock
tions data for stock transfer
Transfer Between
between storage loca
Storage Locations tions.
Materials Management Purchasing Business Add-Ins for BAdI: Change of Field You can use this BAdI
Control for Purchase
(MM) Purchasing to modify the proper
Order Items
ties of specific fields
for the process controll
that appear on the
user interface of pur
chase order apps.
Materials Management Purchasing Conditions Define Define Schema Deter You can use this cus
Price Determination mination tomizing activity to as
(MM)
sign calculation sche
Process
mas to specific pur
chasing transactions.
Materials Management Purchasing Central Configure Control You can configure the
(MM) Procurement - Settings Plane for the APIs of control plane for the
Central Procurement APIs of central pro
in Hub System
curement to perform
several business oper
ations. For example,
maintaining the API
name for the replica
tion of a purchase
requisition.
Materials Management Purchasing Central Define Actions for Con You can define the ac
(MM) Procurement - Settings figuring the Automa tions required for con
tion of Business Proc figuring the automa
in Hub System
esses tion of business proc
esses, such as, assign
Business Objects (op
tional), Action Type,
Action Sub Type, and
specify if the action is
grouping enabled.

Materials Management Purchasing Central BAdI: Check of Docu You can use this BAdI
(MM) Procurement - Settings ments in Business to implement checks

Process Automation for various documents,
in Hub System
such as, purchase
requisitions or pur
chase orders, in busi
ness process automa
tion.
Materials Management Purchasing Central Procurement - BAdI: Modify Docu You can use this BAdI
Settings in Hub System ments in Business to change details of
(MM)
Process Automation various documents,
such as, purchase
requisitions or pur
chase orders in busi
ness process automa
tion.
Materials Management Purchasing Central BAdI: Manage Pur You can use this BAdI
(MM) Procurement - Settings chase Requisitions to modify the extensi

During Replication ble fields and to check
in Hub System
the information about
Central
the header, item and
Requisitioning the account assign
ment of self-service
purchase requisitions
during their replication
from hub system to the
connected systems.
Materials Management Purchasing Central BAdI: Manage Pur You can use this BAdI
Procurement - Settings chase Order Data Cen to check the informa
(MM)
trally During Extraction tion about the header
in Hub System
and item fields of pur
Central Purchasing chase orders. Addition
ally, you can also mod
ify this information
based on the imple
mentation of the BAdI.
Materials Management Purchasing Central BAdI: Determine You can use this BAdI
(MM) Procurement - Settings Agents Centrally for to centrally determine

Approving Replicated approvers of replicated
in Hub System
PR purchase requisitions.
Central Purchasing You can also access
purchase requisition
data by using the cor
responding CDS views.
You can define a list of
approvers based on
this data.

Materials Management Purchasing Central Activate Overall Re You can release all the
(MM) Procurement - Settings lease of Centrally Man items of centrally man

aged Purchase Requi aged purchase requisi
in Hub System
sitions tions together and at
Central Purchasing any time. That is, you
can approve or reject
all the items of cen
trally managed pur
chase requisitions si
multaneously.
Materials Management Purchasing Central Activate Central Set You can activate cen
(MM) Procurement - Settings tings for Purchase Or tral approval. This
in Connected Systems ders means purchase or
ders created in the
Central Purchase
connected systems are
Order sent to the hub system
for approval.
Materials Management Purchasing Central Determine Text Types You can determine the
(MM) Procurement - Settings to Save Release Infor text types to save re
in Connected Systems mation of Purchase Or lease information of
ders purchase orders. This
Central Purchase
means the flexible
Order workflow release infor
mation such as the ap
proval message or re
jection message of
purchase orders can
be saved in the deter
mined text types. This
information is then
sent to the connected
systems.
Materials Management Purchasing Central BAdI: Change of Text You can use this BAdI
(MM) Procurement - Settings ID for Central Approval to modify the Text ID

in Connected Systems of Purchase Requisi for storing the reasons
tions for approval or rejec
Central Purchase
tion by the central ap
Order prover. By default, the
approval or the rejec
tion reason texts are
mapped to the Text ID
B08.
Materials Management Purchasing Central Maintain Central Set You can maintain the
(MM) Procurement - Settings tings for Purchase central settings for

in Connected Systems Requisitions purchase requisitions
that need to be ap
Central
proved centrally. For
PurchaseRequisition example, you can
maintain document
type, document cate
gory, and plant.

10.6 Commodity Procurement
10.7 Integration with Trader's and Scheduler's Workbench
The integration of the TSW, for nominations and tickets, with Commodity Procurement and Commodity Sales
enables oil companies to perform enhanced risk assessments.
The new Risk Object is a generic business object modeled in the Business Object Processing Framework to
integrate risk-related data, which cannot be directly derived from pricing procedures or pricing conditions. With
this data object, you can use the following features:
● An interface for any application to be integrated with Commodity Management

● Flexible pricing with the Commodity Pricing Engine (CPE)
● Evaluation of financial risks resulting from commodity positions
● Risk data can be assessed by performing reports of Commodity Risk Analytics
● Several possibilities to extend the data model and the business logic
Technical Details
Type New
Application Component LO-CMM, SD-SLS-OA-CCO, MM-PUR-OA-CON, CA-GTF-CPE
10.8 Sourcing and Contract Management
10.8.1 Source Assignment
10.8.1.1 Enhancements in Manage Purchasing Info Records
With this app, you can now create and display purchasing info records for the following procurement types:
Consignment, Pipeline, Standard, Subcontracting.

Technical Details
Type Changed
Scope Item BHD (Create Purchasing Info Record)
Application Component MM-FIO-PUR-IR
Related Information
Manage Purchasing Info Records
10.8.1.2 Mass Changes to Purchasing Info Records
This feature enables you to now select and change the values of multiple purchasing info records and
purchasing organizations separately. You can select multiple purchasing info records and click Mass Edit to
change purchasing info record fields. Similarly, select multiple purchasing organizations and click Mass Edit to
change purchasing organization fields. If you select multiple purchasing info records and purchasing
organizations at the same time, the Mass Edit dialog displays both fields, which you can change.
Technical Details
Type Changed
Scope Item BHD (Create Purchasing Info Record)
Application Component MM-PUR-VM-REC
Additional Details
The tree-table structure has been removed and replaced with a two-tab structure – Purchasing Info Records
and Purchasing Organization.

10.8.1.3 Manage RFQs
With this feature you can display the change log for existing RFQs. When you navigate to the object page of an
RFQ, you can choose the History button to view a change log of the RFQ. The log popup displays information
about the user who made a change, the date and time of the change, and the content of the change. You can
use the search function within the change log to search for actions, users, and old and new values
Technical Details
Type Changed
Scope Item 1A0 (Sourcing with SAP Ariba Sourcing), 1L2 (Supplier
Quote Automation with SAP Ariba Commerce Automation),
1XF (Request for Price)
Application Component MM-PUR-RFQ
Additional Details
The change log doesn't document whether notes or attachments were added, edited or deleted, nor does it
provide approval details or process flow information. The search function for entities or items is currently not
supported.
 Note
Please note that the History popup displays changes on database level. Therefore, it is not a one-to-one
representation of the UI changes. For example, if you change the requested quantity of the item, the system
logs the changes on schedule line level.
The business role SAP_BR_EXTERNAL_AUDITOR_PRC must be assigned to your user to enable the History
function for you.

10.8.1.4 Get Bidder Proposals in the Manage RFQs App
This feature enables you to quickly get a list of possible suppliers for the required materials. Instead of
manually typing in the supplier's name or searching for a suitable supplier in the value help, you can now use
the Get Bidder Proposals button. The system shows you a list of suppliers that have delivered the required
materials for the selected purchasing organization in the past. Suppliers that are used by other purchasers are
also included, if applicable.
Technical Details
Type New
10.8.1.5 Manage Supplier Quotations
With this app you can now display a change log for existing supplier quotations. When you navigate to the
object page of a supplier quotation, you can choose the History button to view a change log of the supplier
quotation. The log popup displays information about the user who made a change, the date and time of the
change, and the content of the change. You can use the search function within the change log to search for
actions, users, and old and new values.
Technical Details
Type Changed

Additional Details
The change log doesn't document whether notes or attachments were added, edited or deleted, nor does it
provide approval details or process flow information. The search function for entities or items is currently not
supported.
 Note
Please note that the History popup displays changes on database level. Therefore, it is not a one-to-one
representation of the UI changes. For example, a change of the quotation submission date on the UI also
results in changes of the date of price determination for every item. These changes are shown in the
History, but are not visible on the UI of the supplier quotation object page.
The business role SAP_BR_EXTERNAL_AUDITOR_PRC must be assigned to your user to enable the History
function for you.
10.8.1.6 Situation Template: Low Number of Quotations

Received
This feature enables you to create your own ready-to-use situation template for RFQs. With the predelivered
situation template PROC_RFQLOWNUMBEROFQTN you can notify your purchasers about RFQs with the
approaching submission deadline and a low number of submitted supplier quotations. The purchasers can
keep an eye on such RFQs and contact invited bidders that haven't yet submitted a quotation if necessary.
Technical Details
Type New

Additional Details
This situation template is only available for RFQs of type Int. Sourcing Req..
10.8.2 Purchase Contract Management
10.8.2.1 Enhancements in Manage Scheduling Agreements
With this app, you can now:
● Create notes for scheduling agreements.

● Enable the Kanban process for scheduling agreements.
● Create and save a new scheduling agreement as a draft using the In Preparation status.
● Copy existing scheduling agreements. The newly copied scheduling agreement item opens in the edit
mode, where you can update and save the information based on your requirements.
Technical Details
Type Changed
Scope Item BMR (Scheduling Agreements in Procurement)
Application Component MM-FIO-PUR-SQ-SCH
Related Information
Manage Scheduling Agreements

10.8.2.2 Mass Changes to Scheduling Agreements
This feature enables you to select multiple scheduling agreement headers and scheduling agreement items
separately on two dedicated tabs. If you select multiple headers and items at the same time, the Mass Edit
function conveniently categorizes the fields into header fields, item fields, and partner fields, to help you
identify the fields you want to change.
Technical Details
Type Changed
Scope Item BMR (Scheduling Agreements in Procurement)
Application Component MM-PUR-OA-SCH
Additional Details
The tree-table structure has been removed and replaced with a two-tab structure: Scheduling Agreement
Headers and Scheduling Agreement Items.
10.8.2.3 Mass Changes to Purchase Contracts
This feature enables you to now select and change the values of multiple purchase contract headers and
purchase contract items separately. You can select multiple purchase contract headers and click Mass Edit to
change header-level fields. Similarly, select multiple purchase contract items and click Mass Edit to change
item-level fields. If you select multiple headers and items at the same time, the Mass Edit dialog displays both
header and item-level fields, which you can change.
Technical Details
Type Changed

Scope Item BMD (Purchase Contract)
Application Component MM-PUR-OA-CON
Additional Details
The tree-table structure has been removed and replaced with a two-tab structure: Purchase Contract Headers
and Purchase Contract Items.
10.8.2.4 Enhancements in Manage Purchase Contracts
● Use the situation handling framework to trigger notifications for predicted contract consumption on your
home screen. You can navigate to the Purchase Contract Item app from these notifications.
● Create purchase orders directly from a local purchase contract. In the Manage Purchase Contracts app,
you can select a valid purchase contract and create a purchase order for all items of the contract.
Alternatively, you can open the purchase contract and select the specific items within the contract for
which you want to create a purchase order.
● Use the new BAdI MMPUR_CTR_GTS_CHECKS to perform global trade services checks on purchase
contracts, such as embargo checks and watch list screening checks, to ensure that the contract complies
with international trade laws and restrictions.
Technical Details
Type New
Scope Item BMD (Purchase Contract)
Application Component MM-FIO-PUR-SQ-CON
Related Information
Purchase Contract Management

Manage Purchase Contracts
10.9 Operational Procurement
10.9.1 Enhancements to Create Purchase Requisition
This app now enables you to:
● Search for catalog items by image, as part of the Image-Based Buying machine learning scenario.
● Create purchase requisitions in a connected system other than the one assigned to you. This is applicable
only if you have activated Central Requisitioning scenario in Central Procurement.
● Enhance field control properties and maintain custom logic for field values. Assign a requestor based on
the shop on behalf type and requisitioning groups that are assigned to your user.
Technical Details
Type Changed
Scope Item 3UH (Image-Based Buying), 18J (Requisitioning), 1XI (Cen

tral Requisitioning)
Application Component MM-FIO-PUR-REQ-SSP
Additional Details
● A prerequisite for using the Image-Based Buying machine learning scenario is the successful completion of
a training job in the app Schedule Export of Catalog Item Images for Machine Learning. This involves
exporting a catalog containing a list of image URLs and corresponding product IDs to the SAP Leonardo
system.
● You can navigate to the app Default Settings for Users from the app Create Purchase Requisition, where you
can change the plant and company code, only if you have the necessary authorizations. This is applicable if
you have activated Central Requisitioning scenario in Central Procurement using the customizing activity
Materials Management Purchasing Central Procurement - Settings in Hub System Activate SAP S/
4HANA Procurement Hub and Scenarios .
● When adding items to the shopping cart, the purchasing group can be predefined or a selection of
purchasing groups proposed, based on the settings in customizing activity Materials Management
Purchasing Purchase Requisition Define Mapping of Material Groups to Purchasing Group .

● You can add and maintain requisitioning groups for a user using the customizing activity Materials
Management Purchasing Purchase Requisition Self-Service Procurement Maintain Requisitioning
Groups
● You can modify the properties of different fields that appear on the user interface of purchase requisitions.
You can make the fields hidden, read-only, mandatory, or optional as per your requirements using the app
Custom Fields and Logic, and also create and publish custom logic for the fields.
The Image-Based Buying feature is available only if you have activated the Image-Based Buying machine
learning scenario in one of the following ways:
● Configure Your Solution app under Sourcing and Procurement Integration Smart Enterprise
Intelligence Define Machine Learning Scenarios
● IMG path in the SPRO transaction: Materials Management Purchase Requisition Define Machine
Learning Scenarios
Related Information
Create Purchase Requisition
10.9.2 Enhancements to My Purchase Requisitions
● Add items to existing PRs.

● View changes made by another authorized user in the connected system, to the attributes of PRs created
by you in the hub system, in the context of Central Requisitioning.
● View quick summary of key item information on choosing Number of Items. View external processing
status of PRs. Copy PRs with attachments. View supporting information while copying rejected PRs or
rejected PR items.
Technical Details
Type Changed

Scope Item 18J (Requisitioning), 1XI (Central Requisitioning)
Additional Details
● You can now search and filter purchase requisitions using additional filter criteria.
● You will also receive a notification requesting confirmation, if you have not confirmed the goods even after
the delivery date.
Related Information
My Purchase Requisitions
10.9.3 Enhancements to Default Settings for Users
● Use Excel-based data exchange to update settings for multiple users with the help of Microsoft Excel.
● View and change the connected plant and company code that are assigned to you, provided you have the
necessary authorizations. This is applicable only if you have activated Central Requisitioning scenario in
Central Procurement.
● Assign requisitioning groups for users and select the required shop on behalf type.
Technical Details
Type Changed
Scope Item 18J (Requisitioning), 1XI (Central Requisitioning)

Additional Details
Excel-Based Data Exchange

You can download an Excel file containing the default settings for multiple users based on a range of selection
parameters. You can then make your changes in the Excel file and upload it again with your updated settings.
An Excel template is also available for download, if you want to define user settings from scratch.
Assignment of Shop on Behalf Type
You can add and maintain requisitioning groups for a user using the customizing activity Materials
Management Purchasing Purchase Requisition Self-Service Procurement Maintain Requisitioning
Groups .
The types of shop on behalf can be one of the following:
● Group Based – You can shop on behalf of another user who belongs to the same requisitioning group.
● Company Code Based – You can shop on behalf of another user who belongs to the same company code.
● No Shopping on Behalf – You can restrict a user from creating shopping cart on behalf of another user.
The shop on behalf type determines the shop on behalf behavior in the app Create Purchase Requisition.
Related Information
Default Settings for Users

Create Purchase Requisition
10.9.4 Requirements Processing
10.9.4.1 Create Purchase Requisition - Advanced
With this app, you can now view the approval history of a purchase requisition.
Technical Details
Type Changed
Scope Item 18J (Requisitioning), 2NX (Scheduling Agreement for Sub

contracting Procurement), 2NY (Scheduling Agreement for
Consignment Procurement)

Related Information
Create Purchase Requisition - Advanced
10.9.4.2 Manage Purchase Requisitions - Professional
You can now modify the field control properties of different fields that appear on the user interface of the app
Manage Purchase Requisitions – Professional.
Technical Details
Type Changed
Scope Item 18J (Requisitioning)
Additional Details
With this feature, you can make the fields hidden, read-only, mandatory, or optional as per your requirements.
You can use the app Custom Fields and Logic to create and publish the custom logic Manage Field Controls for
Purchase Requisitions.
Related Information
Manage Purchase Requisitions - Professional

10.9.4.3 Manage Workflows for Purchase Requisitions
The existing scenarios for item and header level approval are now renamed to Old - Overall Release of Purchase
Requisition and Old - Release of Purchase Requisition Item. It is recommended to use the new scenarios Overall
Release of Purchase Requisition and Release of Purchase Requisition Item. For any future releases only the new
scenarios will be enhanced. To get benefits of the new features, start using the new scenarios.
You can now create a new item level or header level workflow if you have activated Central Requisitioning
scenario in Central Procurement. Note that SAP S/4HANA system can be configured as a hub system and you
can activate Central Requisitioning scenario in Central Procurement, where SAP S/4HANA and SAP ERP can be
set up as connected systems .
You can now set deadlines for a workflow step. Also, you can now use the precondition Company Code of
Purchase Requisition is for the overall release of purchase requisitions. You can also define and manage
conditions when to restart the flexible workflow for purchase requisitions. In addition, a comprehensive
overview document now explains how to configure the flexible workflow for purchase requisitions.
Technical Details
Type New
Scope Item 18J (Requisitioning), BMD (Purchase Contract), 1XI (Central

Requisitioning)
Application Component MM-FIO-PUR-REL
Additional Details
Related Information
Manage Workflows for Purchase Requisitions
10.9.4.4 Edit and Approve Purchase Requisiton
With this new app you can, if required, edit specific fields in the purchase requisitions to which you are assigned
as an approver before approving them from the app My Inbox.

Technical Details
Type New
Scope Item 18J (Requisitioning), BMD (Purchase Contract), 1XI (Central

Requisitioning)
Related Information
Edit and Approve Purchase Requisition
10.9.4.5 Schedule Transfer of Purchase Requisitions for

Intelligent Approval
With this app, you can schedule jobs to transfer approval data related to purchase requisitions from SAP S/
4HANA system to SAP Cloud Platform.
Technical Details
Type New
Scope Item 18J (Requisitioning), 43E (Intelligent Approval Workflow),

BMD (Purchase Contract)
Additional Details
SAP Cloud Platform calculates the confidence level for the approval of purchase requisition items based on this
transferred data. Confidence level is a percentage which is calculated based on the already approved or

rejected purchase requisition items. Using this percentage, users can judge whether or not to approve
purchase requisition items. The calculated confidence level is displayed to the approver in the app My Inbox.
Confidence level is available only for the Release of Purchase Requisition Item workflow scenario.
Related Information
Schedule Transfer of Purchase Requisitions for Intelligent Approval
10.9.5 Purchase Order Processing
10.9.5.1 Mass Changes to Purchase Orders
This feature enables you to now select and change the values of multiple purchase order headers and purchase
order items separately. You can select multiple purchase order headers and click Mass Edit to change header-
level fields. Similarly, select multiple purchase order items and click Mass Edit to change item-level fields. If you
select multiple headers and items at the same time, the Mass Edit dialog displays both header and item-level
fields, which you can change.
Technical Details
Type Changed
Scope Item J45 (Procurement of Direct Materials), BNX (Consumable

Purchasing)
Application Component MM-PUR-PO
Additional Details
The tree-table structure has been removed and replaced with a two-tab structure - Purchase Order Headers
and Purchase Order Items.
From the Purchase Order Items tab, you can view and search for delivery schedule lines by selecting purchase
order items and clicking Delivery Schedule Line.

 Note
The Delivery Schedule Line link is only present in the Purchase Order Items tab.
10.9.5.2 Monitor Supplier Confirmations
With this feature, you can now see confirmations for purchase orders and scheduling agreements. Earlier, we
used to show only pending purchase order confirmations. Now, both purchase orders and scheduling
agreements are seen as purchasing documents.
Technical Details
Type Changed
Scope Item 2TX (Direct Procurement with Inbound Delivery)
Application Component MM-FIO-PUR-PO
10.9.5.3 Situation Template: Pending Supplier Confirmation
You can now use this situation template to inform specific members in your purchasing organization about
missing supplier confirmations.
Technical Details
Type New

Related Information
Situation Template: Pending Supplier Confirmation
10.9.5.4 Manage Purchase Orders
With the Manage Purchase Orders app, you can now use several new features, such as the following: You can
use the subcontracting process, you can now display the purchase order commitments, you can enter or
display supplier contact data, you can display supplier confirmations, and you can select any WBS element as
the account assignment object of a purchase order item regardless of whether the WBS element is assigned as
a work package or not.
Technical Details
Type Changed
Scope Item 18J (Requisitioning), 1FM (Quality Management in Procure

ment), 1NB (Ariba - Sales Order to Customer Invoice Integra
tion for Sales), 1W8 (Legal Control), 1ZM (Procure-to-Pay
with SAP Ariba Buying and Invoicing), 22K (Contingent
Workforce Procurement via SAP Fieldglass), 22Z (Procure
ment of Services), 2LG (Supplier Consignment), 2R7 (Pur
chasing Rebate Processing), 2TW (Complementary Procure
ment Functions), 2TX (Direct Procurement with Inbound De
livery), 2XU (Procurement of Materials with Variant Configu-
ration), 3UK (Inbound Storage Tank Management - Process
Manufacturing), BMY (Subcontracting), BNX (Consumable
Purchasing), J45 (Procurement of Direct Materials), J62
(Asset Accounting), J82 (Automated Purchase-to-Pay with
SAP Ariba Commerce Automation),
Application Component MM-PUR (Purchasing)
Additional Details
Below you will find more information about the enhancements to the Manage Purchase Orders app:
● Subcontracting Process: Subcontracting is a form of procurement where the required product is

manufactured by a supplier (in this case the subcontractor) to whom you provide certain components. You

can provide these components either directly from one of your plants, or indirectly through one of your
suppliers. Using the components you provide, the subcontractor completes the manufacturing process
and delivers the required product to the ordering party.
● Purchase Order Commitments: If the account assignment of a purchase order is commitment-relevant,
you can now view the commitments in a table. The table displays one line for each combination of
purchase order item, account assignment line, and schedule line. The respective amount also includes the
commitment for the delivery costs of the item. If the commitment has been reduced, for example, by a
goods receipt or an invoice, the system displays the residual commitment.
The commitment table considers standard items as well as limit items with a commitment-relevant
account assignment (cost centers or WBS elements).
● Supplier Contact Data: You can maintain or view data for a contact person at the supplier, namely an
identifier or the name of the Salesperson, the salesperson´s telephone number, and reference data for the
contact person.
You can use the maintained data for the contact person as a filter for the list of purchase orders displayed
in the object list of the Manage Purchase Orders app.
● Supplier Confirmation Control: The new sections Supplier Confirmation Control and Supplier
Confirmations on purchase order item level enable you to view supplier confirmations and corresponding
control settings.
● Funds Management: If Public Sector Management is active in your system, the new section Funds
Management is also available on purchase order item level.
In the new section Funds Management, you can enter information for purchase orders without an account
assignment category, such as fund, grant, budget period, functional area, cost center, and G/L account.
Invoices created with reference to these purchase orders also have no account assignment category and
forward the information to Finance.
● If you use the account assignment category Project for your purchase order item, you can select any WBS
element as the corresponding account assignment object. The input help of the field WBS element will
offer you all the WBS elements, both those that are assigned as a work package and those that are not.
Please note that, for a correct determination of the project costs for projects, you have to choose only WBS
elements with a work package assignment in such projects.
● In case of missing authorization, the entries of the user in the Manage Purchase Orders app are reset by
the system.
If a user does not have authorization, for example, for the purchasing group, purchasing organization, or for
the plant entered, the system resets the previous entries.
Related Information
Commitments Management (CO)
10.9.5.5 Situation Template: Quantity Deficit in Supplier's

Delivery
You can now use this situation template to inform specific members in your purchasing organization about a
deficit in the quantity of materials to be delivered by the supplier.

Technical Details
Type New
Application Component MM-PUR-PO
Related Information
Situation Template: Quantity Deficit in Supplier's Delivery
10.9.5.6 Monitor Purchase Order Items
With this feature, you can now predict delivery dates of the purchase order items and whether they match the
expected delivery dates. You can click the predicted delivery date for a purchase order item to display the
supplier's delivery reliability for the material and plant over the past 6 months (180 days). This gives you a
direct comparison of what percentage of deliveries were early, on-time, and delayed. You can also navigate to
the Supplier Evaluation Score History app.
Technical Details
Type New
Scope Item 3FY (Prediction of Delivery Date for Purchase Order Items)
10.9.5.7 My Purchasing Document Items - Professional
With this app, you can quickly gain an overview of the items in your purchasing documents for each supplier
and keep track of those purchasing documents for which you, as a purchaser, are responsible. Besides the

count of purchasing document items, the app provides separate tabs for purchase requisitions, purchase
orders, good receipts, and supplier invoices. The clear and customizable views let you monitor your purchasing
document items for each supplier at the level of detail you require.
Technical Details
Type New
Scope Item J13 (Service and Material Procurement - Project-Based

Services)
Additional Details
You can post a goods receipt for a selected purchase order item on the Purchase Orders tab (only if you have
the Inventory Manager role). When you choose the Post Goods Receipt button, you are directed to the Post
Goods Receipt for Purchase Order app, in which the selected purchase order value is entered automatically.
You can also create purchase orders on the Purchase Orders tab.
This app My Purchasing Document Items - Professional (F0547B) replaces the app My Purchasing Document
Items (F0547A).
Related Information
My Purchasing Document Items - Professional
10.9.5.8 Monitor Subcontracting Documents
With this app, you can now view an assembly flow diagram for purchasing document items generated by
Material Requirements Planning (MRP). For these MRP-generated items, you can display a flow diagram
showing the entire network for the subcontracting process – from the first component through to the final
assembly. For example, you can see which components were supplied to the subcontractor from which
supplier or plant, which organization is handling the next assembly step, and what components are involved.

Technical Details
Type Changed
Scope Item BMY (Subcontracting)
10.10 Central Procurement
10.10.1 Central Purchasing
10.10.1.1 Enhancements in Schedule Import of Purchasing

Documents
With this app, you can now use input help for many of the entry fields to help you make valid entries.
Technical Details
Type Changed
Scope Item 2XT (Central Purchasing)
Application Component MM-PUR-HUB-PR
Related Information
Schedule Import of Purchasing Documents

10.10.1.2 Enhancements in Manage Purchase Requisitions
Centrally
● Create purchase requisitions in the connected systems. Also, you can view the process flow diagram that
displays the follow-on documents created for the purchase requisition items. Additionally, you can view,
analyze and resolve the replication errors of central purchase requisitions.
● Create central purchase contracts from centrally managed purchase requisition items in draft mode. Also,
you can add purchase requisition items to a purchase order. Additionally, you can view the approver's
name of the centrally managed purchase requisitions.
● Create central RFQs from purchase requisitions. Additionally, you can defer purchase requisitions, resume
deferred purchase requisitions, display deferred purchase requisitions and close them.
Technical Details
Type Changed
Related Information
Manage Purchase Requisitions Centrally
10.10.1.2.1 Manage Workflows for Centrally Managed

Purchase Requisitions
With this app, you can configure workflows for the approval process of centrally managed purchase requisitions
as a configuration expert. The app provides options to define preconditions for the release of centrally
managed purchase requisitions. It also provides several options to determine the approvers for their release.

Technical Details
Type New
Related Information
Manage Workflows for Centrally Managed Purchase Requisitions
10.10.1.3 Enhancements in Create Purchase Order Centrally
● Create purchase orders using the expert mode. The expert mode opens SAP GUI for HTML to create
purchase orders.
● Create purchase orders using the options Order or Save with Status Held. You can click the purchase order
number to view its details in the connected system.
● You can specify various new information for the purchase order.
Technical Details
Type Changed
Application Component MM-PUR-HUB-PO

Additional Details
On the header level, you can now specify the following information:
● Document Type
● Payment Terms
● Incoterms
● Incoterms Location
On the item level, you can now specify the following information:
● Material Description
● Quantity
● Price
● Tax Code
● Delivery Date
● Good Receipt
Related Information
Create Purchase Order Centrally
10.10.1.4 Enhancements in Manage Purchase Orders

Centrally
● View the process flow diagram that displays the follow-on documents created for purchase orders.
● View a notification received for the number of overdue items for the respective purchase order document.
From the notification, you can navigate to the specific item to view its details under the Situations facet.
Alternatively, you can dismiss the notification.
Technical Details
Type Changed
Application Component MM-PUR-HUB-PO

Related Information
Manage Purchase Orders Centrally
10.10.1.5 Manage Rules for Automation of Business

Processes
With this app, you can manage rules that are required to automate various business processes, for example,
Procure to Pay.
Technical Details
Type New
Related Information
Manage Rules for Automation of Business Processes
10.10.1.6 Schedule Automation of Business Processes
With this app, you can schedule jobs for the automation of business processes in the hub system, based on the
activated rules.

Technical Details
Type New
Additional Details
The rules are activated and configured using the app Manage Rules for Automation of Business Processes.
Related Information
Schedule Automation of Business Processes
10.10.2 Mass Changes to Central Purchase Contracts
With this app, you can apply mass changes to fields at header and item level in your central purchase contracts,
including item and header distribution. This allows you to implement changes that affect a large number of
your central purchase contracts. With just a few clicks, you can change terms and conditions or validity dates
at header level, or target quantities, prices, or tolerance values at item level, in multiple central purchase
contracts. You can also edit the distribution percentage maintained at header or item level by specifying a value
for all affected headers or items, or by changing the value for individual headers or items in the header
distribution or item distribution view.
Technical Details
Type New
Scope Item 2ME (Central Purchase Contracts)

Application Component MM-PUR-OA-CON
Related Information
Mass Changes to Central Purchase Contracts
10.10.3 Enhancements in Manage Central Purchase

Contracts
● Copy central contracts to use as a basis for creating similar contracts

● Use flexible distribution of central contracts to allow your subsidiaries to order a greater or smaller
quantity or value of contract items based on their needs.
● Save draft versions of central contracts using the In Preparation status
● View the consumption percentage of central contracts
● Maintain the info record update code directly from a central contract
● Use value help (F4) when selecting a purchasing group
Technical Details
Type New
Scope Item 2ME (Central Purchase Contracts)
Application Component MM-PUR-HUB-CCTR
Additional Details
The following enhancements are also included:
● Create custom fields and define custom logic for fields on the UI, and use the new BAdI
MM_PUR_S4_CCTR_FLDCTRL_SIMPLE for managing field controls for central contracts.

● Use the new BAdIs for checking and changing standard fields in central contracts:
○ MM_PUR_S4_CCTR_CHECK
○ MM_PUR_S4_CCTR_MODIFY_HEADER
○ MM_PUR_S4_CCTR_MODIFY_ITEM
○ MM_PUR_S4_CCTR_MOD_DISTR_CTR
● Use the situation handling framework to create custom notifications, for example, when central contracts
are about to expire
Related Information
Central Purchase Contracts

Manage Central Purchase Contracts
10.10.4 Central Procurement Operations Monitor
With this app, you can monitor and diagnose the issues that results in errors in the Central Procurement
scenarios. The app displays the overview cards for the scenarios: Central Contract Management, Central
Purchasing, and Central Requisitioning. From each card, you can navigate to the detailed application to view
the issues and their causes.
Technical Details
Type New
Scope Item 1XI (Central Requisitioning ), 2ME (Central Purchase Con

tracts ), 2XT (Central Purchasing)
Application Component MM-PUR-HUB-MON
Additional Details
Central Contract Management:
● Monitor the number of distributions of central purchase contracts that have failed due to errors.
● Monitor the number of release order update jobs that have failed due to errors.
Central Purchasing:

● Monitor the number of extraction jobs for purchase requisitions that have failed due to errors.
● Monitor the number of extraction jobs for purchase orders that have failed due to errors.
● Monitor the number of text extraction jobs that have failed due to errors.
Central Requisitioning:
● Monitor the number of purchase requisition replications that have failed due to errors.
● Monitor the number of sources of supply extraction jobs that have failed due to errors.
Related Information
Central Procurement Operations Monitor
10.10.4.1 Central Procurement Interface Monitor
With this app, you can now see more details about why certain actions for scenarios have failed and at what
stage during the process. You can then navigate directly to the relevant applications or transaction on the hub
system or the connected systems, where you can investigate the problem and begin to fix it.
Technical Details
Type New

Related Information
Central Procurement Interface Monitor

10.10.4.2 Central Procurement Job Monitor
With this app, you can now see more details about why certain jobs failed and at what stage during the process.
You can then navigate directly to the relevant application in which you can investigate the problem, attempt to
fix it, and then restart the job.
Technical Details
Type New

Related Information
Central Procurement Job Monitor
10.10.5 Central Purchasing Analytics
10.10.5.1 Central Purchase Requisition Item Types
With this new app, you can display the number of purchase requisition items that were created in the SAP S/
4HANA system (which acts as a hub system), and the number of purchase requisition items that were
extracted from the connected systems. SAP S/4HANA, SAP S/4HANA Cloud, or SAP ERP act as connected
systems
Technical Details
Type New

Scope Item 1JI (Real-Time Reporting and Monitoring for Procurement),
2XT (Central Purchasing)
Application Component MM-FIO-PUR-ANA
Related Information
Central Purchase Requisition Item Types
10.10.5.2 Monitor Purchase Requisition Items Centrally
With this new app, you can monitor purchase requisition items that were created in the SAP S/4HANA system
(which acts as a hub system), and purchase requisition items that were extracted from the connected systems.
SAP S/4HANA, SAP S/4HANA Cloud, or SAP ERP act as connected systems.
Technical Details
Type New
Scope Item 1JI (Real-Time Reporting and Monitoring for Procurement),

2XT (Central Purchasing)
10.10.6 Manage Central RFQs
This feature enables you to display, create and manage central RFQs in the SAP S/4HANA system that acts as
a hub system. You can create central RFQs from purchase requisitions that are created in the hub system, or
from items that have been extracted from the connected systems and imported to the hub system.

Technical Details
Type New
Scope Item 3ZF (Central Sourcing)
Application Component MM-PUR-HUB-RFQ
Additional Details
You create central RFQs from the Manage Purchase Requisitions Centrally app.
10.10.7 Manage Central Supplier Quotations
This feature enables you to display all central supplier quotations in the SAP S/4HANA system that acts as a
hub system.
Technical Details
Type New
Additional Details
You create central supplier quotations from the Manage Central RFQs app.

10.10.8 Create Purchase Order from Central Supplier
Quotation
This feature enables you to create purchase orders from the central supplier quotations.
Technical Details
Type New
10.11 Invoice Management
10.11.1 Manage Supplier Invoices
With this feature you can now restrict the release authorization for blocked supplier invoices. For a blocked
invoice, you can also display detailed data. For completed invoices for which a workflow is running, you can
display the Approval Details. You can reference documents to which multiple accounts are assigned, and you
can now search by the service performer and the performance date to identify the most relevant service entry
sheet items. If the goods receipt is not valuated, the account assignment fields are ready for input, depending
on the G/L account. The purchase order type Subcontracting can now be posted in the invoice.
Technical Details
Type Changed

Scope Item BH1 (Corrective Maintenance), BMY (Subcontracting), 18J
(Requisitioning), 19O (Automated Dynamic Discounts with
SAP Ariba Discount Management), 22Z (Procurement of
Services), 2Q2 (Data Migration to SAP S/4HANA from Stag
ing), 2NV (Guided Buying Capability with SAP Ariba Buying),
2TX (Direct Procurement with Inbound Delivery), 2R7 (Pur
chasing Rebate Processing), 2TW (Complementary Procure
ment Functions), BD3 (Sales Processing using Third-Party
with Shipping Notification), BJK (Production Subcontracting
- External Processing), BMD (Purchase Contract), BMK (Re
turn to Supplier), BMR (Scheduling Agreements in Procure
ment), BNX (Consumable Purchasing), J45 (Procurement of
Direct Materials), J60 (Accounts Payable), J82 (Automated
Purchase-to-Pay with SAP Ariba Commerce Automation),
1XI (Central Requisitioning), 2MB (Integration of Payment
Advice with Buyers and Suppliers), 2XU (Procurement of
Materials with Variant Configuration)
Application Component MM-FIO-IV (Fiori UI for Invoice Verification)
Additional Details
The following functions are now available:
● New Release Authorization

The authorization object M_RECH_BUK has been extended with the new release activity. You can now define
that the account payable accountant is only responsible for posting and/or releasing supplier invoices.
● Detailed View for Blocked Invoices
If a supplier invoice is blocked for payment, you can navigate to a separate view containing an overview of
facts and statistics for the blocked invoice.
● Approval Details for Completed Invoices
If a workflow was triggered for a parked supplier invoice that was saved as completed, you can check the
approval steps on the Approval Details tab
● Multiple Account Assignment
You can reference documents (for example, purchase orders or service entry sheets) to which multiple
accounts are assigned.
● Search by Service Performer and Performance Date
You can choose among several assignment options depending on the reference document category. To
identify the most relevant service entry sheet items, you can now search by the service performer and the
performance date.
● Field Selection for Account Assignment of Purchase Order Reference Items
If the goods receipt is not valuated, the account assignment fields are ready for input, depending on the
G/L account. They are available as optional or required fields, depending on the field control settings of the
G/L account defined in the G/L Account Master Data app.

● Purchase Order Type Subcontracting
The purchase order type Subcontracting can now be posted in the invoice.
● New Header Fields
With this app, you can use new header fields (Reporting Country, EU Triangular Deal, Payment Method
Supplement, and Invoice Receipt Date).
● Enterprise Search
The Enterprise Search is available for supplier invoices.
10.11.2 Create Supplier Invoices - Advanced
With this feature, you can now choose a Special Period and post a supplier invoice directly to a G/L account
within this special period. In addition, you can use the service order accounting fields for G/L account postings.
Technical Details
Type Changed
Scope Item 18J (Requisitioning), BKP (Accelerated Customer Returns),

1Z3 (Accelerated Third-Party Returns), BDK (Sales Process
ing using Third-Party without Shipping Notification), BDN
(Sales of Non-Stock Item with Order-Specific Procurement),
BEI (Period-End Closing - Plant), J45 (Procurement of Direct
Materials), J60 (Accounts Payable), J62 (Asset Accounting),
2UQ (Future Delivery - Materials Management), 2UT (Com
plementary Invoice – Pricing), 2UU (Returnable Packaging
to Vendor), 3ZF (Central Sourcing), 2NX (Scheduling Agree
ment for Subcontracting Procurement)
Additional Details
Special Periods
A special period is used to divide the last regular posting period into sections for closing operations. For
example, if you have 12 posting periods for a company code that match the calendar year, you can divide the
posting period 12 (December) into the special periods 13, 14, 15, and 16. Then you can post an invoice directly to
one or more G/L accounts, for example into the special period 14. This is not possible for invoices that contain

items with reference to a purchase order. In addition, special periods are not available, if you perform
prepayments.
The company code settings must enable the special period posting. As a further prerequisite, you must have
selected the check boxes Display Periods, and Posting Special Periods in the Edit Options for Journal Entries
app.
10.11.3 Edit Supplier Invoices Settings
With this new app, you can select the parameter Display Journal Entry. If the parameter is selected, and you
post or park a supplier invoice, the invoice number and the journal entry are displayed.
Technical Details
Type Changed
Scope Item BNX (Consumable Purchasing)
Additional Details
 Note
Terminology: Journal Entry vs. Accounting Document
Please note that the following information applies only to English.
The term journal entry replaces accounting document following a change in the underlying financial
architecture. While the basic concept – the accounting record for a business transaction – is the same,
journal entries enable a truly integrated accounting system.
You may notice that you still see the terms document or accounting document on the user interface and in
the documentation. Nevertheless, these accounting documents are journal entries since they are based on
the new architecture.

10.11.4 Park Supplier Invoices
With this app, you can hold or park invoices or credit memos. This means that you enter the invoice data or
credit memo data in the system and save it in a document, but the system does not post this invoice initially.
Technical Details
Type Changed
Additional Details
You can change a parked document as often as you wish, for example, by adding or correcting data. The
changes are logged. When you have finished changing the document, you can post the parked document. Only
when you post an invoice or credit memo, does the system carry out the normal account movements and make
the necessary updates. The Park Supplier Invoices app offers the following functions:
● Hold:
○ The document is saved in its current status.
○ Only minimal checks are performed, for example, to check if the company code exists.
○ No updates take place.
● Park:
○ Information required to post the invoice document is still missing and you do not want to have to re-
enter the data entered so far.
○ The balance is not zero.
○ Updates take place, for example:
○ Information purchase order history
○ Log of document changes
● Save as complete:
○ No more changes should be made to the invoice document.
○ The balance is zero.
○ The invoice document is flagged for posting but is not to be posted yet.
○ Updates take place, for example
○ Information purchase order history
○ Controlling documents

○ Log of document changes
10.12 Supplier Management
10.13 Obsolete Backend Roles
The standard technical roles for Supplier Management that were delivered by SAP are obsolete and are not
supported any more.
Technical Details
Type Deleted
Scope Item 19C (Activity Management in Procurement), SL4(Supplier

Evaluation and Performance Monitoring), 19E(Supplier Clas
sification and Segmentation)
Application Component SLC-ACT, SLC-EVL, SLC-CAT
Additional Details
The following standard roles are obsolete:
Role Description
/SRMSMC/CATEGORY_MANAGER Category manager
/SRMSMC/DNB_REQUESTOR Role for requesting reports from D&B
/SRMSMC/EVALUATION_APPRAISER Appraiser
/SRMSMC/ACTIVITY_MANAGER Activity manager
/SRMSMC/ACTIVITY_PARTICIPANT Participant in Activity

Role Description
/SRMSMC/QUESTIONNAIRE_MANAGER Questionnaire manager
/SRMSMC/TRANSLATOR Translator
/SRMSMC/DISPLAY_ALL Display role for all objects in Supplier and Category

Management
/SRMSMC/REPORT_EXEC_ADMIN Technical role with authorization to start reports in Supplier

and Category Management
/SRMSMC/BG_SUP_EVAL_BUYSIDE RFC background processing in Supplier Evaluation
You can continue to use the standard SAP roles, however they are not supported any more. If you want to
change to the standard SAP procedure for user management and authorizations, see UI Technology Guide
User Management and Authorization .
10.14 Procurement Analytics
10.14.1 Supplier Evaluation Score History
With this new app, you can view the history of supplier evaluation scores. You can persist the supplier
evaluation scores by scheduling a job.
Technical Details
Type New
Scope Item 1JI (Real-Time Reporting and Monitoring for Procurement)

Additional Details
Jobs can be scheduled by using the app Schedule Persistency of Supplier Evaluation Scores in the Purchasing
Scheduling business catalog.
Related Information
Supplier Evaluation Score History

Schedule Persistency of Supplier Evaluation Scores
10.14.2 View Document Type and Item Category Attributes in

Analytics Apps
You can now display the document type and item category details in analytical apps.
Technical Details
Type New
Additional Details
The Document Type and Item Category can be viewed in the following apps:
● Purchase Order Value and Schedule Agreement Value

● Purchasing Spend
● Overdue Purchase Order Items
● Quantity Contract Consumption
● Off-Contract Spend
● Contract Leakage

In the following apps, only the Document Type can be displayed:
● Contract Expiry
● Value Contract Consumption
10.14.3 Operational/Overall Supplier Evaluation by Top/

Bottom 10 Suppliers
You can now view overall and operational supplier scores for the top and bottom 10 suppliers. The 10 suppliers
who got the highest score among the suppliers are listed under the Top 10 Suppliers view. Similarly, you can
view the 10 suppliers who got lowest scores in the Bottom 10 Suppliers view.
Technical Details
Type New
Additional Details
This feature is applicable to the following apps:
● Operational Supplier Evaluation

● Overall Supplier Evaluation
10.14.4 Purchase Order Changes
With this new app, you can view the number of changes made in the purchase orders.

Technical Details
Type New
Additional Details
This app can be used to find the total number of changes for multiple attributes in purchase orders, such as
suppliers, price, purchasing groups, etc.
Related Information
Purchase Order Item Changes
10.14.5 Purchase Requisition Average Approval Time –

Flexible Workflow
You can use this new app to identify the average time taken to approve a purchase requisition from the time of
its creation. This app only considers purchase requisitions for which the approval process is based on the
flexible workflow. By default, the app calculates the average approval time from the previous year to date. The
average approval time is shown in days.
Technical Details
Type New

Additional Details
The average approval time is calculated for different cost ranges; low, medium, high, and very high. You can
specify the cost ranges in the following filters:
● Price Low-Cost
● Price Mdm-Cost
● Price High-Cost
Related Information
Purchase Requisition Average Approval Time - Flexible Workflow
10.14.6 Situation Handling for Purchase Contract Item
You can now get notifications for contract consumption prediction details on your home screen. You can
navigate to the app Purchase Contract Item from these notifications.
Technical Details
Type Changed
10.14.7 Request for Quotation Types
With this new app, you can display RFQs that have been created in the SAP S/4HANA system by type.

Technical Details
Type New
Additional Details
You can see the following RFQ types:
● Ext. Price Requests: RFQs for which pricing is extracted from external systems for example, SAP Ariba.
● Ext. Sourcing Requests: RFQs for which bidding and awarding takes place externally. The RFQs that are
created in SAP S/4HANA, and then sent to the SAP Ariba system where the bidding process takes place.
The awarded quotations are then sent back to SAP S/4HANA.
● Int. Sourcing Requests: RFQs for which all the processes happen internally within SAP S/4HANA.
You can also view the target amounts for all the above RFQ types in this app.
Related Information
Request for Quotation Types
10.14.8 Performance Optimization for Analytics Apps
You can now optimize performance for some of the purchasing analytics apps by migrating the purchasing data
(purchase orders and scheduling agreements).
Technical Details
Type New

Additional Details
To achieve performance optimization, do the following:
1. Set up reporting currencies: Use the new configuration step Setup Analytical Reporting Currencies in the
configuration app Procurement Analytics to set up reporting currencies. These reporting currencies will be
used in various analytical KPIs and queries in the procurement apps.
2. Schedule migration: Use the new app Schedule Migration of Purchasing Data for Analytics to schedule
migration of data.
As an existing user you can choose one of the following migration options:
● Initial Load: Migrates all the purchasing records.

● Reprocess Records: Migrates the remaining purchasing records which failed to migrate during Initial Load.
● Delta Load: Migrates selective purchasing records. Purchasing records can be filtered for purchase order
date, suppliers, and purchase orders.
As a new user, you must use the option Activate Performance Optimization to enable performance
optimization. If the app Schedule Migration of Purchasing Data for Analytics is not executed with Activate
Performance Optimization option, then performance for analytics apps won’t be optimized.
Related Information
Schedule Migration of Purchasing Data for Analytics

10.15.1 Contingent Workforce Procurement via SAP

Fieldglass (22K)
Use
● Enable timely and automated payment while reducing the cost and risk of outstanding payments.
● Increase productivity with integrated creation of purchase requisition, purchase order, service entry sheet,
and supplier invoice.
Technical Details
Type Changed
Scope Item 22K ( Contingent Workforce Procurement via SAP Field

glass )

10.15.2 Procurement of Materials with Variant Configuration
(2XU)
Use
● You can perform variant pricing configuration and use variant pricing based on characteristics in the sales
order at the time of creation of purchase orders for the multi-level BOM.
Technical Details
Type Changed
Scope Item 2XU ( Procurement of Materials with Variant Configuration )
Africa

10.15.3 Central Purchase Contracts (2ME)
Use
● A search for materials directly from the connected back-end system.

● A check for errors and triggering of redistribution of the contract to the back-end systems.
● Storage location is maintained based on the plant when defining the distribution criteria (storage location
is copied to the local contract in the back-end system).
● Existing central contract can be copied to create a central contract.
● Indication that a certain central contract header or item has flexible distribution. In this case, a back-end
system can consume quantities in excess of the specified target quantity in the distributed central contract
item, if another back-end system is not consuming the quantity in same contract.
● View of the aggregated quantities in the hub system from goods receipts created for local purchase orders
or scheduling agreements that reference the distributed central contract.
● Situation alerts in the hub regarding expiring central contracts and the consumption percentage.
● "In Preparation" status can be assigned to a central contract in the hub system. Contracts with this status
cannot be approved or consumed.
● A purchasing info record in the connected system can be created or updated at the point of distributing the
central contract.
● Multiple central contracts can be updated at the same time using the mass update functionality.
● Custom validations for the header, item, item conditions and distribution data of a central contract can be
performed using the Check and Change BAdIs.
● Field controls for standard fields in a central contract can now be changed. You can then use the data in a
central contract to dynamically control the field properties at runtime.
Technical Details
Type Changed
Scope Item 2ME ( Central Purchase Contracts )

South Africa
10.15.4 Request for Price (1XF)
Use
● Situation management: you can create situation type for Low Number of Received Quotations, then take
action when a request for quotation (RFQ) approaches the submission deadline with a low number of
quotations
Technical Details
Type Changed
Scope Item 1XF ( Request for Price )

10.15.5 Analytics - Purchase Order Visibility and

Procurement Spend (2QU)
Use
● New CDS view "C_PurOrdServiceSpendQuery" covering the Service PO orders spend functionality is now
available.
Technical Details
Type Changed
Scope Item 2QU ( Analytics - Purchase Order Visibility and Procurement

Spend )

10.15.6 Legal Content Management (1XV)
Use
Enhancements in Manage Legal Transactions: With this app, you can use Situation Handling in Legal Content
Management. You can define situations to notify the legal counsel when the health synchronization of a legal
transaction has failed and should be processed to ensure successful synchronization.
1. You can now link objects from an external system using the Linked Objects feature.
2. You can also use the Open Issues hyperlink to view the missing or wrong attributes that affect the health of
the legal transaction.
3. Use the Create with Reference functionality to create a copy of an existing legal transaction, by defining a
relationship with the source transaction. Defining a relationship provides traceability between the source
and target transactions. You can also copy the required header attributes and facets from the source legal
transaction. You can use this reference transaction as a template and define other attributes and facets
according to your business needs.
4. You can even copy task group templates defined in the source legal transaction to the target transaction.
5. You can view comments added by the task approver in the My Inbox app, under the Task Group in Progress
facet.
6. Define relationships between multiple legal relationships. You can view all mandatory documents specified
in the related transactions, in the sub-facet Related Mandatory Documents. If configured, you can view
Notifications when the health of related legal transactions is synchronized. You can define renewal and
termination of legal transactions in the new facet called Life Cycle. You can use the Copy functionality to
create a copy of an existing legal transaction.
7. While adding a new task step, you can select additional recipient assignments and roles to assign workflow
tasks to specific teams and users. The teams can be configured using Responsibility Management
functions in the Manage Teams and Responsibility app.
8. You can select preconditions and add alternative preconditions to be fulfilled, before a workflow task is
triggered.
9. You can now define how to handle exceptions for rejected workflow tasks, by selecting the required action
and the action result.
10. While defining the renewal and termination clauses for legal transactions in the Life Cycle facet, you can
also select relevant date types in the All Dates sub facet.
Enhancements in Legal Content Overview: With this app, you can use the new cards to analyze the most
important tasks to be processed by you. You can also analyze the pending tasks of your legal transaction,
average processing time taken by each task, and task completion of different types of tasks.
Categories: With this app, you can now add description to the node category.
Enhancements in Manage Legal Documents: With this app, you can filter all the legal documents using five
new filters Main Organization Type, Main Organization, Stamps, Main Entity Type, and Main Entity. You can also
assign a Reference Number to the legal document, under the Basic Details section of the Document
Information facet in the legal document.
The corresponding fields for the new filters are available under specific groups in the Manage Legal Document
application. The groups are Content Details, Basic Details, and Related Details.

Manage Legal Tasks: With this feature, you can manage tasks that are linked to different legal transactions by
forwarding tasks to other agents and notifying agents about pending tasks. You can see all the tasks grouped
under the legal transaction from where these workflow tasks were triggered. You can filter the tasks based on
task types and agent roles, in addition to all the other common filter types.
Technical Details
Type Changed
Scope Item 1XV ( Legal Content Management )
Application Component LCM
10.15.7 Intelligent Approval Workflow (43E)
Use
This scope item analyzes past approval patterns for purchase requisitions and provides recommendations for
automated approval.
Technical Details
Type New

Scope Item 43E ( Intelligent Approval Workflow )
10.15.8 Prediction of Delivery Date for Purchase Order Items

(3FY)
Use
With this scope item, you can predict the supplier delivery delay to avoid delaying raw material availability or
production rescheduling.
Technical Details
Type New
Scope Item 3FY ( Prediction of Delivery Date for Purchase Order Items )

10.15.9 Central Sourcing (3ZF)
Use
Procurement departments for all company sizes continue to centralize their procurement processes globally or
regionally. There is a trend to establish Shared Service Centers where buying is built over a centralized sourcing
and procurement system.
Technical Details
Type New
Scope Item 3ZF ( Central Sourcing )
10.15.10 Procurement of Services (22Z)
Use
● Enable multi-accounting in Create Supplier Invoice app

● Enable attachments in service entry sheet
● Display service entry sheet attachments in My Inbox app

● Import service entry sheets from Excel
● Send mail notifications for approved and rejected service entry sheets
● Display Supplier Contact Data in Manage Purchase Orders
● Monitor log for service entry sheet generation
Technical Details
Type Changed
Scope Item 22Z ( Procurement of Services )
10.15.11 Blockchain-Verified RFQ Processing (3DT)
Use
With this scope item, you can strengthen the fairness and efficiency of your business transactions by
identifying and preventing fraudulent activities in the tenders and request for quote (RFQ) process.

Technical Details
Type New
Scope Item 3DT ( Blockchain-Verified RFQ Processing )
10.15.12 Supplier Evaluation and Performance Monitoring

(SL4)
Use
● You can now schedule a job to determine the operational and overall supplier evaluation score by supplier,
material group and timeframe.
Technical Details
Type Changed
Scope Item SL4 ( Supplier Evaluation and Performance Monitoring )

10.15.13 Central Purchasing (2XT)
Use
● You can navigate to the backend purchase order document from the Hub system
● In the hub system, you can view the availability of notes and attachments in the backend purchase
requisitions and purchase orders
● You can view and process service purchase requisitions and purchase orders in the Hub system
● You can now approve purchase requisitions in the hub system that were created in the back-end system
and extracted into the hub system
● Along with full extraction of purchase orders from back-end systems in the hub system, you can also
extract selectively by specifying parameters like Company Code, Purchasing Organization, Purchasing
Group, and creation date
● You can now be notified through situation alerts in the hub about the number of overdue purchase order
items, replicated from the back-end system.
● Maintain additional data in a purchase order (from centrally managed purchase requisitions) before it is
created in the connected system
● Add a central purchase requisition item to an existing purchase order in the connected system.
● You can now import central purchase requisitions that are relevant for processing in the hub system.
● You can Create central purchase contracts from purchase requisitions in draft mode.
● You can create central RFQs from purchase requisitions.
● You can now display central purchase requisitions that are processed in the hub system.
● You can Add purchase requisitions to an existing purchase order with an enhanced UI.

● You can defer purchase requisitions, resume deferred purchase requisitions, display deferred purchase
requisitions, and close them.
● You can now create purchase orders from central purchase requisitions that are processed in the hub
system without replicating the Purchase Requisitions to the connected systems.
● You can now manage rules and schedule jobs to automate various business processes in the hub system
● BAdIs for checking and modifying documents like purchase requisitions and purchase orders, in business
process automation.
Technical Details
Type Changed
Scope Item 2XT ( Central Purchasing )
10.15.14 Central Requisitioning (1XI)
Use
● A Hub user can create Local Purchase Requisitions in the Create Purchase Requisition app by changing the
local plant and company code in the Default settings for users app.
● You can create Local Purchase Requisitions without maintaining Plant and Company code in the Default
settings for users app.
● You can now search for Central Purchase Requisitions and filter on the back-end system while listing your
Purchase Requisitions.
● You can now configure workflow and approve Central Purchase Requisitions.

● You can edit or delete a Central Purchase Requisition in the backend. A notification would then be sent to
the user in the Hub system informing them of the change in the back-end system.
● Enhanced and improved search for suppliers at the time of creating purchase requisitions.
● Centrally monitor all operations related to the Purchase Requisitions hub.
● Diagnose, identify, and resolve the issues where they occur.
Technical Details
Type Changed
Scope Item 1XI ( Central Requisitioning )
10.15.15 Purchase Contract (BMD)
Use
● Create Purchase Order Directly from Local Purchase Contract: With this feature, you can create a purchase
order directly from a local purchase contract. In the Manage Purchase Contracts app, you can select a valid
purchase contract and create a purchase order for all items of the contract. Alternatively, you can open the
purchase contract and select the specific items within the contract for which you want to create a
purchase order.

Technical Details
Type Changed
Scope Item BMD ( Purchase Contract )
10.15.16 Image-Based Buying (3UH)
Use
Order items based on an Image
Technical Details
Type New

Scope Item 3UH ( Image-Based Buying )

11 Supply Chain
11.1 Inventory
11.1.1 CDS Views for Inventory
For technical reasons, the technical name of the Current Stock Quantity and Value (Consumption) CDS view has
changed from C_StockQuantityCurrentValue to C_StockQtyCurrentValue_2. Functionally, nothing has
changed. The consumption view C_StockQuantityCurrentValue is deprecated.
You can use the CDS view to obtain information about the current stock quantities and values.
Technical Details
Type Changed
Application Component MM-IM
11.1.2 API for Material Stocks (Replicate)
A new service for material stock is based on the Simple Object Access Protocol (SOAP) and can be consumed
in apps and other user interfaces:
● Material Stock - Replicate

This asynchronous outbound service enables you to replicate material stock quantity information for
external systems such as SAP Hybris Commerce.

620 PUBLIC Supply Chain
Technical Details
Type New
Scope Item BMC (Core Inventory Management)
Application Component MM-IM-GF
Additional Details
This interface is available on the SAP API Business Hub (https://api.sap.com )
Note that to consume the SOAP service, you have to create a communication arrangement for scenario
SAP_COM_0447 - Material Stock Quantity Replication Integration.
11.1.3 Output Management for Inventory
With this feature, you can define output types for further standard fields of a material document. You can
control which standard fields are relevant for output management and you can also choose when to issue their
output.
Technical Details
Type New

Supply Chain PUBLIC 621
11.1.4 Extensibility for Adobe Output Forms of Material
Documents
With this feature, you can extend the Adobe® output forms of various material documents according to your
business needs.
Technical Details
Type New
Application Component MM-IM-GF-PRNT (IM Output Determination)
Additional Details
You can extend the Adobe® output forms of the following material documents according to your business
needs:
● Goods Issue Individual Slip

● Goods Issue Individual Slip with Inspection Text
● Goods Receipt Label
● Goods Issue SC Individual Slip
● Goods Issue SC Individual Slip with Inspection Text
● Goods Issue Collective Slip
● Goods Receipt for PO Individual Slip
● Goods Receipt for PO Individual Slip with Inspection Text
● Goods Receipt for PO Collective Slip
● Goods Receipt for PO Email Message
● Goods Receipt for Order Individual Slip
● Goods Receipt for Order Individual Slip with Inspection Text
● Goods Movement Transfer Posting Individual Slip with Inspection Text
● Goods Movement Transfer Posting - Collective Slip
● Subcontracting Transfer Posting Collective Slip
● Physical Inventory Count List

Related Links
● Extensibility for Adobe Output Forms of Material Documents
11.1.5 Goods Movement
11.1.5.1 Post Goods Receipt for Purchase Order
With this feature, you can post the receipt of goods with reference to the purchase order with which you
ordered the goods. If a material is delivered for a purchase order, it is important for all the departments
involved that the goods receipt entry in the system references this purchase order.
In the Post Goods Receipt for Purchase Order app, you can now do the following:
● You can now display detailed information about the level on which a material is stored: plant, storage
location, and storage bin. Note that the availability of these fields depends on your configuration settings.
● You can now use an optimized visual control for marked or unmarked line items to improve handling the
selection of the desired material document items.
● You can use optimized, predefined output forms in the output management, such as collection slips. You
can copy and adapt these forms for your needs.
● You can now define printing presettings (Default Values) in the Application Settings in this app. This allows
you to specify if the app should print in the posting process and if so, what kind of documents (for example,
individual slip with inspection text).
● You can now use optimized settings for data determination to support time-zone-specific needs for the
posting date.
Technical Details
Type Changed
Application Component MM-FIO-IM-SGM
Related Links
● Post Goods Receipt for Purchase Order

11.1.5.2 Post Goods Receipt for Production Order
With this feature, you can post the receipt of goods with reference to a production order. If a material is
delivered for a production order, it is important for all the departments involved that the goods receipt entry in
the system references this production order.
In the Post Goods Receipt for Production Order app, you can now do the following:
posting date.
Technical Details
Type Changed
Scope Item BJE (Make-to-Order Production - Finished Goods Sales and

Final Assembly)
Related Links
● Post Goods Receipt for Production Order
11.1.5.3 Post Goods Receipt for Inbound Delivery
With this feature, you can post the receipt of goods with reference to the inbound delivery. The app proposes a
selection of inbound deliveries and advanced shipping notifications from the supplier that can be posted.
In the Post Goods Receipt for Inbound Delivery app, you can now do the following:

posting date.
Technical Details
Type Changed
Scope Item BME (Stock Transfer with Delivery)
Application Component MM-FIO-IM
Related Links
● Post Goods Receipt for Inbound Delivery
11.1.5.4 Post Goods Receipt without Reference
With this feature, you can post the receipt of goods without reference to an order.
This situation occurs when you want to handle the procurement process of consignment stocks. The cause lies
in the special ordering principle of consignment stocks, in which the supplier has already contractually agreed
in advance to deliver materials in a specific quantity and time to the customer depending on demand and
without an explicit order.
In the Post Goods Receipt without Reference app, you can now do the following:
posting date.

Technical Details
Type Changed
Related Links
● Post Goods Receipt without Reference
11.1.5.5 Manage Stock
With this feature, you can perform stock changes.
In the Manage Stock app, you can now do the following:
● You can use an optimized selection option to select a cost center for stock transfer postings (scrapping).
A combo box allows you to select an item from a predefined list of available cost centers. There is an
editable input field for filtering the list, and a dropdown menu with a list of the available options.
● Adjustment of documentation: The app supports the initial entry of stock balances. Alternatively, based on
your authorization, you can use the Post Goods Movement app for the initial entry of stock balances
(movement type 561). If you do so, you can also consider the special stock indicators E (project stock) and
W (customer consignment stock).
● You can use an optimized fuzzy search that includes the search for batches.
● The application settings option is enhanced with two batch selection criteria. You can now decide if you
want to exclude batches from the search result that have a deletion flag and/or that have a shelf life
expiration date that has been exceeded.
● To prepare the posting (initial entry or scrapping), you can provide additional free texts for an individual
material document header and an individual material document item.
Technical Details
Type Changed

Related Links
● Manage Stock
11.1.5.6 Transfer Stock – In Plant
With this feature, you can make transfer postings within a plant.
In the Transfer Stock – In Plant app, you can now do the following:
● You can use the print function for a stock transfer of storage location to storage location in one step (that
is, movement type 311: Valuated Unrestricted-Use Stock to Valuated Unrestricted-Use Stock).
want to exclude batches from the search result that have a deletion flag and/or that have a shelf life
expiration date that has been exceeded.
● To prepare the transfer posting, you can provide additional free texts for an individual material document
header and an individual material document item.
Technical Details
Type Changed

Related Links
● Transfer Stock – In Plant
11.1.5.7 Transfer Stock – Cross Plant
With this feature you can make the transfer postings from one plant (issuing plant) to another plant (receiving
plant). The app supports you in finding the transfer postings that are allowed and to personalize the control
presettings of storage locations and visible columns.
In the Transfer Stock – Cross Plant app, you can now do the following:
● When using batches, the app can sort according to the same batches in different plants in the results table.
want to filter for batches with a deletion flag and/or batches with a shelf life expiration date that has not
been exceeded.
● To prepare the transfer posting, you can provide additional free texts for an individual material document
header and an individual material document item.
Technical Details
Type Changed
Scope Item 1P7 (Cross-Plant Transfer Posting)
Related Links
● Transfer Stock – Cross Plant

11.1.6 Inventory Analytics and Control
11.1.6.1 Material Documents Overview
With this feature you can display a list of material document items and display the material document details of
a selected material document item. In addition, you can reverse a material document.
In the Material Documents Overview app, you can now do the following:
● You can extend the Material Documents Overview app according to your business needs. In the Custom
Fields and Logic app, you can enable the usage of standard fields.
● You can use optimized, predefined output forms in the output management, such as collection slips. You
can copy and adapt these forms for your needs.
Technical Details
Type Changed
Related Links
● Material Documents Overview

● App Extensibility: Material Documents Overview
11.1.6.2 Stock - Single Material
With this feature you can get an overview of your material stock. You can review your stock by the plants and
storage locations for which you are responsible. The app can display the stock information as a table or a
diagram.
The following new features are now available with the Stock – Single Material app:
● The search option is extended for batches.

● The table header now keeps its position even when you are scrolling through an extensive result table.

Technical Details
Type Changed
Related Links
● Stock - Single Material
11.1.6.3 Stock - Multiple Materials
With this feature, you can get an overview of your material stocks. You can review your stock by the plants and
storage locations for which you are responsible:
● Display a stock overview of one or multiple materials.

● Display the value of your stocks.
● Display the stock information as a table.
In the Stock – Multiple Materials app, you can now do the following:
● You can now calculate the stock values based on the stock quantity of the selected reporting date
multiplied by the current material price. This means that the app always calculates using the current
material price, irrespective of the reporting date you have selected. This calculation method for the stock
value is common to all Fiori apps in Inventory Management.
● You can use optimized authorization handling to turn off the display of the values in the stock value fields.
In other words, you can hide this type of financial information that should only be available to a specific
group of users.
● You can use enhanced filter options for a refined search with the additional fields Batch, Shelf Life
Expiration Date, and Production Date.
● You can use optimized, predefined filter grouping for an easier filter selection. The filter criteria with
reference to the display currency have been renamed and grouped in the areas Stock Value in Display
Currency and Current Stock Value in Display Currency.
● You can extend the Stock – Multiple Materials app according to your business needs. In the Custom Fields
and Logic app, you can enable the usage of standard fields.

Technical Details
Type Changed
Scope Item 1IU (Customer Consignment)
Related Links
● Stock - Multiple Materials

● App Extensibility: Stock - Multiple Materials
11.1.6.4 Overdue Materials - Stock in Transit
With this feature, you can get an overview of the overdue materials for which a stock transport order has been
created. You can identify these materials to complete the stock transfer process or investigate potential
problems.
In the Overdue Materials - Stock in Transit app, you can now do the following:
group of users.
● You can extend the Overdue Materials - Stock in Transit app according to your business needs. In the
Custom Fields and Logic app, you can enable the usage of standard fields.
● You can use the optimized tooltip in the bullet micro chart.
● You can use the new variant Group by Purchase Order / Purchase Order Item to optimize the result table.
● You can use a new situation template to create your own ready-to-use situation for overdue stock transport
order items using the Manage Situation Types app.
With the predelivered situation template MAN_MATLOVERDUESITSITN you can immediately inform
responsible team members about delayed stock transport order items. These team members can monitor
overdue stock transport order items according to the conditions defined in the situation and can take
further action if necessary. These conditions can be changed. The predelivered conditions are just
proposals.
● You can now access a detailed screen showing more information about the stock transport order item. A
timeline now visualizes the sequence of posted documents. In the timeline section it is also possible to
filter only selected documents which excludes canceled and referenced documents. Referenced
documents refer to other line items in the result table for the same selected stock transport order item.
Open situations can be resolved in the situations section on the detailed screen. This section is only visible
if this stock transport item triggered a situation.

● A new Complete Delivery button has been introduced for open stock transport order items where the total
goods issue quantity equals the total goods receipt quantity.
Technical Details
Type Changed
Scope Item BMH (Stock Transfer without Delivery)
Additional Details
You have to create your own team with team type SINVOVDUEM using the Manage Teams and Responsibilities
app. You can add members of your organization to the created team and assign member functions that are also
predelivered such as warehouse clerk or inventory manager.
 Note
These predelivered member functions are different to the existing business roles Warehouse Clerk, Plant
Manager, or Inventory Manager. The member function allows a more granular assignment for special team
members. For example, it is possible to use one team for different situation types.
If you want to differentiate between different teams, you can do so with the responsibility definitions for Issuing
Plant, Receiving Plant and Receiving MRP Controller. Only notifications about stock transport order items that
fulfill the responsibility definitions of a team will be available for this team.
Related Links
● Overdue Materials - Stock in Transit

● Situation Template: Stock Transport Order Overdue
● Situation Handling → klären!!!
● App Extensibility: Overdue Materials - Stock in Transit

11.1.6.5 Overdue Materials - GR Blocked Stock
With this feature, you can get an overview of the overdue materials that were already posted into the non-
valuated goods receipt blocked stock with movement type GR into blocked stock (103) or GR from blocked rev.
(106). You can identify these materials to complete the goods receipt process or investigate potential
problems.
In the Overdue Materials – GR Blocked Stock app, you can now do the following:
group of users.
● You can extend the Overdue Materials - GR Blocked Stock app according to your business needs. In the
Technical Details
Type Changed
Related Links
● Overdue Materials - GR Blocked Stock

● App Extensibility: Overdue Materials - GR Blocked Stock
11.1.6.6 Slow or Non-Moving Materials
With this feature, you can monitor and make time-dependent investigations of the slow or non-moving
materials in your stock. Based on these results you can react immediately with follow-on activities such as
scrapping or stock transfers.
In the Slow or Non-Moving Materials app, you can now do the following:
● You can now train two new predictive models to predict the Slow-Moving Indicator for a material for a
selected time period. With this information, you get an impression if a material may deviate from the
previous consumption and stock values (displayed with the Predicated Slow-Moving Indicator).

● You can use a standard structured filter bar where the priority of the filter criteria has changed. You can still
adapt the filter bar by customizing various filter criteria for your individual needs.
group of users.
● You can extend the Slow or Non-Moving Materials app according to your business needs. In the Custom
Fields and Logic app, you can enable the usage of standard fields.
● You can now use an optimized structured filter bar with new and changed filter criteria. This supports you
in determining more easily and more accurately the materials with their different inventory turnovers
according to your business needs:
○ The filter Days w/o Consumption has been renamed Days with Low Consumption and its function has
been extended. When entering the number of days, you define the time period for the analysis.
○ You can now determine the use of a material in a bill of material (BOM) as a filter option (Use in BOMs).
○ You can now determine slow-moving materials based on the consumption to stock ratio (Slow-Moving
Indicator). The Slow-Moving Indicator represents the percentage of consumption quantity per year
with respect to the total stock quantity on the reference date. Setting the filter with a value of 0, you
can search directly for non-moving materials. This corresponds to the behavior of the app in the last
release.
○ The result table has been adapted according to the filter criteria.
● The Inventory Consumption Group filter is new. This filter considers only those material documents as a
consumption-relevant goods movement when the related movement types are defined and marked as a
consumption. This can be done using the corresponding SSC UI Define Inventory Consumption Groups.
● The Slow or Non-Moving Material Details page (object page) is new. You can now obtain more information
here on material / plant level for the selected material. The Slow-Moving Indicator over Time graphic
visualizes the evolution of the monthly slow-moving indicator for the past 12 months.
Technical Details
Type Changed

Related Links
● Slow or Non-Moving Materials

● App Extensibility: Slow or Non-Moving Materials
● Extensibility
11.1.6.7 Inventory Analysis Overview
With this feature, you can monitor the most important information and tasks relevant for you as an inventory
analyst right now. The information is displayed on a set of actionable cards:
● Stock Value Increase despite Consumption

● More than 100 Days without Consumption
● Monitor Batches by Longest Time in Storage
● Monitor Batches by Earliest Expiration Date
You can therefore focus on the most important tasks, enabling faster decisions and immediate action.
For example, you can now do the following:
● You can use the list card More than 100 Days without Consumption with a chart visualization. The chart
displays values and the number of materials grouped in intervals of 50 days for days without consumption.
● You can use the two list cards Monitor Batches by Longest Time in Storage and Monitor Batches by Earliest
Expiration Date with an optimized navigation feature:
○ You can navigate from the list card header to the Stock Multiple Materials app with the corresponding
parameters.
○ You can navigate from the item to the Stock Multiple Materials app, which displays the selected
material in more detail.
Technical Details
Type New
Scope Item BGG (SAP Fiori Analytical Apps for Inventory and Warehouse
Management)
Application Component MM-FIO-IM-OVP

Related Links
● Inventory Analysis Overview
11.1.6.8 Dead Stock Analysis
With this feature, you can monitor and make time-dependent investigations of your dead stock. The Dead
Stock Analysis app supports you in your daily work, for example, as an inventory manager, to achieve maximum
inventory accuracy and subsequently to optimize the inventory situation in your stock.
For example, you can now do the following:
group of users.
● You can extend the Dead Stock Analysis app according to your business needs. In the Custom Fields and
Logic app, you can enable the usage of standard fields.
Technical Details
Type New
Related Links
● Dead Stock Analysis

● App Extensibility: Dead Stock Analysis

11.1.6.9 Inventory KPI Analysis
With this feature, you can monitor inventory key performance indicators (KPIs) effectively to ensure forecast
and inventory accuracy in a timely manner and visualize this in a meaningful way. This app supports you, for
example, as an inventory analyst in your daily work. You can identify critical KPIs to monitor the inventory flow
or investigate potential problems.
You can check, for example, stock values as a time series for comparable periods in order to identify potential
outliers that could affect the fixed capital situation. Furthermore, you can filter for these outliers and display
only these particular stocks. Outliers can be identified as major changes at stock identifier level of a certain KPI
in compared time periods. The app offers various KPI filters that display potential outliers in a frequency
distribution chart.
You can extend the Inventory KPI Analysis app according to your business needs. In the Custom Fields and
Logic app, you can enable the usage of standard fields.
Technical Details
Type New
Management)
Related Links
● Inventory KPI Analysis
11.1.6.10 Goods Movement Analysis
With this feature, you can analyze the goods movements in your company.
In the Goods Movement Analysis app, you can now do the following:
● You can extend the Goods Movement Analysis app according to your business needs. In the Custom Fields

Technical Details
Type Changed
Related Links
● Goods Movement Analysis

● App Extensibility: Goods Movement Analysis
11.1.7 Physical Inventory
11.1.7.1 Create Physical Inventory Documents
With this feature, you can display lists of materials and choose to create physical inventory documents for
selected materials or groups of materials. These documents are used as the basis for planning and performing
a physical inventory, for recording count data, and for posting any differences revealed by the count. The app
helps you find and select materials due to be counted, and you can create physical inventory documents for the
materials directly from the detail list.
In the Create Physical Inventory Documents app, you can now do the following:
● You can extend the Create Physical Inventory Documents app according to your business needs. In the
Technical Details
Type Changed
Scope Item BML (Physical Inventory - Inventory Count and Adjustment)

Related Links
● Create Physical Inventory Documents

● App Extensibility: Create Physical Inventory Documents
11.1.7.2 Physical Inventory Analysis
With this feature, you can analyze physical inventory in your company to identify opportunities for process
improvement.
In the Physical Inventory Analysis app, you can now do the following:
● You can extend the Physical Inventory Analysis app according to your business needs. In the Custom Fields
Technical Details
Type Changed
Related Links
● Physical Inventory Analysis

● App Extensibility: Physical Inventory Analysis
11.1.7.3 Inventory Turnover Analysis
With this feature, you can analyze the turnover of materials in a selected plant for which you are responsible.

The app provides you with detailed information about materials that could have turnover problems according
to your turnover definition, depending on the time period you select.
In the Inventory Turnover Analysis app, you can now do the following:
Technical Details
Type Changed
Management)
Related Links
● Inventory Turnover Analysis
11.1.7.4 Physical Inventory Document Overview
With this feature, you can use different kinds of physical inventory strategies, such as annual counts,
continuous counts, and cycle counts. You can use specific criteria such as storage location, materials, or
physical inventory document numbers. The app provides an overview of a physical inventory document and all
its related detailed information.
In the Physical Inventory Document Overview app, you can now do the following:
● You can extend the Physical Inventory Document Overview app according to your business needs. In the

Technical Details
Type Changed
Application Component MM-FIO-IM-PI
Related Links
● Physical Inventory Document Overview

● App Extensibility: Physical Inventory Document Overview
11.1.7.5 Performance Improvements for Physical Inventory

Process
The physical inventory process has been improved in performance and locking concept in the processing of
large amounts of data. This feature allows an optimized performance of calculation and posting processes and
ensures consistency in the handling across all physical inventory steps.
The optimization of material document processing doesn’t affect the posting of inventory differences.
The improvements to the optimization of the physical inventory process are separated into several parts:
● Optimization of database accesses to material data

● Separation of material master data and material stock quantity
● Calculation of stock quantity only if the stock quantity is required for the current inventory process
● Locking behavior of materials when posting the inventory difference is changed from exclusive locking on
plant level to fine granular (situation-based) locking
The Create Physical Inventory Documents app benefits from the improvements.
Technical Details
Type New

Related Links
● Performance Improvements for Physical Inventory Process
11.1.8 Batch Management
11.1.8.1 Value Help Authorizations in Batch Management
Technical Details
Type Changed
Scope Item BLF (Batch Management)
Application Component LO-BM
Additional Details
Please see SAP Note 2803691 for a list of the affected transactions in Batch Management.

Related Information
11.2 Warehouse Management
11.2.1 Pack Warehouse Stock
With this app, you can quickly pack warehouse stock from one handling unit (HU) or storage bin into another
HU. You can use this app for the purpose of internal movements for your warehouse.
Technical Details
Type New
Scope Item 3BW (Warehouse Internal Repacking)
Application Component SCM-EWM-FIO
Related Information
Pack Warehouse Stock
11.2.2 Process Warehouse Tasks - Picking
With this app, you can process the warehouse tasks destined for picking. In the overview screen, you can view
all relevant information about the pick warehouse tasks in your warehouse. You can directly choose one or
multiple warehouse tasks for confirmation or cancellation. You can print a pick list with this app. You can also
view the details of a warehouse task or handle an exception.

Technical Details
Type New
Scope Item 3BS (Warehouse Outbound Processing)
Related Information
Process Warehouse Tasks - Picking
11.2.3 Process Warehouse Tasks - Putaway
With this app, you can process the warehouse tasks destined for putaway. In the overview screen, you can view
all relevant information about the putaway warehouse tasks in your warehouse. You can directly choose one or
multiple warehouse tasks for confirmation or cancellation. You can print a putaway list with this app. You can
also view the details of a warehouse task or handle an exception.
Technical Details
Type New
Scope Item 3BR (Warehouse Inbound Processing)
Related Information
Process Warehouse Tasks - Putaway

11.2.4 Warehouse KPIs - Operations
With this app, you can view an overview of key performance indicators (KPIs) relevant to your warehouse
operations, for example, the total number of open warehouse tasks to be processed on the current date. On the
overview page, you can see different types of KPI cards. As a warehouse clerk, these cards help you to better
manage and process your daily tasks.
Technical Details
Type New
Related Information
Warehouse KPIs - Operations
11.2.5 CDS Views for Warehouse Orders, Warehouse Tasks,

and Outbound Delivery Orders
You can use the following new CDS views:
● Warehouse Order Query (C_EWM_WarehouseOrderQ)

● Warehouse Task Query (C_EWM_WarehouseTaskQ)
● Outbound Delivery Order Query Without Mandatory Parameters (C_EWM_OutbDelivOrdNoParamQ)
Technical Details
Type New

Application Component SCM-EWM-WOP, SCM-EWM-DLP
Related Information
Outbound Delivery Order Query Without Mandatory Parameters

Warehouse Order Query
Warehouse Task Query
11.2.6 Warehouse Billing in Decentralized EWM
In decentralized Extended Warehouse Management (EWM), you can record the quantity of warehouse services
used for the services agreed upon in an agreement in Transportation Management (TM). You can subsequently
send this quantity information back to the TM for charge calculation and settlement based on the charges you
have agreed to in the agreement. This enables you to perform the following:
● Sell warehouse services to customers and bill the customers periodically based on the services used for a
time period.
● Purchase warehouse services from external service providers and periodically pay the service provider
based on the warehouse services used for a time period.
The features are the same for Warehouse Billing both in decentralized EWM and EWM embedded in SAP S/
4HANA.
Technical Details
Type New
Application Component SCM-EWM-WB

Related Information
Warehouse Billing
11.2.7 Enhancements to Physical Inventory
The following enhancements for physical inventory (PI) are available:
● When performing a PI recount on a radio frequency (RF) device, you can avoid the recount being assigned
to the original counter.
● When performing a PI recount on a RF device or a desktop, you can define a queue for recounting.
● When you find a new handling unit (HU) in a PI count on a RF device or a desktop, you can enter the
packaging material and HU type.
In the Count Physical Inventory – Paper-Driven Counting app, you can enter an HU type for a newly found
HU in a PI count.
Technical Details
Type Changed
Application Component SCM-EWM-PI
These enhancements affect the Customizing activities in the following ways:
● A Queue for Recounting field was added to the Customizing activity Define Queues for Physical Inventory
You can find this activity in the Customizing for Define Queues for Physical Inventory in Customizing for
Extended Warehouse Management under Cross-Process Settings Resource Management Define
Queues .
● A checkbox Different User to Recount Physical Inventory Documents was added to the Customizing activity
Specify Physical-Inventory-Specific Settings in the Warehouse
You can find this activity in Customizing for Extended Warehouse Management under Internal Warehouse
Processes Physical Inventory Warehouse-Number-Specific Settings .

Related Information
Processing of Physical Inventory Documents
11.2.8 Distribution of Packing Instructions as Packaging

Specifications
If you want to use packing instructions from an enterprise management system, for example, SAP S/4HANA or
SAP ERP as packaging specifications in decentralized Extended Warehouse Management (EWM) based on SAP
S/4HANA, you can distribute these instructions to the decentralized EWM system. When warehouse workers
perform packing in EWM, they can refer to the proposals provided, such as the materials and packaging
materials to be packed in a handling unit.
Technical Details
Type New
Application Component SCM-BAS-PAK-PS
Related Information
Distribution of Packing Instructions as Packaging Specifications
11.2.9 Enhancements to the Warehouse Management

Monitor
Use
With this feature, you can access more information about your warehouse directly in the warehouse
management monitor, from inspection lot information to change documents, and in new ways, such as using
the kanban container ID.

Technical Details
Type Changed
Application Component SCM-EWM-MON
Additional Details
● You can access the Physical Stock node under Documents Inspection to display the physical stock
for inspection lots with no usage decision yet.
You can also display the inspection lot from the Inspection node.
● You can display logged changes made to storage bins under Stock and Bin Storage Bin .
● You can display logged changes made to fixed bin assignments under the following nodes:
○ Stock and Bin Storage Bin Fixed Bin Assignment
○ Stock and Bin Fixed Bin Overview Fixed Bins Fixed Bin Assignment
○ Product Master Data Warehouse Attribute
● You can search for warehouse tasks via the kanban container ID in the warehouse management monitor
under Documents Warehouse Tasks . You can also find the kanban container ID in the detailed fields
of the warehouse task.
● You can search for warehouse tasks via the material document under Documents Warehouse Tasks
when the tasks are associated with the receipt of finished products in repetitive manufacturing or with the
goods issue of consumed components. You can also find the material document, the material document
item, and the material document year in the warehouse tasks.
You can activate change documents for storage bins and for fixed bin assignments in Customizing for Extended
Warehouse Management under Master Data Storage Bins Activate Change Documents .
Related Information
Warehouse Management Monitor

11.2.10 Warehouse Kanban Supply into Production
Use
A new replenishment strategy is available for stock transfer via Kanban. With this replenishment strategy,
warehouse tasks to replenish a kanban container are automatically created when you set the kanban container
to empty. You can confirm the warehouse tasks either in a kanban app or in Extended Warehouse Management.
This feature is only available for Extended Warehouse Management embedded in SAP S/4HANA.
Technical Details
Type Changed
Application Component SCM-EWM-WOP-REP
Related Information
Set Kanban Container Status

Manual Confirmation of Warehouse Tasks
Process Warehouse Tasks - Picking
11.2.11 Change Documents for Control Cycle in Warehouse

Management
Use
With this feature, change documents are written when you create, change, or delete a control cycle in Extended
Warehouse Management.

Technical Details
Type New
Application Component SCM-EWM-MD
Additional Details
The change documents can be displayed from the following apps:
● Assign Bin to PSA – Warehouse
Related Information
Assignment of Storage Bins to a Production Supply Area (PSA)
11.2.12 Change Documents for Fixed Storage Bin

Assignments
Use
With this feature, you can display change documents that are written when fixed storage bin assignments are
created, changed, or deleted.
Technical Details
Type New

Additional Details
The change documents can be displayed from the following apps:
● Assign Fixed Bins

● Display Storage Bins
● Change Storage Bins
● Warehouse Monitor, nodes Stock and Bin > Storage Bin
● Warehouse Monitor, nodes Stock and Bin > Storage Bin > Fixed Bin Assignment
● Warehouse Monitor, nodes Stock and Bin > Fixed Bin Overview > Fixed Bins > Fixed Bin Assignment
● Warehouse Monitor, nodes Product Master Data > Warehouse Attribute
Related Information
Warehouse Management Monitor
11.2.13 Automatic Replication of Production Supply Area /

Control Cycle Harmonization
Use
When a production supply area (PSA) that is relevant to Extended Warehouse Management is created in
Production Planning, or if the production supply area is used in a control cycle supplied by Extended
Warehouse Management, it’s automatically replicated to Extended Warehouse Management.
Now when you maintain a control cycle in Production Planning, you can navigate directly to the dependent
control cycle in Extended Warehouse Management to maintain it as well.
This feature is only available for Extended Warehouse Management embedded in SAP S/4HANA.
Technical Details
Type Changed

11.2.14 Stock Consolidation: Maximize Number of Free Bins
Use
With this feature, you maximize the number of free storage bins and improve the utilization of occupied bins.
Technical Details
Type Changed
Application Component SCM-EWM-WOP
Additional Details
This new strategy for stock consolidation proposes ad hoc warehouse tasks to move stock items from storage
bins with a lower level of usage to bins with a higher level of usage.
The usage level can be measured by weight, volume, capacity, or number of handling units.
This strategy considers storage type settings. It works with bulk storage and regular storage types.
Related Information
Consolidation to Free up Storage Bins / Bulk Bin Consolidation

11.2.15 Stock Consolidation: New Selection Criteria
Use
With this feature, you can select stock to be consolidated on a more fine-grained basis.
Technical Details
Type Changed
Application Component SCM-EWM-WOP-AHM
Additional Details
New selection criteria are available in the Consolidate Stock app:
● Storage Bin Type

● Aisle
Using these criteria, you can narrow the search for stock to be consolidated. For example, you can limit the
search to storage bins that can fit cartons, or select dedicated aisles to limit travel distance when consolidating
stock.
Related Information
Consolidation to Reach Full Quantities
11.2.16 Stock Consolidation: Batch Consolidation
Use
Stock consolidation allows you to form full stock-keeping quantities from partial quantities of stock. With this
feature, you can consolidate stock of the same material but with different batch numbers.

Technical Details
Type Changed
Application Component SCM-EWM-WOP-AHM
Additional Details
You select the batch criteria that you want to match, and then you get proposals of partial stock to consolidate.
You can choose from the following batch criteria:
● Country of Origin
● Best-Before Date (BBD) or Shelf Life Expiration Date (SLED)
● Vendor Batch
● Manufacturing Date
● Next Inspection Date
● Status of Batch
You can use the fields in the batch master or, if you define your own batch classification, you can include the
standard SAP characteristics in your custom class.
Related Information
Consolidation of Different Batches
11.2.17 Migration Objects for Scenario 'SAP EWM to

Decentralized EWM'
Use
With this feature, you can migrate data for a set of migration objects that belong to the SAP EWM to
decentralized EWM scenario that is now available in the SAP S/4HANA migration cockpit.

Technical Details
Type New
Additional Details
The following migration objects are available:
● Warehouse Stock
● Warehouse Product
● Storage Bin
● Storage Bin Sorting
● Fixed Bin Assignment
Related Information
Transferring Data Directly from an SAP System
11.2.18 EWM-QM Integration Without Inspection Rules
With this feature you can integrate quality management in Extended Warehouse Management (EWM) without
inspection rules for the warehouse-dependent inspection object types 4 and 5.
 Note
QM without inspection rules is only possible in EWM embedded in SAP S/4HANA . It does not apply to
decentralized EWM based on SAP S/4HANA.
For the integration of quality management you can define that the inspection setup data of the Quality
Management view in the material master is used. An inspection rule is no longer required. In EWM the
inspection types 01 (Goods receipt insp. for purchase order), 04 (Goods receipt inspection from production),
08 (Stock transfer inspection) and 09 (Recurring inspection of batches) are supported.
● When using process Acceptance Sampling you specify the inspection type in the quality info record for the
material.

● When using process Presampling in Production you specify the inspection type in the Quality Management
view of the material master.
If you want to change your settings from inspections with inspection rules to inspections without inspection
rules, see SAP Note 2787302 .
Technical Details
Type New
Scope Item
Additional Details
You can use quality inspection without inspection rule in the following processes:
● Acceptance sampling
● Inspections after goods receipt
● Presampling in production
● Stock inspections
● Recurring inspections
You define that you use QM without inspection rules in Customizing for Extended Warehouse Management
under Cross-Process Settings Quality Management Basics and Integration Define and Activate
Warehouse-Dependent IOTs :
● For Origin of the Inspection Lot Setup, you specify that no inspection rule is used and that the inspection lot
setup originates from the Quality Management tab of the material master.
● Under Insp. Planning w/o Rules, you specify the inspection settings and the quality inspection process.
Related Information
Configure Quality Management Without Inspection Rules

11.2.19 Enhancement to the Counting of Inbound Deliveries
(IOT 2)
With this feature, the system can determine the destination bin when putting away unpacked stock during the
counting of received goods using inspection object type (IOT) Counting Inbound Delivery (IOT 2). To enable
this, you assign an external step to the inspection rule you use for IOT 2. Note that to use this feature, you must
use decentralized Extended Warehouse Management based on SAP S/4HANA.
Technical Details
Type Changed
Related Information
Counting
11.2.20 Scenario-Based Authorization Check for Enhanced

Warehouse Number Checks and Activity Checks
Use
With this feature, you can restrict user roles more precisely based on warehouse numbers, warehouse
products, and authorization activities. For example, you can restrict a user role to display-only access to
warehouse product maintenance, or you can restrict write access to only one warehouse number.
In addition, the scenario affects authorization checks for certain warehouse processes.

Technical Details
Type New
Application Component SCM-EWM-AUT
Additional Details
By default, the scenario isn’t activated. If you want to use the enhanced authorization restriction options,
activate the scenario definition /SCWM/WHSE_ACTIVITY_CHECK.
 Note
You must update user authorizations for the Manage Product Master Data app with the new authorization
object /SCWM/PROD, even if you don’t activate the scenario. The authorizations for this object are delivered
active.
Prerequisites
Before you activate the scenario, enhance your user roles for the following processes:
● For product maintenance, enhance user roles with authorizations for the new authorization object /SCWM/
PROD.
● For warehouse order processing and warehouse task processing, enhance user roles with the activity value
02 for the authorization object /SCWM/TOHA. For warehouse orders with physical inventory documents,
enhance the roles with the activity value 02 for the authorization object /SCWM/PIPR.
● For difference analyzer processing, enhance user roles with authorizations for the authorization object /
SCWM/PIPR.
Refer to SAP Note 2792677 and its referenced documents to activate the scenario definition.

See Also
For more information about the upgrade process, see the Upgrade Guide for SAP S/4HANA at http://
help.sap.com/S4HANA_OP_1909.
11.2.21 Authorization Object for Warehouse Requests with

Warehouse Number
Use
With this feature, you can implement an authorization check for warehouse requests using a warehouse
number. This authorization object is the successor to authorization object /SCWM/DLV. The ability to perform a
check based on the warehouse number brings the authorization object into alignment with most of the other
authorization objects in Extended Warehouse Management.
Technical Details
Type New
Application Component SCM-EWM-AUT
Additional Details
If you replace /SCWM/DLV with /SCWM/DLV2, you see that most of the authorization fields are the same. The
main differences are in how the warehouse number and the organizational unit are used:
● In the original authorization object /SCWM/DLV, the fields /SCWM/ORG (location organizational unit) and /
SCWM/ROLE (partner role organizational unit) are used to check for the warehouse (WH), the shipping
office (SO), and the receiving office (RO).
● In the new authorization object /SCWM/DLV2, the field /SCWM/ROLE is no longer necessary. The fields /
SCWM/LGNU (warehouse number) and /SCWM/ORG are used:
○ You can enter a warehouse number in field /SCWM/LGNU.
○ You can enter an organizational unit in field /SCWM/ORG, but this is now optional. The system will
automatically use the organizational unit in the warehouse request header. For inbound deliveries, the

organizational unit is the receiving office (role RO), and for outbound delivery orders, this is the
shipping office (role SO).
With the original authorization object /SCWM/DLV, it is not possible to perform a check based on a warehouse
number directly. Instead, the warehouse number is checked indirectly by checking the location of the
warehouse. Most of the other authorization objects in Extended Warehouse Management check the warehouse
number directly, though. For this reason, a new authorization object, /SCWM/DLV2, was created to allow the
warehouse number to be checked directly.
The new authorization object /SCWM/DLV2 is the successor to the authorization object /SCWM/DLV and can be
used instead of it. Only one of the two authorization objects should be used in an authorization profile.
If you are implementing a new project, we recommend that you use only /SCWM/DLV2.
If you are implementing an upgrade project, it is possible to continue to use /SCWM/DLV, for compatibility
reasons. There is a fallback logic that allows both authorization objects to be used.
Related Information
Warehouse Request
11.2.22 Distribution Equipment
This feature enables you to supply goods to, for example, production supply areas (PSAs). The goods are
picked into handling unit (HU) compartments, then loaded onto the distribution equipment. After picking and
loading, the warehouse worker moves the goods on the distribution equipment to their respective PSAs, where
they are unloaded. You can also change loading and unloading details after you've loaded the distribution
equipment, if required.
The warehouse worker uses a radio frequency (RF) presentation device throughout this process.
Technical Details
Type New

Application Component SCM-EWM-RF
SCM-EWM-WOP
Additional Details
The distribution equipment process comprises the following steps:
● Picking: Using an RF presentation device, the warehouse worker either picks goods into mobile HU
compartments to load onto the distribution equipment or picks full pallets to load directly onto the
distribution equipment. They can optionally record positions within the HU compartment for the picked
items.
● Staging for loading: When picking is finished, the system determines the destination of the goods based
on process-oriented storage control, and the warehouse worker moves them there, ready for loading.
● Loading: The warehouse worker loads onto the distribution equipment either HU compartments that have
been picked upfront or complete HUs. They can also specify the position of the HU compartment in the
distribution equipment, either manually or automatically.
● Unloading: The warehouse worker unloads full pallets, HU compartments, or sub-HUs from the
distribution equipment into the specified production supply area or destination bin.
● Changing loading and unloading details: For example, you may need to remove some goods that have
already been loaded onto distribution equipment (reverse loading) or to load more HUs onto already
loaded distribution equipment (extending it).
If you need to create an incident regarding the RF logic of this feature, use component SCM-EWM-RF and its
subcomponents.
If you need to create an incident regarding the processing of warehouse orders and warehouse tasks, use
component SCM-EWM-WOP and its subcomponents.
● New category of warehouse order creation rule: I – Distribution Equipment Picking.

You find this in Customizing for Extended Warehouse Management under Cross-Process Settings
Warehouse Order Define Creation Rule for Warehouse Orders .
● New internal process steps:
○ DDST distribution equipment: staging
○ DDLD distribution equipment: loading
○ DDUL distribution equipment: unloading
You find these process steps in Customizing for Extended Warehouse Management under Cross-Process
Settings Warehouse Task Define Process-Oriented Stage Control .
● Assign external process steps for DDST (staging for loading) and/or DDLD (loading) to the respective
storage type and specify automatic creation of warehouse tasks. Set up the storage type of the PSAs to
finish process-oriented storage control.

You do this in Customizing for Extended Warehouse Management under Master Data Define Storage
Type .
Related Information
Distribution Equipment Process
11.2.23 Display Change Documents for Inspection Rules
With the feature you can display change documents for inspection rules in order to display the change history
of the inspection rule master data. You can display what has been changed, when it was changed, and who
made the change.
Technical Details
Type New
11.2.24 Synchronous Goods Movements from Repetitive

Manufacturing into EWM embedded in SAP S/4HANA
With this feature, you can have a seamless integration between repetitive manufacturing and warehouse
management.
Technical Details
Type New

Application Component SCM-EWM-IF-ERP-GM
Additional Details
Synchronous goods movement allows you do to the following
● Keep manual posting effort to a minimum

● Improve visibility and control in your warehouse operations
● Perform synchronous updates of stock in inventory management and in warehouse management
● Post goods receipt from repetitive manufacturing into a bin-managed storage location without delivery and
warehouse request documents
● Post goods issue for consumption by backflush from a bin-managed production supply area without
delivery and warehouse request documents
When the finished product is confirmed by repetitive manufacturing, the system automatically posts goods
issue of the consumed materials from stock with the goods receipt of the finished product into the warehouse.
The system posts the goods receipt and goods issue in one material document.
You can specify whether you want to create warehouse tasks for putaway automatically or manually for
different products:
● For products where you want to move the products from the goods receipt bin to the final storage bin, you
can use automatic warehouse task creation to create the warehouse tasks during goods receipt posting.
● For products where you want to pack the product into a handling unit before putaway, you can create the
warehouse tasks manually after you have packed the handling unit.
The following Customizing activities must be maintained or updated for synchronous goods movement:
● Activate synchronous goods receipt in Customizing for Production under Repetitive Manufacturing
Control Define Repetitive Manufacturing Profiles
● Activate automatic warehouse task creation in Customizing for Extended Warehouse Management under
Cross-Process Settings Warehouse Task Determine Warehouse Process Type and Master Data
Define Storage Type .
● Create entries without document type and item type but with the process indicator Receipt of Unpacked
Items (Synchronous Goods Movement) in Customizing for Extended Warehouse Management under
Cross-Process Settings Warehouse Task Determine Warehouse Process Type .

11.2.25 Integration of Quality Inspection Engine to Multiple
Enterprise Management Systems
With this feature you can connect decentralized EWM based on SAP S/4HANA to multiple enterprise
management systems (for example, SAP ERP or SAP S/4HANA) as external quality management (QM)
systems for the quality inspection engine (QIE). The system dynamically determines the correct external QM
system in the background by using the warehouse and entitled to dispose information.
Technical Details
Type New
11.2.26 Automatic Master Data Synchronization to Control

QM Processes
With this feature, you can automatically generate inspection rules in decentralized Extended Warehouse
Management (EWM) based on SAP S/4HANA from the connected enterprise management system (for
example, SAP ERP or SAP S/4HANA).
Technical Details
Type New

Additional Details
When you connect decentralized EWM to an enterprise management system, you can enter the inspection
setup data in the Quality Management view of the material master in the enterprise management system and
establish an ALE distribution of the inspection setup data to the decentralized EWM system. The system then
creates, updates, or deletes the inspection rules in the decentralized EWM system based on the inspection
setup data in the enterprise management system.
11.2.27 Decentralized EWM - Routes and Batches
With this feature, you can use the following features of decentralized Extended Warehouse Management
(EWM) based on SAP S/4HANA:
● SCM routes and the routing guide

● Batch on plant level and the SAP S/4HANA global batch concept
Technical Details
Type New
Application Component SCM-EWM
Additional Details
SCM routing allows you to perform staging area and door determination.
The Customizing activity Map Routes and Route Schedule from ERP System to EWM is now available in
Customizing for Extended Warehouse Management under Interfaces ERP Integration ERP Integration for
Decentralized EWM Map Routes and Route Schedule from ERP System to EWM .

The following Customizing activities are available for route determination in Customizing for Extended
Warehouse Management under Goods Issue Process Goods Issue Process for Decentralized EWM Route
Determination :
● Activate or Deactivate Route Determination

● Define Scheduling Within Route Determination
The following Customizing activities are available for route determination in Customizing for SCM Basis under
Master Data Master Data for Decentralized EWM :
● Calendar Maintain Planning Calendar (Time Stream)

● Calendar Maintain Factory Calendar
● Transportation Lane Maintain Transportation Mode
● Transportation Lane Maintain Means of Transport
● Transportation Lane Set Usage of GIS Tool
● Transportation Lane Activate Change Documents
● Transportation Lane Transportation Service Provider Profile Define Freight Code Sets, Freight Codes,
and Determination
● Transportation Lane Transportation Service Provider Profile Define Product Freight Groups
● Transportation Lane Distance and Duration Determination Configure Process Controller for Distance
and Duration Determination
● Transportation Lane Distance and Duration Determination Define GIS Zone
● Transportation Lane Distance and Duration Determination Assign Country to GIS Zone
● Transportation Lane Distance and Duration Determination Define Strategy for Distance and Duration
Determination
● Transportation Lane Distance and Duration Determination Maintain Global Settings for Buffering of
DDD
● Transportation Lane Distance and Duration Determination Set Usage of GIS Tool
The following Customizing activities are available for route determination in Customizing for SCM Basis under
Routing Guide for Decentralized EWM:
● General Settings for Route Determination

● Define Request Types for Routing Guide
● Define Mode of Transport at the Border
The following Business Add-Ins (BAdIs) are available for route determination in Customizing for Extended
Warehouse Management under Business Add-Ins (BAdIs) for Extended Warehouse Management Goods
Issue Process Goods Issue Process for Decentralized EWM Route Determination :
● BAdI: Filter Method in Route Determination

● BAdI: Cost Determination in Route Determination
● BAdI: Dangerous Goods Enhancements for Route Determination (EHS)
● BAdI: Input Help for Means of Transport in Routing Guide
● BAdI: Enhancements for Scheduling in Routing Guide
● Enhancement Spot for Route Master Data BAdI: Enhancements to Route Master Data

The following BAdIs are available for route determination in Customizing for Extended Warehouse
Management under Business Add-Ins (BAdIs) for Extended Warehouse Management Master Data Master
Data for Decentralized EWM :
● BAdI: Enhance Route Search Help With External Data

● BAdI: Enhancement of Departure Calendar/Route Schedule Value Help
The following BAdIs are available for route determination in Customizing for Extended Warehouse
Management under Business Add-Ins (BAdIs) for Extended Warehouse Management Cross-Process
Settings Cross-Process Settings for Decentralized EWM Delivery - Warehouse Request :
● BAdI: Route Determination and Route Check

● BAdI: Route Release
11.2.28 Decentralized EWM - Integration Features
With this feature. you can use integration features for decentralized Extended Warehouse Management (EWM)
based on SAP S/4HANA to connect to different aspects of the connected enterprise management system (for
example, SAP ERP or SAP S/4HANA) or to SAP Manufacturing Integration.
Technical Details
Type New
Application Component SCM-EWM
Additional Details
You can integrate decentralized EWM to the enterprise management system in the following ways:
● Integrate decentralized EWM with a single SAP ERP system with active Customer Vendor Integration (CVI)
● Replicate packing instructions in the enterprise management system to the SCM packing specification in
EWM
● Integrate decentralized EWM with SAP ERP 6.0 EHP3 or higher

11.3 Delivery and Transportation
11.3.1 Delivery Management
11.3.1.1 CDS Views for Delivery Management
With this release, new CDS (Core Data Services) views for Delivery Management have been released. You can
use them to construct custom views or apps that need to retrieve data about delivery documents.
Technical Details
Type New
2TX (Direct Procurement with Inbound Delivery)
BKP (Accelerated Customer Returns)
Application Component LE-SHP
Additional Details
The following CDS views for Shipping have now been released:
Generic CDS Views for Delivery Documents
● Packaging Material Type

● Packaging Material Type Text
● Warehouse Number
● Warehouse Number Text
CDS Views for Inbound Delivery Documents
● Putaway Status
● Putaway Status Text
CDS Views for Outbound Delivery Documents
● Picking Confirmation Status

● Picking Confirmation Status Text

● Picking Control
● Picking Control Text
● Delivery Items Shipped as Planned - Cube
● Delivery Items Shipped as Planned - Query
CDS Views for Customer Returns Delivery Documents
● Returns Reason
● Returns Reason Text
● Returns Refund Codes
● Multi-step Returns - Returns Refund Text
CDS Views for Delivery Analytics
● Analytics - Delivery Cube
Related Information
CDS Views for Delivery Management
11.3.1.2 Enhancements for CDS Views for Delivery

Management
With this release, enhanced CDS (Core Data Services) views for Delivery Management have been released. You
can use them to construct custom views or apps that need to retrieve data about delivery documents.
Technical Details
Type Changed
2TX (Direct Procurement with Inbound Delivery)
BKP (Accelerated Customer Returns)

Additional Details
The following CDS views for Delivery Management have now been enhanced:
● Customer Returns Delivery Document Item

● Inbound Delivery Document Item
● Outbound Delivery Document Item
● Delivery Document
● Delivery Document Item
Related Information
11.3.1.3 Inbound Deliveries - Read, Create, Update, and Delete
You can now use this service to read inbound delivery header and item texts.
Technical Details
Type Changed
Additional Details
For customer messages, use the more accurate application component LE-SHP-API.
Related Information
Inbound Deliveries - Read, Create, Update, and Delete

11.3.1.4 Outbound Deliveries - Read, Create, Update, and
Delete
You can now use this service to read outbound delivery header and item texts.
Technical Details
Type Changed
Additional Details
For customer messages, use the more accurate application component LE-SHP-API.
Related Information
Outbound Deliveries - Read, Create, Update, and Delete
11.3.1.5 Analyze Delivery Performance - Shipped as Planned
With this app, you can monitor the current delivery performance within your organization to keep track of
customer satisfaction and retention. If delivery performance is below what you expect it to be (meaning if
planned dates for issuing goods to internal and external customers are not observed properly), you can drill
down to individual outbound deliveries that were processed with delay and navigate to the related sales orders
or stock transport orders for more detailed information. You can then use this information to help to resolve the
issues that caused these delays in the first place.

Technical Details
Type New
Scope Item BD9 (Sell from Stock), BME (Stock Transfer with Delivery)
Additional Details
For customer messages, use the more accurate application component LE-SHP-FIO-ANA.
Related Information
Analyze Delivery Performance - Shipped as Planned
11.3.1.6 Value Help Authorizations in Delivery Management
Technical Details
Type Changed

Additional Details
For customer messages, use the more accurate application component LE-SHP-IAM.
Please see the following SAP Notes for the value help authorizations of the respective areas:
● For LO-ARM, see SAP Note 2796071 .

● For LO-SPM, see SAP Note 2796047 .
● For LE-SHP, see SAP Note 2795979 .
Related Information
11.3.1.7 Changes to Shipping Specialist Role
The launchpad for the SAP_BR_SHIPPING_SPECIALIST role has been restructured to provide a more
compact and business-related overview: The apps are now grouped by business use cases, major apps are
displayed as tiles, other apps as links, and apps less important in daily business are not displayed at all in
standard delivery. The technical configurations, for example, the business catalog assignments of the apps,
and the app content have not been changed. In general, these changes have no impact on your user roles
created on basis of your own Z-catalogs or Z-groups.
Technical Details
Type Changed

Additional Details
For customer messages, use the more accurate application component LE-SHP-FIO.
11.3.1.8 Product Marketability
With this feature, you can check the marketability of products that are marked as Product Compliance Relevant,
during delivery processing. This helps you determine whether a product can be sold in a particular country or
region. This feature enables you to check all compliance-relevant products to determine whether outbound
delivery processing is allowed from a product marketability point of view, block post goods issue if the
marketability status does not allow for further processing, and use the new Product Marketability Status
functionality to filter for items that have marketability issues.
Technical Details
Type New
Scope Item 31J (Chemical Compliance in Sales)
Application Component LE-SHP-DL
Related Information
Product Marketability in Delivery Processing
11.3.1.9 Dangerous Goods Checks in Outbound Delivery

Processing
With this feature, you can use dangerous goods checks for transport checks. In addition, dangerous goods data
can be printed on delivery documents.

Technical Details
Type New
Related Information
Dangerous Goods in Delivery Processing
11.3.1.10 Safety Data Sheet Checks
With this feature, you can check the safety data sheet status of products that are marked as Product
Compliance Relevant, during delivery processing. This feature enables you to check all compliance-relevant
products to determine whether outbound delivery processing is allowed from a safety data sheet point of view.
Technical Details
Type New
Scope Item 3VQ (Safety Data Sheets in Sales)
Application Component LE-SHP-GF
Related Information
Safety Data Sheet Management in Delivery Processing

11.3.1.11 Read Access Logging for CDS Views
Read Access Logging (RAL) to monitor and log read access to sensitive data is now enabled for CDS views in
Delivery Management.
Technical Details
Type New
BD9 (Sell from Stock)
BDD (Customer Returns)
Additional Details
RAL is available for the following CDS views:
● I_DELIVERYCATEGORY
● I_DELIVERYRELATEDBILLGSTATUS
● I_ITEMGDSMVTINCOMPLETIONSTS
● I_ITEMPACKINGINCOMPLETIONSTS
● I_ITEMPICKINGINCOMPLETIONSTS
● I_LOADINGGROUP
● I_PACKINGSTATUS
● I_PICKINGCONFIRMATIONSTATUS
● I_PICKINGCONTROL
● I_PICKINGSTATUS
● I_PROOFOFDELIVERYSTATUS
● I_REQDDELIVDATECALWEEK
● I_RETSMGMTCOMPNPROCGSTATUS
● I_RETSMGMTPROCGSTATUS
● I_RETURNSDOCUMENTTYPE
● I_RETURNSREFUNDPROCGMODE
● I_RETURNSREFUNDPROCGMODEACTIVE
● I_RETURNSREFUNDTYPE

● I_SLSORDERTOTRANSPMGMT
● I_STOCKCATEGORY
● I_WAREHOUSEACTIVITYSTATUS
● I_WAREHOUSEGATE
● I_WAREHOUSESTAGINGAREA
● I_ADVNCDRETURNSMGMTPROCESS
● I_DELIVERYDOCUMENTITEMAMOUNT
● I_DELIVERYDOCUMENTITEMCUBE
Related Information
11.3.1.12 New Navigation Option in the "Create Outbound

Deliveries - From Sales Orders" App
With this feature, you can now easily navigate to the Schedule Delivery Creation app from within the Create
Outbound Deliveries - From Sales Orders app. This saves you time if you realize you need to use the Schedule
Delivery Creation app to schedule the mass processing of sales orders while you are in the Create Outbound
Deliveries - From Sales Orders app.
Technical Details
Type New
Additional Details
For customer messages, use the more accurate application component LE-SHP-FIO.

Related Information
Create Outbound Deliveries - From Sales Orders
11.3.2 Transportation Management
11.3.2.1 Authorization to Edit Released Freight Agreements
With this feature, you can restrict the editing of released freight agreements, local calculation sheets, and local
rate tables only to super users if you set up authorizations using authorization object T_AGR_FRS. This
restriction helps to avoid inconsistencies for freight orders using the released freight agreements. Note that the
editing of reference calculation sheets and rate tables is allowed irrespective of the authorization object.
Technical Details
Type Changed
Application Component TM-FRA
If you upgraded from a lower release of SAP S/4HANA to SAP S/4HANA 1909 or higher, you're using
authorization object T_AGR_FR instead of T_AGR_FRS. Then, as a default, all users with edit authorization can
edit released freight agreements. To avoid any disruption for existing users, you can run XPRA SAP S/4HANA
1909: Editing of Released Freight Agreements (/SCMTMS/XPRA_1909_FAG_AUTHOBJ) to allow all users with
edit authorization for freight agreements to also edit released freight agreements.
You can allow all users to edit released freight agreements in Customizing for Transportation Management
under Basic Functions General Settings Define General Settings for SAP TM .

Related Information
Freight Agreement Maintenance
11.3.2.2 Package Unit
The transportation unit category Package Unit and the corresponding planning functions have been enhanced.
After you have consolidated freight units in package units to transport them together across several
transportation stages and freight documents, you can now deconsolidate the packages again on the last stage
of your route.
Technical Details
Type Changed
Application Component TM-FRM, TM-PLN
Additional Details
Order Management
The following features have been added to the package unit:
● You can create the route of a package unit in a way that packages are transported together across several
transportation stages and are deconsolidated on the last stage of a tour called "delivery tour". The route
then contains a special (virtual) stage which represents a group of distributions stops. These stops are
displayed as sub-stops of the virtual stage. The sequence, however, is not fixed.
● If you create package units from a freight order, the system can assign freight unit items to several package
units. This means that items and sub-quantities of the items in a freight unit can be distributed over several
package units.
If the multiple package units to which a freight unit is assigned are transported with the same freight
documents, the freight unit does not have to be split. Otherwise the freight unit is split by the system and
distributed accordingly to the freight documents.
You have the following additional options to create package units:
● Creation from a Forwarding Order or its Successor Documents

You can create package units directly from the user interface of a forwarding order or its successor
documents such as freight units or transportation units. To do so, specify the type of transportation unit
that will be created for a stage in Customizing (see below).
● Creation from a Freight Order
After you create local packages in your freight order and set the load plan status (packaging) to "finalized",
you can let the system create package units for these packages.
Furthermore, if certain prerequisites are met, you can cancel the package units and merge the packages
back into the item hierarchy of the freight order.
In the Origin of Package Unit field on the General Data tab page of a package unit document you can see where
and how the package unit has been created.
Transportation Cockpit
You have the following additional options:
● You can display and plan package units with distribution stops on the geographical map and in manual
planning. For example, scheduling-relevant information like the unloading start and end date/times is
displayed for the distribution stops in a detail area. On the geographical map, the distribution stops are
displayed in a star-like shape.
● VSR optimization also considers package units with distribution stops. Scheduling only considers them if
the package units are assigned to another business document, for example a freight order.
● If a freight unit is assigned to several package units, you can see this in the Assignment to Package Units
area. This information is also available in the freight unit user interface in the stage details.
● You can create package units from a freight order in the freight order list, in the freight order hierarchy, on
the geographical map, and in the load plan hierarchy. You can also cancel package units. For more
information, see Creation from a Freight Order above.
● In the package unit stage hierarchy, for example, you can now group package unit stages according to the
execution document (for example a freight order) of a stage or the subsequent stage. To use this new
grouping option, you need to define a hierarchical level for stages with the standard grouping attribute
Execution Document of Stage or Execution Document of Subsequent Stage in Customizing (see below).
This new grouping option is only available for consumer Transportation Cockpit - Requirement Document
Stages. Note that you need to implement SAP Note 2786778 to use the grouping of stages according to
the execution document of a subsequent stage.
● You can define a default package unit type in the package unit type and also in the freight order type. For
more information, see Customizing for Transportation Management under Planning Transportation
Unit Define Transportation Unit Types .
● To model a delivery tour, you can specify in Customizing of the transportation unit type that the package
unit contains a special stage with distribution stops. In field Seq. Typ of Stages (Sequence Type of Stages)
choose Linear with Distribution. This setting is required if you want to create package units from freight
orders.
● In Customizing of the transportation unit type you can also specify that freight units can be assigned to
several package units. In field Assgnmt of Pred.Docs (Assignment of Predecessor Documents) choose
Partially or Completely. This setting is required if you want to create package units from freight orders. It
can only be used for this function.

● To create package units directly from the user interface of a forwarding order or its successor documents,
you can specify the type of transportation unit that is to be created for a stage. For more information, see
Customizing for Transportation Management under Forwarding Order Management Forwarding Order
Define Default Capacity Document Types for Stages . Please note that the title of this Customizing
activity has been adjusted to this enhancement. This feature is also available in SAP S/4HANA 1809.
Moreover, new specific Customizing activities for defining default capacity document types for stages are
available for delivery-based transportation requirements and order-based transportation requirements. For
more information, see Customizing for Transportation Management under Integration Logistics
Integration External TM System Integration .
● In your freight order type (Package Unit Creation Rule field), you can indicate whether a package unit will be
created per package item (default setting) or for all package items of a freight order. As a prerequisite, you
must have defined a default package unit type in the freight order type. For more information, see
Customizing for Transportation Management under Freight Order Management Freight Order Define
Freight Order Types .
● To group package unit stages according to the execution document, you need to define a hierarchical level
for stages. For more information, see Customizing for Transportation Management under Planning
General Settings Define Hierarchical Views for Business Documents .
Related Information
Package Unit
Creating a Package Unit
Transportation Planning with Mixed Packages and Deconsolidation
Use of Package Units in Planning
Planning with Distribution Stops
11.3.2.3 Utilization and Outer Volume
In Transportation Management (TM) you can display the utilization of capacities that are in a capacity
document. By doing so, you can get a rough overview about the capacity utilization for the whole freight order,
for a stage, or for a specific item. This overview is shown on a dedicated tab page of a capacity document or the
transportation cockpit. The tab page has been enhanced with SAP S/4HANA 1909.
Technical Details
Type New

Application Component TM-FRM, TM-PLN
Additional Details
In some cases, the outer volume needs to be considered when the system calculates the utilization. The outer
volume indicates the space that a package, for example a pallet or a carton, consumes on a capacity, for
example a truck. In some cases, the outer volume is calculated based on the products in the package. In other
cases, it is independent from the products. New fields are available in SAP S/4HANA 1909 to display the outer
volume.
Utilization and Utilization Overview Tab Pages

On the Utilization tab page of a capacity document or the Utilization Overview tab page of the transportation
cockpit you can display the utilization of the capacities that exist in a capacity document, such as vehicle
resources, containers, and packages. The utilization is displayed in a hierarchical view for the transportation
stages. SAP provides two default views: Utilization and Utilization with Complete Context (the latter shows not
only the physical objects but also sub-documents, such as container units and package units). In addition to
the hierarchical view, you can also display a graphical view of the utilization.
The system displays, for example, the following capacity information for the individual stages and objects: Total
capacity, consumed capacity, and remaining capacity (for mass and volume).
The system calculates the utilization using the capacity information and load (for example, the load of the
package units and freight units in a container).
General Data Tab Page of a Freight Order

On the General Data tab page of a freight order document you can display the maximum utilization as well as
the total, consumed, and remaining capacity for the truck and trailer separately. You can also display the
combined utilization of the truck and trailer.
Utilization Information on Additional Tab Pages

The maximum utilization is also displayed on the Overview tab page of a freight order and the General Data tab
pages of transportation unit documents. Capacity information such as total and consumed capacity is
displayed in all lists and hierarchies for capacity documents as well as in the load plan hierarchy.
When calculating the maximum utilization, the system considers the tare weight of packages and containers as
well as the outer volume of packages (see below).
Outer Volume
The outer volume is determined and considered for package items only. It is determined automatically in the
following cases:
● during package building

● when you manually create a package unit

Vehicle scheduling and routing (VSR) optimization and scheduling consider the outer volume.
The outer volume is displayed in the package unit on the Items tab page. Moreover, it is displayed in a number
of lists and hierarchies in the transportation cockpit, for example, in the package unit list and in the freight unit
stage list.
Related Information
Utilization
Outer Volume
11.3.2.4 Normalized Quantities and Capacities
With this feature you can use normalized load consumption quantities and normalized capacities in a road
scenario to optimize the usage of loading space. For example, you can convert europallets and pallet cages into
loading meters and specify the capacity of a truck as a normalized capacity.
You have the following options:
● You can let the system determine the normalized load consumption quantity (normalized quantity) during
freight unit building using the package building function. The result is also used later in the planning
process by manual and automatic planning (VSR optimization).
● You can let the system determine the normalized quantity during capacity-document-based package
building.
● You can display load consumption quantities and normalized quantities in the item details of a freight unit,
transportation unit (that is, trailer unit, container unit, or package unit), or freight order. Further, you can
view the aggregated values of these quantities in the header data of these documents.
● You can convert the unit of measure (UoM) of a normalized quantity to the UoM of an additional normalized
quantity, such as loading meters.
● You can view the capacity of a resource with regard to the normalized quantity in the header data of a
freight order. This capacity is also considered by the system when calculating the maximum utilization of
the resource.
Technical Details
Type New
Application Component TM-FRM, TM-PLN, SCM-BAS-PAK-PB

Additional Details
The normalized quantity is used to allow the comparison of different packaging materials that are used within
the same scenario. The different UoMs of the packaging materials are converted to a standard UoM to facilitate
comparison.
During package building, the system determines the normalized quantities for products based either on the
entries in the package type assignment transaction (Normalized Quantity Definition tab page) or the conversion
factor between the base UoM and the UoM for the normalized quantity that you have defined for each product
in the material master data. If you have also defined such a conversion factor for your packaging materials, the
system also determines normalized quantities for package items.
Normalized Quantity Definition

The Change Package Type Assignment app has been enhanced with a new tab page Normalized Quantity
Definition. It allows you to enter normalized quantities for your products and UoMs or to upload them with an
Excel upload function. In addition, the new Determine Normalized Load Consumption Quantity app allows you
to have the system determine the normalized quantity per product and UoM.
Display of Normalized Quantities

Normalized quantities are displayed in the user interfaces for freight orders, transportation units, and freight
units as well as in the corresponding lists and hierarchies of the transportation cockpit and in the Gantt chart
(see "Effects on Customizing"). They are also displayed on the geographical map as well as for trucks, trailers,
and containers in the transportation cockpit, if you have indicated the default UoM for the normalized quantity
in the Create Planning Profile app.
Packaging Material Overview

You can view the aggregated values of the unpackaged and packaged load consumption quantities on a new
tab page of a freight unit, transportation unit, or freight order (Packaging Material Overview). Further, the
remaining capacity is displayed on this tab page for a freight order. Depending on your Customizing settings,
the system also considers the remaining capacity of the individual packages when calculating the remaining
capacity of the freight order.
A condensed view of this information is displayed in your personal worklist (POWL) as well as in the lists and
hierarchies of the transportation cockpit and in the Gantt chart (see "Effects on Customizing").
Normalized Capacity
The capacity of a resource with regard to the normalized quantity is displayed in the header data of a freight
order for a truck and trailer separately as well as for the vehicle-resource combination. When calculating the
maximum utilization of the resource, the system considers the most critical transportation stage and UoM
(mass, volume, or normalized quantity).

● To activate the determination of the normalized quantity and the display of the corresponding values in the
freight unit, transportation unit, and freight order, you must enter a default UoM for the normalized
quantity in the package building profile as well as in the freight unit type, transportation unit type, and
freight order type. Further, you can enter a default UoM for an additional normalized quantity (such as
loading meters) in the Customizing of the document type. For more information, see Customizing for
Transportation Management under the following Customizing activities:
○ Planning Package Building Define Package Building Profile
○ Planning Freight Unit Define Freight Unit Types
○ Freight Order Management Transportation Unit Define Transportation Unit Types
○ Freight Order Management Freight Order Define Freight Order Types
● If you want to display additional fields related to the normalized quantity in the transportation cockpit, you
need to implement SAP Note 2782304 .
● If you work with schedules, you need to indicate the default UoM for the normalized quantity in your
schedule type. To do so, in Customizing for Transportation Management choose Master Data
Transportation Network Schedule Define Schedule Types .
● In addition, you can enter in the Customizing for Transportation Management under Freight Order
Management Define Conversion Between Normalized Qty and Additional Normalized Qty UoMs , a
conversion factor between the UoM of normalized quantities and the UoM of additional normalized
quantities.
● To activate the display of the Packaging Material Overview tab page and the calculation of the
corresponding data, you can use the Aggregate Load Consumption Quantities option in the Customizing of
the document type.
To activate the condensed view in the lists and hierarchies of the transportation cockpit, you have to
implement SAP note 2789943 .
To activate the condensed view in the Gantt chart, you need to assign the corresponding fields to the
specific lists. For more information, see Customizing for Transportation Management under Basic
Functions Gantt Chart Define Field Lists and Label Schemes for Gantt Chart .
● If you want the system to consider the remaining capacity of the individual packages when calculating the
remaining capacity of the freight order, you can use the Consider Package Utilization for NLQ Consumption
option in the NLQ Utilization Rule field in the Customizing of the freight order type.
Related Information
Use of Normalized Quantities and Capacities

Determination of Normalized Load Consumption Quantities

11.3.2.5 Enhancements for Planning
With this feature you can define capacity adjustment factors in the planning profile. Moreover, you can use new
fields in the Customizing activity for defining hierarchical views. And finally, you can display capacities while
assigning schedules.
Technical Details
Type Changed
Application Component TM-PLN
Additional Details
The following new features are available:
● In the constraints and costs settings of the planning profile, you can define capacity adjustment factors for
mass, volume, and normalized quantity. These factors indicate by how much the vehicle capacity that is
effectively available for planning can be decreased or increased. These factors are taken into account
during vehicle scheduling and routing (VSR) optimization and creation of transportation proposals. They
are not taken into account by the following:
○ Manual planning
○ Schedules
○ Load consolidation
○ Decreasing capacities
○ Compartments
○ Vehicle-resource combinations
Capacity adjustment factors are also displayed in the explanation tool (under vehicle capacity).
● When defining hierarchical views, you can now indicate that only directly assigned documents are to be
displayed in a hierarchy. For this, a new field Related Documents has been introduced in Customizing (see
below).
This feature is also available in SAP S/4HANA 1709 as of Support Package 5 and SAP S/4HANA 1809 as of
Support Package 3.
● When defining hierarchical views, you can now control the editability of fields in hierarchies. For this, a new
field Editability has been introduced in Customizing (see below).
This feature is also available in SAP S/4HANA 1709 as of Support Package 5 and SAP S/4HANA 1809 as of
Support Package 3.

● When you assign a schedule in the transportation cockpit, for example, capacities (weight, volume, and
normalized load consumption quantities) are now displayed in the Select Schedule Departure dialog box.
The Planning Costs Settings tab page of the planning profile has been renamed to Constraints and Costs
Settings.
In the constraints and costs settings of the planning profile, new fields for defining capacity adjustment factors
for mass, volume, and normalized quantity are available.
To indicate that only directly assigned documents are to be displayed or to control the editability of the fields in
a hierarchy, in Customizing for Transportation Management choose Planning General Settings Define
Hierarchical Views for Business Documents .
Related Information
Normalized Quantities and Capacities [page 684]
11.3.2.6 Enhancements for Package Building and Load

Planning
Package building and load planning have been enhanced.
Technical Details
Type Changed
Application Component TM-PLN-LP, TM-PLN-PB, SCM-BAS-PAK-PB, SCM-

BAS-PAK-PB-OPT, TM-FRM

Additional Details
The following new functions are available:
● Physical positions of each item in the package can be determined during package building. If necessary,
you can adapt these positions by changing their coordinates in the load plan hierarchy.
● You can inform the warehouse about physical positions, orientations, and the loading sequence of product
items in packages by sending loading or unloading appointment requests (LDAP requests) (see Effects on
Data Transfer).
● Manual load planning
○ In the 3D load plan, you can now adjust a load plan manually. You can do this by moving objects within
a truck using the reposition buttons or the keyboard shortcuts. The system moves the objects in
increments that you can define in Customizing. Statuses and axle weights are automatically adjusted.
To enable manual load planning, a new field has been added in Customizing (see below).
○ You can define keyboard layouts for manual load planning. For each keyboard layout, you can assign
specific keys to key codes. Defining keyboard layouts is recommended if you want to use your own
keyboard shortcuts in manual load planning. You define keyboard layouts and keyboard shortcuts in
Customizing (see below).
● In your freight order type and package unit type, you can specify if the system updates the load plan when
items are changed after you perform package building based on a freight order or package unit of this type.
● The load plan status has been enhanced. You can now set a status value, which indicates that you have
finalized packaging in a road freight order. This status value is set automatically when package building is
performed during freight unit building.
When packaging is finalized, the corresponding items are automatically fixed. This fixing indicator is visible
in the road freight order and in the load plan hierarchy in the transportation cockpit.
In your road freight order, you can also fix the assignment of requirements manually. That means, the
assigned freight units can't be removed and no new freight units can be assigned.
You can also set a status value that indicates that you have finalized load planning in a road freight order.
In the transportation cockpit, you can also set these status values for several freight orders.
● To improve performance, you can now perform package building for several capacity documents in parallel.
To do so, you need to assign a parallel processing profile to your planning profile. Moreover, you can run
package building in the background.
● You can see who has created or changed a profile and when. This administrative information is available in
the following profiles and transactions:
○ Package building profile
○ Package type assignment transaction
○ Product relationship profile
○ Profile for package building optimizer
○ Rule profile for package building optimizer
● You can simulate the creation of packages and analyze the results. You can also display and analyze the
currently entered master data for products and display products or reference products in the product
hierarchy.
To start the product-based simulation of package building from the SAP Easy Access menu, choose
Transportation Management Administration Package Building Test Report for Package Building .

To start the document-based simulation of package building from the SAP Easy Access menu, choose
Transportation Management Administration Package Building Test Report for Package Building
(Document-Based) .
The loading/unloading appointment request message (LDAP) has been enhanced with load plan details, that is,
physical positions, orientations, and the loading sequence of product items in packages.
● For more information about triggering an update of the load plan, see Customizing for Transportation
Management under Freight Order Management Freight Order Define Freight Order Types and
Freight Order Management Transportation Unit Define Transportation Unit Types .
● For more information about enabling manual load planning in the 3D load plan, see Customizing for
Transportation Management under Basic Functions Load Planning Define Layouts for 3D Load
Plan . In this Customizing activity, you can also define movement increments for manual load planning.
● For more information about defining keyboard layouts, see Customizing for Transportation Management
under Basic Functions Define Keyboard Layouts .
● For more information about defining keyboard shortcuts, see Customizing for Transportation Management
under Basic Functions Define Layouts for 3D Load Plan .
Related Information
Package Building in TM
Package Building
Test Report for Package Building in TM
11.3.2.7 Creation of Package Units Based on Package

Building
You can create package units that contain products for one specific customer only. The system first builds
packages for your freight units. Then the system creates package units for these packages. Note however, that
the system only takes into account freight units for which you have selected Exclusive Package for Customer.

Technical Details
Type New
Application Component TM-PLN
Additional Details
To use this function, select Create PUs Based on PB (Create Package Units Based on Package Building) in the
transportation cockpit (freight unit stage list and freight unit stage hierarchy). Alternatively, you can use this
function in the background, that means, a background report is available.
This function can also be used in parallel processing mode.
As a prerequisite, you need to indicate a default package unit type and a package building profile in your
planning profile. Optionally, you can indicate a package unit creation rule.
Related Information
Use of Package Units in Planning

Creation of Package Units Based On Package Building for Freight Units
11.3.2.8 Delivery Creation and Split for Package Units with

Multiple Assignments
This feature enables you to prevent early delivery splits or updates, if you have allowed the multi-assignment of
freight units. Delivery splits are prevented until load planning is finalized. This helps to avoid issues associated
with early splitting of deliveries such as unnecessary delivery splits, unnecessary freight unit splits, or
unnecessary single deliveries.

Technical Details
Type New
Application Component TM-ERP
11.3.2.9 Integration of MM Scheduling Agreements with TM
This feature enables you to integrate scheduling agreements from Materials Management (MM) with
Transportation Management (TM).
Technical Details
Type New
Application Component TM-ERP
11.3.2.10 Billing the Freight Cost in TM to a Customer in SD
This feature enables you, when billing your customers, to include the freight costs, along with the price for the
products sold. When you sell product to your customer you may undertake the responsibility of delivering
these products to your customer. For this you incur cost for transportation, for example, through a carrier. You
can pass on these costs to your customer.

Technical Details
Type New
Application Component SD-BIL, TM-FRM
Available As Of S/4HANA 1909
Additional Details
You use integration of sales orders and deliveries to facilitate transportation planning and execution in
Transportation Management (TM). The TM component creates or updates freight units directly for sales orders
or deliveries. You plan transportation for these freight units by creating freight orders that you then subcontract
to the carrier. The freight order determines the freight costs to be paid to the carrier. You configure TM to
distribute the freight costs in the freight order according to delivery items. You can then add the distributed
costs for each delivery item to the final amount in the billing document that you send to your customer.
This involves integration of the following processes:
● Sales orders and deliveries to TM

● Freight orders in TM
● Pricing in SD
● Billing in SD
You must distribute the freight cost in TM. You can then add the distributed costs to the final amount in the
billing document.
11.3.2.11 Enhancements for Scenario Builder
With this feature you can create scenario templates in the Scenario Builder from scratch. This means that a
scenario template can be based on data that doesn't exist in the Transportation Management system yet. In
addition, you can let the Scenario Builder create sample data for your scenario template that shows the data
format used in the Scenario Builder.
Technical Details
Type Changed

Application Component TM
Additional Details
If you don't want to use existing system data as a basis for your scenario template, but want to create the
scenario template from scratch, you can now create a scenario template including all Excel files. Optionally, the
Excel files can already contain sample data that shows the data format used in the Scenario Builder.
The column titles of the Excel file contain information about the number of characters that you are allowed to
enter for your system objects.
When creating a scenario template, you can now select the checkbox Sample Data in the New Scenario
Template dialog box. The system then adds sample data to your scenario template.
Related Information
Creating a Scenario Template
11.4 Advanced Order Promising/ATP
11.4.1 Configure Substitution Strategy
The Configure Substitution Stragey app has been enhanced with functionality for defining the best alternative
plant when multiple plants can fulfill a requirement and for evaluating alternatives according to the posting
status of each individual line item. New functionality has also been added for displaying alternative controls.

Technical Details
Type Changed
Scope Item 1JW (Advanced Available-to-Promise Processing)
Application Component CA-ATP-ABC (ATP: Alternative-Based Confirmation)
Additional Details
● If multiple plants can fulfill a requirement equally (for example, multiple plants can confirm the requested
quantity fully on the requested date), the system now calculates the most appropriate plant by location
automatically and independently. For more information, see Alternative Determination.
● When you create a new strategy in the Configure Substitution Strategy app, you can use the Consider
Alternative dropdown to decide if alternatives are always to be considered or if they are to be considered
for new requirements only or when existing requirements are changed. For more information, see Consider
Alternative.
● The Strategies table in the Configure Substitution Strategy app has been enhanced to allow you to display
and navigate to alternative controls that are using the same substitution strategy.
● ABC now supports all confirmation strategies used in backorder processing (BOP). For more information
about confirmation strategies, see Confirmation Strategies.
11.4.2 Data Configuration for Backorder Processing
The technology used to create segments and sort sequences for backorder processing (BOP) in the Configure
BOP Segment and Configure Custom BOP Sorting apps has changed.
Technical Details
Type Changed
Application Component CA-ATP-BOP (ATP: Backorder Processing)

The technology used previously for segment creation in advanced Available-to-Promise (aATP), SAP HANA
Rules Framework, has been replaced by Select Option Tool (SOT). As a result, the process and user interface
for creating segments have changed: you now maintain selection criteria on the basis of document type and
using a combination of selection conditions and, if required, optional exclusion conditions.
In addition, the Configure BOP Variant and Monitor BOP Run apps support and display segment and sequence
data created and maintained with SOT.
Data created previously with SAP HANA Rules Framework is converted automatically to the new technology
when it is edited. For more information, see SAP Note 2800374 and/or Filtering Requirements with Select
Option Tool (SOT).
Related Information
How to Configure a Segment

How to Configure a Custom Sorting
Configure BOP Segment
Configure Custom BOP Sorting
11.4.3 Configure Custom BOP Sorting
The Configure Custom BOP Sorting app has been enhanced to log when a custom sort sequence was used
when a backorder processing run was executed.
Technical Details
Type Changed

To display the logged data in the Configure Custom BOP Sorting app, go to Settings and activate the Used On
column for display in the Sequences table.
Related Information
Configure Custom BOP Sorting

How to Configure a Custom Sorting
11.4.4 Monitor BOP Run
The Monitor BOP Run app has been enhanced to indicate if plant substitution has taken place during backorder
processing.
Technical Details
Type Changed

Additional Details
If Alternative-Based Confirmation (ABC) is active when a backorder processing run takes place and results in
the requirement supplying plant for a requirement being substituted by an alternative plant, this is displayed
graphically. If the line item is selected, an additional dialog displays the original and substituted plant.
Related Information
Alternative-Based Confirmation (CA-ATP-ABC)

Configure Substitution Strategy
How to Activate Plant Substitution
Monitor BOP Run
How to Monitor the Results of a Run
11.4.5 Data Configuration for Release for Delivery
The technology used to create order fulfillment responsibilities for manual backorder processing in the Release
for Delivery app has changed.
Technical Details
Type Changed
Additional Details
The technology used previously for responsibility definition in advanced Available-to-Promise (aATP), SAP
HANA Rules-Based Framework (HRF), has been replaced by Selection Option Tool (SOT). As a result, the
process and user interface for defining order fulfillment responsibilities have changed: you now define
responsibilites on the basis of selection conditions and, if required, optional exclusion conditions.

Order fulfillment responsibilities created previously with HRF are converted automatically to the new
technology when they are edited. For more information, see SAP Note 2800374 and/or Filtering
Requirements with Select Option Tool (SOT).
Related Information
How to Configure Order Fulfillment Responsibilities

Configure Order Fulfillment Responsibilities
11.4.6 Configure Order Fulfillment Responsibilities
The Configure Order Fulfillment Responsibilities app has been enhanced with configuration functionality that
enables the order fulfillment manager to define if and how the order fulfillment specialist's worklist in the
Release for Delivery app is updated when changes are made to the requirements in underlying sales and/or
stock transport orders.
Technical Details
Type Changed
Related Information
Configure Order Fulfillment Responsibilities

Release for Delivery

11.4.7 Release for Delivery
The Release for Delivery app has been enhanced with functionality for dynamically updating the order
fulfillment specialist's worklist when changes are made to the requirements in underlying sales and/or stock
transport orders.
Technical Details
Type Changed
Related Information

Release for Delivery
11.4.8 Schedule Deletion of ATP Results Logs
The Schedule Deletion of ATP Results Log app is deprecated as of SAP S/4HANA 1909. The app will not be
replaced.
Technical Details
Type Deleted

Additional Details
To perform the activities previously executed in the Schedule Deletion of ATP Results Log app, use data
destruction object ATP_CHECK_LOG_DESTRUCTION Destruction of ATP Check Logs in aATP instead.
Related Information
How to Schedule the Deletion of ATP Results Logs

Schedule Deletion of ATP Results Log
Data Destruction for aATP
11.4.9 Manage Characteristic Catalogs
This new app enables you to adapt characteristic catalogs to suit your business needs for checking the
availability of materials for sales and/or stock transport orders against product allocation and for backorder
processing.
Technical Details
Type New
Application Component CA-ATP-PAL (ATP: Product Allocation)
The Manage Characteristic Catalogs app is available if the business role Internal Sales Rep (R0080) is assigned
to your user. Furthermore, note that before you can use the app, business catalog ATP - Characteristic Catalogs
(SAP_SCM_BC_ATPPAL_CTLG_PC) must be included in the business role(s) created from the template

SAP_BR_INTERNAL_SALES_REP. Failure to do so will result in the app not appearing on the SAP Fiori
launchpad.
Additional Details
● You can use the Value Existence Check Type configuration option to define if and how you would like to be
notified when a group value chosen for use in, for example, planning data, contains incorrect data (for
example, you have maintained a group value that does not exist in your planning data). You can select one
of the following configuration options:
Option System Behavior
Check with Error An error message is displayed the next time you save a
group value containing incorrect data and prevents the
saving of data in the corresponding app. You can navigate
to the offending data.
Check with Warning A warning message is displayed the next time you save a
group value containing incorrect data. You can navigate to
the offending data.
No Existence Check You are not notified of incorrectly maintained group val
ues.
● You can use the Folder column to identify the node under which a characteristic is positioned in the
characteristic tree structure, as displayed in the Select Characteristics dialog.
Related Information
Manage Characteristic Catalogs

Example: Defining Characteristic Value Groups
Key Concepts in Product Allocation
11.4.10 Manage Product Allocation Sequences
The Manage Product Allocation Sequences app has been enhanced with functionality for using multiple product
allocation objects as alternative sources of supply, combining the quantity from constraints in a sequence
group to enable a common confirmation based on strictly aligned consumption periods, consuming quantity
exclusively from periods that overlap and modeling and maintaining capacity allocations in addition to sales
allocations.

Technical Details
Type Changed
Additional Details
● When checking availability against product allocation, the product allocation objects in a sequence group
are now automatically connected as sources of supply if more than one product allocation object is valid
for the checked requirement. Possible alternative sources of supply include those product allocation
objects whose periodicities and check date time types differ. For more information, see Multiple Sequence
Constraints in a Sequence Group.
● By maintaining different consumption parameters for a product allocation object in a sequence group, the
same product allocation object can be checked for required quantity more than once within the same
sequence group, ideally leading to earlier confirmation dates for the required quantities in order
documents. For more information, see Alternative Consumption Strategies in Product Allocation
Sequences.
● You can now combine the quantity from constraints in a sequence group to enable a common confirmation
based on strictly aligned consumption periods. This ensures that when an availability check against
product allocation is executed, confirmation dates are aligned and quantity is only consumed from those
periods that overlap all constraints of the group. In the Manage Product Allocation Sequences app, you can
set the Consume Overlapping Quantities Only indicator in the consumption strategy for a sequence group,
thus ensuring that only the quantities from constraints whose quantities overlap are used to confirm
requirements. For more information, see Using Overlapping Quantities.
● The Manage Product Allocation Sequences app has been enhanced to offer the possibility of modeling and
maintaining capacity allocations in addition to sales allocations. The Manage Product Allocation Sequences
app includes a new business object, the capacity sequence group, that enables you to execute an
availability check against product allocation after a product availability check has taken place. The new
check against capacity is executed on the basis of the results of the preceding product availability check:
the confirmation from the preceding product availability check is used as the request (date and quantity)
for the product allocation check against capacity. This enables you to react to changes (for example, the
requested date is pushed back by one week) as a result of the product availability check which could
render any previous allocation results invalid.
The change means that you can now combine both product allocation checks within one availability check:
○ Check product allocation based on sales constraints.
○ Check product availability.
○ Check product allocation based on capacity constraints.
The Product Allocation: Confirmation Calculation screen now clearly differentiates between allocations for
sales and allocations for capacity.

Related Information
Manage Product Allocation Sequences
11.4.11 Product Allocation Overview
With this feature, you can perform data aging for product allocation data. Furthermore, you can display aged
product allocation data subsequently on the Product Allocation Overview overview page.
Technical Details
Type Changed
Additional Details
You can use data aging object AATP_PROD_ALLOC_PLNG_DATA_DAG to perform data aging for allocation
periods and their quantity assignments. The Aged Product Allocation Data card lists allocation periods aged
before a specific date. By clicking on the allocation period name, you can display the aged quantity data in the
Monitor Product Allocation Periods app.
Use the Manage Cards function in the Me Area to show the Aged Product Allocation Data card on the Product
Allocation Overview overview page in the SAP Fiori launchpad.
Related Information
Data Aging for Product Allocation Planning Data

Product Allocation Overview

Monitor Product Allocation Periods
11.4.12 OData APIs for Product Allocation
The OData application programming interfaces (API) for product allocation (PAL) have been extended.
Technical Details
Type Changed
Additional Details
The business objects for product allocation (PAL), product allocation object and product allocation sequence
now support the business events CREATED, CHANGED and DELETED.
Furthermore, the OData API for product allocation objects, API API_PRODUCT_ALLOCATION_OBJECT, can
now:
● Read or change the activation status of the characteristic value combination

● Read or change the constraint status of the characteristic value combination
● Delete characteristic value combinations and periods
● Delete single periods of characterstic value combinations
The OData API for product allocation sequences, API API_PRODUCT_ALLOC_SEQUENCE, can now delete
product-location assignments.
Related Information
Product Allocation Object

Product Allocation Sequence

11.5.1 Procurement of Direct Materials (J45)
Use
● Enhancements in purchase order mass change capabilities

● Provides direct link to monitor mass change view after execution of mass change for purchase orders
● Enablement of approval details for supplier invoices (saved as completed) in supplier invoice list
● Enhanced filter options for purchase order search
● Display journal entry and supplier invoice number after posting supplier invoice
● Time dependent tax
● New Header Fields in Mange Supplier Invoices
Technical Details
Type Changed
Scope Item J45 ( Procurement of Direct Materials )

11.5.2 Subcontracting (BMY)
Use
● Creation of subcontracting purchase orders with the Manage Purchase Orders app
● Enablement of subcontracting supplier invoices in the Create Supplier Invoice app
● Addition of a visualization for the subcontracting material flow in the Monitor Subcontracting Documents
app
● Supplier Contact Data now displayed in Manage Purchase Orders
● Commitments now displayed in Manage Purchase Orders
Technical Details
Type Changed
Scope Item BMY ( Subcontracting )

11.5.3 Supplier Consignment (2LG)
Use
Technical Details
Type Changed
Scope Item 2LG ( Supplier Consignment )
South Africa

11.5.4 Complementary Procurement Functions (2TW)
Use
● Display the journal entry and supplier invoice number after posting the supplier invoice
● Time dependent tax
● Display the Supplier Contact Data in Manage Purchase Orders
● New Header Fields in Manage Supplier Invoices
Technical Details
Type Changed
Scope Item 2TW ( Complementary Procurement Functions )
Germany, Portugal, United States of America

11.5.5 Quality Management for Complaints against Suppliers
(2F9)
Use
● Using the Record Defects app, you can record defects and generate an automatic display of defects found
during quality inspections, including a flexible worklist and a graphical representation.
● A new category for production-related issues which helps by manually recording the production-related
defects that need to be documented and rectified.
● Enhanced processing of defects and tasks by follow-up action. Follow-up action enabled for quality tasks
including parameters, separate statuses, actions and application logs. An example follow-up function: Post
to Blocked Stock.
● Efficient defect recording with code recognition based on the text, supported by machine learning
capabilities.
● A quality task can be forwarded via workflow. Processing of quality tasks is embedded into the unified
inbox called My Inbox.
Technical Details
Type Changed
Scope Item 2F9 ( Quality Management for Complaints against Suppli

ers )

11.5.6 Direct Procurement with Inbound Delivery (2TX)
Use
● Get proactive notifications for supplier delivery deficit

● Monitor purchase orders with supplier confirmations in the Manage Purchase Order app
Technical Details
Type Changed
Scope Item 2TX ( Direct Procurement with Inbound Delivery )

11.5.7 Consumable Purchasing (BNX)
Use
● Display the journal entry and supplier invoice number after posting the supplier invoice.
● Enablement of multi-accounting in Create Supplier Invoice app.
● Enablement of approval details for supplier invoices (saved as completed) in the supplier invoice list.
● Time dependent tax.
● Display Supplier Contact Data in Manage Purchase Orders.
● Display Commitments in Manage Purchase Orders.
Technical Details
Type Changed
Scope Item BNX ( Consumable Purchasing )
South Africa


12 Sustainability

714 PUBLIC Sustainability
13 Integration
13.1.1 Data Migration to SAP S/4HANA from Staging (2Q2)
Use
Customers can migrate data into SAP S/4HANA from legacy systems, using a staging area with staging tables
as a source for the SAP S/4HANA Migration Cockpit.
● Additional data migration business objects

● Updates to some existing migration objects
Technical Details
Type Changed
Scope Item 2Q2 ( Data Migration to SAP S/4HANA from Staging )

Integration PUBLIC 715
13.1.2 Data Migration to SAP S/4HANA from File (BH5)
Use
This scope item describes data migration to SAP S/4HANA for customers coming from any legacy system
using a file-based approach.
● Additional data migration business objects

● Updates to some existing migration objects
Technical Details
Type Changed
Scope Item BH5 ( Data Migration to SAP S/4HANA from File )
13.1.3 Responsibility Determination (1NJ)
Use
● A new feature in the Manage Teams and Responsibilities app perform upfront checks on team members to
ensure they have proper authorizations to carry out assigned business functions. The Business Process

716 PUBLIC Integration
Specialist will see a warning message when a team member lacks the authorization to carry out assigned
business functions.
Technical Details
Type Changed
Scope Item 1NJ ( Responsibility Determination )
13.2 SAP S/4HANA Migration Cockpit – Transfer Data

Directly from SAP Source System
This feature enables you to transfer data directly from an SAP source system. This new migration approach
allows an automated selection and extraction of business data from SAP source systems and facilitates a
direct data migration to SAP S/4HANA without using files or staging tables. With SAP S/4HANA 1909,
approximately 100 migration objects are available for the data migration from SAP ERP, and additional
migration objects are available for the data migration from SAP AFS and SAP EWM.
Technical Details
Type New

Integration PUBLIC 717
Application Component CA-LT-MC
Additional Details
Similar to the other migration approaches, the approach "Transfer Data Directly from SAP System" follows a
guided migration process and the migration object modeler can also be used to address custom requirements.
This new SAP Fiori app enables the user to:
● Manage migration projects with the readily consumable SAP Fiori user experience (UX).
● Select data from a source system, transform this data, and load it to SAP S/4HANA.
● Transfer business data using preconfigured migration objects.
● Specify mapping rules.
● Simulate the migration.
● Execute the migration.
● Monitor and control the migration by using the comprehensive SAP Fiori UX.
● Automate data extraction from an SAP source system, rather than writing custom data extraction
programs.
● Save effort by using preconfigured migration objects, rather than writing custom load programs.
● Specify mapping values to consistently transform the full data set across different migration objects.
● Navigate intuitively through the migration process.
● Monitor and control the migration process for the entire project from one central application.
● Simulate the migration and learn from the results before you migrate the data.
● Get a comprehensive overview about error situations from extensive process logs.
For more information about this new migration approach, see the Data Migration landing page on the SAP Help
Portal.

718 PUBLIC Integration
14 Cross Components
14.1 Master Data Maintenance
14.1.1 New Features in Mass Maintenance
Mass Maintenance is offering the new features listed below:
● Summary of changes to access change documents after activation step

● Extended data model coverage:
○ Business Partner: Credit Mgmt., Unloading Points, Long Texts
○ Product: PRT (Production Resources & Tools)
Technical Details
Type New
Application Component LO-MD-MM
14.2 Master Data Governance, Consolidation and Mass

Processing
14.2.1 New Features in Consolidation
Consolidation offers the new feature listed below:
● Enhanced address validation with review capabilities for ambiguous address data using Fiori App F3989
● Handling of cross references when loading data from source systems
● Support of mass creation scenarios without using key mapping

Cross Components PUBLIC 719
Technical Details
Type New
Application Component CA-MDG-CMP
14.2.2 New Features in Mass Processing
Mass Processing offers the new features listed below:
● Summary of changes to access change documents after activation step

Technical Details
Type New
Application Component CA-MDG-CMP

720 PUBLIC Cross Components
14.3 Master Data Governance, Central Governance
14.3.1 New Features for Master Data Governance for

Business Partner
We have added several new features to Master Data Governance for Business Partner. For example, the Change
Request Tracker is now available to help processors track the progress of workflow steps. For details on all new
features, please see the Additional Details section.
Technical Details
Type New
Application Component CA-MDG-APP-BP
Additional Details
Change Request Tracker
Any processor assigned to a change request can now view the current workflow step, all previously executed
dialog workflow steps, as well as all future steps needed until the change request is successfully approved.
The change request tracker can be called up via the new What’s Next link, which is displayed in the change
request UIBB next to the entry for the current work item.
Improved Error Message Handling for MDG-BP/C/S
Message error handling in the MDG business partner area has been greatly improved and optimized, allowing
processors to see for example which segments, customers or vendors a message is referring to. Messages are
now grouped according to the corresponding object segment (e.g. ERP Customer, ERP Vendor, Company
Code, Sales Area, Purchasing Organization).
If a processor is currently on a UI that contains the field to which an error message refers, the message shown
in the Message Area will be clickable, taking the processor directly to the field they need to maintain.
 Note
For direct clicking to work properly, users must be in the right screen, subscreen, and in Edit mode.
Furthermore, the UIBB must be expanded (not collapsed).

Customer
We have added several new features to Master Data Governance for Customer. For example, the Change
Request Tracker is now available to help processors track the progress of workflow steps. For details on all new
features, please see the Additional Details section.
Technical Details
Type New
Application Component CA-MDG-APP-CUST
Additional Details
 Note

14.3.3 New Features for Master Data Governance for Supplier
We have added several new features to Master Data Governance for Supplier. For example, the Change Request
Tracker is now available to help processors track the progress of workflow steps. For details on all new features,
please see the Additional Details section.
Technical Details
Type New
Application Component CA-MDG-APP-SUPPL
Additional Details
 Note

Financials
We have added new features to Master Data Governance for Financials. The Change Request Tracker is now
available to help processors track the progress of workflow steps. For details on this new feature, please see the
Additional Details section.
Technical Details
Type New
Application Component CA-MDG-APP-FIN
Additional Details
14.3.5 New Features for Master Data Governance for Material
We have added several new features to Master Data Governance for Material. For example, the Change Request
Tracker is now available to help processors track the progress of workflow steps. For details on all new features,
please see the Additional Details section.
Technical Details
Type New

Application Component CA-MDG-APP-MM
Additional Details
Price Unit Editable
Processors such as master data stewards can now change the price unit for plants with material ledger active
or not active, and the corresponding prices are recalculated automatically.
The price unit field is now maintainable and related prices (for example Standard Price, Moving Price, Future
(Standard) Price, Future Planned Price, Planned Price 1, Planned Price 2, Planned Price 3, Costing Lot Size) are
also recalculated.
Production Resource/Tool (PRT)
SAP MDG delivers the most commonly used fields as part of its predefined data models. To enable master data
stewards to maintain data for Production Resource/Tools directly within MDG governance, Production
Resource/Tool fields are now available in the MDG-M data model in SAP S/4HANA 1909.
Technically, the fields have been added to the new entity MARCPRT. A set of new UI configurations with suffix
‘_09’ have been created (for example, BS_MAT_OVP_09).
SCM fields at MRP Area Level
To enable master data stewards to maintain the most commonly used fields from the MRP area in Supply
Chain Management (from the Advanced Planning tab) as part of master data governance, these fields are now
available as part of the MDG-M data model in SAP S/4HANA 1909.
From a technical perspective, the fields have been added to entity MDMABASIC. A set of new UI configurations
with suffix ‘_09’ have been created (for example BS_MAT_OVP_09).
Enabling Master Data Governance for Inbound Product SOA Service
Users of SAP MDG are now able to process change requests that were created using SOA service
ProductMDMBulkReplicateRequest.
They can configure the system to create a change request automatically when an SOA service is received,
trigger a consolidation process, or post directly to the active area.

From a technical perspective, the new business activities MATI and MATU and new the change request types
MATL0I (SOAP Product Inbound: Create Material) and MATL0U (SOAP Product Inbound: Change Material) are
now delivered with BC Set MDGM_MDG_MATERIAL_CR_SOAP_09 and used as follows:
● If the material doesn't exist yet, the default change request type for the new business activity MATI with
logical action CREATE_DX is used.
● If the material exists already, the default change request type for the new business activity MATU with
logical action CHANGE_DX is used.
● If multiple materials are sent, the default change request type for the new business activity MATB with
logical action LOAD is used.
14.3.6 New Features for Master Data Governance Application

Framework
We have added several new features to Master Data Governance Application Framework (sometimes referred
to as Generic Functions). For example, the Change Request Tracker is now available to help processors track
the progress of workflow steps. For details on all new features, please see the Additional Details section.
Technical Details
Type New
Application Component CA-MDG-AF
Additional Details
Additional Steps After Activation
A user responsible for the governance processes, such as a master data steward, can now define additional
workflow steps after the activation step, if necessary. In other words, the workflow no longer has to end after a
change request has been activated successfully.

Instead, after a change request has been activated, further actions can be performed to trigger additional
dialog workflow steps. These may include additional steps related to the object of the change request itself, and
could also result in a follow-up change request as well. A workflow item for these additional steps can then be
found in the workflow inbox of the user who has been assigned accordingly.
Example: You may need to create purchasing info records after creating or changing (i.e. activating) a supplier.
 Note
SAP recommends that customers define their own actions for additional steps. However, if customers need
to use the standard actions that are delivered, they must only use actions that do not have a Note or
Reason set for them. The Check setting however is irrelevant for this situation.
Search Change Requests by Business Data
From within any of the MDG search result lists, processors can now select one or more business objects and
find all change requests in the system that are related to these objects, by choosing the new button that is
available. They navigate to the list of all open and past change requests and can review those over time,
including information of explicit previous and follow-up change requests.
This new feature gives the processor an overview of how often certain business objects have been changed,
when the last change was performed, and who actually performed the changes. Where edition-dependent
business objects are chosen by the processor, change requests for all relevant editions are displayed.
Follow-Up Change Request
Master data stewards can define additional follow-up processes that are not part of the original change request
due to technical or organizational reasons. New links on the Change Request UI and on the My Change
Requests screen now allow them to call up previous change requests and follow-up change requests directly.
For example, if such a user needs to create a business partner as quickly as possible, they can do this and then
trigger the link to a contact person as part of a follow-up change request.
Pre-Set Data Model / URL Parameter USMD_MODEL
System administrators can now configure change request processes limited to one data model – while still
allowing for all business activities (assuming users have the required authorization). Data stewards or power
users such as a “Master Data Help Desk” can efficiently trigger changes for the defined data model.
The new solution temporarily overwrites the data model in the user parameter settings, meaning it works for all
MDG Web Dynpro applications that consider this parameter (Creation of a Change Request, Mass Change, File
Download, File Upload, Where-Used List, Collective Processing).
Using Data Quality Rules in Central Governance
Users such as master data stewards can now use existing data quality rules for their processes within SAP
MDG, central governance. The new check type 07 Validation Rules (Data Quality) within Customizing allows
them to define the change request types and change request steps in which these rules are used.
Please note that you can only enable the use of Validation Rules (Data Quality) for change requests of the data
model BP and for custom objects data models that use a re-use active area.

14.4 Master Data Governance, Data Quality Management
14.4.1 Enable Automation with Rule Mining for Master Data

Quality Management
This feature enables you to use machine learning for data analysis and mining of data quality rules. The feature
offers collaboration options to enhance the creation process for new data quality rules. Rule mining is enabled
for business partners, products, and custom objects.
Technical Details
Type New
Application Component CA-MDG-ADQ
14.4.2 Enable Data Quality Management for Business Partner

Data
This feature enables you to manage the quality of key master data objects including the ability to define,
enforce, monitor, and improve quality. This includes the ability to manage data quality rules and data quality for
business partners. You can use data quality rules in change requests for business partners in the SAP Master
Data Governance application. Data quality rules can be shared between SAP S/4HANA systems using the
import and export apps.
Technical Details
Type New

14.4.3 Extend Scope in Data Quality Management for

Product Data
This feature enables you to import and export data quality rules. Rules from rule mining can be added to the
rule repository and implemented as data quality rules.
Technical Details
Type New
14.4.4 Deprecated and Successor Apps
The app Configure Score Calculation for Products (F3412) has been deprecated. The following replacement
apps are available:
● Configure Data Quality Scores for Product (F4090)
The app Data Quality Rules for Products (F3337) has also been deprecated. The following replacement app is
available:
● Manage Master Data Quality Rules (F3820)
Technical Details
Type Deleted

14.4.5 Enable Data Quality Management for Custom Object

Data
This feature enables you to manage the quality of key master data objects including the ability to define,
enforce, monitor, and improve quality. This includes the ability to manage data quality rules and data quality for
custom objects. You can also use data quality rules in change requests for custom objects in the SAP Master
Data Governance application. Data quality rules can be shared between SAP S/4HANA systems using the
import and export apps.
Technical Details
Type New
14.5 Display Search Models
With this app, you can view a seach model's technical details in a unified way. You can view the artifacts
belonging to the search model, such as the CDS view on which the search model is built. fields, ranking,
relationship, technical details, hierarchy of the CDS views, and a preview of the search results in raw format.

Technical Details
Type New
Application Component CA-GTF-HSB
Related Information
Display Enterprise Search Models
14.6 Shifted Gregorian Calendar Date
This CDS view enables you to shift the Gregorian calendar by time units.
Technical Details
Type New
Scope Item J58
Application Component CA-GTF-VDM
Related Information
Shifted Gregorian Calendar Date

14.7 Analytics
14.8 Manage KPIs and Reports
With this app, you can create groups, KPIs, reports, and applications to launch directly from the Fiori
Launchpad. You can configure metrics to the KPIs and visualize the data either in chart or table format.
The Reports feature has both Generic and Analytical list page visualization. This data analyzation helps the
organization to analyze data from different perspectives, investigate root causes, and act accordingly to
improve the quantity and quality of the business unit.
Technical Details
Type New
Application Component CA-GTF-SB-S4H-DT
CA-GTF-SB-S4H-RT
This app replaces these apps in the following catalogs:
● KPI Design
○ Create Evaluation
○ Configure Drill-Down
○ Manage KPI Associations
○ KPI Workspace
○ Create Tile
○ Create KPI
● Report Design
○ Create Report
○ Create Report Evaluation
○ Configure Report Drill-Down
○ Report Workspace

○ Publish Report
The above-mentioned apps will be deleted with SAP S/4HANA 1909 FPS02.
Related Information
Manage KPIs and Reports
14.9 Responsibility Management
14.10 Manage Teams and Responsibilities
This feature enables you to group responsible members, who perform specific functions in a business process,
as a team. You can refer to these teams, members, and functions in frameworks, such as workflows or situation
handling as responsible members to receive focus about specific circumstances or business situations. For
example, end users receive a notice about upcoming deadlines, warnings about delays, or are informed about
tasks that need to be completed as soon as possible.
● Use the Teams search model and search for teams based on team names and descriptions from the SAP
Fiori launchpad.
● Edit inherited responsibility definition values in subteams.
● Maintain team owners that are responsible for a team header, responsibility definitions, team members,
and their associated functions
● Assign functions to a set of team members at a time.
● See the authorization status for functions assigned to team members.
● Find and replace a member (Business Partner ID) and associated functions with another member across
teams.
If required, you can assign only one of the functions of a selected member to another member across
teams. This removes the function from the selected member. You have to choose the category and type to
see the list of functions.
● See a list of potential subteams with responsibility definitions that exactly match those of the selected
parent team while viewing its hierarchy.
● See changes (old and new values) made to a team definition. However, hierarchical changes are not
captured.

Technical Details
Type Changed
Scope Item 1NJ (Responsibility Determination)
Application Component CA-GTF-RM
● To classify functions for standard team categories, you can configure Classify Functions for Standard Team
Category ( Responsibility Management Teams and Responsibilities SAP Delivered Team
Categories ).
● To see the authorization status for functions assigned to team members you can configure these
( Responsibility Management Teams and Responsibilities SAP Delivered Team Categories Validate
Team Members ):
○ Map Functions to Template Roles
○ Map Authorization Fields to Responsibility Definitions
○ Override Authorization Field Mappings
Related Information
Responsibility Management
14.11 Situation Handling
14.12 New Features for Situation Handling
With these features for Situation Handling, you can now:
● Use many functional and usability enhancements of the Manage Situation Types app, such as using a date
picker to delete monitored data, getting previews of the in-app situation messages and notifcations
including e-mail, comparing the filter criteria used or available for conditions, and so on.
● Depending on the use case, decide to capture the data context from business situations and to extract it
with the Business Situation – Read API for advanced analytics.

● Use rules for determining notification recipients with a reuse component from Responsibility Management.
● Use the new My Situations app with which end users can see a list of all the open situations that are
assigned to them, navigate to detail pages with the situation messages, and close situations.
● Choose from many new use cases from various business areas, such as Finance, Manufacturing, Sourcing
and Procurement, and so on.
Technical Details
Type Changed
Scope Item 31N
Application Component CA-SIT
As of SAP S/4HANA 1909, Situation Handling requires a new notification provider. If you have used Situation
Handling in a former version, you need to change this configuration setting. For more information, see
Notifications.
Related Information
Situation Handling
Manage Situation Types
Business Situation – Read
Responsibility Management
My Situations
Configuration Settings for Situation Handling

14.13 Legal Content Management
14.13.1 Legal Content Creation with SAP Cloud Platform

Legal Content Assembly
This integration of SAP S/4HANA Cloud Platform Legal Content Assembly with SAP S/4HANA for Legal
Content Management enables you to integrate with all core business processes, assemble all types of
documents based on templates, text blocks, rules, and simultaneously store all documents in a central online
repository. As a legal counsel, you can create and manage legal content that is generated out of various
business scenarios in a company, such as procurement processes, sales, policies or intercompany agreements.
Technical Details
Type New
Scope Item 2OQ (Legal Content Creation with SAP Cloud Platform)
1XV (Legal Content Management)
Application Component LCM-INT
Additional Details
● You can use the Create from Template feature to assemble a virtual document. This feature is available in
both Manage Legal Transactions, Request Legal Content and Manage Legal Documents apps.
● You can use the Discard Content feature to delete all the assembled content from a legal document,
without deleting the document itself. This feature is available in the Manage Legal Document app.
● You can retry assembly if the assembly of a virtual document fails. This feature is available in both Manage
Legal Transactions and Manage Legal Documents app.
● You can edit a virtual document if it is in the In Process status, using the Edit Content button.
● You can use the Generate Word File feature to work in a word document that is generated out of the virtual
document.
● You can use the Upload File feature to upload a file to the legal document.
● You can also filter the virtual documents using two new filters Content Export Status and Assembly Status.
● You can restore an existing version of a virtual document to edit the same document. You can either
Restore with the old version of the template or re-generate the document with the latest version of the
template.

● You can edit or download a virtual document from the Open Documents card in the Legal Content Overview
app.
Related Information
Integration with SAP Cloud Platform Legal Content Assembly

Documents
Request Legal Content
Manage Legal Transactions
14.13.2 Enhancements in Manage Legal Transactions
With this app, you can define renewal and termination dates for legal transactions in the new facet called Life
Cycle. The other new feature is to use Situation Handling in Legal Content Management. You can define
situations to notify the legal counsel when the status synchronization of a legal transaction has failed and
should be processed to ensure successful synchronization.
Technical Details
Type Changed
Used in Scope Item (Legal Content Management) 1XV
Application Component LCM-LT
Additional Details
● You can now link objects from an external system using the Linked Objects feature.
● You can also use the Open Issues hyperlink to view the missing or wrong attributes that affect the status of
the legal transaction.
● Use the Create with Reference functionality to create a copy of an existing legal transaction, by defining a
relationship with the source transaction. Defining a relationship provides traceability between the source
and target transactions. You can also copy the required header attributes and facets from the source legal
transaction. You can use this reference transaction as a template and define other attributes and facets
according to your business needs.

● You can even copy task group templates defined in the source legal transaction to the target transaction.
● You can view comments added by the task approver in the My Inbox app, under the Task Group in Progress
facet.
● Define relationships between multiple legal relationships. You can view all mandatory documents specified
in the related transactions, in the sub-facet Related Required Documents. If configured, you can view
Notifications when the status of related legal transactions is synchronized.
● You can use the Copy functionality to create a copy of an existing legal transaction.
● While adding a new task step, you can select additional recipient assignments and roles to assign workflow
functions in the Manage Teams and Responsibilities app.
● You can select preconditions and add alternative preconditions to be fulfilled, before a workflow task is
triggered.
● You can now define how to handle exceptions for rejected workflow tasks, by selecting the required action
and the action result.
● While defining the renewal and termination clauses for legal transactions in the Life Cycle facet, you can
also select relevant date types in the All Dates sub facet.
Related Information
Manage Legal Transactions
14.13.3 Enhancements in Legal Content Overview
With this app, you can use the new cards to analyze the most important tasks to be processed by you. You can
also analyze the pending tasks of your legal transaction, average processing time taken by each task, and task
completion of different types of tasks.
Technical Details
Type Changed
Scope Item (Legal Content Management) 1XV
Application Component LCM-OVP

14.13.4 Enhancements in Categories
With this app, you can now add description to the node category.
Technical Details
Type Changed
Application Component LCM-CAT
14.13.5 Enhancements in Manage Legal Documents
With this app, you can filter all the legal documents using five new filters Main Organization Type, Main
Organization, Stamps, Main Entity Type, and Main Entity. You can also assign a Reference Number to the legal
document, under the Basic Details section of the Document Information facet in the legal document.
Technical Details
Type Changed
Application Component LCM-DOC
Additional Details
The corresponding fields for the new filters are available under specific groups in the Manage Legal Document
application. The groups are Content Details, Basic Details, and Related Details.

14.13.6 Enhancements in Manage Contexts
With this app, you can use the Life Cycle facet to predefine renewal and termination of legal transactions and
select the relevant date types. You can predefine relationships between two or more legal transactions and
specify the relationship type. You can use enhanced attributes of task steps under recipients, preconditions,
and exception handler sub facets.
Technical Details
Type Changed
Scope Item 1XV (Legal Content Management)
Application Component LCM-CTX
Additional Details
● While defining relationships, you can already specify the type of relationship between multiple legal
transactions.
● While adding a new task step, you can select additional recipient assignments and roles to assign workflow
functions in the Manage Teams and Responsibilities app.
● You can select preconditions and add alternative preconditions to be fulfilled, before a workflow task is
triggered.
● You can now predefine how to handle exceptions for rejected workflow tasks, by selecting the required
action and the action result.
Related Information
Manage Contexts
14.13.7 Enhancements in Request Legal Content
With this app, you can use the Create from Template feature to assemble a virtual document. You can use the
Upload File feature to upload a file to the legal document.

Technical Details
Type Changed
Application Component LCM-LT
Related Information
Request Legal Content
14.13.8 Manage Legal Tasks
With this app, you can manage tasks that are linked to different legal transactions by forwarding tasks to other
agents and notifying agents about pending tasks. You can see all the tasks grouped under the legal transaction
from where these workflow tasks were triggered. You can filter the tasks based on task types and agent roles, in
addition to all the other common filter types.
Technical Details
Type New
Application Component LCM-TSK

14.13.9 Customizing and Business Add-Ins for Legal Content
Management
New Customizing Activities and Business Add-Ins are available in the SAP Implementation Guide. These
configurations enable you to integrate with SAP S/4HANA Cloud Platform Legal Content Assembly.
Technical Details
Type New
2OQ (Legal Content Creation with SAP Cloud Platform)
Additional Details
New and Enhanced Customizing Activities and Business Add-Ins

Legal Content Manage Integration Basic Settings ● Assign RFC Desti You can enable the
ment Integration with nations switch for legal content
Legal Content ● Enable Switch for assembly to activate
Assembly Legal Content As the scope item 2OQ.
sembly You can also assign
● Define Areas
RFC destinations and
define areas required
to map with the legal
content management
attributes - Profile, En
tity Type (Main Organi
zation Type), and En
tity ID (Main Organiza
tion).

Legal Content Manage Integration Variables Define Document Vari You can define the vari
ables
ment able mapping, source
CDS Views, and aliases
for the document vari
ables.
Legal Content Manage Business Add-Ins ● Integration ● Modify URL for use this BAdI to modify
the URL for external
ment External Linked
Linked Objects linked objects, during
Objects
runtime.
● Integration ● Calculate Custom
Integration with
Linked Objects
Legal Content
● Calculate Custom
Assembly
Variable Fields
Variables
● Calculate Custom
Variables
14.13.10 APIs for Integration with Legal Content

Management
With these services, you can enable the integration scenario Legal Content Creation with SAP Cloud Platform.
Technical Details
Type New
Application Component LCM-INT
Related Information
Legal Document Content Types - Read

Legal Document Access Levels - Read

Legal Categories - Read
14.14.1 Situation Handling (31N)
Use
Situation handling recognizes business situations by evaluating conditions (rules) on business facts. A
business situation occurs when a business object changes a status relevant to a user, when critical deadlines
are passed, or a KPI passes a threshold.
● Situation Handling now supports use cases across LOBs (for example, Procurement, Idea, production,
Finance, Cross-Applications and so on)
● Situation Handling can leverage Responsibility Management to determine notification recipient(s) based
on responsibility definition and/or business functions.
● Users can navigate from a notification to the affected object to resolve underlying issue.
● Inform users about their new situations via e-mail. From the e-mail, end users can navigate to the situation
message, where they can view relevant details.
● New My Situations app that serves as single point of entry for displaying all open situations.
● New Monitor Situations app that provides insights into the handling of situation instances.
Technical Details
Type New
Scope Item 31N ( Situation Handling )

14.14.2 Legal Content Creation with SAP Cloud Platform
(2OQ)
Use
This scope item describes integration of both applications (Legal content management and Legal content
assembly) that can be used to automate creation and assembly of legal content.
Technical Details
Type New
Scope Item 2OQ ( Legal Content Creation with SAP Cloud Platform )
14.14.3 Output Management (1LQ)
Use
● Output with attachments (print, email)

● Merging attachments of type PDF with the rendered form template

Technical Details
Type Changed
Scope Item 1LQ ( Output Management )
14.15 Access Protection for Value Helps
Many additional applications now support to distinguish between granting Display permission to data
(usually associated with activity value 03 in authorizations) and granting value help access (usually associated
with activity value F4).
Technical Details
Type Changed
Application Component CA (Cross Applications)

Additional Details
While activity Display permits to access the full scope of the respective business object (including access to
value helps) activity value F4 only permits access to a value selector and the limited subset of information
displayed in the value selector. To achieve this, access protection to value helps were introduced and enhanced
authorization proposals for the affected applications are delivered.
Users who neither have Display authorization (usually encoded as activity 03) nor value help access
authorization (activity value F4) are no longer permitted to see the value help content.
Default authorization values are delivered by SAP to support the refinement of the authorization concept.
Please refer to SAP Note 2792518 and its referenced documents and perform the postprocessing steps as
described in SAP Note 1539556 (question 2).
You can omit this activity temporarily by applying SAP Note 2606478 . This introduces the role SAP_NEW_F4
which can be used to grant unrestricted access to value helps.
See Also
For more information about the upgrade process, see the Upgrade Guide for SAP S/4HANA at http://
help.sap.com/s4hana_op_1909.
14.16 SAP CoPilot Skills
Additional skills are available that you can use to interact with SAP CoPilot by simply typing in what you need to
accomplish certain tasks.
Technical Details
Type New

Application Component CA (Cross Applications)
Additional Details
For a complete list of skills available in this release, see SAP Note 2818565 .
The types of skills available to you depend on which SAP CoPilot subscription you have. For example, SAP S/
4HANA customers that are subscribed to the paid version of SAP CoPilot can use the out of box SAP CoPilot
skills that SAP has built for them. If you type Help, SAP CoPilot displays all the skills that are available for you.
Additional Details
For more information about skills, see the SAP CoPilot user help at https://help.sap.com/viewer/p/
SAP_COPILOT under Digital Assistant.
14.17 Touch Enablement of the Classic UIs (SAP GUI for

HTML, Web Dynpro)
With SAP S/4HANA 1909, SAP has started to enable applications running on classic UI technologies (SAP GUI
for HTML or Web Dynpro) for usage on touch devices like tablets. This means that you will get access to some
additional applications in the SAP Fiori Launchpad when using tablets.
Technical Details
Type New
Application Component BC-WD-UR Unified Rendering

Additional Details
As not all applications that are based on classic UI technologies are enabled for touch devices yet, you can get
an overview of the enabled applications in the SAP Fiori apps reference library (https://
fioriappslibrary.hana.ondemand.com/sap/fix/externalViewer/). To get a list of all relevant applications,
proceed as follows:
1. In the SAP Fiori apps reference library, go to All apps and choose the Filter icon at the bottom of the screen.
2. Choose the following selection criteria and confirm your selection with OK:
○ Product Suite: SAP S/4HANA
○ UI Technology: SAP GUI and Web Dynpro
○ Form Factor: Tablet
○ Product Version: SAP S/4HANA 1909 (optional)
You get a list of all applications that are already enabled for touch devices.
3. Choose List View at the bottom of the screen to get a sorted list, grouped by business roles. You can also
download this list by choosing Download at the bottom of the screen.
 Note
Please consider that some user interface controls will work differently when used on a tablet, compared to
a desktop application.
For more information on touch-enabled applications and on the supported devices and browsers, see the
following SAP Note: 2700517
14.19 What's New in ABAP Platform
ABAP platform is the basis of the SAP S/4HANA product line. To find out what's new in ABAP platform, see the
what's new viewer for the ABAP platform.

Technical Details
Type Changed
Application Component BC
Related Information
ABAP Platform - What's New Viewer

15 Country/Region Specifics
15.1 Austria
15.1.1 Finance
15.1.1.1 Update in VAT Return
You can use the Run Compliance Reports app to create XML files that contain the necessary data to submit
your periodical advance return (U30) and your annual return (U1) for tax on sales/purchases. You do so by
using the Advanced VAT Return - U30 and the Annual VAT Return - U1 reports. This means that the Create
Advance Tax Return File app is no longer supported.
Technical Details
Type Changed
Functional Localization Localized for Austria
Scope Item 1J2 (Advance Compliance Reporting )
J58 (Accounting and Financial Close )
Application Component FI-LOC-FI-AT
Additional Details
If you need to create an incident regarding this feature, you can also use component XX-CSC-AT-FI.

Country/Region Specifics PUBLIC 751
The Run Compliance Reports app replaces the Create Advance Tax Return Fileapp. We recommend that you
switch to the successor app as soon as possible.
Please note that as of release SAP S/4HANA 1909 the Create Advance Tax Return File app will be deleted from
the General Ledger - Reporting for Austria (SAP_FIN_BC_GL_REPORTING_AT) business catalog.
15.2 Argentina
15.2.1 Finance
15.2.1.1 Sales and Purchase Print Format
Technical Details
Type New
Functional Localization Localized for Argentina
Scope Item 1J2
Application Component FI-LOC-FI-AR
Additional Details
The government of Argentina by the means of AFIP (Administración Federal de Ingresos Públicos) requires that
companies report on demand the amounts of VAT (value-added tax) generated in their sales and purchase
operations.
To help companies to effectively report the amounts of VAT generated in their sales and purchase operations,
SAP delivers the Sales and Purchase Print Format report (AR_VAT_PRINT), that extracts information from the
SAP S/4HANA system and organizes this data in a PDF file that you can submit to AFIP.

752 PUBLIC Country/Region Specifics
You can use the Run Compliance Reports app to generate the Sales and Purchase Print Format.
● Before you run the Sales and Purchase Print Format, go through the steps of setting up your compliance
reporting. To do so, make the required changes in Customizing for Financial Accounting under Advanced
Compliance Reporting Setting Up Your Compliance Reporting .
● Check if any other setting or configuration shall be completed for using the Manage Tax Items activity in
Manage Tax Items for Legal Reporting .
Related Information
Sales and Purchase Print Format
15.2.1.2 Value Help Authorizations in Argentina
Technical Details
Type Changed
Functional Localization Localized for Argentina
Scope Item 1J2
Application Component FI-LOC-FI-AR
Additional Details
See SAP Note 2801214 for a list of the affected transactions in Argentina.

To ensure that the system works well for your users, we strongly recommend that you perform the
Related Information
15.3 Belgium
15.3.1 Cross-Application Functions
15.3.1.1 eDocuments
This feature enables you to use create electronic documents in the eDocument Cockpit (EDOC_COCKPIT
transaction) for Belgium.
Technical Details
Type New
Functional Localization Localized for Belgium
Application Component CA-GTF-CSC-EDO-BE
To use the eDocument solution for Belgium, you carry out some of the Customizing activities in Customizing
for Cross-Application Components under General Application Functions eDocument . For more
information see the product assistance mentioned in the See also section.

Additionally, you carry out Customizing activities specific for Belgium in Customizing for Cross-Application
Components under General Application Functions eDocument Country-Specific Settings Belgium
Settings for PEPPOL.
Related Information
eDocument for Belgium
15.4 Brazil
15.4.1 Integration
15.4.1.1 Customizing Activities for Tax Service
You can customize what sales materials and sales and purchase services are relevant or not relevant for
Contribuição Previdenciária sobre Receita Bruta (CPRB) contribution.
Technical Details
Type New
Functional Localization Localized for Brazil
Scope Item 43D
Application Component FI-LOC-TXS
Find the new Customizing activities in the following paths:
● Financial Accounting Global Settings (New) Tax on Sales/Purchases Basic Settings Brazil
Integration with SAP Localization Hub, tax service Tax Configurations for Sales Pricing Procedures
Determine Relevant Sales Materials for CPRB Contribution

Determine Not Relevant Sales Material for CPRB Contribution
Determine Relevant Sales Services for CPRB Contribution
Determine Not Relevant Sales Services for CPRB Contribution
Integration with SAP Localization Hub, tax service Tax configurations for Tax Procedures Determine
Relevant Purchase Services for CPRB Contribution
Integration with SAP Localization Hub, tax service Tax configurations for Tax Procedures Determine Not
Relevant Purchase Services for CPRB Contribution
Related Information
SAP Localization Hub, Tax Service
15.4.2 Finance
15.4.2.1 Value Help Authorization in CIAP
SAP has refined the access protection of value helps, resulting in modified authorization proposals for the
applications in CIAP.
Technical Details
Type Changed
Scope Item 1J2
Application Component FI-LOC-FI-BR

Additional Details
See SAP Note 2817149 for a list of the affected transactions in CIAP.
To ensure that the system works well for your users, we strongly recommend that you perform the
Related Information
15.4.2.2 Enter Bar Code in Supplier Invoices
With this feature, you can display or enter the bar code into journal entries at line item level in the Manage
Journal Entries app when you use a company code specific to Brazil. The country-specific extension affects the
app on the SAP Fiori launchpad.
Technical Details
Type New
Application Component FI-LOC-FI-BR (Financials Brazil)

Related Information
Entering Bar Code in Supplier Invoices
15.4.2.3 EFD-Reinf Report
This feature enables you to collect all the required data for the EFD-Reinf report to generate XML files that you
need to submit to the tax authorities through the Run Advanced Compliance Reports app.
Technical Details
Type Changed
Scope Item 1J2
Additional Details
Now you can generate three new EFD-Reinf file categories to the tax authorities:
● EFD-Reinf Periodic Files

● EFD-Reinf Closing Files
● EFD-Reinf Exclusion Files
Now you can assign tax type and tax code to the EFD-Reinf files in Customizing for Financial Accounting under
General Ledger Accounting Periodic Processing Report Statutory Reporting: Brazil Company Settings
EFD-Reinf .

Related Information
EFD-Reinf Report
15.4.2.4 EFD Contribuições Report
This feature enables you to collect all the required data for the EFD Contribuições report to generate TXT files
that you need to submit to the tax authorities through the Run Advanced Compliance Reports app.
Technical Details
Type Changed
Scope Item 1J2
Now you can define automatic determination to report your nota fiscal through the EFD Contribuições report in
Customizing for Financial Accounting under General Ledger Accounting Periodic Processing Report
Statutory Reporting: Brazil Company Settings EFD Contribuições .
Related Information
EFD Contribuições Report

15.5 China
15.5.1 Finance
15.5.1.1 Balance Sheet / Income Statement - China
This app has been renamed from Display Financial Statements - China to Balance Sheet / Income Statement -
China.
Technical Details
Type Changed
Functional Localization Localized for China
Application Component FI-LOC-FI-CN (Financials China)
Related Information
Balance Sheet / Income Statement - China
15.6 Denmark
15.6.1 Finance
15.6.1.1 VAT Return
You can use the Run Compliance Reports app to create XML files for the VAT Return that fulfill the
requirements of the tax authorities in Denmark.

Technical Details
Type New
Functional Localization Localized for Denmark
Application Component FI-LOC-FI-DK
Related Information
VAT Return
15.7 France
15.7.1 Finance
15.7.1.1 VAT Return
The ouput of the VAT Return using the Run Compliance Reports app has been changed to reflect the format
provided by the tax authorities:
● The report generates two lists: one with the necessary data for the Form 3310CA3 and another one for the
3310A (Annex) part A.
● These lists show all lines and their descriptions, even the ones for which there is no data.
● The lines on these lists are sorted and grouped to match the official ones.
● The subtotals are calculated and shown according to the official forms.
Technical Details
Type Changed
Functional Localization Localized for France

Application Component FI-LOC-FI-FR
Additional Details
If you need to create an incident regarding this feature, you can also use component XX-CSC-FR-FI.
In order to generate the output mentioned above, you have to perform the following customizing steps:
1. Go to Customizing (SPRO transaction) under Financial Accounting Advanced Compliance Reporting

Setting Up Your Compliance Reporting .
2. In the Set Properties of Reporting Activity activity, limit the validity of the FR_VAT_DCL_V0_S activity key.
You do this by changing the Use Until date to 31.03.2019 (or a later date). After this date the new activity
(FR_VAT_DCL_V1_S) will be used. Yo do not need to explicitly enter this in the configuration.
15.8 Germany
15.8.1.1 eDocuments
transaction) for Germany.
Technical Details
Type New
Functional Localization Localized for Germany

Application Component CA-GTF-CSC-EDO-DE
Components under General Application Functions eDocument Country-Specific Settings Germany
Related Information
eDocument for Germany
15.9 India
15.9.1 Finance
15.9.1.1 Bills of Exchange Receivable
With this feature, you can use the following apps for the purpose of processing bills of exchange receivable in
India:
● Receive Bills of Exchange

● Bill of Exchange List
● Bill of Exchange Transactions
● Reverse Bills of Exchange Transactions
● Printout of Transaction Records

Technical Details
Type New
Functional Localization Localized for India
Scope Item 1WQ (Bill of Exchange)
Application Component FI-LOC-FI-IN
Additional Details
If you need to create an incident regarding this feature, use component XX-CSC-CN-CM-BOE.
Related Information
Receive Bills of Exchange

Bill of Exchange List
Bill of Exchange Transactions
Reverse Bill of Exchange Transactions
Printout of Transaction Records
15.10 Italy
15.10.1 Finance
15.10.1.1 CUP/CIG Code and MGO ID Extensions
With this feature, you can enter CUP/CIG codes to incoming and outgoing invoices and to journal entries, and
the MGO ID to incoming invoices and journal entries when you use a company code specific to Italy. The
country-specific extensions affect apps on the SAP Fiori launchpad.

Technical Details
Type New
Application Component FI-LOC-FI-IT (Financials for Italy)
Additional Details
When you enter a company code that is specific to Italy, the following apps on the SAP Fiori launchpad display
the CUP, CIG, MGO country-specific fields on their screen where you can enter the codes directly:
● Manage Journal Entries

● Create Incoming Invoices
● Create Outgoing Invoices
After that, you can insert these data into the RIBA and CGI_CT payment formats.
Related Information
Managing CUP, CIG Codes and MGO ID

Managing CUP and CIG Codes
15.11 Japan
15.11.1 Finance
15.11.1.1 VAT Return
Apart from the existing outputs, you can use the Run Compliance Reports app to generate the Form 3-(1) report
that does not generate legal form directly but provide you with the necessary figures when legal declaration
forms are prepared.

Technical Details
Type Changed
Functional Localization Localized for Japan
Application Component FI-LOC-FI-JP (Financials Japan)
Related Information
VAT Return
15.12 Mexico
15.12.1 Finance
15.12.1.1 Compensation UUID for Electronic Accounting
The Mexico Compensation UUID for Electronic Accounting (FIGLMX_UUID) field was added to the following
apps:
● Post Incoming Payment

● Post Outgoing Payment
● Create Incoming Invoices
● Create Outgoing Invoices
Technical Details
Type Changed
Functional Localization Localized for Mexico
Scope Item 1J2

Application Component FI-LOC-FI-MX
Additional Details
The addition of the Mexico Compensation UUID for Electronic Accounting (FIGLMX_UUID) field to these apps
enables you to report the UUID number (unique identifier number of the Comprobante Fiscal Digital por
Internet) of your journal entries to Mexican tax authorities through the Journal Entries Details
(MX_JE_DETAILS) report in ACR (Advanced Compliance Reporting).
For more details, go to help.sap.com/viewer/product/SAP_S4HANA_ON-PREMISE/ and choose Product

Assistance Country/Region Versions Americas Mexico Financial Accounting (FI) Apps for Finance in
Mexico Advanced Compliance Reporting for Mexico eAccounting Mexico Compensation UUID for
Electronic Accounting .
For more information, refer to 2798781 .
15.13 Netherlands
15.13.1.1 eDocuments
transaction) for the Netherlands.
Technical Details
Type New
Functional Localization Localized for the Netherlands
Application Component CA-GTF-CSC-EDO-NL

Components under General Application Functions eDocument Country-Specific Settings Netherlands
Related Information
eDocument for the Netherlands
15.14 Norway
15.14.1 Finance
You can use the Run Compliance Reports app to create a list to prepare the VAT return that fulfills the
requirements of the tax authorities in Norway.
Technical Details
Type New
Functional Localization Localized for Norway
Application Component FI-LOC-FI-NO

Additional Details
If you need to create an incident regarding this feature, you can also use component XX-CSC-NO-FI.
Related Information
VAT Return
15.14.1.2 Line Items Reports
You can use the Run Advanced Compliance Reports app to generate files that show the details of your G/L
account line items, your customer line items and your supplier line items. You can generate these files in a PDF
and in a TXT format.
Technical Details
Type New
Functional Localization Localized for Norway
Application Component FI-LOC-FI-NO
Additional Details
If you need to create an incident regarding this feature, use component XX-CSC-NO-FI.
Related Information
G/L Account Line Items

Customer Line Items
Supplier Line Items

15.15 Poland
15.15.1 Finance
15.15.1.1 Cash Flow Statement
You can use the Run Compliance Reports app to generate the cash flow statement that fulfill the requirements
of the government in Poland. You can use the direct method and submit it by year to the tax authorities.
Technical Details
Type New
Functional Localization Localized for Poland
Application Component FI-LOC-FI-PL
(Financials Poland)
Related Information
Cash Flow Statement

15.16 South Korea
15.16.1.1 eDocument
15.16.1.1.1 Creation and Sending of Electronic Customer Tax

Invoices in XML Format
With this feature, you can create and send electronic customer tax invoices in XML format to an integrated
external system, such as another system of your company or a third-party application service provider. Then
you use this external system to forward tax invoice XML files to the National Tax Service (NTS) of South Korea.
Technical Details
Type New
Functional Localization Localized for South Korea
Application Component CA-GTF-CSC-EDO-KR (eDocument South Korea)
Additional Details
You can create tax invoices in XML format for the following types of source documents:
Source Document Type Source Application
Invoice, credit memo, cancelation document for invoice Sales and Distribution
Invoice, credit memo, reversal document for invoice Financial Accounting
The following reports are used in processing tax invoices in XML format for South Korea:
Report Function
eDocument Cockpit (transaction code EDOC_COCKPIT) Create, submit, and cancel tax invoices in XML format, in
cluding consolidated tax invoices

Report Function
Create Consolidated eDocuments (transaction code Create consolidated eDocuments, based on which consoli
dated tax invoices in XML format can be created
EDOC_KR_SUMMARY)
When a tax invoice has been validated by the NTS successfully, the system fills the following South Korea-
specific fields of the corresponding accounting document in the Manage Journal Entries app, on the Header
tab:
● Approval Number: Indicates the electronic tax invoice ID, which is approved by the NTS.
● Transfer Date: Indicates the date on which an electronic tax invoice is transferred to and validated by the
NTS.
You can use this data in advanced compliance reporting for South Korea.
You need an external forwarding system to act as a bridge between SAP S/4HANA and the NTS. This external
system should be able to communicate with both SAP S/4HANA and the NTS. SAP S/4HANA sends tax invoice
XML files to the external system. Then the external system forwards the XML files to the NTS for validation and
forwards validation statuses back to SAP S/4HANA. You can integrate SAP S/4HANA and your forwarding
system using SOA Manager.
The following authorization objects are required to perform actions on eDocuments:
● EDO_BUK (eDocument: Authorization for Company Code)

● EDO_PROC (eDocument: Authorization for Process & Process Step)
You should carry out the following Customizing activities:
● Define Interface Type for eDocument under Cross-Application Components General Application
Components eDocument General Settings
● Activate Source Type Documents for Company Code under Cross-Application Components General
Application Components eDocument General Settings

● Assign eDocument Type to Accounting Document Type under Cross-Application Components General
Application Components eDocument General Settings
● Determine Values for Tax Code under Financial Accounting (New) Financial Accounting Global Settings
(New) Tax on Sales/Purchases Basic Settings South Korea Tax Invoices
In addition, you can implement your own logic for eDocument processing by using the Business Add-In
Enhancements for eDocument (EDOC_ADAPTOR). You can find it in Customizing for Cross-Application
Components under General Application Functions eDocument General Settings Business Add-Ins .
Related Information
eDocument for South Korea
15.16.2 Finance
15.16.2.1 Value-Added Tax (VAT)
You can use the Run Compliance Reports app to generate the Value-Added Tax (VAT) reports that fulfill the
requirements of the government in South Korea. Apart from the existing features, the report also generates a
new file Acquisition Statement of Depreciation Assets in TXT format. This file classifies the depreciation asset
categories into Buildings and Structures, Machinery, Vehicles, and Others. It includes the information of number
of acquisition item, net amount of each asset category, tax amount of each asset category, and total of all the
categories.
Technical Details
Type Changed
Application Component FI-LOC-FI-KR
(Financials South Korea)

Related Information
VAT Declaration
15.16.2.2 Cash Flow Statements
You can use the Run Compliance Reports app to generate the cash flow statements that fulfill the requirements
of the government in South Korea. You can use the direct method or indirect method and submit it by year to
the tax authorities.
Technical Details
Type New
Application Component FI-LOC-FI-KR
(Financials South Korea)
Related Information
Cash Flow Statements
15.17 Spain
15.17.1 Finance
15.17.1.1 Update in Tax Registers
Real Decree 596/2016 in Spain approved a new VAT system called Suministro Inmediato de Información(SII).
Therefore, the Modelo 340 form is no longer required. This means that the Generate Form 340 app is no longer
supported.

For the tax register books for Spain, the Electronic Tax Register Books with SII solution is available. We
recommend that you switch to this solution as soon as possible.
Technical Details
Type Changed
Functional Localization Localized for Spain
J58 (Accounting and Financial Close )
Application Component FI-LOC-FI-ES
Additional Details
If you need to create an incident regarding this feature, you can also use component XX-CSC-ES-FI.
The Electronic Tax Register Books with SII solution replaces the Generate Form 340 app. The Generate Form
340 app is no longer supported and will be removed from the system in one of the next Feature Packs of release
SAP S/4HANA 1909. We recommend that you switch to the successor solution as soon as possible.
Please note that as of release SAP S/4HANA 1909 the Generate Form 340 app will be deleted from the General
Ledger - Reporting for Spain (SAP_FIN_BC_GL_REPORTING_ES) business catalog.

15.18 Switzerland
15.18.1 Finance
The VAT return functionality for Switzerland has been enhanced by providing the following reporting activities:
● Manage Tax Items

● Post Tax Payables
The VAT Return report generates now an XML file to comply with the newest legal requirements.
Furthermore, corrections to an already completed VAT return have been enabled by creating a new correction
run phase.
You generate the VAT Return for Switzerland using the Run Compliance Reports app.
Technical Details
Type Changed
Functional Localization Localized for Switzerland
Application Component FI-LOC-FI-CH
Additional Details
If you need to create an incident regarding this feature, you can also use component XX-CSC-CH-FI.
In order to generate the XML file mentioned above, you have to perform the following customizing steps:
1. Go to Customizing (SPROtransaction) under Financial Accounting Advance Compliance Reporting

Setting Up Your Compliance Reporting
2. In the Set Properties of the Reporting Activity activity, limit the validity of the CH_VAT_DCL_2018_V0_S
activity key. You do this by changing the Use Until date to 31.12.2018.

 Note
The CH_VAT_DCL_2018_V0_S activity key corresponds to the old output version with PDF.
3. In the Enter Parameters Specific to Reporting Entity activity, enter a parameter, for example,
CH_VAT_COMPANY_NAME.
Related Information
VAT Return
15.18.1.2 QR-Bill in Accounts Payable
With this feature, you can use a new payment slip type that replaces the inpayment slips (ISR). This new
payment slip contains not only billing data, but also integrated payment details, a QR code, and a receipt. This
new payment slip type is called QR-bill. The current solution is available in the purchase-to-pay process (in the
Accounts Payable component) only.
Technical Details
Type New
Functional Localization Localized for Switzerland
Application Component FI-LOC-FI-CH (Financials Switzerland)
Additional Details
The QR-bill contains the QR-IBAN number: the International Bank Account Number (IBAN) that identifies the
vendor’s international bank account number that is used during a payment transaction. The QR-IBAN contains
the QR-IID (bank identification) in positions 5-9, using a number range from 30000 through 31999. QR-IBAN
must be used for payments with a structured reference. The formal structure of this IBAN corresponds to the
rules defined in ISO 13616.

Related Information
Processing QR-Bills
15.19 Thailand
15.19.1 Finance
15.19.1.1 Branch Code
In Thailand, a customer or supplier may have many branches depending on the various locations from where
they operate from. A branch code is typically a 4-digit or a 5-digit code assigned by the Revenue Department in
Thailand to uniquely identify each branch of a customer or supplier.
The Branch code can be maintained for each business partner master data and the system displays this code
at the time of posting sales order, MM invoice, or FI invoice. In case a customer or supplier does not have a
branch you can maintain 00000 or 0000 which represents a head office.
Technical Details
Type New
Functional Localization Localization for Thailand
Application Component FI-LOC-FI-TH
Additional Details
The Branch Code and Branch Code Description fields have been enabled for the following apps:
● Clear Incoming Payments

● Clear Outgoing Payments
● Display Customer List
● Display Supplier List
● Manage Customer Down Payment Requests

● Manage Customer Line Items
● Manage Supplier Down Payment Requests
● Manage Supplier Line Items
● Post General Journal Entries
● Post Incoming Payments
● Post Outgoing Payments
● Reprocess Bank Statement Items
Effects On Data Transfer
You need to maintain branch codes in the master data in the Maintain Business Partner app or in Master
Records for accounts receivable or accounts payable in SAP Easy Access menu. Alternatively, you can migrate
the brands codes using the migration template in the Migration Cockpit.
Related Information
Branch Code
15.19.1.2 Withholding Tax Report - 50BIS
The Thailand Withholding Tax - PND50BIS report has been enhanced to provide you the ability to generate a
report with the information collected from payment documents for business partners. You use the Run
Advanced Compliance Reports (tile title Run Compliance Reports) app to generate Thailand withholding tax
report.
Technical Details
Type New
Functional Localization Localized for Thailand
Application Component FI-AP-AP-Q1

Related Information
Withholding Tax - 50BIS Report
15.19.1.3 Withholding Tax Report - PND2
The Thailand Withholding Tax - PND2 report has been enhanced to provide you the ability to generate a report
with the information collected from payment documents for business partners. You use the Run Advanced
Compliance Reports (tile title Run Compliance Reports) app to generate Thailand withholding tax report.
Technical Details
Type New
Related Information
Withholding Tax - PND2 Report
Technical Details
Type New

Related Information
Technical Details
Type New
Related Information

Technical Details
Type New
Related Information
15.19.1.7 VAT Return - PP30 Report
With this feature, you no longer have to enter operator's name every time you generate the Thailand VAT Return
report (P.P.30 Value Added Tax Return) in the Run Compliance Reports app. Instead, the operator's name can
be maintained for once as the value of the parameter FITH_OPERATOR_NAME (Name of VAT Operator) of the
reporting entity. This parameter supports 30 characters.
Technical Details
Type Changed

To maintain the operator's name for the reporting entity, use the Customizing activity Setting Up Your
Compliance Reporting under Financial Accounting under Advanced Compliance Reporting .
Related Information
VAT Return - PP30

Configuration for VAT Return - PP30
15.19.1.8 VAT Return - PP36 Report
With this feature, you can use the Run Compliance Reports app to generate the Thailand PP36 VAT Return
report (P.P.36 Value Added Tax Return).
Technical Details
Type New
Related Information
VAT Return - PP36

Configuration for VAT Return - PP36

15.19.1.9 Bills of Exchange Receivable
With this feature, you can use the following apps for the purpose of processing bills of exchange receivable in
Thailand:
● Receive Bills of Exchange

● Bill of Exchange List
● Bill of Exchange Transactions
● Reverse Bill of Exchange Transactions
● Printout of Transaction Records
Technical Details
Type New
Scope Item 1WQ (Bill of Exchange)
Additional Details
If you need to create an incident regarding this feature, use component XX-CSC-CN-CM-BOE.
Related Information
Receive Bills of Exchange

Bill of Exchange List
Bill of Exchange Transactions
Reverse Bill of Exchange Transactions
Printout of Transaction Records

15.20 Turkey
15.20.1 Finance
15.20.1.1 E-Ledger
This feature enables you to electronically generate the ledger report in a TEXT file. You can use the Run
Compliance Reports app to generate the report.
Technical Details
Type New
Functional Localization Localized for Turkey
Application Component XX-CSC-TR-FI
Related Information
E-Ledger Report
15.21 #United States
15.21.1 Finance
15.21.1.1 Bank Accounting
15.21.1.1.1 Check Management
15.21.1.1.1.1 Reprocess Lockbox Items
You can now reprocess lockbox items in the Reprocess Lockbox Items app.

Technical Details
Type New
Scope Item 1JT
Related Information
Reprocess Lockbox Items

16 Industries
16.1 Consumer
16.1.1 Retail and Fashion
16.1.1.1 Value Help Authorizations in Retail
SAP has refined the access protection of value help, resulting in modified authorization proposals.
Technical Details
Type Changed
Application Component LO-RFM (Retail and Fashion)
Additional Details
For a list of the affected applications (transaction codes) in SAP S/4HANA Retail for merchandise management
and SAP S/4HANA for fashion and vertical business, please see SAP Note 2588746 .
To ensure smooth system operation for business users, during the upgrade of your system, we strongly
recommend that you perform the postprocessing steps described in SAP Note 1539556 .

Industries PUBLIC 787
Related Information
16.1.1.2 Retail for Merchandise Management
16.1.1.2.1 Advanced Planning in Article Master Records
With this feature you can specify the settings used for advanced planning processes in article master records.
Technical Details
Type Changed
Application Component LO-RFM-MD-ART (Article)
LO-RFM-PP (Production Planning for Fashion)
Additional Details
In earlier releases, it was only possible to enable advanced planning and specify the corresponding settings in
the applications used for material management. It is now possible to do this during article master record
processing.
If you need to create an incident regarding this feature, use component LO-RFM-MD-ART.
In the article maintenance apps Create Article (MM41), Change Article, Maintain Article app (MM42), and Display
Article (MM43), the following screen sections and fields are now available.

788 PUBLIC Industries
Basic Data 2
Under Advanced Planning: Shelf Life and Storage, you can specify the following settings:
● Maturation Time
● Required Maximum Shelf Life
● Preferred Alternative UoM for Warehouse Operations
Logistics:DC 2
Under Advanced Planning: Control, you can enable advanced planning. Furthermore, you can specify the
settings to be used in advanced planning processes in the following screen sections:
● Advanced Planning: PP/DS

For example, you can assign a planning procedure to each article assigned to a specific distribution center
(location product) that you want to plan in Production Planning and Detailed Scheduling (PP/DS).
● Advanced Planning: Demand
For example, you can specify which pegging strategy is to be used in demand planning.
● Advanced Planning: Lot Size
For example, you can specify the target days' supply and the reorder day's supply in the planning of
standard lots.
● Advanced Planning: Goods Receipts and Goods Issues
For example, you can specify the processing times of good receipts and goods issues.
● Advanced Planning: Location-Dependent Shelf Life
You can specify whether the shelf life of a product should be dependent on its location in planning
processes.
16.1.1.2.2 Batch Management in Article Master Records
With this feature you can activate and deactivate batch management for articles at site level in article master
records.
Technical Details
Type Changed
LO-BM (Batches)
SAP S/4HANA 1809 FPS03

Additional Details
In earlier releases, it was only possible to activate and deactivate batch management for articles in the basic
data of article master records. It is now possible to activate and deactivate batch management for articles at
site level in article master records.
If you need to create an incident regarding this feature, use component LO-RFM-MD-ART.
In the Create Article app (MM41) and the Change Article, Maintain Article app (MM42), in the Logistics: DC view
and the Logistics: Store view, you can now set and change the Batch management requirement indicator. In
these views, the indicator is set by default in the following cases:
● Batch management is activated in the Basic Data view for an article

● Batch management is activated for the corresponding reference site
● Batch management has not been deactivated for a site in Customizing
If the level at which batch numbers are unique is specified in Customizing as either Batch unique at material
level or Batch unique at client level for a material, in article maintenance, you can now do the following:
● Activate and deactivate batch management in the Basic Data view by using the Batch management
requirement indicator.
This setting is applied to reference distribution centers and stores when they are assigned to an article
master record.
● Activate and deactivate batch management in the Logistics: DC or Logistics: Store view for a reference site.
This setting is applied later when distribution centers or stores are assigned to articles based on a
reference site.
● Activate and deactivate batch management in the Logistics: DC or Logistics: Store view for a specific
distribution center or store.
If the batch level specified in Customizing is Batch unique at plant level, the same logic applies; however, it is
not possible to activate batch management in the Basic Data view.
The behavior described is also reflected in ALE data transfer, that is, the same logic is applied to reference
handling or considering the default batch settings at plant level.
You specify the level at which batch numbers are unique in Customizing for Logistics – General under Batch
Management Specify Batch Level and Activate Status Management .

You can specify that batch management is deactivated for a site by default in Customizing for Logistics –
General under Batch Management Specify Batch Management Default by Plant by setting the Batch
Management Not Active by Default indicator. If this indicator is set for a site, this site will not inherit the batch
management setting from the article basic data or the article/reference site data. However, users can manually
override this Customizing setting in article maintenance by setting the Batch management requirement
indicator at site level.
More Information
● SAP Note 2758033

● SAP Note 2774749
● SAP Note 2787153
● SAP Note 2793371
16.1.1.2.3 Enterprise Search for Retail Business Objects
With this feature you can search for sites (stores and distribution centers), promotions, and allocation tables.
From the search results area, you can then navigate to a detailed overview of a specific retail business object.
Technical Details
Type New
Application Component LO-RFM-MD-ESH (Enterprise Search)
LO-RFM-MD-PR (Seasonal / Promotion Planning)
LO-RFM-MD-SIT (Sites)
LO-RFM-PUR-AL (Allocation)

Additional Details
The SAP Fiori launchpad offers an enterprise search function that searches across all apps and business
objects. The search icon is displayed at the top of the screen. When you click the search icon, the type selector
and the search field appear.
You can search all objects or use the type selector to search only for objects of a particular type. You then enter
your search query in the search field. The search results area lists all objects that match your search query. You
can expand and collapse the display area of search results to view more or fewer details.
If you need to create an incident with regard to using enterprise search to search for retail business objects, use
component LO-RFM-MD-ESH.
You can now use the type selector to restrict the search to the following retail business objects:
● Stores and distribution centers (objects of type Site)

● Promotions (objects of type Promotion)
● Allocation tables (objects of type Allocation table)
From the search results area, you can navigate to the object page of a particular retail business object.
Depending on the authorization roles to which you are assigned, navigation shortcuts to apps that can handle
the business object are also displayed. Furthermore, you can change the sort order, or switch to a table
representation with the option to show or hide specific columns.
 Note
If you are not authorized to view a business object in the system, you will not be able to find it by using any
search functions. Furthermore, you might need specific permissions or roles to access certain objects.
For information about configuring the enterprise search function, see Setting up Enterprise Search.
16.1.1.2.4 List Product: Exclude Local Assortments
With this feature you can exclude local assortments from listing in the front-end of List Product. This enables
master data specialists to decide whether to list local and/or general assortments.

Technical Details
Type New
Application Component LO-MD-RFM-LST
On the user interface of List Product, the List Also Local Assortments checkbox was added. This enables the
user to decide whether to exclude local assortments for listing.
If the List Also Local Assortments checkbox is set, local assortments are listed. If the checkbox is not set, local
assortments are excluded from listing.
The default value for the checkbox on the front-end is specified in the back-end with the Local Assortments
Listing checkbox in Customizing for Logistics General under Basic Data Retail General Control, Retail
Master Data .
Related Information
List Product
16.1.1.2.5 Manage Season Completeness: Shared Strategy
By using shared strategy, articles that are common between different seasons and that are ordered, will be
considered for season completeness of all seasons they are shared between (under the same grouping rule
value) and the details of shared orders will be displayed in the Shared tab.

Technical Details
Type New
Application Component LO-RFM-CA-SE
The SAP Fiori app Manage Season Completeness is assigned to the predefined role
SAP_BR_ORD_FULLFILMNT_SPE_R for the SAP Fiori launchpad.
For information about assigning roles, please see the UI Technology Guide for SAP S/4HANA at https://
help.sap.com/s4hana_op_1909 under Product Documentation.
16.1.1.2.6 Mass Season Processing: Automation of Season

Data Change
For mass season processing, season data change must be captured. With this feature, relevant order
documents will be updated based on season data change.
Technical Details
Type New

For example, a season that was valid for a list of customers (ex: CUST01, CUST02), is extended for an additional
customer (for example CUST03). In Mass Season Processing, you can select the option to update all the order
documents which will be affected by this season change. In the sense, all the order documents for the
customer (CUST03) will be considered for season redetermination and the relevant document items will be
updated (items where seasons are applicable, must be considered).
Similarly, if sales area, region, article assignment etc. are changed for an existing season, then those will be
considered for redetermining appropriate seasons.
You have activated the change pointers for message types (RFM_SEASON_PO, RFM_SEASON_PUR_CNTRT,
RFM_SEASON_SD) in Customizing for Cross-Application Components under Predefined ALE Business
Processes Logistics Logistics <-> External Systems External Transportation Planning Systems Activate
Change Management for Master Data .
16.1.1.2.7 Move Products with RFID
With this feature you can move RFID tagged products from one storage location to another storage location,
identify the collected products and adjust the stock immediately in both storage locations. The SAP Fiori app
Move Products with RFID simplifies all steps involved in moving products between two storage locations by the
use of radio frequency identification (RFID) technology. This enables store associates to move products in a
store more efficiently.
Technical Details
Type New
Application Component LO-RFM-STO-FIO

Additional Details
The app can only be used with an RFID reader as the hardware input device. For more information about how to
configure your RFID reader, see RFID Reader under Related Links.
You make the basic settings for Move Products with RFID in Customizing for Logistics – General under Store
Operations In-Store Merchandise and Inventory Management – UI5 Apps Move Products with RFID .
Related Information
Move Products with RFID

RFID Reader
16.1.1.2.8 RFID Reader: Signal Strength
With this feature you can adjust the signal strength of an RFID reader that is used in combination with the
following RFID-enabled SAP Fiori apps: Transfer Products, Count Products with RFID, and Move Products with
RFID. You can select three different signal strengths for RFID reader and adapt them to the specific use cases
of the apps.
Technical Details
Type New
You can adapt the default signal strength of RFID readers that are used in combination with RFID-enabled apps
on the user interface of the apps in a popover under Signal Strength. You can select the following signal

strengths: Low, Medium, or High. If the signal strength was adapted successfully, a message toast appears. The
signal strength selected on the front-end of the app overrides the default signal strength selected in the back-
end until the app is restarted.
You can select a default signal strength for RFID readers that are used in combination with RFID-enabled SAP
Fiori apps in the basic customizing settings of the apps under RFID Reader Signal Strength. For Transfer
Products, for example, you can select the default signal strength in Customizing for Logistics General under
Store Operations In-Store Merchandise and Inventory Management - UI5 Apps Transfer Products Define
Basic Settings for Transfer Products Transfer Products Basic Customizing Settings .
Select one of the following signal strengths in RFID Reader Signal Strength: Low, Medium, or High.
The default signal strength will be used when you start RFID-enabled SAP Fiori apps. After that you can change
the signal strength on the user interface of the app. The signal strength selected on the front-end of the app
overrides the default signal strength selected in the back-end of the app until the app is restarted.
If you do not change the signal strength in Customizing of the apps, the following default signal strengths will
be used:
● Transfer Products: Low

● Count Products with RFID: Medium
● Move Products with RFID: Low
Related Information
RFID Reader
Transfer Products
Move Products with RFID
Count Products with RFID
16.1.1.2.9 Schedule Season Completeness
With the apps Schedule Season Completeness - Sales Documents and Schedule Season Completeness - Stock
Transport Orders, you can create and schedule background jobs to update the sales documents or the stock
transport orders for season completeness for which the season completeness indicator is set. The apps
monitor the current status of jobs and notify users when a job is completed. You can view the results of the
season completeness check in the application logs.

Technical Details
Type New
Available As Of SAP S/4HANA1909
The SAP Fiori apps Schedule Season Completeness - Sales Documents and Schedule Season Completeness -
Stock Transport Orders are assigned to the predefined role SAP_BR_ORD_FULLFILMNT_SPE_R for the SAP
Fiori launchpad.
Related Information
Schedule Season Completeness - Sales Documents

Schedule Season Completeness - Stock Transport Orders
16.1.1.2.10 Schedule Season Processing
With this app, you can create and schedule background jobs to redetermine the assigned seasons in existing
sales documents, purchase documents and stock transfer documents. The season redetermination reflects
any changes made to the current season master data since the previous season determination for a given
article. You can view the status and results of the season redetermination in the application log.
Technical Details
Type New

The SAP Fiori app Schedule Season Processing is assigned to the predefined role
SAP_BR_ORD_FULLFILMNT_SPE_Rfor the SAP Fiori launchpad.
Related Information
Schedule Season Processing
16.1.1.2.11 Season Master Data: Season Category
With this feature, you can specify a Season Category while creating and/or changing seasons. The Season
Category will be used as filtering criteria and as additional information in documents and reports. However, the
Season Category is not used in season determination
Create and/or change time periods with the following additional fields: Partner Function and Preferred Delivery
Date.
The value specified under customer field will be considered based on the partner function. By default, it will be
considered as Sold-To party.
Technical Details
Type New

Related Information
Season Master Data
16.1.1.2.12 DRFOUT Outbound Implementation for POS
You can use new outbound implementation via transaction DRFOUT (instead of WES outbound implementation
or transaction WESOUT) to transfer the product merchandize master data from SAP S/4HANA system to
point-of-sale (POS) systems. The data replication framework (DRF) configuration offers a new business object
ProductMerchandiseView. Using DRFOUT transaction you to create one or more outbound messages and
send them in bulk to the target POS systems.
Technical Details
Type New
Application Component LO-RFM-IFC-OUT
Additional Details
If you need to create an incident regarding this feature, use component LO-RFM-IFC.
If you have more than one POS systems in your system landscape, you need to define a new replication model
in DRF customizing. It is possible to send the master data to different business systems within one replication
model; however, we recommend installing different POS servers for a different group of stores. This means you
need to define a replication model per target POS system.

As an administrator you can define the replication model directly in the corresponding IMG or by using
maintenance transaction /DRFIMG.
Related Information
Merchandize Data Replication in POS System

SOAP API for Product Merchandise View [page 801]
16.1.1.2.13 SOAP API for Product Merchandise View
With the asynchronous outbound service Product Merchandise View – Replicate

(ProductMerchandiseViewReplicationBulkRequest_Out), you can send product master data, sales
price information, and additional information, such as purchase price information and bills of material, to point-
of-sale (POS) systems.
The bulk structure of the message type allows you to transfer a larger number of product instances in one
message. The replication process needs to be triggered by a corresponding outbound implementation from an
outbound replication framework such as the Data Replication Framework (DRF).
Technical Details
Type New
Related Information
Product Merchandise View – Replicate

16.1.1.2.14 Transfer Products: External IDs for Handling Units
With this feature, store associates can provide external IDs for handling units (Boxes) in Transfer Products when
sending products from a store to another store or distribution center.
Technical Details
Type New
Store associates can specify an external handling unit ID on the user interface of Transfer Products. The
external handling unit ID is displayed on the user interface of the app in a popover under Handling Unit.
To specify an external handling unit ID on the front-end of Transfer Products, implement controller extension
point extHookGetExternalHandlingUnitNumber. For more information, see the SAP Fiori apps reference
library at https://fioriappslibrary.hana.ondemand.com/sap/fix/externalViewer/index.html?appId=F2449
under Implementation Information Extensibility UI Controller Extensions .
Related Information
Transfer Products
16.1.1.2.15 Transfer Products: Multiple Storage Locations
With this feature, store associates can specify in Transfer Products from which storage location in a store
products will are sent to another store or distribution center.

Technical Details
Type New
You specify a sending storage location on the user interface of Transfer Products when you create a new
transfer under Sending Storage Location. If a store has only one storage location, this storage location is used
as sending storage location per default. If a store has at least two storage locations, you must specify one of the
storage locations as sending storage location. The sending storage location is displayed in the header of a
transfer.
Related Information
Transfer Products
16.1.1.3 Fashion and Vertical Business
16.1.1.3.1 VAS Plant Capability
With this feature you can define all the possible plants for a VAS service-subservice combination which can
cater to these services during the order lifecycle process. This feature allows you to maintain the valid plant
details for VAS Service – VAS Subservices, that is, whether a plant can cater to this VAS service-subservice
combination within the documents.
Technical Details
Type New

Application Component LO-RFM-SD
LO-RFM-PUR
Additional Details
You can activate the verifiability of the valid plant details in the sales order and stock transport order
documents and issue a corresponding warning message.
Creating a delivery is not allowed for sales orders and stock transport orders that contain non-capable value-
added services.
To use this feature, you need to activate the business function ISR_RETAILSYSTEM.
For more information on the business function, see Retail.
The Enable VAS Plant Capability Check checkbox allows you to validate VAS capability for a plant when VAS is
entered manually or during VAS determination.
For sales documents, select the Enable VAS Plant Capability Check checkbox in Customizing for Sales and
Distribution under Sales Sales Documents Sales Document Header Maintain Sales Document Types for
Fashion Management .
For deliveries, select the Enable VAS Plant Capability Check checkbox in Customizing for Logistics Execution
under Shipping Deliveries Define Delivery Types for Fashion Management
Related Information
VAS Plant Capability

16.1.1.3.2 Purchase Order Generation
With this feature you can transform or procure the total sales demand of seasonal products for the wholesale
and retail channel by generating one or more purchase orders based on the rules.
Technical Details
Type New
Application Component LO-RFM-PUR
Additional Details
The Purchase Order Generation Tool is a mass procurement tool to generate purchase orders based on actual
demand coming from sales events or sales campaigns and assortment planning.
To use the Purchase Order Generation Tool, on the SAP Easy Access Retailing (transaction W10M) menu,
choose Cross-Application Functions Purchase Order Generation Purchase Order Generation Tool .
You can directly access the report using the transaction FSH_POGT.
The Purchase Order Generation related configuration is available in Customizing for Logistics – General under
Fashion Management Cross-Applications Purchase Order Generation .

Related Information
Purchase Order Generation
16.1.1.3.3 Alignment of Account Assigned Purchase

Requisitions to Purchase Orders
With this feature you can assign open account assigned purchase requisitions to available purchase orders in
the system. You enable the system to consume existing purchase orders efficiently to fulfil the demand of open
account assigned purchase requisitions instead of creating new account assigned purchase order items every
time.
Technical Details
Type New
You can use the PO Workbench to align open account assigned purchase requisitions to freely available POs
based on the configured business rules defined in the system.
To use PO Workbench, on the SAP Easy Access Retailing (transaction W10M) menu, choose Cross-Application
Functions Materials Management Purchase Order Mass Maintenance .
You can directly access the report using the transaction FSH_PWB.

Related Information
Alignment of Account Assigned Purchase Requisitions to Purchase Orders
16.1.1.3.4 Multi-Level Contract Enablement
With this feature you can create multiple purchase contracts with reference to a purchase contract.
Technical Details
Type New
Additional Details
With this feature, you can create multi-level contracts with various levels of detail for an article in various
planning phases. With this capability, you can reserve capacity of vendor early in the planning phase, with the
visibility of very few details like the generic article and the quantity in a referenced contract.
You can enable the multi-level contract feature in Customizing for Materials Management under Purchasing
Contract Maintain Document Types for Fashion .

Related Information
Multi-Level Contract Enablement
16.1.1.3.5 Contract Consumption of Structured Article

Components
With this feature, you can enable the system to consume structured article components present inside the
purchase order from the reference purchase contract items.
Technical Details
Type New
The Allow Consumption of Contract checkbox in Customizing for Materials Management under Purchasing
Purchase Order Maintain Purchasing Document Types for Fashion Management allows the structured
article components to consume the reference contract items.
The Allow Determination of Contract checkbox in Customizing for Materials Management under
Purchasing Purchase Order Maintain Purchasing Document Types for Fashion Management enables the
automatic determination of relevant purchase contract items for the components of structured articles.

Related Information
Contract Consumption of Structured Article Components
16.1.1.3.6 OData Service for Alignment of Purchase

Requisition Item to Purchase Order Item
With this feature you can use API_ALIGN_PURREQN service interface to align an account assigned third-party
order (TPO) or individual purchase order (PTO) purchase requisition item to an existing purchase order item.
Technical Details
Type New
Additional Details
You must provide the necessary input details such as purchase requisition, purchase requisition item, purchase
order and purchase order item in the interface. Before saving, the service validates the information to ensure
the consistency of the parameters.
You can also use this service to align multiple purchase requisition items to a single or multiple purchase order
items.

Related Information
OData Service for Alignment of Purchase Requisition Item to Purchase Order Item
16.1.1.3.7 VAS Enhancement in OData API for Deliveries
With this feature you can use the properties added pertaining to value-added services related to inbound and
outbound deliveries for SAP S/4HANA for fashion and vertical business in Delivery APIs.
Technical Details
Type Changed
Application Component LO-RFM-CA
Additional Details
Value-added service has been added to the following Delivery APIs:
● API_INBOUND_DELIVERY_SRV_0002
● API_OUTBOUND_DELIVERY_SRV_0002
Related Information
Inbound Deliveries - Read, Create, Update, and Delete

API_INBOUND_DELIVERY_SRV - A_InbDeliveryValAddedSrvc

Outbound Deliveries - Read, Create, Update, and Delete
API_OUTBOUND_DELIVERY_SRV - A_OutbDeliveryValAddedSrvc
16.1.1.3.8 Schedule Alignment
With this transactional application you can schedule jobs to execute the alignment runs based on the
predefined alignment business rules.
Technical Details
Type New
Use the following business catalog, group, and role to access the corresponding apps from SAP Fiori home
page:
Business Group Business Catalog Business Role
SAP_RFM_BCG_PURCHASER SAP_RFM_BC_PURCHASER SAP_BR_PURCHASER_RFM
Related Information
Schedule Alignment
16.1.1.3.9 Monitor Alignment
With this transactional application you can view and analyze the results of background alignment runs that
were scheduled using the Schedule Alignment application.

Technical Details
Type New
Additional Details
The Monitor Alignment application provides you all the information relevant to the above alignment run of
different purchase requisition documents.
page:
Related Information
Monitor Alignment
16.1.1.3.10 Schedule Deletion of Alignment Run Logs
With this transactional application you can create and schedule jobs to delete the logs of different alignment
runs.

Technical Details
Type New
Additional Details
Once the logs have been deleted, the results for these runs are not displayed in the Monitor Alignment and
Schedule Alignment applications.
page:
Related Information
Schedule Deletion of Alignment Run Logs
16.1.1.3.11 Workflow Events Handling in Supply Assignment
Use workflow events to trigger the tasks when the orders are unassigned or partially unassigned in cross
applications. Additionally, system triggers the workflow events when the orders are deviated from the
exception rule triggered in the background mode of Insight to Action (ITA) tool in supply assignment.

Technical Details
Type New
Application Component LO-RFM-ARN
Additional Details
If you need to create an incident regarding this feature, use component LO-RFM-ARN.
Workflow events are part of SAP Business Workflow.
Activate Supply Assignment (ARun) (SUPPLY_ASSIGNMENT_01) business function to use this feature.
Related Information
Workflow Events
16.1.1.3.12 Configure Supply Sort Rules
This transactional application allows you to create static or dynamic sort attributes for a supply sort rule. The
supply sort rules defined using this app are used during supply assignment in backorder processing (BOP),
insight to action (ITA), or immediate assignment processes.

Technical Details
Type New
Additional Details
You can access these apps from SAP Fiori launchpad using the following business catalog, group, and role.
● Business Catalog: SAP_RFM_BC_ORDR_FF_MNGR

● Business Group: SAP_RFM_BCG_ORDR_FF_MNGR
● Business Role: SAP_BR_ORDER_FULFILLMNT_MNGR or SAP_BR_ORDER_FULFILLMNT_MNGR_R
Using ARUN_STKSORT transaction, you used to create static supply sort rules. The user interface for
transaction ARUN_STKSORT has been reworked for usability reasons and the new Configure Supply Sort Rule
app allows you to create both static and dynamic sort rules.
Related Information
Configure Supply Sort Rule
16.1.1.3.13 Dynamic Supply Prioritization
You can use this feature to prioritize different supply types so that the supply with the highest priority is
assigned first. Dynamic supply prioritization is applicable to the physical supply and the future supply.

Technical Details
Type New
Additional Details
Related Information
Supply Sorting Rules
16.1.1.3.14 Supply Demand Overview for All Documents
With this analytical application you can view and analyze the overall situation of all the supply and demand
documents.
Technical Details
Type New

Additional Details
● Business Catalog: SAP_RFM_BC_SUPPDEMNDOVW

● Business Group: SAP_RFM_BCG_SUPPDEMNDOVW
● Business Role: SAP_BR_ORDER_FULFILLMNT_MNGR_R
Related Information
Supply Demand Overview - All Documents
16.1.1.3.15 Schedule Temporary Assignments
With this transactional app you can configure and schedule jobs for temporary assignments.
Technical Details
Type New
Additional Details
● Business Catalog: SAP_RFM_BC_SUPPDEMNDOVW

● Business Group: SAP_RFM_BCG_SUPPDEMNDOVW
● Business Role: SAP_BR_ORDER_FULFILLMNT_MNGR_R

Related Information
Schedule Temporary Assignments
16.2 Discrete Manufacturing
16.3 Energy & Natural Resources
16.3.1 Oil & Gas
16.3.1.1 Logistics Cost
With this feature you can calculate the logistics costs by simulating a shipment cost document. Additional
customizing is provided so that:
● If relevant partners are not known, a default pricing procedure can be assigned per shipment cost item.
● Fields related to partners in the nomination can be mapped to shipment cost partner roles.
The logistics cost is integrated with the Scheduling Assistant, Inventory Planning Workbench (IPW) and Supply
Chain Visualization applications.
Technical Details
Type New
Application Component IS-OIL-DS-TSW
You can make the settings for logistics cost in Customizing under:
● Industry Solution Oil & Gas (Downstream) TD (Transportation and Distribution) TD Bulk Shipment
Shipment Costs- Maintain item category with pricing procedure for logistics cost calculation.

● Industry Solution Oil & Gas (Downstream) TSW (Trader's and Scheduler's Workbench) Basic
Functions Defaulting Fields to Partner Functions for Logistics Cost Simulation.
16.3.1.2 Scheduling Assistant
With this feature you can fulfill any given demand either a nomination or simulation. This app presents the
scheduler with a list of the feasible sources of supply. The list shows whether the source is from own stock or
from a purchase, the material or purchase price, the associated simulated logistics costs, the duration based
on mode of transport and the proposed loading date. The list is ranked by cost. The scheduler can make the
final decision by selecting from the sources of supply suggested by the app to fulfill the demand and complete
the respective nomination or simulation in the backend system.
The feature is also integrated with Inventory Planning Workbench (IPW), where the same functions can be
invoked by selecting a nomination demand line or simulation.
Technical Details
Type New
Additional Details
You can also use this app to perform following functions
● To view the list of open demands from various sources.

● Provides an option to capture a new demand line
You make settings in Customizing for Scheduling Assistant under Industry Solution Oil & Gas (Downstream)
TSW (Trader's and Scheduler's Workbench) Nomination Fiori Apps for Trader's and Scheduler's
Workbench Scheduling Assistant Define Load/Discharge Movements.

The BAdI can be implemented in Customizing under Industry Solution Oil & Gas (Downstream) TSW
(Trader's and Scheduler's Workbench) Nomination Fiori Apps for Trader's and Scheduler's Workbench
Scheduling Assistant Business Add-Ins.
To use Scheduling Assistant the following configuration must be maintained:
● Maintain Default Pricing procedure for each item category under

Industry Solution Oil & Gas (Downstream) TD (Transportation and Distribution) TD Bulk Shipment
Shipment Costs Maintain Item Category with Pricing Proc. for Logistics Cost Calculation
● Maintain Default fields for Partner function under
Industry Solution Oil & Gas (Downstream) TSW (Trader's and Scheduler's Workbench) Basic
Functions Defaulting Fields to Partner Functions for Logistics Cost Simulation
16.3.1.3 Laytime and Demurrage
With this feature you can initiate the accrual process for the calculated demurrage amount. Once the
demurrage amount is calculated in the system ,negotiation starts for settlement of demurrage amount. During
the negotiation phase, accruals will be done for the amount calculated as demurrage. The process is integrated
with the standard accrual engine. An accrual object is created based on the trip header and item number. The
accrual process begins based on the predefined set of rules for the accrual object.
A claims object OIT01_CLAIM is provided to capture the demurrage claims and correspondence.
Technical Details
Type Changed
Application Component IS-OIL-DS-CMH
You can make the settings for Accruals in Customizing under, Financial Accounting (New) General Ledger
Accounting (New) Business Transactions Accruals Management Accruals Mangement with the Accrual
Engine

16.3.1.4 Supply Chain Visualization
This feature enables you to view:
● The inventory graph of Heel, Capacity, Target and Safety Inventory

● Inventory calculation per valuation type
● Open purchase and sale contract at location and their breakdown as per quantity schedule
● Handling rebrand materials and its intergation with IPW
● Shipment cost
● Combined view of nomination and simulation
Technical Details
Type Changed
16.3.1.5 Mobile Event Data Capture
With this feature you can use the hybrid mobile application to capture the details of actuals events for a
nomination line item. This app is useful to the terminal operator who captures actual event for load or
discharge line item and sends the information to backend system where it gets updated in the corresponding
nomination line item. This has offline features where the nominations downloaded when online is captured with
the details of actual events even as the mobile device is offline in the field.
Technical Details
Type New

Additional Details
You can use this fetaure to perform the following functions:
● To update the existing event with actual details.

● Create new events for selected nomination line item.
16.3.1.6 Integration of Pricing based Exchange Fees with SAP

Commodity Management
This feature enables you to set-up the exchanges fees within standard pricing conditions in sales and
purchasing documents. It provides an integration option into Commodity Management (CM) and the optional
usage of the Commodity Pricing Engine (CPE) for stock-market related exchange fees. When using CPE,
Exchange Fees conditions are referenced to a statistical CPE condition in regular pricing and
ExchangeAgreements are marked as pricing based fee in the Exchange Header.
Technical Details
Type New
Application Component IS-OIL-DS-EXG

16.3.2 Utilities
16.3.2.1 Customer Management
16.3.2.1.1 Utilities Sales Contract Overview
This feature enables you to display a list of utilities sales contracts for a business partner and a premise as
follows:
● Visualize all utilities sales contracts as well as the respective contract details such as contract data and
product information.
● Visualize all items of a utilities sales contract in a hierarchical tree.
● Create new utilities sales contracts.
● Use sort orders to sort a current result list.
● Use filters to filter a current result list.
● Start guided processes with one-click actions:
○ Move to another premise
○ Change product
○ New contract item
○ End contract item
● Sorts, filters and one-click actions are fully configurable in Customizing without additional coding.
Technical Details
Type New
Application Component CRM-S4-IU
You make the basic settings for guided processes in Customizing under SAP Utilities Customer
Management Utilities Sales Contract Management General Process Definition .
You can change and configure the sorts, filters and one-click actions in the utilities sales contract overview in
Customizing under SAP Utilities Customer Management Settings for the Object Workbench Define
Object Hierarchy and Object Attributes .

Related Information
Utilities Sales Contract Management

Utilities Product Integration Layer
16.3.2.1.2 Utilities Sales Contract Management: Start

Contract
This feature enables you to start a new contract as follows:
● Select a business partner and a premise.

● Start the guided process New Contractin utilities sales contract overview.
● Select a contract start date an and a point of delivery.
● If the point of delivery is occupied, perform a forced move-out by selecting the flag for the checkbox Forced
Move-Out.
● Select a product.
● If it is a configurable product, then configure the product.
● Select a contract account.
● Check the entered data in a summary view.
● Save your entries and create a utilities sales contract. In addition, the system automatically creates an IS-U
contract and a move-in is performed.
Technical Details
Type New
Related Information
Start Contract

16.3.2.1.3 Utilities Sales Contract Management: Move to
Another Premise
This feature enables you to end contracts for a confirmed premise and then start contracts for a new premise
as follows:

● Select a utilities sales contract in utilities sales contract overview and start the guided process via one-click
action.
● Select a contract end date for the current utilities sales contract.
● Search for the new premise with HANA Free Text search.
● Select a contract start date and a point of delivery.
● If the point of delivery is occupied, perform a forced move-out by selecting the flag for the checkbox Forced
Move-Out.
● Select a product.
● If it is a configurable product, then configure the product.
● Select a contract account.
● Save your entries and create a new utilities sales contract item with the new end date.
In SAP IS-U a move-in and a move-out with all changes are performed automatically.
Technical Details
Type New
Related Information
Move to Another Premise


16.3.2.1.4 Utilities Sales Contract Management: Change
Product
This feature enables you to change the product assignment as follows:

● Select a utilities sales contract in utilities sales contract overview and start the guided process via one-click
action.
● Select a new product and a product change date.
● Save your entries and create a new utilities sales contract item which includes the changed product and
the new contract start date.
Technical Details
Type New
Related Information
Change Product
16.3.2.1.5 Utilities Sales Contract Management: End Contract
This feature enables you to end a contract as follows:

● Select a utilities sales contract item in utilities sales contract overview and start the guided process via
one-click action.
● Select a contract end date.
● Save your entries and end the utilities sales contract item. The IS-U contract is terminated automatically
and a move-out is performed.

Technical Details
Type New
Related Information
End Contract
16.3.2.1.6 Utilities Sales Contract Management: Simplified

Guided Procedure Configuration
This feature enables the administrator to configure the guided processes for utilities sales contract
management as follows:
● Create and define the necessary process steps for utilities sales contract management.
● Define the sequence of the individual steps.
● Flag the steps as mandatory or optional.
● Define dependencies by setting the requirements for individual steps.
● Guided procedures can be set up by Customizing without additional coding.
Technical Details
Type New

You make the basic settings for guided procedures in Customizing under SAP Utilities Customer
Management Utilities Sales Contract Management General Process Definition .
Related Information
Guided Procedure Configuration
16.3.2.1.7 Utilities Sales Contract Management: Summaries
This feature enables you to have a Customer 360° overview and process summaries during utilities sales
contract management which provides:
● Configurable Customer 360° BOL trees

● Business partner summary
● Process summary
● Content is dynamically generated during process
● Content is fully configurable without additional coding
Technical Details
Type New
The summary content is dynamically generated during a process and is configurable in Customizing under
SAP Utilities Customer Management Utilities Sales Contract Management General Process
Definition .
The summaries are configurable in transaction SO10 and can be assigned in the process Customizing settings
for Utilities Sales Contract Management.

You can change and configure the Customer 360° BOL trees in the utilities sales contract overview in
Customizing under SAP Utilities Customer Management Settings for the Object Workbench Define
Object Hierarchy and Object Attributes .
Related Information
Summaries
16.3.2.2 Contract Billing
16.3.2.2.1 Product Integration
16.3.2.2.1.1 Utilities Product Integration Layer
This feature enables you to use an interface to the SAP S/4HANA Utilities solution to automate the translation
of a commodity product defined in an external system into billing master data and sales master data in SAP S/
4HANA Utilities. Customers can use their existing rate category and billing schema by way of a framework that
enables flexible mapping between SAP S/4HANA Utilities rate operands and the attributes of the product. The
mapped product attributes are stored as operand values.
Technical Details
Type New
Application Component IS-U-BI-PI (Utilities Product Integration Layer)
Additional Details
● Enables product managers to create commodity products without dependency on IT billing experts
● Shortens the time-to-market for new commodity products by automating the manual steps required in
SAP S/4HANA Utilities

● Enables intuitive integration of external products tools into SAP S/4HANA Utilities
In Customizing, you can define the mapping of commodity product attributes to billing master data. For more
information, see Customizing for Define Mapping of Commodity Product Attributes to Billing Master Data under
SAP Utilities Contract Billing Product Integration .
Related Information
16.3.2.2.1.1.1 OData APIs – Utilities Product Integration Layer
With this feature you can use a service that enables operations for commodity product definition and billing
simulation.
Technical Details
Type New
Related Information
Utilities Product Integration Layer API

16.3.2.2.1.1.2 CDS Views for the Utilities Product Integration
Layer
CDS (Core Data Services) views are released for the Utilities Product Integration Layer.
Technical Details
Type New
Additional Details
● C_UtilitiesProduct
You can use this CDS view to obtain information about a utilities product.
● C_UtilsReferenceProduct
You can use this CDS view to obtain information about a reference product.
Related Information
C_UtilitiesProduct
C_UtilsReferenceProduct
16.3.2.3 Customer Service
16.3.2.3.1 S/4HANA Utilities Multichannel: Managing Utility

Contracts
This feature has been changed to enable the customer to manage their utilities sales contracts in the following
ways:
● Start a sales contract

● End a sales contract
Technical Details
Type Changed
Application Component IS-U-CS-MC
Related Information
SalesContract
EndSalesContract
16.3.3 Machine Learning for Implausible Meter Readings
This product feature provides specific capabilities to enable machine learning-based processing for implausible
meter readings. It is seamlessly integrated in meter reading processing in IS-U, learns from the meter reading
and consumption history, and provides the capability to determine a machine learning release confidence used
to automate the release of implausible meter readings.
Technical Details
Type New
Application Component IS-U-DM-MR

Additional Details
The predictive analytics scenario UTI_MR_IMPLAUSIBLE can be trained on your data and will produce a
consumable machine learning model. You can execute the prediction and release meter reading documents
automatically with a release confidence above a provided threshold. Several filters to search and limit the
processed meter readings can be applied, to manage the risk and meter reading segments to be included or
excluded. The release confidence is also provided in the Fiori app Resolve Implausible Meter Readings (F2185).
Roles and Business Catalog
The role Analytics Specialist (SAP_BR_ANALYTICS_SPECIALIST) is required to access the predictive scenario
and model, and for training and model evaluation using the predictive analytics apps.
The Fiori app Resolve Implausible Meter Readings is available for the role Meter Data Specialist (Utilities)
(SAP_BR_METERDATA_SPEC_ISU) and is assigned to the business catalog Utilities - Meter Reading
(SAP_ISU_BC_MTRD_SPECIALIST).
Related Links
For more information about this feature and the FIORI apps in the SAP Utilities area, see
● Machine Learning for SAP Utilities

● Resolve Implausible Meter Readings
16.3.4 Machine Learning for Outsorted Billing Documents
This product feature provides specific capabilities to enable machine learning-based processing for outsorted
billing documents. It is seamlessly integrated in the billing process in IS-U, learns from the billing document
history, and provides the capability to determine a machine learning release used to automate the release of
billing documents.
Technical Details
Type New

Application Component IS-U-BI
Additional Details
The predictive analytics scenario UTI_BI_OUTSORTED can be trained on your data and will produce a
consumable machine learning model. You can execute the prediction and automated release after billing is
finished. Several filters to search and limit the processed contracts can be applied, to manage the risk and
customer segments to be included or excluded. The release confidence is also provided in the Fiori app Resolve
Outsorted Billing Documents (F2986).
Roles and Business Catalog
The role Analytics Specialist (SAP_BR_ANALYTICS_SPECIALIST) is required to access the predictive scenario
and model, and for training and model evaluation using the predictive analytics apps.
The Fiori app Resolve Outsorted Billing Documents is available for the role Billing Specialist (Utilities)
(SAP_BR_BILLING_SPECIALIST_ISU) and is assigned to the business catalog Utilities Billing
(SAP_ISU_BC_BIL_SPECIALIST).
Related Links
For more information about this feature and the FIORI apps in the SAP Utilities area, see
● Machine Learning for SAP Utilities

● Resolve Outsorted Billing Documents

16.4 Financial Services
16.4.1 Banking
16.4.1.1 Reserve for Bad Debt (FS-RBD)
16.4.1.1.1 Realization of Legal Requirements (POCI, Novation,

Modification)
This function fulfills the following legal requirements according to IFRS9:
● Purchased or originated credit-impaired assets (POCI)

● Novation
● Modification
For more information, see Additional Details.
Technical Details
Type New
Application Component FS-RBD, FS-RBD-IPX
Required Business Functions /IBX/EAFS_RBD, /IBX/EAFS_RBD_IPX
Additional Details
● Purchased or originated credit-impaired (POCI) indicates financial transactions that were already
depreciated at purchase. These transactions need to be considered separately in their own risk provision
step. As a result of the retroactive implementation of the POCI handling, there are financial instruments in
the position from RBD and RBD-ipx that are not yet assigned to the correct risk provision step. A potential
risk provision position is cleared via the new flow type "Outflow Due to POCI", so that it is handled in the
POCI risk provision step. If a contract is assigned to the POCI risk provision step, it will no longer leave this
step, even if it fulfills the assignment criteria for another step.
● In the valuation of a financial instrument, if the present values of the cash flows differ by more than 10%, or
the currency changes, we speak of novation. A retirement of the risk provision due to novation is posted,

and an acquisition due to novation takes place. The acquisitions can take place in the same or a different
risk provision step. Since the contracts affected by the novation should be handled as new contracts, the
imported initial comparative data (initial rating and initial default probability) is redefined.
● In the valuation of a financial instrument, if the present values of the cash flows differ by 10% or less, we
speak of modification. A modification amount calculated outside of RBD is cleared with the imported time
slices, and so represents the change to the risk provision due to the modification. A reduction or increase
of the risk provision due to modification is posted.
16.4.1.2 Loans Management (FS-CML)
16.4.1.2.1 Customizing Structure
The structure of Customizing for Loans Management (FS-CML) has changed. To transfer these changes to the
project Customizing, you need to re-generate the project Customizing.
Technical Details
Type Changed
Application Component FS-CML (Loans Management)
New Customizing Activities
● SAP Banking Loans Management Functions Rollover:

○ Assign Rollover Tables to Cluster for Rating Procedure
● SAP Banking Loans Management Tools Intelligent Loans Management:
○ Define Internal Keys
○ Creation of Grouping Procedure and Object Settings
○ Default Setting For Grouping Procedure
● SAP Banking Loans Management BAdIs for Enterprise Services BAdIs for Business Object
LoanContract:
○ BAdIs for Interface Loan Contract In_V2
○ BAdI for CreateLoanContractAsBulk

○ BAdI for UpdateLoanContractAsBulk
○ BAdIs for Interface Loan Contract Out_V2
○ BAdI for ConfirmLoanContractCreationAsBulk
○ BAdI for ConfirmLoanContractUpdateAsBulk
○ BAdIs for Interface Manage Loan Contract In_V1
○ BAdI for RetrieveLoanContract
○ BAdI for CheckLoanContractCreation
○ BAdI for CheckLoanContractUpdate
● SAP Banking Loans Management BAdIs for Enterprise Services BAdIs for Business Object
LoanContractProlongationQuotation
○ BAdIs for Interface Manage Loan Contract Prolongation Quotation In_V1
○ BAdI for Check Quotation Creation
○ BAdI for Check Quotation Variant Creation
○ BAdI for CheckQuotationVariantUpdate
○ BAdI for Retrieve Prolongation Quotation
○ BAdIs for Interface Loan Contract Prolongation Quotation Action In_V1
○ BAdI for CheckQuotationAcceptance
○ BAdI for CalculateQuotationVariant
○ BAdI for Check Quotation Variant Rejection
○ BAdI for CheckQuotationRejection
○ BAdI for Retrieve Prolongation Quotation
○ BAdIs for Interface Loan Contract Prolongation Quotation In_V1
○ BAdI for CreateQuotationAsBulk
○ BAdI for CreateQuotationVariantAsBulk
○ BAdI for UpdateQuotationVariantAsBulk
○ BAdI for AcceptQuotationAsBulk
○ BAdI for RejectQuotationAsBulk
○ BAdI for RejectQuotationVariantAsBulk
○ BAdI for CancelQuotationAsBulk
○ BAdIs for Interface Loan Contract Prolongation Quotation Out_V1
○ BAdI for ConfirmQuotationCreationAsBulk
○ BAdI for ConfirmQuotationVariantCreationAsBulk
○ BAdI for ConfirmQuotationVariantUpdateAsBulk
○ BAdI for ConfirmQuotationAcceptanceAsBulk
○ BAdI for ConfirmQuotationRejectionAsBulk
○ BAdI for ConfirmQuotationVariantRejectionAsBulk
○ BAdI for ConfirmQuotationCancellationAsBulk
For more information, see the documentation for the Customizing activities.
Customizing Activities moved from CMS to CML
The following Customizing activities were moved from Collateral Management to SAP Banking Loans
Management Basic Settings Integration with Collateral Management :

● Define RFC Destination
● Assign RFC Destination to Default Implementation
● Map Product Category to Product Class
● Map Loan Attributes to Product
● Map Company Code to Receivable Organizational Unit
● Map FS Business Partner Roles to CM Partner Function
● Assign Access Mode to Credit System
16.4.1.2.2 Area Menu Structure
The SAP Easy Access menu for Loans Management has changed.
Technical Details
Type Changed
Application Component FS-CML (Loans Management
New Transactions
From the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Loans Management Environment Intelligent Loans
Management :
● Generate Machine Learning Objects

● Train Model
Related Information
Tailor-made Rollover Offer

16.4.1.2.3 Using Machine Learning in Mass Rollovers to Tailor
Rollover Offers
In SAP Loans Management for Banking, SAP S/4HANA edition, you can now use machine learning to offer your
customers tailored loan contract rollovers at the end of a fixed interest period after you have processed the
rollovers in a mass run. Although you can process a rollover individually, the mass run can also be used for
individual rollovers to save time and avoid manual processing. Since a mass rollover may not reflect the status
of the borrower in terms of rating, credit standing and payment behavior, two new reports are available that use
predictive analytics to help you make rollover offers based on these criteria.
These reports enable you to cluster borrower data and to analyze past payment behavior of a borrower, for
example, by looking at the number of dunning cases. This can support your bank's decision-making process in
determining whether a customer with excellent credit standing and payment behavior can be offered better
conditions; likewise it is easier to determine whether a customer needs to pay a surcharge as a result of poor
credit standing or previous bad payment behavior. Additionally, the intelligent mass run capabilities can help
you to reduce the number of individual rollovers that need to be processed.
Technical Details
Type New
Additional Details
To call these reports, choose Accounting Bank Applications Loans Management Environment
Intelligent Loans Management Generate Machine Learning Objects and Train Model from the SAP Easy
Access screen.
For more information about the SAP HANA Predictive Analytics Library, see the SAP Help Portal at https://
help.sap.com/ and search for SAP HANA Predictive Analysis Library.
To configure this function, you need to make settings in Customizing for SAP Banking by choosing the
following:

● Loans Management Tools Intelligent Loans Management
● Loans Management Functions Rollover Assign Rollover Tables to Cluster for Rating Procedure
Related Information
Rollover
Tailor-made Rollover Offer
16.4.1.2.4 CDS Views for SAP Loans Management for

Banking, SAP S/4HANA edition
Core Data Services (CDS) views for SAP Loans Management for Banking, SAP S/4HANA edition have now been
released.
Technical Details
Type New
Additional Details
The following CDS views are now available:
● Planned Items for Loan Contract (I_LoanContrPlndItm)

● Condition Header for Loan Contract (I_LoanContrCndnHdr)
● Change Pointer for Loan Contract (I_LoanContrChgPointer)
● Business Partner Relationship Data for Loan Contract (I_LoanContrBusPartRelshp)
● Loan Master Data with Business Partner Details (I_LoanContrBP)
● Actual Document Item for Loan Contract (I_LoanContrActlDocItm)
● Actual Document Header for Loan Contract (I_LoanContrActlDocHdr)

Related Information
View Browser
Planned Items for Loan Contract
Condition Header for Loan Contract
Business Partner Relationship Data for Loan Contract
Change Pointer for Loan Contract
Loan Master Data with Business Partner Details
Actual Document Item for Loan Contract
Actual Document Header for Loan Contract
16.4.1.2.5 Enterprise Services
Technical Details
Type New
Application Component FS-CML
New Enterprise Services

Namespace: http://sap.com/xi/FS-CML/Global2
The following new Enterprise Services are available:
● Loan Contract (business object)

○ Loan Contract In_V2 (service interface)
○ Create Loan Contract As Bulk
○ Update Loan Contract As Bulk
○ Loan Contract Out_V2 (service interface)
○ Confirm Loan Contract Creation As Bulk
○ Confirm Loan Contract Update As Bulk
○ Manage Loan Contract In_V1 (service interface)
○ Retrieve Loan Contract
○ Check Loan Contract Creation
○ Check Loan Contract Update
● Loan Contract Prolongation Quotation (business object)
○ Manage Loan Contract Prolongation Quotation In_V1 (service interface)
○ Check Quotation Creation
○ Check Quotation Variant Creation

○ Check Quotation Variant Update
○ Retrieve Prolongation Quotation
○ Loan Contract Prolongation Quotation Action In_V1 (service interface)
○ Check Quotation Acceptance
○ Calculate Quotation Variant
○ Check Quotation Variant Rejection
○ Check Quotation Rejection
○ Check Quotation Cancellation
○ Loan Contract Prolongation Quotation In_V1 (service interface)
○ Create Quotation as Bulk
○ Create Quotation Variant as Bulk
○ Update Quotation Variant as Bulk
○ Accept Quotation as Bulk
○ Reject Quotation as Bulk
○ Reject Quotation Variant as Bulk
○ Cancel Quotation as Bulk
○ Loan Contract Prolongation Quotation Out_V1 (service interface)
○ Confirm Quotation Creation as Bulk
○ Confirm Quotation Variant Creation as Bulk
○ Confirm Quotation Variant Update as Bulk
○ Confirm Quotation Acceptance as Bulk
○ Confirm Quotation Rejection as Bulk
○ Confirm Quotation Variant Rejection as Bulk
○ Confirm Quotation Cancellation as Bulk
16.4.2 Insurance
16.4.2.1 Policy Management
16.4.2.1.1 End-to-End Scenarios for International Auto

Insurance Product
16.4.2.1.1.1 RFM Calculating an Anonymous Quotation in New

Business
You can use the new remote-enabled function module (RFM) /PM0/ABT_SVC_NBQUOTE_CALCULATE to
calculate a premium for a New Business quotation.
The user enters his or her data for a New Business quotation in an external system, such as an insurance
comparison portal. FS-PM returns a premium calculation in the new RFM without the need to have the master
data for business partner, insurance object or commission contract, or commission role stored on the
database. The user only needs to enter the premium-relevant data in the external system, such as the age of

the driver for a vehicle quotation, but no further business partner data, such as name and address. This allows
premiums to be calculated quickly and efficiently.
Technical Details
Type New
Application Component FS-PM-BP-NB
Effects On System Administration
Note the following for the RFM /PM0/ABT_SVC_NBQUOTE_CALCULATE:
● The import parameters of the function module indicate which data is potentially relevant for the premium
calculation.
Depending on the contract for which a premium calculation is to be performed, less data may be required.
For example, reported data only needs to be specified for contracts that support reported values.
● To enable a fast premium calculation, in the standard delivery the following functions are deactivated in the
RFM:
○ Correspondence
○ Charges
○ Reinsurance
○ Interfaces (Organizational Management, Portfolio Assignment)
○ Checks (such as cardinality checks)
○ Derivations
If you want to use the functions mentioned above for your premium calculation, you must implement the
Business Add-In (BAdI) /PM0/ABP_DEACTIVATOR_BADI (see below "Effects On Customizing " ->
"Activating Deactivated Functions (BAdI /PM0/ABP_DEACTIVATOR_BADI").
For more information about the RFM and the difference to the already existing RFM , see the documentation of
the /PM0/ABT_SVC_NBQUOTE_CALCULATE function module.

Activating Deactivated Functions (BAdI /PM0/ABP_DEACTIVATOR_BADI)
In Customizing for SAP Insurance, choose Policy Management Integration Services Remote-Enabled
Function Modules New Business BAdI: Reactivate Functions for New Business Quotation Calculation .
 Note
SAP tests the RFM only with deactivated components. Therefore you must check yourself if activating
components with the BAdI would lead to conflicts with customer-specific developments or BAdI
implementations.
Deactivating Check and Derive Rules
Check if you use Check&Derive rules for business partner data, insured object, or commission contract and
commission roles for the New Business business process. Since Check&Derive rules generally access stored
master data, you need to deactivate these rules.
To do so, in Customizing for SAP Insurance under Policy Management In-Force Business Management
Basis Business Processes Business Rules Check&Derive , execute the Customizing activities Deactivate
Check&Derive Rules for Business Transactions and Deactivate Check&Derive Rules for Entities. For the required
rules, select the Deactivate Quotation Calculation checkbox.
Further Import Parameters for Premium Calculation
If you require further data for the premium calculation (in addition to the import parameters defined in
RFM /PM0/ABT_SVC_NBQUOTE_CALCULATE), implement the Business Add-In /PM0/
ABT_SVC_INPI_CREATE_BADI (BAdI: Create Application/Policy (Extension In/Out)) (Customizing path:
SAP Insurance Policy Management Integration Services Remote-Enabled Function Modules New
Business BAdI: Create Application/Policy (Extension In/Out) .
Further Return Parameters from Premium Calculation
If the function module /PM0/ABT_SVC_NBQUOTE_CALCULATE is to return additional data from the premium
calculation, implement the Business Add-In /PM0/ABT_SVC_INPI_CREATE_BADI (BAdI: Create Application/
Policy (Extension In/Out)) (Customizing path: SAP Insurance Policy Management Integration Services
Remote-Enabled Function Modules New Business BAdI: Calculate New Business Quotation (Extension
Out)
16.4.2.1.1.2 New Sample Sales Product "Auto International"
A new sample sales product "Auto International" is available, which is based on the product engine SAP
Product Lifecycle Management for Services Industries (FS-PRO). This sample product supports the object type
"Passenger Vehicle International".

Technical Details
Type New
Application Component FS-PMA
Additional Details
If you use FS-PRO as your product engine and wish to use the sales product "Auto International", you can
create your own products based on this sample product.
You can create and process a policy for this sales product using the standard business transactions and remote
function modules (RFMs) of FS-PM Auto line of business.
You can use the following business processes for the international sales product:
● New Business
● Change
● Inquiry
● Reversal
● Reset
You can use the following business transactions and corresponding remote-enabled function modules (RFMs)
for the international sales product:
● Change Payment Frequency (RFM /PM0/ABT_SVC_PMD_CHANGE)

● Change Premium Payer (RFM /PM0/ABT_SVC_PPY_AMD)
● Edit Insured Object (RFM /PM0/ABT_SVC_SBJ_AMD)
16.4.2.1.1.3 Improved Reusability of the Product Engine

Adapter for FS-PRO
The adapter that is used by the interface for calling the rating service of FS-PRO can now be reused more easily
for more than one line of business, in particular for Auto.
This improvement enables the faster implementation of a new FS-PRO adapter for a line of business (such as
Auto) and the faster addition of customer fields to FS-PM entities.

Technical Details
Type Changed
Application Component FS-PM-IT-PE
Additional Details
The adapter converts the data from the business object (policy) in FS-PM to a different format. For each
business object entity (such as a coverage) for which data is being converted, the adapter provides
SERIALIZE-methods for the forward path from the business object to the rating engine and GET_RESULTS-
methods for the return path. Through the new inheritance concept of the adapter, you can now reuse the
relevant parts of the P&C implementation of the adapter for other lines of business such as Auto.
The mapping class maps the data to the payload of the webservice provided by FS-PRO. This part is now
generic through using dynamic typization. Therefore, it can still be used if the structure of the payload changes
or if customers add new fields to FS-PM entities according to the enhancement guide.
The name of the proxy and its input structure are now configurable in FS-PM, meaning that you can replace
them with customer-specific content.
16.4.2.1.1.4 Integration of FS-PM Auto Line of Business with

Product Engine FS-PRO
You can use this function to rate a product of the Auto line of business in SAP Product Lifecycle Management
for Services Industries (FS-PRO). You can rate entities in the functional scope of the sample product
"Passenger Vehicle International".
Technical Details
Type New

16.4.2.1.1.5 Specification of Named Drivers in Insured Object
You can use this function to enter one or more named drivers in an insured object of the object category 44401
- Vehicle. For each named driver, you can enter the following additional information:
● Driver category (main driver/occasional driver)

● Driver's license number
● Driver's license date
You can add, remove, and change named drivers with the business transaction Edit Insured Object and also
with the corresponding remote-enabled function module (RFM) (/PM0/ABT_SVC_SBJ_AMD).
Technical Details
Type New
Related Information
Edit Insured Object - Auto
16.4.2.1.1.6 Insurable Object for Object Type "Passenger

Vehicle International"
You can use the new object type "Passenger Vehicle International" to create an insurable object.

Technical Details
Type New
Functional Localization Localized for all countries apart from DE/AT
Additional Details
You can define the following information in the sample dialog for the object type "Passenger Vehicle
International":
● License Plate
● Vehicle Identification Number
● Make
● Category
● Construction Year
● Usage
The following functions are available for the Auto line of business in the dialog of Object Management:
● Create Insurable Object

● Change Insurable Object
● Shift Start Date of Insurable Object
● Reverse Insurable Object
You can also use the remote-enabled function module (RFM) /PM0/ABT_SVC_IO_CREATE to create an
insurable object of the object typ "Passenger Vehicle International" (see the section RFMs for Auto Line of
Business).
Related Information
RFMs for Auto Line of Business

RFMs for Insurable Object
Creating Insurable Objects (Auto)
Specification of Named Drivers in Insured Object [page 847]

16.4.2.1.1.7 Joint Customizing for Make, Model, Category, and
Rating Year
To define a vehicle in Policy Management (FS-PM), you can now use the same criteria used in Claims
Management (FS-CM): make, model, category, and rating year.
You can use the rating year to further differentiate a vehicle. This allows an external system, such as SAP
Product Lifecycle Management for Services Industries (FS-PRO), to set a different rating for different rating
years.
Technical Details
Type New
Application Component FS-PM
You enter the rating year in Customizing for SAP Insurance under Claims Management Claim Business
Settings Damaged and Insured Objects/Diagnoses Damaged and Insured Objects/Injured Persons Define
Makes and Models . Choose Make Model Category Year .
16.4.2.1.1.8 Reversal as a Reaction to Dunning
With this feature you can schedule and execute the automatic reversal of a contract without a surrender value if
a dunning level (determined by FS-CD) has been reached in Collections & Disbursements (FS-CD). The new
time model function DUNCANCEL is available to enable you to do this.
You can schedule the reversal, thereby specifying the input data and effective date of the reversal, by
implementing the Business Add-In (BAdI) /PM0/ABP_CD_REACTINFOCONTAINER (BAdI: Reaction to FS-CD
Dunning Through Info Container).
If there is a surrender value for the contract, it cannot be reversed and Policy Management (FS-PM) creates a
claim for the current effective date.

Technical Details
Type New
Application Component FS-PM-IT-CD
● You need to assign the time model function DUNCANCEL to the required product components. In
Customizing for SAP Insurance choose Policy Management In-Force Business Management Basis
Update Time Model Define Execution Criteria for Time Model Functions .
 Tip
We recommend that you do not define a second, conflicting reaction such as time model function
DUNLEVEL to reached dunning levels.
● If the time model function DUNCANCEL is to be assigned for products in the Life line of business, the system
needs to check whether the contract has a surrender value. In such cases, a claim is created. To enable this
check and the creation of a claim, you need to assign loss event type and cause of loss for this claim with
this time model function. In Customizing for SAP Insurance choose Policy Management In-Force
Business Management Basis Update Time Model Assign Time Model Functions to Loss Event Type
and Cause of Loss .
● You need to specify the dunning procedure. In Customizing for SAP Insurance choose Collections and
Disbursements Business Transactions Dunning Dunning by Dunning Procedure Configure Dunning
Procedure .
16.4.2.1.2 Integrated Change Business Process with

Underwriting Capabilities
16.4.2.1.2.1 Stateful RFC Communication for Change

Requests
Remote-enabled function modules (RFMs) that are used for change requests can now process change request
sessions. The RFMs can now open change request sessions and transfer an ID for the change request session.

Technical Details
Type Changed
Application Component FS-PM-BP-CH
Additional Details
This enables you to do the following:
● Simulate the execution of multiple business transactions for the same change request
● Execute this simulation faster because you do not need to save the intermediate results in the database
 Note
A change request session can be kept open in one RFC session only. It is not possible for two RFC sessions
to access the same change request session.
16.4.2.1.2.2 External Change Options
External change options are created in external systems. With this feature you can use remote-enabled
function modules (RFMs) to create and manage external change options from Policy Management (FS-PM).
Technical Details
Type New

Additional Details
You can use an external change option as a preliminary step for creating a standard change request. It is
possible to have more than one external change option for a policy, which enables you to provide alternatives to
the customer. As this is not the case for a standard change request, only one of these external change options
can be converted to a standard change request for further processing. All other external change options are
implicitly cancelled or refused.
You can also postdate external change options, which is useful, for example, if you want to execute a business
transaction such as shifting funds but do not yet know the fund prices.
There are two new policy status values in the application journal to denote external change options:
● 170 (External Change Option)

● 180 (Postdated External Change Option)
These are also included in the application statuses in the results list of the business process Central Access.
Stateful RFC communication is supported for external change options.
The following new RFMs are available:
● /PM0/ABT_SVC_CHGOPTREQ_CRT (Create External Change Option)

● /PM0/ABT_SVC_CHGOPTREQ_SIMEXEC (Simulate Release of External Change Option)
● /PM0/ABT_SVC_CHGOPTREQ_ACCEPT (Accept External Change Option)
Existing RFMs have also been updated to enable you to process external change options.
In Customizing for SAP Insurance, the following new Business Add-Ins (BAdI) are available for customer
enhancements under Policy Management Integration Services Remote-Enabled Function Modules
Change :
● BAdI: Create an External Change Option (ExtensionOut)

● BAdI: Request Simulation of CBC Amount for External Change Options
16.4.2.1.2.3 RFM Returning List of Business Transactions for

Change Business Process
You can use the remote-enabled function module (RFM) /PM0/ABT_SVC_CHGBTXLIST_GET to find out which
remote-enabled business transactions are available for an application in the Change business process when
you change an application outside of Policy Management (FS-PM) and to evaluate the executability of those

business transactions. There are many factors that need to be considered in this evaluation. This RFM makes it
easier to evaluate what is possible in the Change business from outside of FS-PM.
Technical Details
Type New
The Business Add-In (BAdI) /PM0/ABT_SVC_CHGBTXLIST_BADI BAdI: Determine Business Transactions for a
Change Request) enables you to change the list of business transactions returned by the system for a business
transaction in the Change business process. In Customizing for SAP Insurance, choose Policy Management
Integration Services Remote-Enabled Function Modules Change BAdI: Determine Business Transactions
for a Change Request .
16.4.2.1.2.4 RFM Returning Properties of Business

Transactions in Change Business
The new remote-enabled function module (RFM) /PM0/ABT_SVC_CHGBTXPROPS_GET (Get Properties for
Remote-Enabled Change Business Transactions) enables you to access settings for the Change business
process in Developer Customizing (transaction /PM0/CUST_INT) from outside of Policy Management (FS-
PM).
Technical Details
Type New

Additional Details
This RFM enables improved integration of external systems. External systems such as a quotation
management system (for example, FS-QUO) can use these settings to decide the following:
● Which input fields are potentially available for a given business transaction
● What the name of the related RFM for a given business transaction is and the names of the input
parameters
● Which business transactions in FS-PM are needed to make the same changes that were made on an
external UI. For example, on the external UI, the sum insured was changed. In FS-PM, the equivalent
business transaction is Change Benefit Premium. The external UI knows that this is the correct business
transaction because it knows that the Sum Insured field is an input field for that business transaction.
The RFM can be called at design time, meaning that the business transaction properties can be stored in
the external system and accessed locally at run time.
Alternatively, the external system calls the RFM at run time with a caching mechanism, meaning that only
the properties for a limited number of business transactions need to be read.
The RFM returns the following data:
○ Basic properties of the required remote-enabled business transactions
○ Properties of input fields for all entities that can be changed by those business transactions
You can restrict the amount of data returned by using a filter for the business transaction ID or the line of
business. The RFM returns data for your specified business transactions and a list of input fields for your
specified line of business. In Customizing for SAP Insurance, choose Policy Management Integration
Services Remote-Enabled Function Modules Remote-Enabled Function Modules Change BAdI: Return
Properties of Change BTXs (ExtensionOut) . For more information, see the documentation of the remote-
enabled function module.
16.4.2.1.3 New RFMs for LoB Auto
16.4.2.1.3.1 RFMs for New Business for Auto Line of Business
You can call the following remote-enabled function modules (RFMs) from the New Business Process for Auto
policies:

● Create and Process New Business Application
● Read New Business Application
● Change New Business Application
● Calculate New Business Application
● Change and Calculate New Business Application
Technical Details
Type New
Remote-Enabled Function Modules
You can use the following RFMs to create, process, and change New Business applications of an Auto policy:
RFM Technical Name
Create and Process New Business Application /PM0/ABT_SVC_INPI_CREATE
Read New Business Application /PM0/ABT_SVC_INPI_RETRIEVE
Change New Business Application /PM0/ABT_SVC_INPI_CHANGE
Calculate New Business Application /PM0/ABT_SVC_INPI_CALCULATE
Change and Calculate New Business Application /PM0/ABT_SVC_INPI_CHANGE_CALC
Related Information
RFMs for New Business


16.4.2.1.3.2 RFM Create and Process Contract for Auto
Products
You can use the remote-enabled function module (RMF) /PM0/ABT_SVC_POLPR_CRT to create Auto contracts
for an existing policy in the Change business process
Technical Details
Type New
Related Information
16.4.2.1.3.3 RFM Create and Process Coverage Packages for

Auto Products
You can use the remote-enabled function module (RFM) /PM0/ABT_SVC_BTX_COVPAC_AMD to create
coverage packages for an Auto contract in the Change business process.
Technical Details
Type New

Related Information
16.4.2.1.3.4 RFM Create and Process Coverage for Auto

Products
You can use the remote-enabled function module (RFM) /PM0/ABT_SVC_SCV_ICL to create coverages for an
Auto contract in the Change business process.
Technical Details
Type New
Related Information
16.4.2.1.3.5 RFM Policy/Contract Reversal for Auto Products
You can use the remote-enabled function module (RFM) /PM0/ABT_SVC_CANCEL to reverse an Auto policy,
and also to reverse single or multiple contracts of it, specifying various parameters.

Technical Details
Type New
Related Information
16.4.2.1.3.6 RFM Read Reversal Request for Policies for Auto

Products
You can use the remote-enabled function module (RFM) /PM0/ABT_SVC_CANCREQ_RTRV to read the data of a
reversal request for an Auto policy.
Technical Details
Type New
Related Information

16.4.2.1.4 New Business Transactions for LoB Auto
16.4.2.1.4.1 Change Duration Business Transaction for Auto

Products
With this function, you can use the Change Duration business transaction in the Change business process for
Auto contracts in order to adjust the contract end. The main due date is derived from the new contract end.
You can execute the business transaction either in dialog mode or in the background. The business transaction
can be executed with postdating, and it can be reimplemented.
Technical Details
Type New
Additional Details
The adjustment of the main due date as a result of the Change Duration business transaction derives the
bonus-malus rating, if required.
Restriction
The system does not offer the Change Duration business transaction for Auto contracts if the contract is
suspended, or if it contains an insured object with a season indicator, or if the extension variant is set to "No
Extension".

16.4.2.1.5 Group Insurance
16.4.2.1.5.1 Sample Application Processing via Master Policy
This feature enables you to directly handle sample applications from within a master policy itself.
Technical Details
Type New
Application Component FS-PMG
Additional Details
Tab page Sample Application is provided in programs related to processing of master policies
(transactions /PM0/ABC_MPO_G*) for executing the following actions on sample applications, such as
● Create
● Change
● Display
● Copy
● Lock
● Unlock
16.4.2.2 Claims Management
16.4.2.2.1 Rating Year of a Vehicle
You can use this function to enter the rating year for a vehicle in addition to the manufacturer, model, and
category. You can use the rating year to further differentiate a vehicle. For example, this enables an external
system such as SAP Product Lifecycle Management for Services Industries (FS-PRO) to set a different rating
for the different rating years.

Technical Details
Type New
Application Component FS-CM
You enter the rating year in Customizing for SAP Insurance under Claims Management Claim Business
Settings Damaged and Insured Objects/Diagnoses Damaged and Insured Objects/Injured Persons Define
Makes and Models . Choose Make Model Category Year .
16.4.2.3 msg.PMQ
16.4.2.3.1 Switch to Eclipse 2018-12
With this feature the development platform Eclipse 2018-12 is the new technological base of PMQ.Designer .
This ensures full Java 11 support.
Technical Details
Type New
Application Component FS-MPM (msg.PMQ)

16.4.2.3.2 Object Extensions for Internal Tables
With this feature extensions for internal tables are now supported by msg.PMQ. In msg.PM 3.x classes,
templates and product modules can also be extended. In msg.PMQ, however, inheritance mechanisms are
used for this purpose. Now all essential object extensions are also available in msg.PMQ. Extensions allows you
to customize delivered standard content according to your needs.
The title of the editor is indicated in the case of an extension by the addition "-extended". With the help of the
new button in the table editor, a new extension object can be created. The buttons and allow
navigation between the objects of an extension chain.
The extension of internal tables is only supported for the Content mode. The Layout of an internal table cannot
be changed.
In addition the following functionalities have been added to the extensions of internal tables:
● If a table extension has unnecessary overwrites in its data, these are now also found and can also be
corrected.
● In the editor for the extension of tables in the view "Contents" it is now possible - as already in the editor for
tables - to sort and filter the data of the individual columns.
Technical Details
Type New
16.4.2.3.3 Content Filter
This feature enables you to create content for a specific application system. The new headless command
SearchAndDelete allows filtering and deleting elements from an existing workspace. This searches for named
elements using a user-defined OCL query. These and their references can then be deleted by refactoring. As a
result, the deployment is reduced to the number of required elements.

Technical Details
Type New
16.4.2.3.4 Downstream Refactoring
 Note
The function "Downstream Refactoring" has beta status. Only some of the changes to product module
types and structure types are currently recognized and processed. Therefore, the function is currently not
recommended for productive use. The function will be completed in the next release
Standard contents from suppliers are inevitably subject to changes over time. In the course of maintenance
and further development, parts of a standard content can be adapted, extended, renamed, moved or even
deleted. This also applies to product components that are already part of customer products. Sometimes
changes in the standard cannot be made downwards compatible. The result is then partly extensive manual
reworking of the customer contents. PMQ.Designer provides quick fixes to assist in troubleshooting customer
content, but manual intervention is required.
With this new feature all changes made by the supplier to the standard content is automatically determined
and then the customer content will be reworked using the existing refactoring mechanisms of PMQ.Designer so
that it meets the requirements of the standard content.
In this release, the new functionality is initially only offered in the form of a batch command:
PMQDesignerBatch.bat <workspace path> UpdateContent -baselineFolder=<folder path> |
-baselineConfig=<file path> [-dryRun]
The -baselineFolder and -baselineConfig parameters can be used to specify the path (absolute file
system path) to the folder where the files (QAR file or library configuration file) of the previously used version
are located. These two parameters cannot be defined simultaneously. The comparison takes place with the
active, new version of a standard content, which is located in the workspace.
For the time being, only changes to product module types and structure types are recognized and processed.
In the future, the aim is to detect and process all changes to a delivered content.

Technical Details
Type New
16.4.2.3.5 Comparison and Merging of Product Module Types

and Structures
With this new feature you can compare historized data of product module types and structures (in the version
management system or local protocol) with the current data of the object and, if desired, selectively integrate
(merge). In this way, changes made by other users can be integrated into the version control system before the
commit and thus preserved.
A new comparison editor is available for product module types and structures, which displays the separate
elements in a similar way to the standard editor. Functions are now available for data integration that can
integrate the entire element as well as separate properties of an element.
Technical Details
Type New
16.4.2.3.6 Support of Working Sets
In this feature the Eclipse integrated possibility to define working sets has been extended. With the help of the
new working set type PMQ Working Set you can now use working sets sensibly in the PMQ.Designer
environment. Thus, projects and project contents can be better structured and mapped in subsets.
Independently of this, the existing resource working set is supported in the best possible way.

The working sets are managed with the functions Select Working Set / Edit Active Working Set (open the
view-specific menu in the PMQ explorer). With the function Deselect Working Set, the user-
defined selection of projects and contents can be cancelled again.
Technical Details
Type New
16.4.2.3.7 Batch Scripts for the Workspace Creation with Git
This feature enables you to use the Git version control system. Previously, the automatic workspace creation
with subsequent import of projects was only supported for the SVN version control system. This functionality
has now been extended to support the Git version control system. As of this release, a Git configuration script
(PMQWorkspaceSetupConfig_Git.bat) and a Git execution script
(PMQWorkspaceSetupWorker_Git.bat) are also provided. Both scripts are located in the installation
directory in the folder …/batch.
Technical Details
Type New

16.4.2.3.8 Data Version per Object Type
It is recommended to update all product data to the latest version with each release (performance
improvement). This product data update results in changes to each content file. For distributed or larger
teams, it is organizationally difficult to perform such a data migration once per release, as all content
developers should first check in their local changes. When checking the updated product data into a version
control system, it is difficult to manually check which changes have actually been made because each content
file is affected.
With this feature, information about the data version is maintained for each object type. The current data
version of an object type corresponds to the version of the msg.PMQ release in which the last change was
made to its data format.
Technical Details
Type New
16.4.2.3.9 Integration and Development of Business

Interface
As of this release, the Business Product Editor (BPE) is an integral part of PMQ.Designer and is therefore
available for productive use for the first time. With this feature the view and editing of single product modules is
facilitated by the special prepared form in the new editor.
With a corresponding configuration (*.pmbpecfg) you can adapt your relevant contents to your needs.
The following functionalities of the BPE are included in the productive version:
● Support of a storage functionality

● Wizard for selecting PMQ objects to be deleted during the storage process
● Wizard for selecting the editor scope
● Wizard for creating new time slices
● Wizard for defining new time slices
● Wizard for connecting business-oriented product modules
● Wizard for creating new business-oriented product modules
● Wizard for unlocking business-oriented product modules

● Wizard for setting BPE settings
● Various other actions in the main window (Open, Expand subtree, Minimize subtree, Delete)
● Drag and Drop in the main window to move business-oriented product modules
In the course of this integration, PMQ.Designer has a new perspective PMQ for Business Users (Menu
Window Perspective Open Perspective Other PMQ for Business Users ) and a new view Product
Explorer (Menu Window Show View Product Explorer ) at its disposal.
With the Product Explorer, only business-oriented entry points into the BPE are displayed. Objects such as
formulas, product module types and tag types are not displayed.
Technical Details
Type New
16.4.2.3.10 Consolidation of Overrides of Mathematical

Object Extensions
With this feature the functionality Search for redundant overrides has been extended. Unnecessary
overwrites to extensions of structures, formulas, includes and functions are now also found and removed.
Technical Details
Type New

16.4.2.3.11 Insert in Comparison Editor
This feature enables you to insert copied entries in the comparison editor of product module types and product
modules. The prerequisite for inserting entries is that the cells can be edited in the comparison editor. Cells
that correspond to an inherited property can also include copied content using implicit overwriting.
Technical Details
Type New
16.4.2.3.12 Jump to Instance/Message in the Debugger
This feature enables you to display instances or messages in the view PMQ Product Module Instances / PMQ
Messages:
● View Debug: Call stack entries within methods / calculated attributes

● View PMQ Variables: Scalar variables of type Object or Message with value not equal to zero
● View PMQ Variables: Elements of values of multidimensional variables of type Object with value not equal
to zero
● Views PMQ Instance Details and PMQ Instance Watches: Product module instances
● Debug hover (Introducing a new toolbar): Variables of type Object or Message or elements of
multidimensional variables of type Object
To jump to this option, select the context menu option Display Instance / Display Message. The new toolbar
of the debug hover also contains the options Open Definition and Watch.
Technical Details
Type New

16.4.2.3.13 Support of new CAIMAN Versions
With this feature you can select the current CAIMAN versions in the SAP edition of PMQ.Designer.
The following table illustrates the new assignment of the integrated binary versions of CAIMAN:
Component Technical name CAIMAN version
FS-PM 5.3 FSPM_53 34101.50.1 'Shortcuts'
FS-PM 5.4 FSPM_54 34130.53 'My Generation'
S/4HANA 1709 INSURANCE_802 34140.53 'My Generation'
S/4HANA 1809 INSURANCE_803 34140.53 'My Generation'
Technical Details
Type New
16.4.2.3.14 Detail Improvements
The following features describe detail improvements:
● PMQ.Designer
○ Improvements for Breakpoints
The PMQ.Designer debugger now also supports breakpoints for creating and deleting product module
instances, relation instances, structure instances and messages.
In addition, the following functions have been added to the existing breakpoints:
○ Condition at exceptions
○ Using breakpoints as trace points (console output instead of pausing)
○ Using breakpoints as trigger points (preventing hitting of breakpoints until more trigger
breakpoints hit)

○ Freely selectable names for context variables in conditions and console outputs of watch points,
exception breakpoints and instance breakpoints.
○ Deleting Objects via Search View
It is now possible to delete objects from the Search view in the view type Tree and List. The deletion
takes place in the same way as deleting in other views and editors, that means, references to the object
to be deleted are also removed.
○ Improvements for the Legacy Mode
The PMQ name check can be (de)activated using the project setting Legacy mode (context menu
Project Properties PMQ Settings Project Settings in the group Compability). The name
check of msg.PMQ is more restrictive than in msg.PM 3.x. Only the letters A-Z, the numbers 0-9 and
underscores are allowed.
The project settings Legacy mode and C runtime support can now be switched independently.
Customers who use C runtime as their runtime environment can now also use PMQ name validation.
Problems in downstream application systems due to the use of special characters in names can thus
be avoided.
The legacy mode contains further validations. These validations have been fundamentally revised.
For more information, refer to the PMQ.Designer User Guide, section 'Legacy Mode (Compatibility to
msg.PM 3.x)'
○ Improvements for the Product Data Update
The dialog for updating the product data (context menu Project Update Product Data ) has been
adapted. The previous options
○ Update old product data to the current data version (including add/update GUIDs for stable object
referencing)
○ Reformat all product data XMLs
○ Delete history in the product data
are an integral part of the product data update as of this release. The user now has the possibility to
update either all files or only files with outdated data versions. The option Activate automatic naming
for product module relations is retained and can only be activated in connection with updating all
files.
Furthermore, a new headless command UpdateProductData is introduced. In the course of this a
new flag -allFiles is provided, which extends the scope of the update to all files.
The parameter -updateProductData can now be set for the already existing headless command
ImportExistingContentProject - as for the headless command ImportContentArchive. If the
parameter -updateProductData is specified, the data version of the imported objects is updated to
the data version used by PMQ.Designer, otherwise the data version is not adjusted.
For the command ImportExistingContentProject, the original boolean parameter -
ignoreExisting was renamed to -skipExisting and converted to a flag. If the flag -
skipExisting is specified, existing projects are skipped during import. If the option is not set, the
import of an existing project is terminated with an error.
Technical Details
Type New

16.4.2.3.15 Error Corrections and Usability Improvements

The following features fix smaller issues:
● PMQ.Designer
○ Until now, all available columns could be displayed in all views of an editor. Now you can only select
columns that make sense for the respective view.
○ When searching for the use of enumeration entries, the system only checked whether the content
project was included in the scope of the search when assigning the search results. Content libraries
were not checked. This has been fixed.
○ The behavior for displaying and hiding folders in the test result editor has been adapted to the behavior
of the test structure editor. Folders can now be shown or hidden in the list and detail view using the
button .
○ The selection of an aggregated product module in the product module editor is now retained when
switching between different views. Newly created relations are preselected. In this context, a
"Template" column has been added in which the template of an aggregated product module is
displayed.
○ The formulation of various validation messages, some of which were very technical and general, have
now been adapted to make them easier for the user to understand. For example, checkings have been
adapted in the following context:
○ Value to data type check
○ Cardinalities of relations check
○ String length restriction check
○ The number of errors and warnings, if any, is displayed in the title bar of an editor. All available quick
fixes were displayed individually via a corresponding context menu. Similar quick fixes are now
grouped into the entry.
○ The coloring of the line number column in the source code editor has been improved. It now adapts to
a dark color scheme even if it is selected. The color scheme for M10 identifiers has also been improved.
○ When switching to the properties view of a product module via the button in the upper area of the
editor, the associated type comment was sometimes not displayed correctly. This has been fixed.
○ When editing the condition of breakpoints in the debugger, null pointer exceptions could occur that
were logged in the error log. This has been fixed.
○ In M10 formulas, autocompletion was unintentionally activated when a point was entered in a string
literal. This has been fixed.
○ If Reset and Rebuild All PMQ Projects are executed in the Project menu, already running build jobs
are aborted promptly and all new projects are created afterwards.
○ If a formula was debugged in PMQ.Designer which contains a call of the built in functions exp or rnd,
the result value of the built in function was not displayed correctly in the hover. This has been fixed.
○ When PMQ.Designer was started, a full build was always executed if GUIDs were missing from
subordinate objects (e.g. relations) in the projects of the workspace. This has been fixed.

○ The product data update via context menu was not executed for deployment an POTATO projects. This
has been fixed.
○ The value of an attribute, which was set to <NULL> during calculation, was displayed incorrectly in the
test result editor after test execution. This has been fixed.
○ Customer-specific validation messages cause QAR archives to be marked as incorrect when they are
deployed.
○ The generated Java code of formulas has been optimized for better just-in-time compilability in the
Java VM. However, this optimization is at the expense of calculations that generate many exceptions in
formulas.
○ The generation of cache keys of the function result cache in connection with calculated input variables
of methods or calculated attributes was corrected.
○ The display in the Technical Schema Diagram was not updated correctly when changes were made to
relation cardinalities.
○ The size of the window for creating a variable assignment in test cases is now dynamically adapted to
the resolution. This behavior has been applied to all wizard windows in PMQ.Designer.
○ In editors that contain columns with numeric values, a comparison by numeric value is now performed
by default and sorted accordingly.
○ Packages and folders could no longer be moved. This has been fixed.
○ When performing the deployment in headless mode, a validation of the projects to be deployed in a
workspace is performed at the beginning. If errors occur, the details are now also listed at the end of a
terminated deployment process.
○ Renaming a template resulted in an error that caused the new name to be incorrectly written to the
reference. This has been fixed.
○ Using the command SearchAndDelete in the batch process of PMQ.Designer could lead to aborts
without a concrete error message. This has been fixed.
○ The culture az-AZ (Azerbaijani) has been added to the list of supported cultures. Cultures with more
than two segments (e.g. az-AZ-Latn and az-AZ-Cyrl) have been removed from the list of supported
cultures.
○ During C runtime generation, the package and folder structure of the underlying projects is no longer
checked. This allows C runtime compilations of any complexity to be generated. When importing into
PM.Designer 3.x, only PM3-compatible structures are supported.
○ The inheritance in connection with the derivation hierarchy for structure types was incorrect. This has
been fixed.
○ An empty XML tag <transportrule> was created in the XML data in the following situations:
○ when importing internal tables using POTATO
○ when creating new internal tables
○ when updating the product data version from internal tables to the version 1903
This tag is not needed and is therefore no longer generated.
○ The Java code generation of the Iterate statement in M10 has been corrected. The final value is now
determined only once at the beginning, as in msg.PM 3.x.
○ The Java code generation for Goto statements in Switch statements with multiple case brances has
been corrected.
○ The generation of Java code from formulas with Continue statements in Switch statements has been
corrected. Sometimes the Continue statement jumped to the beginning of the Switch statement.
○ The behavior of the M10 build in function copy() has been adapted to the behavior of msg.PM 3.x.
When copying product module instances to structure instances, attributes without a value (null) now
generate an exception. Previously, such attributes were ignored in msg.PMQ.

○ In result files of test case executions the data version was corrected.
○ The check of compilation IDs in the deployment only contains the error message "The compilation ID is
invalid. It must be 10 characters long and may only contain the characters 0-9 and A-Z." Other
messages in this context are not technically necessary and have therefore been removed.
● POTATO
○ The POTATO export may hava terminated with a null pointer exception (Error on searching element by
name "PMQGenericProduct") if only selected projects of the workspace were specified in the selection
filter. This has been fixed.
Technical Details
Type Changed
16.5 Public Services
16.5.1 Defense & Security
16.5.1.1 Force Element
You can use this feature to create, update, delete, and delimit organizational units (force elements) or
templates for the organizational units (reference force elements). You can also use it to visualize relevant parts
of the organizational structure.
Technical Details
Type New

Application Component IS-DFS-OF-FE
Additional Details
Force Element
Four apps are used to work with force elements:
● Manage Force Element

● Manage Force Element - Capabilities
● Manage Force Element - Authorized Material
● Manage Force Element - Maintenance
The app Manage Force Element is the main app. The other three apps are variants of the main app. All of the
apps have nearly the same structure. They differ to meet the needs of different roles.
App Usage Link
Manage Force Element Enables the organizational planner to see Manage Force Element
create, update, delete and delimit or
ganizational units (force elements)
Manage Force Element - Capabilities Enables the capability planner (Organi see Manage Force Element - Capabili
zational Planner – Capabilities) to add ties
or update capability-relevant informa
tion in existing organizational units
(force elements), specifically by man
aging assignments between the force
element and capabilities and mission
essential task lists
Manage Force Element - Authorized Enables the material planner (Material see Manage Force Element - Authorized
Material Planner – Authorized Materials) to add Material
or update authorized material-relevant
information in existing organizational
units (force elements), specifically by
managing assignments between the
force element and flexible material
planning objects or products
Manage Force Element - Maintenance Enables the maintenance planner see Manage Force Element - Mainte
(Maintenance Planner – Force Element) nance
to add or update maintenance-relevant
information in existing organizational
units (force elements)

Each app provides detailed information about an organizational unit, such as:
Overview of Detailed Information in Each Force Element App

App Manage Force El
App Manage Force El App Manage Force El ement - Authorized App Manage Force El
Infomation ement ement - Capabilities Material ement - Maintenance
Name, detailed de x x x x

scription, organiza
tional characteristics,
tactical symbol
Hierarchical command x x x x
and control relation
ships
Readiness / prepared x x x x
ness
Maintenance-specific x x
data
Assigned authorized x x
material
Assigned capability in x x

formation
Assigned documents x x x x
Additional categoriza x x x x
tion using customer-
defined classification
attributes
The following activities can be performed using all available apps for force elements:
● Creation of a root force element

● Creation of subordinate force elements
● Add, update and delete the data mentioned above
● Status changes to force elements and their dependent data
● Copy force elements to force elements
● Copy force elements to reference force elements
● Search, filter and list display for force elements
Reference Force Element
Manage Reference Force Element is an application that enables the Organizational Planner - Force Element to
create, update, delimit, and delete the templates for organizational elements within the organizational
structure of a defense & security organization. The app is closely related to the "Manage Force Element" app.
However, it only contains a subset of data.
The app provides detailed information about the template organizational unit, such as
● Name, detailed description, organizational characteristics, tactical symbol

● Hierarchical command & control relationships to other units
● Readiness data
● Support relationships (supply, maintenance) to other units

● Maintenance-specific data
● Assigned authorized material (flexible material planning objects, products)
● Assigned capability information (capabilities, mission essential task lists)
● Assigned documents
● Additional categorization by using customer-defined classification attributes
The following activities can be performed using the app:
● Creation of a root force element

● Creation of subordinate reference force elements
● Add, update and delete the data mentioned above
● Status changes to reference force elements and their dependent data
● Copy reference force elements to force elements
● Copy reference force elements to reference force elements
● Search, filter and list display for reference force elements
Force Structure
Manage Force Structure is an application that enables the organizational planner – and other related roles – to
visualize relevant parts of the organizational structure of a defense & security organization.
Functions provided by the app are:
● Search for a force element or reference force element as starting point for the structure display
● Display (parts of) either the force element or reference force element structures
● Display hierarchical command & control relationships between the elements of a structure
● For force elements: Display structure type-dependent relationships (such as the administrative chain of
command, wartime establishment)
● Display superior or subordinate elements
● Expand or collapse (sub-)structures
● Display selected detailed data for a specific element
● Navigate to the corresponding app used to manage an individual force element or reference force element.
16.5.1.2 Flexible Material Planning Object
You can use this feature to maintain and manage authorized materials (consumable and non-consumable
goods) for force elements. The flexible material planning object is an enhanced material planning object that
you can use more flexibly. You can also use this feature to get a clear hierarchical view of the flexible material
planning objects.
Technical Details
Type New

Application Component IS-DFS-OF-FMP
Additional Details
App Manage Flexible Material Planning Object

Manage Flexible Material Planning Object is an application that helps the Master Data Specialist - Authorized
Material Data to maintain and manage authorized materials (consumable and non-consumable goods).
Using the application you can,
● Maintain flexible material planning objects (FMPOs)

● Maintain variants for the FMPO along with the details, such as models, accompanying parts-FMPOs,
accompanying parts-products, and so on.
● Display FMPO assignments to force elements and reference force elements
● Add another FMPO as a parent FMPO and create a parent-child relationship between FMPOs
16.5.1.3 Capability
You can use this feature to manage the scope of capabilities and related associations to various defense areas
to serve a directive in the defense capability. You can also use it to maintain capability statements and mission
essential tasks (METL). METLs show the tasks for which military units need to train and then execute in
missions. METLs are structured hierarchically and are used in conjunction with capabilities to describe the
abilities of armed forces.
Technical Details
Type New
Application Component IS-DFS-OF-CAP

Additional Details
App Manage Capability

Manage Capability is an application that helps the Organization Planner - Capabilities to manage the scope of
capabilities and related associations to various defense areas to serve a directive in the defense capability.
● It provides a hierarchy view of the capability structure.

● It allows you to maintain a detailed description of a capability (code, owner, name, symbol, status).
● It allows you to maintain a capability (code), the capability hierarchies, and capability variant groups.
● It allows you to link a capability to capability statements, (reference) force elements, and mission essential
tasks.
● You can add customer-defined fields to capabilities.
App Manage Capability Statement

Manage Capability Statement is an application that helps the Organization Planner - Capabilities to maintain
capability statements.
● It allows you to maintain a detailed description of a capability statement.

● It is possible to define different capability types and select different capability categories.
● A capability statement can be linked to one or more capabilities.
● You can add customer-defined fields to capability statements.
App Manage Mission Essential Task

Manage Mission Essential Task is an application that enables the Organizational Planner - Capabilities to
manage the different mission essential tasks and task lists (METL). METLs reflect the tasks for which military
units need to train and then execute in missions. METLs are structured hierarchically and are used in
conjunction with capabilities to describe the abilities of armed forces.
● It provides a hierarchy view of the METL structure

● It allows you to maintain the detailed description of a METL (name, description, tasks, owner, status)
● It is possible to link METLs to capabilities and (reference) force elements
● You can add customer-defined fields to METLs.
16.5.2 Public Sector
16.5.2.1 Public Sector Management
16.5.2.1.1 Multi-Level Budget Structures in Funds

Management Budgeting
With this feature you can define rules for budget distribution and validation based on funds management
master data hierarchies with multi-level budget structures.
You can use:

● Time-dependent feature activation (fiscal year) by funds management area.
● Flexible definition of the hierarchical role played by a master data in the multi-level budget structure.
● Multilevel-related checks can be activated for changes to hierarchies and for the budget distribution
process.
● Budget maintenance with multi-level budget structures is supported in the budgeting workbench
(transaction FMBB) and in the multiple budget entry tool (transaction FMPEP).
Technical Details
Type New
Application Component PSM (Public Sector Management)
Maintain the Multi-Level Bugdet Struture-Customizing under Public Sector Management Funds
Management Government Master Data Use of Account Assignment Elements Budget Structure (BCS)
Multi-Level Budget Struture .
16.5.2.1.2 US Federal Government Data Included in Universal

Journal
The following features integrate the SAP US Federal Government data in the universal journal. The journal
integration involves the US Federal attributes, general ledger splitting characteristics, display and simulation in
FI documents, and an embedded analytics concept.
Technical Details
Type Changed
Functional Localization Localized for the United States

Application Component PSM-FG (Functions for U.S. Federal Government
Available As Of S/4HANA 1909
Additional Details
US Federal Attributes in Universal Journal
This feature enables the following US Federal attributes in the universal journal:
● Attributes for GTAS reporting, such as federal/ non-federal indicator, reimbursable indicator, agency
treasury account symbol components (TAS).
● PAM and IPAC attributes (agency and trading partner TAS and business event type code (BETC), agency
location code (ALC) and payment office)
● Commitment string
● Object class for US Federal
US Federal-Specific General Ledger Splitting Characteristics
This feature enables document splitting and balancing characteristics to be added to the universal journal as
GL split characteristics and as fields:
● Object Class for US Federal

The commitment item that was entered in the revenue and expenditure lines in the initial document
posting is moved to the universal journal field. The field should be configured as a splitting and balancing
characteristic for both the receivable, liability, and subsequent cash accounts.
● Commitment String
The commitment string represents the original document where budget consumption occurs (such as the
purchase order/line item (LI), earmarked funds/LI, sales order/LI, or FI document/LI) and should be
configured as a splitting and balancing characteristic for the update to the relevant document line items in
the universal journal.
This supports reporting across process chains, the US federal payment update (delivered paid/undelivered
paid), and the trading partner treasury account symbol being entered in the original document (such as
the purchase order, sales order, earmarked funds) and being subsequently updated in follow on
documents, making these attributes available for GTAS, PAM and IPAC.
FI Document Display and Simulation including US Federal Attributes
This feature enhances the FI document display and simulation in the SAP GUI:
● Display US federal attributes in the 'ledger view' of 'Display Document' (transaction FB02)
● Display the budgetary ledger document in 'Display Document' (transaction FB02)
● Simulate federal attribute derivation in the 'Simulate General Ledger' function for:
○ Enter G/L Account Document (transaction FB50)
○ Enter Vendor Invoice (transaction FB60)
○ Enter Customer Invoice (transaction FB70)
○ Post Document (transaction FB01)
Embedded Analytics to Analyze Universal Journal with US Federal Attributes

This feature enables the display of US Federal attributes in the following financial accounting queries:
● C_TrialBalanceQ0001
● C_GLLineItemsQ0001
Migration from US Federal ledger to the universal journal is not currently supported. This needs to be
addressed on a project basis.
Public Sector Management account assignments as document splitting characteristics are included in the FI
Customizing under Financial Accounting General Ledger Accounting Business Transactions Document
Splitting .
16.6 Services

Important Disclaimers and Legal Information
Hyperlinks
Some links are classified by an icon and/or a mouseover text. These links provide additional information.
About the icons:
● Links with the icon : You are entering a Web site that is not hosted by SAP. By using such links, you agree (unless expressly stated otherwise in your
agreements with SAP) to this:
● The content of the linked-to site is not SAP documentation. You may not infer any product claims against SAP based on this information.
● SAP does not agree or disagree with the content on the linked-to site, nor does SAP warrant the availability and correctness. SAP shall not be liable for any
damages caused by the use of such content unless damages have been caused by SAP's gross negligence or willful misconduct.
● Links with the icon : You are leaving the documentation for that particular SAP product or service and are entering a SAP-hosted Web site. By using such
links, you agree that (unless expressly stated otherwise in your agreements with SAP) you may not infer any product claims against SAP based on this
information.
Beta and Other Experimental Features

Experimental features are not part of the officially delivered scope that SAP guarantees for future releases. This means that experimental features may be changed by
SAP at any time for any reason without notice. Experimental features are not for productive use. You may not demonstrate, test, examine, evaluate or otherwise use
the experimental features in a live operating environment or with data that has not been sufficiently backed up.
The purpose of experimental features is to get feedback early on, allowing customers and partners to influence the future product accordingly. By providing your
feedback (e.g. in the SAP Community), you accept that intellectual property rights of the contributions or derivative works shall remain the exclusive property of SAP.
Example Code
Any software coding and/or code snippets are examples. They are not for productive use. The example code is only intended to better explain and visualize the syntax
and phrasing rules. SAP does not warrant the correctness and completeness of the example code. SAP shall not be liable for errors or damages caused by the use of
example code unless damages have been caused by SAP's gross negligence or willful misconduct.
Gender-Related Language
We try not to use gender-specific word forms and formulations. As appropriate for context and readability, SAP may use masculine word forms to refer to all genders.

882 PUBLIC Important Disclaimers and Legal Information
Important Disclaimers and Legal Information PUBLIC 883
www.sap.com/contactsap
© 2019 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form

or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP SE or an SAP
affiliate company. The information contained herein may be changed
without prior notice.
Some software products marketed by SAP SE and its distributors

contain proprietary software components of other software vendors.
National product specifications may vary.
These materials are provided by SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company for

informational purposes only, without representation or warranty of any
kind, and SAP or its affiliated companies shall not be liable for errors or
omissions with respect to the materials. The only warranties for SAP or
SAP affiliate company products and services are those that are set forth
in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and
services, if any. Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an
additional warranty.
SAP and other SAP products and services mentioned herein as well as
their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP
SE (or an SAP affiliate company) in Germany and other countries. All
other product and service names mentioned are the trademarks of their
respective companies.
Please see https://www.sap.com/about/legal/trademark.html for

additional trademark information and notices.
THE BEST RUN

What's New in SAP S - 4HANA 1909

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

What's New in SAP S - 4HANA 1909

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

WHAT'S NEW | PUBLIC

Document Version: 1.0 – 2019-09-20

What's New in SAP S/4HANA 1909

THE BEST RUN

What's New in SAP S/4HANA 1909

What's New in SAP S/4HANA 1909

What's New in SAP S/4HANA 1909

What's New in SAP S/4HANA 1909

5 Manufacturing for Production Engineering and Operations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383

What's New in SAP S/4HANA 1909

6 Just-In-Time Processing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397

What's New in SAP S/4HANA 1909

What's New in SAP S/4HANA 1909

10 Sourcing and Procurement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .544

What's New in SAP S/4HANA 1909

What's New in SAP S/4HANA 1909

11 Supply Chain. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 620

What's New in SAP S/4HANA 1909

What's New in SAP S/4HANA 1909

14 Cross Components. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 719

What's New in SAP S/4HANA 1909

15 Country/Region Specifics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 751

What's New in SAP S/4HANA 1909

What's New in SAP S/4HANA 1909

What's New in SAP S/4HANA 1909

2.1 Maintenance Operations

2.1.1 Actual Cost Analysis

Functional Localization Not applicable

Scope Item BH1 (Corrective Maintenance), BH2 (Emergency Mainte­

Application Component PM (Plant Maintenance)

Available As Of SAP S/4HANA 1909

This app is available for the maintenance planner user role.

What's New in SAP S/4HANA 1909

Actual Cost Analysis

2.1.2 Maintenance Notification and Order: Change

Functional Localization Not applicable

Scope Item BH1 (Corrective Maintenance), BJ2 (Preventive Mainte­

Application Component PM (Plant Maintenance)

Available As Of SAP S/4HANA 1909

Effects on Existing Data

Find Maintenance Notification

What's New in SAP S/4HANA 1909

Functional Localization Not applicable

Scope Item BJ2 (Preventive Maintenance)

Application Component PM (Plant Maintenance)

Available As Of SAP S/4HANA 1909

Find Maintenance Plans

2.1.4 Find Maintenance Plans: Viewing End Date for

Functional Localization Not applicable

Scope Item BJ2 (Preventive Maintenance)

What's New in SAP S/4HANA 1909

Available As Of SAP S/4HANA 1909

Effects on Existing Data

● End Date for Scheduling

Find Maintenance Plans

2.1.5 Find Maintenance Items

Functional Localization Not applicable

What's New in SAP S/4HANA 1909

Application Component PM (Plant Maintenance)

Available As Of SAP S/4HANA 1909

Find Maintenance Items

2.1.6 Mass Time Confirmations

With this feature, you can do the following:

Scope Item BH1 (Corrective Maintenance), BH2 (Emergency Mainte

Scope Item BH1 (Corrective Maintenance), BJ2 (Preventive Mainte